Home

MGC Manager User's Guide Vol. 1 version 6.0 - Support

1. CO el el ea SS a 2 RPS A peice Ail A TAA aad a EAE ajg al Awe GF rea acorzi ae io aaa a L F6 Field 9 Name sd Status Connection Participant Numbers P Connection Typi L MGc 25 tsr E0 Product Management Minor K Alan Connected 172 22 172 74 H323 Bet Dial out Debbie Connected 172 22 169 72 H323 Reb Dial out Donald D Connected 172 22 172 13 H323 Reb Dial out Karen si gt Disconnected 79320 ISDN Set Dial out ic H g MCU Configuration H E On Going Conferences 2 p Budget 9 Sales 5 On Going Gateway Sessio d Participants Queue 0 Reservations 1 Regional Sales_ 3 pag Meeting Rooms Entry Que gt Ifa gt Name Status Connection Network _ Participant Numbers IP _ Connection Type Audio _ Video Sync Tx Rate Rx Rate Eijeudget Product 3 Connected Not Full Alan Con H323 172 22 172 74 Ret Dial out d Bt oK 128 128 Debbie D Con H323 172 22 169 72 Ret Dial out q Da oK 128 128 Donald D Con H323 172 22 172 13 Bek Dial out nce a OK 128 128 Karen D gt Disc ISDN 79320 Ret Dial out q Eilsales Product O Connected Empty Nancy D Disc H323 172 22 172 191 Reb Dial out q ae a Neil s Wait H323 172 22 172 245 32 pialin St OK o0 a z z Ready Portso 4 5 7 Chapter 5 Monitorin
2. H MGC Manager ERSION 8 0 0 10 Main Menu an _ Fle edit view Template DataBase Directory Options Window Help A A Toolbars F3 Arrow 03 Normal MCU Configuration is R f B F ie Cards amu Configuration ro wser p ane oy Connections 3 On Going Conferences iy WR Msg Services On Going Gateway Sessions at AV Message Services ie Participants Queue i gg E Network Services Reservations H ii ISDN 283 meeting Rooms amp Entry Queues 4 rP H i T1 CAS Status pane g Operators gt a Gateway Configuration ich Profiles og Recording Links ESE on Going Conferences o Status Connection Network _ Participant Num On Going Gateway Sessions 0 Eilirightcont F6 Field 8 ID 0 Connected Empty di Participants Queue 0 iPower 47 D Disconnected H323 172 22 186 47 get Dia Reservations 0 Nortel_ 5x7000 ptest22 JD Disconnected SIP ptest22 intero vh Dia Meeting Rooms Entry Queues f view Station 77 JD Disconnected H323 172 22 186 77 Dia D EQI Suk yr EQ View Station 98 JD Disconnected H323 172 22 186 98 fi Dia va Ares J Disconnected H323 172 22 186 116 vh Dia M onl tor p an e D Disconnected H323 172 22 186 120 get Dia ne Arrow US VSX 183 ID Disconnected H323 172 22 186 183 K Dia FS Arrow 160 136 h WS AQ fle Nicrannec ted H373 17 9 196 8a Ob nia Status bar av Ready E P Mem5 Memory Indicators Figure 3 1 M
3. E gt Root 5 Default Bich Default Audio a Default COP a Default_Video sw CP ib Video Switch 5 weboffice Ready sV Mem10 Pots Figure 3 10 Application Windows in Cascade View This display enables you to view multiple windows simultaneously although only one window can be active at a time 3 12 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume The MGC Manager Main Menu The MGC Manager main menu bar provides the following options Table 3 2 MGC Manager Main Menu Options File For creating or clearing a Login Record downloading the MCU software displaying or hiding the MCU Memory Indicators and exiting the application Edit Used to Cut or Copy participants data View Allows you to display or hide the status bar toolbars and change the main window View mode Template Allows you to create new conference or participant templates or open existing templates in Polycom s proprietary format Database Provides options for logging into the Database Manager module and for handling conference templates and participant templates stored in the database Directory Allows you to open Public or Personal LDAP directories and configure the Directory setting Options For defining the general system parameters and defaults Window For managing the currently opened window s To access help a O 3 13 Chapter 3 MGC Manager Basics The MGC Manager Toolbar
4. The conference name is derived from the Entry Queue name and the conference properties are taken from the Entry Queue properties You can modify the conference name by entering a new name In the Numeric ID box enter the conference numeric ID If left blank the system automatically assigns a numeric ID depending on the system cfg settings If required define the Conference Entry Password and the Chairperson Password If left blank the system automatically allocates them if configured in the system cfg settings These passwords are required if an IVR service is assigned to the conference and is configured to prompt for them Otherwise you can leave these parameters blank If required enter general information in the User Defined fields For more details see Chapter 4 User Defined 1 3 on page 4 24 8 19 Chapter 8 Entry Queues Operator Conferences and Attended Conferencing 6 The current date and time are shown in the Scheduler dialog box Do not Click the Scheduler tab to define the conference start date and time For more information see Chapter 9 Rescheduling Reservations on page 9 11 change them if you want to start an On Going Conference 7 The dialog box displays the conference properties as defined for the Entry Click the Settings tab The Conference Properties Settings dialog box opens Default Conference Properties Product Management General Settings Pa
5. 8 Debbie 8 Nancy 3 POLYCOM lt DP Sales 787 Sales Onhold Aug 24 Sales 787 Onhold Aug24 Sales 787 k Participants Queue 2 W Sales 787 _ 012 Sales 787 W Sales 787 _ 011 Sales 787 HEN Reservations O Tata v 4 gt Name Status Connection Network _ Participant Numbers P Connection Type Audio video sync Tx Rate _ Rx Rate Gijeudget Product 1 Connected Single P Debbie Con H323 172 22 169 72 Beh Dia out xo OK 128 128 Nancy i Disc H323 172 22 172 191 Be Diaout q Portso The Participants Queue lists e participants whose connection to the conference is managed by an operator in Attended conferences e participants who failed to enter the correct conference Numeric ID or the conference password in the Entry Queue e participants who have requested operator s assistance during the conference Participants connecting to the Entry Queue IVR Queue or Greet and Guide conference AV Message Service and participants requiring the operator s attention are listed In addition participants in the Greeting Attended and On Hold stages are also listed in the Participants Queues 5 34 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Special management tools are available to speed up and facilitate the operator s work while assisting the participants waiting in the queue An Operator conf
6. Inthe Min Participant box define the number of participants for which the system should reserve resources including defined and undefined participants This option is enabled when the Allow Undefined Parties option is selected If you enter 0 no resources will be reserved for the conference However participants are able to connect to the conference if there are available resources To reserve resources for 2 defined participants and three undefined participants enter five 5 as the minimum number of participants Inthe Max Participants box enter the maximum number of participants that can connect to the conference at one time By default this option is set to Auto to allow as many participants as possible The number of participants is limited by the maximum number of participants set in the Max Participants field or by the maximum number of participants allowed for the conference depending on the Audio and Video cards installed on the MCU or by the MCU resources being used up During an On Going Conference you can also limit the number of participants by Ly locking the conference to additional dial in participants For more details see Chapter 6 Locking Unlocking a Conference on page 6 54 11 If you are defining a Continuous Presence and or Lecture Mode conference click the Video Sources tab For more details see Chapter 4 Conference Properties Video Sources CP Layout Menus on page 4
7. Starting Time BE 4 Reservation Recurrence Cancel Help The Scheduler dialog box is used to define the reservation s date and time 5 Define the Scheduler parameters as follows Table 9 2 Scheduler Parameters ae e Starting Date By default the system displays the current date as the scheduled date If the current date and time is selected for the Reservation it becomes an On Going Conference To select a date on which the conference should start use the arrows in the calendar heading to select the month and then click the required day 9 5 Chapter 9 Conference Reservations Table 9 2 Scheduler Parameters Continued eS ee Starting Time By default the system displays the current time as the start time of the conference To select a time at which the conference should start set the starting time using the time format taken from the operating system Highlight the hours or minutes in the box and either use the spin buttons to modify the displayed time or type a time directly Reservation Click this button to define a recurrent reservation Recurrence and the frequency at which the reservation occurs For more details see Recurrent Reservations on page 9 17 6 Click the Settings tab The Reservation Properties Settings dialog box opens 7 Define the Settings parameters as for the On Going Conference For details see Chapter 4 Conference Prope
8. using menu driven scripts that are part of the Entry Queue Service The user inputs touch tone signals in response to voice prompts Using an Entry Queue minimizes the number of dial in numbers that are required for the MGC unit to handle conferences and dial in participants In addition it enables service providers to advertise their services with one or two telephone numbers that can be used for all the conferences for example 1 800 POLYCOM In addition the Entry Queue is assigned a numeric ID for IP dialing Participants can be moved from the Entry Queue to the conference if Entry Queue Access is selected for the conference Video Switching conferences that are accessed from an Entry Queue must have the same video audio and line rate settings as defined for the Entry Queue used for accessing these conferences In this mode participants connecting to that conference follow a two stage process 1 Participants connect to an Entry Queue where they are routed to their conference in one of two ways According to the Numeric ID NID or conference password they enter depending on the MCU configuration Or Wait for the Operator s assistance The Entry Queue Service is set to Attended mode On Hold for Operator Assistance 2 Participants are moved to the conference and connect to the conference in one of the following ways Directly without any additional operation from the participant s endpoint If
9. Chapter 5 Monitoring Conferences Table 5 2 On Going Conference Monitor Pane Columns Continued Column Description Name Connection taal n Single Only one participant is defined or cont 1 Bi Participant only one of the defined participants is connected Resource The resources currently installed in Deficiency the MCU such as audio cards cannot handle the requested conference because it exceeds its limitations Bad A fault occurred in one of the Resources cards Participant Indicators Connected The participant is successfully connected to the conference Disconnected The participant is disconnected from the conference This status may occur when the participant is disconnected from the On Going Conference either by the operator or from the participant side Connecting Displayed during the connection process of a participant to the conference Stand By In a conference that was set to Dial out Manually the dial out participant is waiting to be connected to the conference by the operator Waiting for The system is waiting for the Dial in defined dial in participant to dial into the conference 5 16 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Table 5 2 On Going Conference Monitor Pane Columns Continued Column Description Name gt Connection cont o Partial The connection process is not yet connection complete the video channel has not been connected Faulty The part
10. Conference 2 ISDN PSTN Endpoint av IVR 9 Service ag A eal IP Network Service napoin Prefix 925 Conference2 Numeric ID 1223 Password 71356 Figure 4 5 Conference Access via IVR Queue Participants dial in directly to the conference in the same way as for direct dialing as described on page page 4 76 Once they reach the conference they enter the conference IVR queue where they are requested to enter the conference password the chairperson password only for the meeting chairperson and other information using the remote control or the telephone touch tone keypads e The system can automatically allocate the conference and chairperson passwords depending on the MCU configuration For more information on system configuration see the MGC Administrator s Guide Chapter 5 Edit system cfg e Dial out participants operator dial out or system dial out connecting to the conference can also enter the IVR queue if the IVR Service assigned to the conference is configured to prompt dial out participants for conference password Conference Access via Entry Queue Entry Queue is a call routing method in which all participants dial the same dial in number and then they are routed to the appropriate conference according to the conference password or conference numeric ID depending on the system s configuration they enter Callers are guided to the conference MGC Manager User s Guide Volume
11. Line Rate 3e4kbps xf Msg Service Type 5 Video Rate In Out a Msg Service Name o l Conference On Port Tl Encryption Silence IT M TX 1000 PNE Chair Control None O E aoe rei M Mute Meet Me parties Cascade None gt Start Conf Requires Chairperson M GndHold Master Name None Terminate After Chairperson Exits Enable Invite T120 Rate None X I Auto Termination FECC LSD Rate None 7 Before First Join E Min After Last Quit fi Min m Media Settings Audio Ala Auto X Dual Stream Mode None lt lt Basic l Roll Call Pro Motion None T V Entry Tone Roll Call announcement Viden Protocdi Auta MV End Time Alert Tone 5 il Min Video Format J Exit Tone Roll Call announcement Frame Rate auto Y Talk Hold Time f5 Sec Quality Auto E fires He Dei zz 4 Sites Annex F AnnexP P Annex F Cancel Parameters in the Conference Properties Settings dialog box are grouped in two main areas General Settings and Media Settings By default only the Basic settings are displayed when you first open the dialog box You can click the Advanced gt gt button to view and modify the additional settings The Advanced options remain on display until 4 28 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume closed by clicking the lt lt Basic button In most conference definitions you do not need to modify the
12. Mute By Participant M Audio T video Mute By MCL T Sudio T video Block Audio F Attending Participant Attending State OF Cancel Apply 5 47 Chapter 5 Monitoring Conferences The following information is displayed in Connection Info2 Table 5 12 ISDN Participant Properties Connection Info2 Connection Time The date and time the participant connected to the conference Note The time format is derived from the operating system time format Disconnection The date and time the participant was disconnected Time from the conference Connection Indicates the number of retries left for the system to Retries Left connect the participant to the conference Tx Rate The line rate at which data sent from the MCU is received by the endpoint Rx Rate The line rate at which data sent from the endpoint is received by the MCU Mute By When checked by the operator mutes the Operator participant s audio or video transmission to the conference Note The Video Mute option may be disabled in the system cfg and will not be applied even if checked here Mute By When checked indicates that the participant has Participant muted the audio and or video transmissions from the endpoint to the conference Mute By MCU If checked indicates that the audio and or video transmissions from the endpoint have been muted by the MCU as in the Exclusive Speaker mode or in a Lecture Show Block
13. Op US Wiad deep Oh Ue Ufa We Ufa Ue choices Show results as percentage with reference to Voters only f Participants M Show results as number of votes 4 Anonymous Vote Details Results Apply Table 6 4 describes the voting results options Table 6 4 Voting Results Display Options Number of Displays the number of participants currently participants connected to the conference Number of voters Displays the number of participants who have already voted This number is updated continuously according to the number of voters 6 84 5 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Table 6 4 Voting Results Display Options Continued Show results as Select this check box to display the number of votes percentage with for each choice as percentage If checked select reference to the category from which to calculate the percentage e Voters Only Displays the percentage of participants who voted for each choice out of the total number of voters All Participants Displays the percentage of participants who voted for each of choice out of the total number of connected participants Show results as Select this option to display the absolute number of number of votes votes cast for each choice Details Results Click this button to display a summary of the voting results Note Detailed results can be viewed only when the Stop Voting button has been clicked to complete
14. 1 Connected a Alan a3 attend D Faul H323 172 22 172 74 ger Dial out q l OK 7 7 0 Audio a Debbie W Hold Con H323 172 22 169 72 Bed Dial out OK 7 7 QO Audio a Donald JD Disc H323 172 22 172 13 Bed Dial out 3 Ready Poto INU z Participants Queue window Participants Queue Prod Mgmt 172 22 138 116 E E ol x Name Stats Queue Access Time Destination Conf Called Number vip Attended On hold by I R Faulty connected Dec 10 2003 15 18 35 Audio 1 ACCORD by you Onhold On hold by IVR Connected Dec 10 2003 15 19 57 Audio 1 Onhold On hold by IVR Connected Dec 10 2003 15 18 40 Audio 1 Onhold Asked For private help Dec 10 2003 15 18 55 Audio 1 The operations can be performed using the following methods Using the participant right click menu Using the Participants Queue toolbar Using shortcut keys Using drag and drop only applicable to moving a participant to the Operator or Home conference Double clicking the participant s icon only applicable to moving a participant to the Operator conference MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Performing Operations using the Right Click Menu Moving a Participant to the Operator Conference To move a participant to the Operator conference from the On Going Conferences list 1 Inthe Browser Status or Monitor panes display the list of participants in the On Going Conference 2 Right click the icon of the part
15. 2 Table 5 1 describes the information displayed about the conferences in the main window Status pane The columns are listed in the default order however you can rearrange the columns see Using the Main Window Panes for Monitoring on page 5 3 Table 5 1 On Going Conference Status Pane Columns Name The name of the conference and an icon indicating the conference type and status For a detailed description of icons and conference types see Table 5 2 on page 5 10 Status Additional information about the conference For a detailed description see Table 5 2 on page 5 10 Connection The connection status of the conference Fora detailed description see Table 5 2 on page 5 10 Chapter 5 Monitoring Conferences Table 5 1 On Going Conference Status Pane Columns Continued Column Name Starts At End Time D Connected Dial in Number Join Conference Entry Password Chairperson Password Numeric ID H323 Service Prefix Encryption 5 6 The time the conference started The scheduled end time of the conference A sequential ID number assigned to the conference by the system for use by the Call Detail Record CDR utility The number of participants currently connected to the conference The dialing number that participants can use to access the conference via an ISDN line The names of conferences the operator has joined e nan Operator Conference indicates the name of the con
16. 2 Click the Minus I button The service name and phone numbers are deleted automatically allocates the dial in numbers from the dial in numbers range If no Dial in numbers are manually assigned by the operator the MCU fs defined in the default ISDN Network Service 8 13 Chapter 8 Entry Queues Operator Conferences and Attended Conferencing 3 Click OK to complete the Entry Queue definition The new Entry Queue is added to the Meeting Rooms Entry Queues amp SIP Factories list Listing Entry Queues All Entry Queues are listed in the Meeting Rooms Entry Queues amp SIP Factories list To save dial in numbers usually a limited number of Entry Queues are defined per MCU To view the list of Entry Queues l 2 In the Browser pane of the main window expand the MCU tree Expand the Meeting Rooms Entry Queues amp SIP Factories tree A list of Entry Queues Meeting Rooms and SIP factories is displayed below the Meeting Rooms Entry Queues amp SIP Factories icon a Product Management Normal age E MCU Configuration c Bos On Going Conferences 2 a On Going Gateway Sessions D p 4 Participants Queue 0 E lt I Reservations 0 amp Meeting Rooms Entry Queues amp SIP Factories E nr BP Audio EQ IP al m a aviv E aesid 3 bbh 3 Default Conference The number of Meeting Rooms Entry Queues and SIP Factories currently defined for the selected MCU is displayed between par
17. Alternatively to paste the participant while changing the participant s name and other parameters a Click Paste Participant As The Participant Properties dialog box opens 6 47 Chapter 6 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences 6 48 Lg b Change the participant s parameters and then click OK The participant is added to the conference with the new parameters When defining a participant during an On Going Conference only the participant properties relevant to the conference to which the participant is added are enabled For example when defining a participant during an On Going Audio Only conference only audio participants can be defined For detailed information on defining participants see Defining Participant Properties on page 4 8 To copy the participant properties from a Database Reservation template You can copy a participant from a participant template to a conference 1 Open the Reservation in Database window as described in Chapter 3 Reservation Templates on page 3 25 2 Expand the Groups tree until you locate the Reservation template containing the participant that you wish to copy 3 Expand the Reservation template icon to list its participants T Reservations in AccordDB E Ee x E Root Name Phone 1P__ Connectio Channels Aggregation E Polycom Group H 0 user 172 22 13 Dial out H User Group 2 79320 Dial out CH International TW 172
18. Disconnection Time elaine Pe vides rf an 07 2003 14 40 33 PM Tx Rate Rix Rate Connection Retries Left fi 20 114 0 Mute By Operator r Attending Audio Video Oper Participant Mute By Participant ter T Audio Video aaka Mute By MCU Participant Attending State F Audio M Video Block Audio Gatekeeper Status ETTE rm Gatekeeper State ete eee Admitted Allocated C DRG fo KBPS None Request Info Interval F Gatekeeper routed 0 Sec OK Cancel Apply Table 5 18 IP Participants Properties Connection Info2 Parameters ee ES Connection Time The date and time the participant connected to the conference Disconnection The date and time the participant was disconnected Time from the conference Connection Indicates the number of retries left for the system to Retries Left connect the participant to the conference 5 68 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Table 5 18 IP Participants Properties Connection Info2 Parameters Se ee Tx Rate The total line rate of all the channels agreed rate in which data sent from the MCU is received by the endpoint Rx Rate The total line rate of all the channels agreed rate in which data sent from the endpoint is received by the MCU Mute By When checked by the operator mutes the Operator participant s audio or video transmission to the conference Note The Video Mute option may be disabled i
19. For example the Remote Capabilities list may indicate that the participant is using a restricted line 56 Kbps per channel instead of 64 Kbps However this Restricted option was not selected in the 9 55 Chapter 5 Monitoring Conferences 5 56 Lj participant s properties dialog box nor was it set for the conference if the conference is Restricted a special indication appears in the Local Communication Mode list In such a case you may need to change the participant and conference definition to Restricted or change the conference video session to Transcoding Connecting Auto Detect Pre defined Participants When a participant defined as Auto Detect dials into the MCU each channel is detected by the MCU and the system tries to connect the participant using the Bonding protocol If the connection using Bonding is successful the negotiation with the endpoint communicates the number of additional channels to be connected The connection of the participant proceeds using the same procedure for Bonding connection If the connection using Bonding aggregation fails the MCU tries to connect the endpoint using the H221 standard If this fails the connection with the endpoint is terminated If the capabilities exchange is successful the endpoint is connected according to the line rate communicated by the endpoint during the capabilities exchange and using the standard H 221 aggregation procedure These negotiations and the final tra
20. IP only A 9 Appendix A Disconnection Causes Table A 1 Primary Disconnection Reasons Continued SIP Failure cont SIP client error 405 The endpoint sent a SIP Client Error 405 Method Not Allowed response The method specified in the Request Line is understood but not allowed for the address identified by the Request URI IP only SIP client error 406 The endpoint sent a SIP Client Error 406 Not Acceptable resources The remote endpoint can not accept the call because it does not have the necessary responses The resource identified by the request is only capable of generating response entities that have content characteristics not acceptable according to the Accept header field sent in the request IP only SIP client error 407 The endpoint sent a SIP Client Error 407 Proxy Authentication Required response The client must first authenticate itself with the proxy IP only A 10 MGC Manager User s Guide Table A 1 Primary Disconnection Reasons Continued SIP Failure cont SIP client error 409 The endpoint sent a SIP Client Error 409 Conflict response The request could not be completed due toa conflict with the current State of the resource IP only SIP client error 411 The endpoint sent a SIP Client Error 411 Length Required response The server refuses to accept the request without a defined Content Length IP only SIP client error 413 The endpoint sen
21. MGC Manager User s Guide Volume To move a participant to the Home conference e In the Attended Participant window click the To Home Conf button Attended Participant Karen xi m Attened Participant Patticipant Name Karen M VIP Tl Chair Person User Defined 1 User Defined 3 User Defined 2 User Defined 4 Disconnect i i 1 i eet Broadcasting Volume 5 Listening Volume 5 Apply m Operator i i 6 Broadcasting Yolume 5 ____ Listening Volume 5 Join End Join Mute Audio m Conferences Search Value O Search In Ongoingmeetings New Conference Sta Conference Name Numericld User Defined 1 User Defined 2 User Defined 3 Polycom Finance Meeting Type Sep 18 2005 0 Ongoing Meeting Sep 19 2005 0 Ongoing Meeting gt JV Auto Attend Next Participant Next By Time z IV Include On Hold Participants To Home Conf F3 Hold F4 Alternatively press the selected shortcut key combination as it appears on the To Home Conf button the default shortcut key is lt F3 gt When you move the presently attended participant to his her Home conference and he she is the last participant in the Participants Queue the following message appears MGC Manager If the Participants Queue includes only On Hold participants the following message is displaye
22. Select this check box to save this Filter as a Public Filter for use by all users When viewing the list of Filters in the Filter list in the MGC Manager Toolbar Public Filters are labeled Public Filter Name 5 Click the Preview button to apply the filter to the Participants Queue before saving it and adding it to the Favorites list 6 If you are not satisfied with the filtering options you can modify them and preview the results before saving the filter 7 Click OK to save the filter in the Favorites list To use filters You can filter the list of participants displayed in the Participants Queue window at any given time by selecting a different filter from the list of saved filters filters For more information on how to log into the database see Chapter 3 You must be logged into the appropriate databases to use existing pre defined LY Using Default Templates to Start a Conference on page 3 25 e To filter the Participants Queue window select a filter from the list DELETE FILTER Personal Audio On k All New Filter Personal Audio Onl PAAT ICIPANTS ODELE FILTER 8 40 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume The Participants Queue window displays only the participants that match the selected filter To modify a filter You can modify your personal filters or public filters Gf you have the appropriate permission and you are logged into the database 1 Inthe Filters l
23. An Entry Queue is a special routing lobby to which one or several dial in numbers are assigned When callers dial this number they access this Entry Queue where they wait to be routed and connected to the conference Additional Video Features 2 8 The following features and enhancements are also available with the MGC Video card is required H 264 video protocol for high quality transmission in addition to H 263 and H 261 Conference On Port COP mode Continuous Presence video layouts may be viewed by all participants while using only one video port increasing the number of participants in a video conference Click amp View application an endpoint application that lets participants select their personal video layout from their endpoints via DTMF codes Choice of a personal video layout for participant Visual effects for video display background color window border color and speaker indication color Enhanced video quality through the use of 4CIF video resolution H 230 People Content the ability for a video conference participant to introduce content from a laptop PC or Macintosh into the call so that all participants can see the Content and the speaker at the same time Video Invite enables participants usually the Chairperson from any endpoint H 323 H 320 SIP MPI in a video conference to invite H 323 participants into the conference Visual Indication Visual Text and or Icon indications can be disp
24. Bonding Failure The connection could not be established between the participant and the MCU when Bonding is used Bad H243 Problems with the connection Connection protocol Resource Not enough hardware resources Deficiency MUX video audio data or network cards to handle the participant call 5 73 Chapter 5 Monitoring Conferences Table 5 20 H 323 and SIP Participant Properties Disconnection Causes Pane Name Category and Description Gatekeeper The participants failure to connect Failure to the conference is caused by the gatekeeper H323 Failure The participants failure to connect to the conference is caused by the MCU H 323 card Call SIP Failure The participant cannot connect to Disconnection a conference that does not support Reason cont SIP participant connections If there is a problem in the connection which is indicated by one of the call disconnection reasons the system displays an explanation for this problem For a detailed description of disconnection causes and parameters see Appendix A Video Describes those cases where a participant s video Disconnection cannot be connected and the participant is using only the Reason audio channel The detailed cause is indicated in the Secondary Cause box with a Possible Solution displayed beneath Incoming video During the capabilities exchange channel does not between the endpoint and the match conference MCU the endpoint capabilities do
25. Chapter 5 Monitoring Conferences This dialog box displays the participant s video layout and video forcing settings the participants that are forced to each of the layout windows The following information is displayed Table 5 13 ISDN Participant Properties Video Sources Layout view Displays the current video layout the participant is viewing Each participant window includes e Name box indicating the name of the participant shown in the window Drop down list names of the other conference participants who can be selected to be forced into the video layout window Layout options A selected option button indicates which video layout is currently used by the participant e Personal Layout the layout selected for this participant disabled for conferences running on a Standard video card Conference Layout the layout selected for the conference In a Continuous Presence conference running on a Video card this dialog box indicates whether the participant is viewing the video layout of the conference or their personal video layout If required you can select the video layout viewing mode Conference or Personal Layout if inthe Personal Layout mode select the video layout for this participant video force When running a conference on a Standard video card only the Conference Layout can be viewed by the participants 5 50 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume 6 To view the MCU r
26. MGC Manager Basics 3 20 Table 3 8 Q amp A Toolbar Buttons Continued maon fon oee Move Participant to Last Position in Q amp A View Only Q amp A Participants View All Q amp A Parties out of Total Parties Moves the participant to the last place of the Q amp A queue Displays only the participants waiting in the Q amp A queue Displays all the conference participants The number of participants out of the total number of participants in the conference waiting in the Q amp A queue MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Connecting to an MCU Once an MCU 1s defined for details see the MGC Administrator s Guide Chapter 2 the MGC Manager can be connected to all the defined MCUs simultaneously This allows you to set up conferences make reservations monitor On Going Conferences and perform other activities on several MCUs To connect the MGC Manager to an MCU 1 Inthe Browser pane expand the MCUs Network list MGC Manager VERSION 7 5 0 17 s 10 x File Edit View Template DataBase Directory Options Window Help PARTICIPANTS QUEUE FILTER Prod dt Management Product Man 172 22 188 40 5001 F3 Alpha 01 F3 Aapha01 172 22 188 101 80 F3 Alpha 02 L F3 alpha02 172 22 188 102 80 F3 Alpha 03 L F3 alpha03 172 22 188 103 80 F3 Alpha 04 L r3 alphao 172 22 188 104 5001 F3 Alpha 06 F3 Alpha06 172
27. The endpoint sends an MCV signal to the MCU requesting the Chairperson If the request is accepted by the MCU the endpoint becomes the chairperson and transmits the still image To release the 6 65 Chapter 6 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences Chair token and restore the conference to its previous state the Cancel MCV command is sent by the endpoint This procedure conforms to the H 320 standard e The endpoint sends an Annex D image without an MCV signal or a request for the chair token prior to the image transmission The MCU recognizes the incoming Annex D image processes it and broadcasts it to all other participants In such a case only the participants who can view the sender can see the Annex D still image The Annex D image is sent to all endpoints If an endpoint has two screens the still video image is viewed on one screen while the live video will be seen on the second screen without being interrupted If the endpoint has only one screen the live video is interrupted for a few seconds to display the still image The image is stored in the endpoint s memory and can be viewed at the discretion of the individual participants At the end of the transmission the conference video is restored The image handling process takes a number of seconds a long time relatively since a full 4CIF image is created while the VCP video card receives four instances of the same still image and transmits them The estimate
28. The participant is transferred to the selected destination conference To move several participants together l Using the standard Windows conventions select the icons of the participants to move While the list is highlighted right click one of the participants icons click Move Participant to open the list of active conferences and then click the name of the destination conference to which to move the participants The selected participants are transferred to the selected destination conference Chapter 6 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences Designating an Exclusive Speaker During On Going Conferences you can designate one participant as the conference lecturer speaker All other participants are automatically muted so they do not interrupt the lecture Alternatively the chairperson can designate themselves as the conference Exclusive Speaker by entering the DTMF code assigned to this function the default code is 5 on the DTMF input device usually remote control For more about DTMF codes see Using DTMF Codes During a Conference on page 6 88 To designate a participant as the conference Exclusive Speaker e In the Browser pane the Monitor pane or the Status pane of the main window right click the participant s icon and then click Exclusive Speaker Disconnect Participant Ctrl T Move Participant b Copy Participant ctrl E Cut Chris Delete Del O84 Managemen Unmute Audia Ctrl
29. is used to highlight a part of the window dialog box or menu that you want to be changed with your next action Right click is used when you press and release the right mouse button to open a pop up menu Choose OK means that you can either click the OK button with the mouse or press the lt Enter gt key on the keyboard Keyboard keys appear in capital letters between these two symbols lt gt For example the Shift key appears as lt Shift gt The plus sign between two key names indicates that you must press and hold down one key while pressing down the second key For example press lt Alt gt lt P gt means that you press and hold down the Alt key while you press the P key Bold type appearing in the text or in a procedure indicates the word or the character that you should type into a text box Bold type is also used to indicate the name of a menu item or command that you should select Italic type appearing in the text or in a procedure indicates the name of an icon a menu a dialog box or a field from which an option should be selected or into which parameters should be entered Tips and notes are indicated by an icon and appear in a special format on a gray background For example Ly This is an example of the type of note that you encounter in this User Guide 2 MGC Manager Overview In multipoint video conferencing several audio and video endpoints can simultaneously participate in a conf
30. Copy Participant Ctrl C Cut Ctrl Delete Del Exclusive Speaker O84 Management Mute Audio Ctrl M Mute Video Block Audio Turn OFF AGE The Participant Properties dialog box opens 2 Click the Video Sources tab MGC Manager User s Guide Volume The Participant Properties Video Sources dialog box opens Alice Properties Identification Advanced Connection Infot Connection Info2 Video Sources H245 Disconnection Cause Resource Details E oo ooo oooo o B ES 65 885 oe i il 2 il 3 4 5 10 S Name of the participant currently olanda forced to this window Personal Layout Conference Layout OK Cancel Apply 3 Inthe Video Layout pane select from the Participant list the name of the participant to be viewed in the selected window The participant selected for a certain video window is constantly viewed in the window until further changes take place 4 Repeat the previous step to select the participants to be viewed in the other windows Windows that were not assigned any participant will display the current speaker and previous speakers according to the conference settings 5 To cancel the video forcing in a desired window click Auto select from the Participant list 6 Click OK to apply the changes and exit this dialog box Ly Video Forcing at the Participant level overrides Video Forcing at the Conference level 6 41 Chapter 6 Opera
31. Default Attending Print Template Cu Ctrl Copy Chr Paste trl Paste 45 Ctr P Delete Del Properties If you have selected Start the Conference Properties Schedule dialog box opens Define the conference Start Date and Time and click OK The Operator conference is added to either the On Going Conferences or the Reservations list as relevant The conference name is automatically taken from the operator s login name and not from the Operator Template name 8 31 Chapter 8 Entry Queues Operator Conferences and Attended Conferencing Attended Conferencing 8 32 When participants connect to an Entry Queue or IVR enabled conference they initially hear a welcome message If the Entry Queue or VR enabled conference is set to attended mode the Entry Queue service or the IVR service is configured to wait for Operator Assistance they are then moved to the Participant s Queue where they must wait for an operator to attend to them The participants can be in one of the following stages Greeting Welcome Attended On Hold or Conferencing The operator controls the participant connection to the conference moving the participant from one stage to another The move is performed either interactively using drag and drop using the right click pop up menu or the using appropriate buttons on the Participants Queue toolbar Special icons are used to indicate the participant status in an attended conference Greeti
32. Defining an On Going Operator Conference 8 24 An On Going Operator Conference can be defined directly from the On Going Conferences right click pop up menu In that case the Operator conference name is derived from the operator name currently connected to the MCU from the same workstation To define an Operator Conference 1 Connect to an MCU and expand its tree 2 Right click the On Going Conferences icon and then click New Operator Conference On Goin g Conferences 13 Mew Conference Mew Operator Conference Print All Paste EIH E Paste As crl P Paste SIP Factory As Debbie Properties Product Management x General Settings Patticipants Resource Force Name Debbie Conf Entry Password Duration 200 Web Chairperson Password Billing Numeric ID MCU Product Management a DEAN a User Defined 2 Poo Biles 1 Cor User Defined 3 SY r Conference Type Media Supported Network r Video Session C Standard C Audio C P C Video Switching Meeting Room Video Audio O IE ISDN Transcoding Operator ga f Continuous Presence Remarks FO Update Remark Remarks History MGC Manager User s Guide Volume The conference type is set to Operator The name of the On Going Operator Conference or Reservation is taken from the Operator s login name This name cannot be modified No password is required
33. If IP Only you have an additional option G 723 G 729 If set to Auto the system tries to connect the participants using the best possible audio algorithm selecting it in the following order G 728 G 722 G711 Select the Video Format for the Entry Queue according to the target conference settings The Video Format options are enabled only when defining a Video Switching Entry Queue and when the video protocol is H 261 or H 263 Select Auto to let the system select the appropriate video format according to the participant properties Select one of the video formats to force the participant to connect using one of these frame resolutions For a detailed description of the Video Format options see Chapter 4 Video Format on page 4 44 8 9 Chapter 8 Entry Queues Operator Conferences and Attended Conferencing Table 8 1 Entry Queue Definitions Parameters Continued St Se ees Frame Rate Video Protocol Annexes Line Rate 8 10 Select the Frame Rate for the Entry Queue according to the target conference settings This option is enabled only for Video Switching conferences set to H 261 H 263 or H 264 Select Auto to let the system select the appropriate frame rate Select one of the frame rates to force the participant to connect using this frame rate For a detailed description of the frame rates values see Chapter 4 Frame Rate on page 4 45 Select the video compression protocol of the Ent
34. MGC Manager Basics The Global Defaults or Private Defaults set is now loaded and active in the MGC Manager and a check mark appears next to the selected option in the Load Defaults from Database menu Commands Shortcut Keys Shortcut keys can be configured to quickly accomplish tasks you perform frequently For example pressing lt CTRL gt lt D gt terminates an On Going Conference The following table lists the default shortcut keys available in the MGC Manager application For more details see the MGC Administrator s Guide Chapter 5 Table 3 10 Command Shortcut Keys lt Alt gt lt C gt Clears the participants listed in the Q amp A queue lt Ctrl gt lt N gt Creates a new Participant or Reservation Template file lt Ctrl gt lt O gt Opens a Participant or Reservation Template file lt Ctrl gt lt S gt Saves a Participant or Reservation Template file or saves changes to the database lt Ctrl gt lt C gt Copies the On Going Conference Reservation Entry Queue or Meeting Room properties to the clipboard or copies the participant s properties to the clipboard lt Ctrl gt lt X gt Copies the conference or participant properties to the clipboard while deleting the original item lt Ctrl gt lt V gt Pastes participant properties from the clipboard into an On Going Conference Reservation Conference Template template file or database or Participant Template template file or database Pastes Co
35. Meet Me dial in participants and prevent them from joining the conference once it has started Clear this check box to unlock a locked conference A locked conference can be unlocked while it is in an On Going state Note This option is enabled only if the Audio card is installed in the MCU and for Meeting Rooms and Standard conferences set as Meet Me Per Conference or Entry Queue Access Mute Meet Me Select this option to automatically mute all undefined Parties Meet Me dial in participants once they are connected to the conference The participants can then be individually unmuted by the operator or the conference chairperson Note This option is enabled only if the Audio card is installed in the MCU and for Audio Only Meeting Rooms and Standard conferences set as Meet Me Per Conference or Entry Queue Access Start Cont Select this option to allow the conference to start Requires only when the participant defined as a chairperson Chairperson connects to the conference Participants who connect to the conference before the chairperson are placed on hold and hear background music and see a Welcome slide when available Once the conference is activated the participants are automatically connected to the conference When the check box is cleared the conference Starts at its predefined time or when the first participant connects to it Meeting Rooms Note This option is enabled only when an IVR Service i
36. Polycom Viewstation or Viewstation FX endpoints and only when the conference is set to Video Switching DuoVideo Available with Tandberg endpoints in which one conference is set as the video conference and the other as the presentation conference Select this option when defining presentation conferences This option is available only when the conference is set to Video Switching For a detailed description of Dual Stream options see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Chapter 1 Dual Stream Modes Defining Advanced Conference Settings 6 Inthe General Settings pane click the Advanced gt gt button 7 Define the following parameters Table 4 6 Conference Properties Advanced Settings General Chair Control Select Auto to enable one endpoint chairperson s to control the conference and other conference participants Select None to disable this option This option is enabled when the Cascade field is set to None For more details see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Chapter 5 4 36 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Table 4 6 Conference Properties Advanced Settings General Continued T120 Rate FECC LSD Rate Cascading enables you to run one large conference that is made up of one Master and one or several Slave conferences these conferences are not connected directly to each other run on different MCUs or on the same MCU For more details see the MGC Manager User
37. Select this option to cancel the current conference definition without defining a new On Going Conference 4 69 Chapter 4 Defining Conferences and Participants Joining an On Going Conference Defined dial in participants can connect directly to the conference Undefined participants can connect to a Standard conference via an Entry Queue or directly if the conference is defined as a Meet Me Per Conference or as a Meeting Room Defined dial out participants wait for the system to call them and connect them to the conference Conference Access for Defined Dial in Participants 4 70 ISDN Participants Defined ISDN participants can dial in to a conference directly For direct dial in the participant s CLI dial in number is added to the participant definition and the participants are given the MCU dial in number When they dial the MCU number the system recognizes their CLI number and routes them to their conference accordingly When defined participants connect to a Meet Me per Conference the system behaves in the same way as with undefined participants For more details see Conference Access for Undefined Dial in Participants on page 4 75 You can add defined participants during an On Going Conference For more details see Chapter 6 Adding New Participants to a Conference For detailed information about Entry Queues see Chapter 8 Entry Queues Operator Conferences and Attended Conferencing
38. You can modify this file name The file can be saved only in the text or ASCII format txt Budget txt Planning tet File name Pension Plan nave az type Text File txt Cancel A 6 86 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume 9 Using the standard Windows conventions select the destination folder for the file and then click Save 10 At this point you can perform one of the following operations in the Voting window Click OK to exit the voting session b Click Restart Voting to restart the voting on the same subject if the first voting session was interrupted or there is a need to recount the votes c Click New Vote to create a voting session for a new subject item To view the voting results file e Using any word processor open the text file The following is a sample of a voting results text file E Pension Plan txt Notepad o x File Edit Format View Help Pension Plan Plan 1 Vote Plan Plan 6 87 Chapter 6 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences Using DIMF Codes During a Conference 6 88 Lj During an On Going Conference participants can perform various operations using touch tone signals DTMF codes e Participants can perform various operations using DTMF codes only if an IVR Service is assigned to the conference e The definition of operations that can be performed by all conference participants or just by the chairperson is done in
39. audio and visual indications can be played to the conference participants on their endpoints For more details see Chapter 5 Audio and Visual Indications on page 5 31 The timing of the end of conference reminder is defined in the Conf Alert function in the Options menu To enable the End of Conference reminder 1 On the Options menu click Conf Alert Options Window Help Communication Fip Configurations Beep on faults Drag confirmation set Reservation Creator v Enable Crash Dump monitor dialog Audio Look amp Feel Monitor All Configure Indications Configure Shortcuts Stop Current Indication Repeating Gonhigure Proxy Settings Open Diagnostic tool Mark Faulty Participants in Red The Conference End Time Alert dialog box opens x End Conf Alert Min 5 ox eae 6 61 Chapter 6 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences Set the time period in minutes before the end of the conference to display the End of Conference Reminder icon For example if you enter 5 the End of Conference Reminder icon will be displayed five minutes before the end of the conference Entering 0 disables the appearance of the icon Click OK to apply the settings The system will display the End of Conference Reminder icon x minutes where x is the number of minutes entered in this dialog box before the end of the conference Changing the Conference Billing Code 6 62 During an On Going Co
40. conference For example if the conference frame rate is set to 15 fps and the endpoint sends video at 30 fps frames per second the endpoint is connected as Secondary The resources of the H 323 card were insufficient for the participant s video channel Video connection for SIP participant is temporarily unavailable 5 75 Chapter 5 Monitoring Conferences 5 76 7 Click the Resource Details tab to view the MCU resources allocated to the participant The Participant Properties Resource Details dialog box opens Duke IP Properties Identification Advanced Connection Infot Connection Info2 Video Sources H245 Disconnection Cause Resource MUX None AUDIO CODEC None AUDIO BRIDGE None VIDEO None T120 BRIDGE None T120 CODEC None H323 7 Net Resource Details Board Id None None None None None None 2 Resource Details Allocated OK Cancel The following information is displayed Board ID the number of the slot where the IP card used to handle the participant is installed Unit ID Displays the unit number on the card used to handle the participant in the conference Allocated Indicates whether the IP card is used to run the conference or not All other resources are identical to ISDN participants and are described in Table 5 14 on page 5 51 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Monitoring Gateway Sessions If a gateway is configured on
41. depending on the type of conference that is managed by the operator IVR enabled conferences use the Audio card while AV Welcome Attended conferences use the Standard Audio card The Operator conference should be set according to the installed card capabilities Encrypted conferences require MUX cards MGC Manager User s Guide Volume About Participants Participants are people using personal endpoints or endpoints in Meeting Rooms used by many people When defining participants you are actually defining the connection parameters of the endpoint to be used by the person participating in the conference Participants may dial to the conference dial in or the conferencing system may dial to the participant dial out Participant Roles Conference participants can have different roles a standard participant a chairperson lecturer or an operator Each role is represented by an appropriate icon Standard participant takes part in the conference performing operations via the telephone or via the endpoint s remote control using touch tone signals DTMF codes Participants can control their broadcasting and listening volume mute or unmute their line request operator s assistance invite new participants to the conference vote and ask questions Chairperson takes part in the conference but is also the meeting s organizer The chairperson can control the conference using a Web browser or via DTMF codes Chairpersons
42. e Preparation stage Before the voting session begins the operator or the chairperson creates the list of choices and their descriptions The operator or the chairperson then informs the conference participants of the choices available for selection and the digit assigned to each option e Voting stage When voting each participant enters the digit that represents the participant s choice using the DTMF input device As each vote is counted the information is presented on line in the Voting window e Results stage When the voting is completed the final results can be saved to a file Voting sessions are available in IVR enabled conferences that are run on Audio cards and require the use of a DI MF input device Conducting a Voting Session The operator or the chairperson manages the voting session 6 81 Chapter 6 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences To manage a voting session conference 1 In the Browser Status or Monitor panes right click the conference icon and then click Voting olycorn Stop Monitoring Monitor Filter New Participant F Terminate Del Refresh video Copy Conf ctrl E Paste Participant Ctrl V Paste Participant 45 Ctrl F Lock Conference On Hole Print Reservation Daka Video Force Drag amp Drop Properties The Voting dialog box opens Voting eee Voting Settings Voting results Title Number of participants Ee Pension
43. gt Port MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Enabling the Presentation Mode during an On Going Conference To enable the Presentation Mode during an On Going Conference l Right click the On Going Conference icon and then click Properties The Conference Properties dialog box opens Click the Video Sources tab The Conference Properties Video Sources dialog box opens Finance Properties Product Management i Ed General Scheduler Settings Participants Video Sources Resource Force Ongoing State Meet Me Per Conf Recording Icon Video Session Lecturer Layout Video Switching Auto posse oo oo oR nuns l ndi cating Transcoding Layout EA E EN eee y y oa that Continuous Presence 1 2 3 4 5 10 w Continuous Presence Presentation Mode is active Background M MV Layout Border E MV Speaker Notation E Audio Muted Participants CIDonald Auto Select Lecture Mode Presentation Mode Lecturer name V Timer Debbie Interval 5 Ez Sec Select Unforced Participants OK L cance Apply Help In the Lecture Mode list select Presentation Mode To disable the Presentation Mode select None in the Lecture Mode list In the Interval field select the amount of time in seconds or minutes to wait before the speaker automatically becomes the conference lecturer and the
44. i9 Product Management Major H ig MCU Configuration H On Going Conferences 3 B Donald a Karen HES Debbie On Going Gateway Sessions d Participants Queue 2 W Karen budget W Donald budget e Ifs Name d ZVbudget Prot 2 Connected Not Full JD Disc H323 172 22 172 74 Res Dial out d l 0 W Hold s Con H323 172 22 172 13 Bed Dial out d l OK 7 7 a Audio W Hold D Con ISDN 79320 Ret Dial out OK 64 64 o Audio Ready Portso NM 4 8 53 Chapter 8 Entry Queues Operator Conferences and Attended Conferencing 8 54 Browser and Status pane Participants Queue list MGC Manager VERSION 7 5 0 15 File Edit View Template DataBase Directory Options Window Help 2 ed eed en 2 a Of0 PARTICIPANTS QUEUE FILTER Product Management Normal H BA mcu Configuration to On Going Conferences 4 Ba Alan Attended Wrong conference passw Sep 21 2005 02 06 budget Debbie pa AMIT Debbie Onhold On hold by operator Conn Sep 21 2005 10 33 budget budget B Alan B Debbie 8 Donald SS Debbie 8 Alan m a H Reservations 0 Name Status Connection Network __ Participant Numbers JP _ Connection Type Audio Video sync Tx Rate RxRate Retries L Media mel Sh bunget Product
45. on page 3 25 Chapter 9 Conference Reservations 9 14 3 4 Enter your Login Name and Password and click OK On the Database menu click Open D B Reservation Template and then select the database storing the Reservation Template DataBase Directory Options Window Save Database Refresh Database Fo Filter Login Open D E Reservation Template Open D B Participant Template Logout amp Clear Login Record Load Defaults From OB i Manage databases Database ODBC The Reservations in Database window is displayed Expand the Groups hierarchy until you locate the desired Reservation template 2101 x Root Name Phone 1P Connection Type Channels Aggregation Default E My Group S Default Audio ici Default_COP sei Default_Video ici SW CP video Switch E UserGroups D accorD 9 Administration H O Operator a Operator tii DO Operator Audio MGC Manager User s Guide Volume 6 Right click the Reservation template icon that you want to schedule and then click Start New Participant Copy 4s Default Attending Print Template Cut Chrl Copy ctrl E Paste Erl Paste 4s itr P Delete Del Properties The Conference Properties General dialog box opens allowing you to modify the conference general parameters 7 Select the MCU on which to run the conference Standard New Reservation Template Properties Product
46. on page 4 10 For a COP session select the estimated highest transfer rate that can be used by the conference participants In this mode all conference participants must use the same video parameters 4 32 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Table 4 5 Conference Properties Settings Parameters Continued Encryption Select this check box to enable encryption for this conference ISDN and IP encrypted participants require more resources than non encrypted participants Whether the participant s connection to a conference is encrypted or non encrypted depends on the encryption setting of the conference or the Entry Queue as well as on the participant s own encryption setting For more information see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Chapter 1 Media Encryption SilencelT Select this check box to enable automatic muting of noisy lines for Audio Only participants taking part in a video conference SilencelT must be enabled in the IVR Service to be enabled for new conferences If you enable this option while an IVR Service you assigned to the conference is not SilencelT enabled the conference definition will be rejected See the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Il Chapter 2 Using SilencelT VTX 1000 Select this check box to enable VTX 1000 users to connect by a phone line to unified or Audio Only conferences with wideband high quality audio Undefined participants connecting directly to VTX 1000 en
47. password is only required in VR enabled conferences that are configured to prompt for the chairperson password Note In Video conferences without IVR this password is required only for accessing the conference properties from the WebCommander application Numeric ID Each conference must be assigned a unique identification number Numeric IDs NID are required for routing purposes when accessing the conference from the Entry Queue when the selected routing method is numeric ID and for dialing to the conference from an H 323 endpoint as part of the dialing string NID can be assigned manually or automatically To manually assign the NID enter a number in the length the number of digits defined in the system cfg file If the Numeric ID is already in use in another Entry Queue or conference an error message will be displayed If you do not assign the Numeric ID the MCU automatically assigns one when the conference is saved on the MCU Note If the MCU is configured to support only automatic assignment of Numeric IDs then this field is disabled and the system automatically assigns a Numeric ID after you save the conference on the MCU Entry Queue Select this option to force participants to access the Access conference via a single dial Entry Queue by dialing the Entry Queue dial number Once the participants are connected to the Entry Queue they enter the destination conference Numeric ID or password depending on the MCU c
48. the voting stage Click the Stop Voting button to conclude the voting session Alternatively end the voting session by entering the appropriate code on the DTMF input device The default code for this action is 81 At this point you can display the voting results on screen and choose to save them to a file Click the Details Results button to display the full information about the results of the voting session 6 85 Chapter 6 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences The Voting Details window opens For each option the system displays the total number of votes Voting Details yx Pension Plss Number of votes per choice isting Pension Plan 3 Votes tranald Names of participants who voted for ee this choice karen H ABC Pension Plan 1 Wote i YZ Pension Plan i PAT Pension Plan i option 4 i option 5 i option 6 i option 7 i option 8 option 9 Ifthe vote was not anonymous you can view the names of the participants who have voted for each of the listed choices To display names click the icon next to the choice name Ifthe vote was anonymous the system displays only the number of votes for each choice 7 Click OK to close the Voting Details window 8 Inthe Voting window click the Save Results button to save the results to a text file The Save As dialog box opens The File Name field displays the default name derived from the voting session s title
49. video settings not support the capabilities required by the MCU For example the conference Video protocol is set to H 263 while the endpoint supports only H 261 In the Cause box the system lists the conference video parameters and the endpoint s video parameter that does not match the conference 5 74 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Table 5 20 H 323 and SIP Participant Properties Disconnection Causes Category and Description Video Disconnection Reason Secondary cont Remote device does not support the current video parameters Remote device failed to change its video parameters Video stream violation during session Video channel rejected due to inadequate H 323 card resources Conferencing Limitation During the connection to the conference the endpoint fails to adjust lower its video settings to the conference settings For example when the conference frame rate is set to QCIF the endpoint sends video in CIF and cannot lower the video resolution to QCIF In a Video Switching conference with video parameters set to Auto activating the highest common mechanism when the conference video parameters are adjusted according to the participants currently connected to the conference the participant s endpoint could not adjust its video parameters Consequently the connection status changed to Secondary The endpoint s video parameters exceed the parameters set for the
50. 0 0 eeeeeeeeeeeees 4 110 Monitoring Conferences 002c eee eee eee 5 1 General Monitoring ccecccccccccceccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeesseseesseeessseeseeseees 5 2 Using the Main Window Panes for Monitoring eeeeeeee 5 3 Listing Conference Properties cceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 5 4 Viewing On Going Conference Status ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 4 Listing On Going Conference Participants in the Status Pane 5 7 Listing On Going Conference Participants in the Monitoring PAINS eo apes ote E E EEA 5 8 Monitor Pane Information cccccccessecccceceeesececceeeaeeseeeeeeeeas 5 10 Additional Participant Statuses ccccccccccssseeeeetstensseees 5 21 Participant s Audio Status ce ccccccccccccecceceeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeaeeees 5 22 Participant s Video Status aicsssccieasactecseceaseccoataiuasdeasndereaeaae 5 24 Monitor Filter oo cccccccccccccssesecceeceeeeeeccceeessaeeecceeeeaeeeseeeeeees 5 25 Monitoring All Conferences ccccccccceseeeceeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 27 Secure Conference ModE ic cssscessescccveswayuaneveccecensscvntinacnssawentedseens 5 28 Secure Conference CONS ccidiciscsncaisinsisnseaisdinsansnseiseraenocdsaeaecs 5 29 Audio and Visual Indications 0 0 0 0 eeeessscccsccceccceceeeeeeceeeeeeeeees 5 31 Noisy Line Detection and Automatic Muting cccceeeeeeee 5 33 Viewing the Participants Queue 2 0 ccccceeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 3
51. 3laboo dhonti 188 203 ID 44799 Exclusive Speaker Not Full o i h Dial Bit 3lab10 716171111 222 D Disconnected ISDN 5716171111 Gre Dial DFR FR FE BF 3lab11 t 31 Connected Faulty Connection AF siabiz D Faulty conn SIP Iab06 Fi Beb Dial Ready D Memi1 l Potso Nm Figure 3 8 MGC Manager Main Window Vertical View You can resize the Main window panes to display the information as you choose When the application is restarted the panes retain the selected layout until you change it again For more details see Resizing the Window Panes on page 3 11 To modify the main window view mode 1 On the View menu click Vertical View if Horizontal View is displayed or Horizontal View if Vertical View is displayed View Main Toolbar Conference Toolbar Conf Participants Toolbar v Participants Queue Toolbar Participants Queue Filter Q amp A Toolbar Status Bar Indications Log EEL 1m window 3 8 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Alternatively on the toolbar click the Change View Mode icon Gl A warning message is displayed indicating that the MGC Manager application must be restarted 2 Click OK to restart the MGC Manager application When you restart the MGC Manager application you may be required to log on depending on your application settings if
52. 4x4 2 8 1 12 Figure 2 5 Continuous Presence Quad Views Additional Video Layouts For conferences with more participants than display squares the MGC s dynamic video mix capability allows the site mix which sites can be seen to be modified throughout the conference The displayed layout can be preset in the reservation stage or changed during an On Going conference allowing a participant to view different screen layouts of the other conference participants These layout options allow conferences to have greater flexibility when displaying a large number of participants and maximizes the screen s effectiveness When Auto Layout is set for the CP conference the MGC system automatically selects the video layout based on the number of currently connected participants in the conference and it changes dynamically during the conference when video participants are connected or disconnected The Continuous Presence Software Software CP is a software solution for IP only conferences that resembles Continuous Presence but saves video card resources In Software CP only two types of video layouts are available 2x1 and 2x2 Chapter 2 MGC Manager Overview Multiple Switching Modes Switching between video participants can be performed using these features e Voice activation e Operator force via the MGC Manager to and or the MGC WebCommander e Selecting certain participant display windows as fixed and other
53. 503 A 16 The SIP server sent a SIP Server Error 501 Not Implemented response The server does not support the functionality required to fulfill the request IP only The SIP server sent a SIP Server Error 502 Bad Gateway response The server while acting as a gateway or proxy received an invalid response from the downstream server it accessed in attempting to fulfill the request IP only The SIP server sent a SIP Server Error 503 Service Unavailable response The server is temporarily unable to process the request due toa temporary overloading or maintenance of the server IP only MGC Manager User s Guide Table A 1 Primary Disconnection Reasons Continued SIP Failure cont SIP server error 504 SIP server error 505 SIP temporarily not available SIP timer popped out SIP trans error TCP The SIP server sent a SIP Server Error 504 Server Time out response The server did not receive a timely response from an external server it accessed in attempting to process the request IP only The SIP server sent a SIP Server Error 505 Version Not Supported response The server does not support or refuses to support the SIP protocol version that was used in the request IP only The participant s endpoint was contacted successfully but the participant is currently unavailable e g not logged in or logged in such a manner as to preclude communication with t
54. Chairperson 73 Everyone Increase Listening Volume 76 Everyone Decrease Listening Volume 76 Everyone Override Mute All but Me Everyone SilencelT Menu 9 Everyone il Unmute amp Return to Conference 1 Everyone Return to Conference Muted Everyone Start Click View Everyone ha lt Back Finish Cancel Help Select Start Click amp View in the Name field In the DTMF Code left field enter the code The default is a double asterisk In the Permission right field select Everyone to enable this function to be used by all the conference participants Click Finish to complete the IVR Service definition The new IVR Message Service with the Click amp View application enabled is added to the JVR Services list The number of IVR Services defined for a single MGC unit may not exceed 30 Services To enable the Click amp View application by modifying an existing IVR Service l 2 3 Connect to the MGC Unit MCU Click the plus icon next to the MCU icon to expand its options tree Double click the MCU Configuration icon or click the plus icon next to the MCU Configuration icon to expand the MCU s Configuration options Chapter 11 Click amp View 11 6 Expand the IVR Msg Services tree i Product Management Normal Ae MCU Configuration oe Cards t DA Connections Ey BE IVR Msg Services i aise AD HOC as Attended IVR D tes aviy HE cry mwhenwr 3
55. Chapter 4 Defining Conferences and Participants Conference Media Type According to MCU Configuration The functional modules installed in the MCU determine the conferences that can be run by the MCU Table 4 3 lists the currently available conference types and functionalities as applicable to specific MCU configurations Table 4 3 Conference Types According to MCU Configuration Available Conference Functionality Types MCU Configuration Audio Audio Only Enables Standard Meeting Rooms Net 2 4 8 ISDN Meet Me Per Conference Audio Only card conferences IP card optional IVR enabled features Entry Queues Enables ISDN and PSTN participants Enables VoIP H 323 participants if an IP card is installed SIP participants require installation of an IP card e Audio Audio Only e Enables Standard Meeting Rooms e Net 2 4 8 ISDN Meet Me Per Conference Audio Only card conferences e Net 2 4 8 T1 CAS e Enables IVR features card optional e Entry Queues Enables ISDN T1 CAS and PSTN participants Enables VoIP H 323 participants if an IP card is installed SIP participants require installation of an IP card IP card optional 4 14 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Table 4 3 Conference Types According to MCU Configuration Continued MCU Configuration Audio Video Net 2 4 8 ISDN card IP card MUX card Audio Video Net 2 4 8 ISDN card IP card MUX card e Audio e Video e Net 2 4 8 ISDN car
56. E E EQ70 i IVR71 a osi AY Message Services ct i Network Services H Gi Operators H i paea Configuration ced 4 Profiles ee Recording Links E D On Going Conferences 14 pee On Going Gateway Sessions 0 pe a Participants Queue i0 HE lt I Reservations 0 B88 Meeting Rooms Entry Queues amp SIP Factories 18 The list of IVR Messages Services is displayed Double click an IVR Message Service or right click the IVR Service you want to modify and then click Properties The IVR Message Service dialog box opens Click the Video Services tab MGC Manager User s Guide Volume The IVR Message Service Video Services dialog box appears I R Message Service x Global Welcome Message Conference Chairperson Conference Password General Operator Assistance Roll Call Video Services SilencelT DTMF codes W Enable Video Services Clo Click amp View Video Welcome Slide IN one Add Slide Cancel Help Select the Enable Video Services check box Select the Click amp View check box Click the DTMF codes tab to view and or modify the DTMF code assigned to the activation of the Click amp View application from the participants endpoint I R Message Service g x Global Welcome Message Conference Chairperson Conference Password General Operator Assistance Roll Call Video Services SilencelT OTHF codes DTMF Code Permissions Roll Call Stop Revie
57. F4 Action options In the Attended Participant area enter the participant name and general information User Defined fields change the participant status to VIP and or chairperson and modify the listening and broadcasting volumes In the Operator area you can modify your listening and broadcasting volumes In the Conferences area you can list all the On Going Conferences Meeting Rooms and Reservations depending on the selected listing criteria and search the list for the required destination conference MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Once the destination conference is located you can move the participant to that conference or place the participant on hold If the Auto Attend Next Participant check box is selected the next participant waiting in the Participants Queue is automatically moved to the Operator conference when the current attended participant is moved out of the Operator conference either to the destination conference placed on hold or disconnected The following parameters and functions are displayed in the Attended Participants dialog box Table 8 5 Attended Participant Dialog Box Fields Attended Participant Participant Name If the participant is undefined the system assigned participant name is displayed in this field Type the name of the participant using up to 80 characters VIP Select this check box to change the participant status to VIP Chairperson Select this check box
58. For information about defining an Audio Only Entry Queue see the MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Chapter 5 Meeting Rooms and Entry Queues MGC Manager User s Guide Volume H 323 Participants Simple Dial in no Gatekeeper In simple dial in no gatekeeper is required if the participant uses the IP address of the card to dial in The participant is provided with the IP address of the IP card installed in the MCU The participant enters this IP address when dialing to the conference When connecting the participant is routed to the appropriate IP card according to the specified IP address The system determines the target conference according to the participant s IP address entered during the participant properties definition Endpoint IP Dom TN Endpoint IP 196 123 38 129 196 123 38 146 IP 172 22 138 146 IP 172 22 138 146 MCU IP 172 22 138 146 Conference1 MG323 module A Conference2 MG323 module B IP 172 22 138 148 E Figure 4 1 H 323 Participant Simple Dial in No Gatekeeper IP 172 22 138 148 Endpoint IP 196 123 12 89 In simple dial in the MGC Manager operator must manage the system resources by giving the appropriate IP address of the IP card to each of the participants In this mode resource sharing between IP cards is unavailable If eleven ports are taken by currently defined participants it will be impossible to add a twelfth participant who requires two ports eve
59. IP only conferences Line Rate Select the conference transmission rate according to the type of video session you selected The highest transmission rate in Transcoding and Continuous Presence sessions is 1920 Kbps E1 High line rates may require more MCU resources The H 264 video protocol is supported at line rates of up to 384 Kbps 4 29 Chapter 4 Defining Conferences and Participants Table 4 5 Conference Properties Settings Parameters Continued Line Rate cont For a Video Switching conference select the highest line rate common to all participants For example if two participants can connect at a transfer rate of 384 Kbps and one participant can connect at a rate of 128 Kbps set the line rate to 128 Kbps Ina conference with participants from mixed networks ISDN and IP the line rate defined for ISDN participants is also used for IP participants For Transcoding and Continuous Presence conferences define the maximum rate for the conference The actual line rate for individual connection is defined at the participant level If the participant s Line Rate is set to Auto the endpoint connects to the conference using the highest line rate possible by the endpoint up to the line rate defined for the conference in this field In such a case set the conference line rate to the highest transmission rate that can be used by the participants in the conference For Software Continuous Presence conferences the line
60. In the Status pane Browser pane or Monitor pane click the Participant icon Alternatively right click the icon of the participant to monitor and then click Properties 2 ms Disconnect Participant Ckrl T Copy Participant ctrl E Cut Chris Delete Del Exclusive Speaker O84 Operations d Unmute Audia Chrl U Mute Video Block Audio Turn OFF AGC The Participant Properties dialog box opens 5 41 Chapter 5 Monitoring Conferences Monitoring ISDN ATM MPI T1 CAS Participants Using the Participant Properties dialog box you can verify the properties of an ISDN participant The Identification Advanced Connection Info Connection Info2 Resource Details Disconnection Cause H221 or another used protocol and Video Sources tabs contain information that is relevant to the participant status only while the conference is running and is used to monitor the participant s status when connection problems occur For a detailed description of the participant properties that are set up in the Identification and Advanced tabs see Chapter 4 ISDN ATM MPI T1 CAS Participant Definition on page 4 90 To view and modify the participant s properties during a conference 1 In the Participant Properties dialog box click the Identification tab Information is displayed in the Participant Properties Identification dialog box You can view the name and the dial in numbers that were used by the participant to connect t
61. Ly Only one Operator Conference can be run for each login name at any time You can modify the conference duration 4 Inthe Media box select Audio to create an Audio Only Operator conference This type of conference is described in the MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Select Video Audio to create a video Operator conference The Operator conference is automatically set to Transcoding supporting all available network connections These parameters cannot be modified Lj 5 Click the Settings tab The Conference Properties Settings dialog box opens ACCORD Properties Product Management g x General Settings Participants Resource Force Name ACCORD Conf Entry Password Duration I 2 00 WWeb Chairperson Password Billing Numeric ID MCU Product Management Uker DeinadT o User Defined 2 J Meet We Per Conf eee Deaed Tr r Conference Type Media Supported Network Video Session C Standard C Audio C IP Yideo Switching C Meeting Room Video Audio PISDN Transcoding ATM MPI Operator Continuous Presence Remarks Remarks History 8 25 Chapter 8 Entry Queues Operator Conferences and Attended Conferencing as I 120 Rate Attended Msg Service Type and Name Video Format and Frame Rate are disabled In an Operator conference all fields not relevant to the operator conference such 6 Select the E
62. MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Chapter 6 For a description on how to load the user defined default titles see Chapter 3 Loading the User Defined Default Set to the MGC Manager Application on page 3 31 4 24 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Table 4 4 Conference Properties General Continued Conference Type Select the type of conference you are defining e Standard Select this option if you are defining an On Going Conference with its required MCU resources When this conference ends it is deleted from the MCU Meeting Room Select this option to define a new Meeting Room A Meeting Room is a passive conference that is reserved once without resource allocation and is activated many times when the first participant dials in and joins the conference For more details see Chapter 7 Meet Me per Conferences and Meeting Rooms Operator Select this option to define an Operator conference to enable the attended conferencing mode and to enable the operator s assistance for Entry Queues and IVR enabled conferences as well as Greet and Guide Video conferences For more details see Chapter 8 Entry Queues Operator Conferences and Attended Conferencing Select Audio to define an Audio Only conference with VoicePlus capabilities such as IVR Service Roll Call etc For a detailed description refer to the MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Select Video Audio for video conferences tha
63. Management xj General Scheduler Settings Participants Video Sources Resource Force Meet Me Per Cont Recording Name Standard New Reservation Temp Conf Entry Password Duration 2 00 Web Chaiperson Password Billing Numeric ID ACU Product Management Meee eE o I Enty Queue Access User Defined 2 V Meet Me Per Conf User Defined 3 oOo m Conference Type Media Supported Network gt r Video Session Standard C Audio CIP Video Switching Meeting Room Video Audio PLISDN Transcoding ATM MPI Operator Continuous Presence Classic x Remarks Update Remark Remarks History Cancel Help If only one MCU is connected to the MGC Manager the MCU is displayed in the MCU box If several MCUs are connected they are listed alphabetically and the first MCU on the list is displayed in the MCU box 9 15 Chapter 9 Conference Reservations If required modify the conference name duration and passwords You can also add Remarks to the conference or read the notes added to the Reservation Template when created For more details see Table 4 4 Conference Properties General on page 4 22 8 Click the Scheduler tab to define the conference start date and time The Scheduler dialog box opens Standard New Reservation Template Properties Product Management E3 General Scheduler Settings Participants Vide
64. Management Remove Participant From QRA ove Participant to First Position in O84 Mute Audio Ciritn Stee ote N ce trees meee mute video a a a en n ove Participant Position Up in Block Audio ihren e a m Turn OF AGC ove Participant Position Down in Properties Using the right click menu you can move the participant to the following positions in the Q amp A queue First position Last position Up one position Down one position Allowing Participant Questions Participants in the Q amp A queue can ask a question after the permission is granted to them by the conference chairperson or the operator e The chairperson enters the appropriate code on the DTMF input device to let the first participant in the queue ask the question The default code for this action is 23 An audio confirmation is played e The operator lets the first participant in the queue ask a question using one of the following methods Click the Next Questioner button if on the Question and Answer toolbar 6 77 Chapter 6 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences Right click the Conference icon then click Next Questioner n On Going Conferences 44 Hgg ACCORD HH ice Budget Monitor Monitor Filter New Participant Fa Terminate Del Copy Cont Ctlt c Paste Participant Eilts Paste Participant 4s Cirlth Next Questioner Clear Tat Lock Conference Voting Print Reservati
65. Mode Auto Chair No Voice Data Node Type Terminal Restrict Only No To print details of all On Going Conferences or Reservations 1 Print details using one of the following options In the Reservations list right click the Reservation icon and then click Print All Reservations 1 Mew Reservation New Operator Reservation Paste 5 Ctrl F On Going Conferences list right click the On Going Conferences icon and then click Print All A ri yo New Conference CTS New Operator Conference D Master Reservation 5 Faste Cerl Paste s Ctrl P The Print All dialog box opens listing the On Going Conferences or Reservations currently handled by the MCU whose data can be printed 2 To exclude conferences from the printing session clear the check box next to the name of the conference or reservation 6 72 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume 3 Click OK The Print dialog box opens Print Default X Name OF Operator Cancel 4 Enter your name as the report initiator select the report destination and then click OK If File is selected as the printing destination the data of all the conferences are printed to the same text file If File is selected the Save As dialog box opens Budget txt Planning tet File name l Save az type Text File txt Cancel p te Select the destination folder Specify the file na
66. Mode when defining a new On Going Conference Reservation or Reservation template To define a conference as Lecture Mode l 2 Set the conference as a Standard conference Define the Conference Properties General Schedule Settings and Participants parameters as described in Chapter 4 Defining a New On Going Video Conference on page 4 20 Ensure that a participant to be designated as the conference lecturer is added to the list of conference participants in the Conference Properties Participants dialog box MGC Manager User s Guide Volume 4 Click the Video Sources tab to display the Lecture Mode parameters The Conference Properties Video Sources dialog box opens Default Conference Properties Product Management F video Switching e Transcoding e Continuous Presence Auto Select F E limer ra Zi 10 3 Chapter 10 Lecture and Presentation Options 5 Define the following parameters Table 10 1 Lecture Mode options The following options are available e None Disables the Lecture Mode Lecture Mode e Lecture Mode Enables the Lecture Mode When enabling the Lecture Mode an indication the Lecture Mode icon appears at the top right corner of the dialog box g Presentation Mode Enables Presentation Mode When enabling the Presentation Mode an indication the Presentation Mode icon appears at the top right corner of the dialog box For more i
67. Parameters Continued ee es Numeric ID Entry Queue Service Cascade A Numeric ID is a unique number assigned to the Entry Queue identifying it to the system It is used as part of the dialing string by IP participants to connect to the Entry Queue A Numeric ID can be assigned either automatically or manually To manually assign the Numeric ID use the number of digits defined in the appropriate flag in the system cfg file If the Numeric ID is already in use in another Entry Queue or conference an error message is displayed If you do not manually assign the Numeric ID the MCU assigns one after the completion of the Entry Queue definition The assignment is done once when the Entry Queue is saved on the MCU Note If the MCU is configured to support only automatic assignment of Numeric Conference IDs this field is disabled and the system automatically assigns a Numeric ID after you save the Entry Queue on the MCU Select the name of the Entry Queue Service for playing audio prompts and displaying the video slide to participants waiting in the Entry Queue Leave this field blank to use the default Entry Queue Service if an Entry Queue Service was set as default Note e The same Entry Queue Service can be used for Audio Only and Video participants Select this check box to define an Auto Cascade Entry Queue Defining an Auto Cascade Entry Queue is part of the setup process to enable automatic cascading
68. Participant s Queue Window The Participants Queue window lists all the participants waiting for the operator s assistance Participants are automatically added to the Participants Queue in the following circumstances e The IVR Entry Queue Service is set to attended mode On Hold for Operator assistance and the operator is required to connect the participant to the conference e The participant fails to connect to the conference by entering the wrong conference Numeric ID or conference password and waits for the operator s assistance e The participant requests Operator s Assistance during the On Going Conference e The participant is placed on hold The Participants Queue provides robust tools for the operator to manage participants waiting for assistance The Participants Queue is organized in one list Participants waiting in the Participants Queue can be listed in the Status pane or in a separate window This enables you to list the On Going Conferences in the Status pane while assisting the participants waiting in the Participants Queue The Participants Queue management options are available only if an Operator conference is active and running on the MCU The main working tool is the Attended Participant dialog box that opens when a participant is being attended by the operator This dialog box enables the operator to enter the participant name general information indicate the participant status VIP yes no change the list
69. Properties Video Sources H245 Disconnection Cause Resource Details Identification Advanced ConnectionInfot Connection Info2 Connection Type Interface Type Diat out v Participant IP Signaling Port Alias Name ae ype C Extension Identifier String T User Defined 1 User Defined 2 User Defined 3 User Defined 4 ooo Broadcasting Yolume 5 Listening Volume 5 M YIP OK Cancel 3 Move the slider to the right or to the left to adjust the audio volume On the volume scale is the lowest and 10 is the highest volume The Broadcasting and the Listening volume of each endpoint at the time of connection is set to 5 Each movement of the volume slider increases or decreases the volume by one unit equivalent to 3 dB MGC Manager User s Guide Volume 4 Click OK endpoint from their endpoint using DTMF codes The default DTMF code to increase the Broadcasting Volume is 9 and to decrease 9 The new default DIMF code line to increase the Listening volume is 76 and to decrease 76 See Using DTMF Codes During a Conference on page 6 88 Participants in an On Going Conference can also control the volume of their Muting Unmuting Participant s Audio or Video Occasionally a conference organizer may want to exclude the audio or video channel of a participant from part of an On Going Conference You can mute a participant s audio and or video cha
70. Right click the On Going Conference icon and then click Properties The Conference Properties dialog box opens Click the General tab The Conference Properties General dialog box opens Budget Properties Product Management x General Scheduler Settings Participants Video Sources Resource Force Ongoing State Meet Me Per Conf Recording Name 137812 Web Chairperson Password 020230 we ID Duration 2 00 Billing oduct Managemen L User Defined 1 oo F Enty Gueue Access User Defined 2 ooo er Conf User Defined 3 Conference Type r Media m Supported Network p ideo Session d Audio C IF ideo Switching Meeting Room amp Video Audio P SDN ATM MPI Gperato Standard Remarks Update Remark Remarks History z OK Cancel Apply Help ok Note To be able to change the Conference Password an IVR Service must be assigned to the conference Enter a new conference and or chairperson password and click OK From this point on dial in participants must enter the new password or they will not be able to connect to the conference 6 57 Chapter 6 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences Changing the Conference Duration 6 58 At times operators may find it necessary to manually extend the duration of a conference or terminate a conference before its scheduled completion time For a description of how to aut
71. Service that handles the call DiffServ Select the QoS mechanism for prioritizing traffic on the IP Precedence network e DiffServ e Precedence enables additional parameters For more details refer to the MGC Administrator s Guide Chapter 3 Defining Network Services Audio and Video You can prioritize audio and video IP packets to ensure that all participants in the conference hear and see each other clearly Select the desired priority to ensure highest quality and lowest latency The recommended priority for both audio and video is 4 to ensure that the delay for both packets is the same and audio and the video packets are synchronized Type of Service TOS defines optimization tagging for routing the conferences audio and video packets Select the ToS Type of Service method that defines the route used by LAN router to transfer the packets e Delay The recommended default for video conferencing prioritized audio and video packets tagged with this definition are delivered with minimal delay the throughput of IP packets minimizes the queue sequence and the delay between packets None No optimization definition is applied This is a compatibility mode in which routing is based on Precedence priority settings only Select None if you do not know which standard your router supports 4 111 Chapter 4 Defining Conferences and Participants 4 112 Monitoring Conferences You can monitor On Going Conf
72. The QoS parameters may be defined at the participant level and at the network services level The participant properties setting has priority over the network services level For more details on services configuration see the MGC Manager Administrator s Guide Chapter 3 Defining Network Services In the Participant Properties dialog box you can enable or disable QoS for H 323 or SIP participants or allow the values defined in the Network Service To define Quality of Service for a H 323 or a SIP participant 1 Inthe Participant Properties Advanced dialog box click the Quality of Service button The Participant Properties IP Quality Of Service dialog box opens Participant Properties X IP Quality OF Service From Service i DiffSery f Precedence Audio 4 Video 4 TOS Delay E Cancel 2 Define the following parameters Click OK to complete the QoS definition for the H 323 or SIP participant In the Participant Properties Advanced dialog box click OK to apply the settings MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Table 4 10 IP Participant Properties IP Quality of Service IP Quality of QoS refers to the media transfer portion of a point to point Service or point to multipoint call Select the QoS option e Disable QoS is not implemented for this participant e Enable To modify the participant QoS properties e From Service Default To use the QoS settings of the P Network
73. These operations are listed and defined in the JVR Service DTMF Codes dialog box The same operations are also available from the MGC Manager application For a detailed description of IVR enabled conferences see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services 6 93 Chapter 6 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences Changing the Conference or Chairperson Password During an On Going Conference the conference password or the chairperson password can be modified by the chairperson or by a participant depending on the user permissions using DTMF codes When the user enters the DTMF code which activates the password modification process a voice message instructs the user to select whether to modify the conference password or the chairperson password A sequence of voice messages and chairperson actions follows to complete the password modification Table 6 6 describes this sequence Table 6 6 Password Modification DIMF IVR Sequences Chairperson or participant enters the Press one to change conference change password DTMF code password Press two to change the chairperson password Press nine to exit the menu Chairperson or participant enters 1 Please enter the new conference password Press the pound key to complete Chairperson or participant enters 2 Please enter the new chairperson password Press the pound key when complete Chairperson
74. This participant is the current conference speaker This participant is the conference s Exclusive Speaker in this mode all other participants are automatically muted Transmission of audio from the conference to the participant is blocked video only conferences The audio channel of the participant is muted by the participant from the endpoint The audio channel of the participant is muted by the participant and by the MCU The audio channel of the participant is muted by the participant Audio transmission from the conference to the participant site is blocked video only conferences The audio channel of the participant is muted by the operator The audio channel of the participant is muted by the operator i Audio transmission from the conference to the participant site is blocked video only conferences The audio channel of the participant is muted by the participant W and the operator 5 22 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Table 5 4 Participant Audio Status Icons Continued se pe T The audio is muted by the participant and by the operator Audio transmission from the conference to the participant site is blocked video only conferences The audio channel of the participant is muted by the operator and the MCU The audio channel of the participant is automatically muted by the MCU Exclusive Speaker mode Lecture Show The audio channel of the participant is automatically mute
75. User s Guide Volume MGC Hardware Enhancements The MGC unit provides the following features and enhancements Connectivity The MGC unit enables multi network conferences by connecting to the following networks ISDN T1 E1 Leased E1 T1 T1 CAS ATM FVC 25 amp 155 Mbit s IP Networks H 323 and SIP MPI V 35 RS 449 EIA 530 Scalable Architecture You can increase capacities of the MGC unit by adding ports as needed with no performance degradation All MGC ports are centrally controlled as a result system management is simplified and resources can be used efficiently and at a lower cost Reliability The powerful telecom architecture allows the MGC unit to ensure continuous multipoint service for all calls even in the most rigorous conferencing environments The MGC architecture includes Automatic resource allocation Redundant power supplies in the MGC 100 amp MGC 100 only The MGC 100 can be equipped with up to three load sharing redundant power supplies Front accessible hardware cards for ease of maintenance MGC 100 MGC 50 amp MGC 100 MGC 50 Chapter 2 MGC Manager Overview Maintenance 2 12 The MGC unit offers the following advanced maintenance features that minimize downtime and the need for human intervention On line diagnostics that continuously monitor system and network failures Universal slot architecture that allows all cards to fit into any slot MGC 100 MGC 50 amp MGC 100 MG
76. a fault The Fragmented information is displayed with the following details e Accumulated N total number of packets that were fragmented since the channel opened Accumulated percentage of fragmented packets out of the total number of packets transmitted since the channel opened Interval N number of fragmented packets received in the last RTP report interval default interval is 5 minutes Interval percentage of fragmented packets out of the total number of packets transmitted in the last RTP report interval default interval is 5 minutes Peak the highest number of fragmented packets in a report interval from the beginning of the channel s life span RTP Statistics The values this information provides may indicate Jitter problems with the network which can affect the audio Mechanism and video quality Jitter Buffer Size The maximum permitted delay in milliseconds in the expected arrival time buffer size determining whether packets are processed or considered as lost For example if the jitter buffer size is 15 milliseconds and a packet from an endpoint arrives with a 12 millisecond delay the packet is processed e N the current jitter buffer size e Peak the highest jitter buffer size from the beginning of the channel s life span 5 66 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Table 5 17 IP Participant Properties Video In Channel Info Continued Late Packets The number of packets disc
77. a card was removed from the MCU The exclamation point on the icon initially appears in red and blinks After the Fault file is viewed to identify the error the exclamation point color changes to yellow Consult your system administrator A minor error occurred The exclamation point on the icon initially appears in red and blinks After the Fault file is viewed to identify the error the exclamation point color changes to yellow Consult your system administrator MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Using Default Templates to Start a Conference Reservation Templates A Reservation template includes the conference parameters such as the conference media audio video video session line rate video protocol and other video parameters VR and more The Reservation Template may include the conference participant parameters Using a Reservation template you can schedule a conference to start immediately On Going Conference or to start automatically at a predefined date and time Reservation For information on defining a Reservation template see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Chapter 7 Reservation Templates Default Reservation Templates Five default Reservation templates are installed with the MGC Manager database to enable you to quickly start conferences e Default Audio Audio Only with Default IVR Service e Default_COP Conference On Port at 384 Kbps e Default_Video Continuous Presence Con
78. a message Manager or indication that the WebCommander participant has e For defined joined left the participants where no conference name is defined on the endpoint then as defined in the MGC Manager and WebCommander e For undefined participants the name is displayed as defined in the endpoint 5 31 Chapter 5 Monitoring Conferences Table 5 8 Audio and Visual Indications on Participant Endpoints Audio mndications ice Text Indication Indication Participant If no name is defined Enters the New Party will be Conference displayed Participant Leaves the If the participant is Audio Only the name will appear as Audio Party e Joined Left Describes the indication n Total number of sites currently connected to the conference Conference cont End of The Audio tone is D The indication The Conference played to all Conference is about to end conference in x minutes is displayed participants once where x is defined in the x minutes before Conference Settings the end of the conference where xX is defined in the Conference Properties Settings dialog box If Roll Callis enabled the system announces the self recorded name of the participant connecting to the conference 5 32 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Noisy Line Detection and Automatic Muting During an On Going Conference you can monitor noisy participant lines by selecting the Noisy Line mon
79. an icon and a name For recurrent 3 29 Chapter 3 MGC Manager Basics reservations the name is followed by a number identifying the reservation occurrence LUU Product Management Normal L3 MCU Configuration 3 On Going Conferences 0 On Going Gateway Sessions 0 Participants Queue 0 Reservations S Documentation Regional Sales_ 1 Regional Sales_ 2 Regional Sales_ 3 Worldwide Sales i Meeting Rooms Entry Queues amp SIP Factories To view an MCU s list of Meeting Rooms Entry Queues and SIP Factories 1 In the Browser pane expand the MCU tree 2 Expand the Meeting Rooms Entry Queues amp SIP Factories tree A list of Meeting Rooms Entry Queues and SIP Factories is displayed below the Meeting Rooms icon Each Meeting Room Entry Queue or SIP Factory is identified by an icon and a name _ Product Management Normal r MCU Configuration H A On Going Conferences 2 On Going Gateway Sessions 0 ot Participants Queue 0 Reservations 0 Meeting Rooms Entry Queues amp SIP Factories Audio S Audio EQ IP rth Tyr Aviv bbb 4 ay Default Conference aa Sales quarterly meeting VS IP IVR If no Meeting Rooms Entry Queues or SIP factories were defined the list is empty 3 30 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Loading the User Defined Default Set to the MGC Manager Applicat
80. as On hold for Operator Assistance In attended conferences the MGC Manager operator is usually responsible for connecting participants to their destination conferences placing participants on hold and tending to participants in need of operator assistance The Participants Queue management tools allow easy management of participants waiting in the queue All participants in the Entry Queue Attended and On Hold stages and those who have requested or need the operator s assistance appear in the Participants Queue You can view the participants statuses either by expanding the Participants Queue tree or by clicking the Participants Queue Window button For more information regarding the Participants Queue window see The Participant s Queue Window on page 8 33 The system simultaneously lists the participants of all the On Going Conferences waiting in the Participants Queue Only one participant at a time can be moved to the Operator conference for assistance MGC Manager User s Guide Volume When participants require or request operator assistance or while the operator attends a participant the participant s icon changes and it appears with a special exclamation point in the Name column ay In addition a special icon is displayed in the Status column of the Monitor and Status panes indicating the status of the participant Wait for Assistance Attended or Hold A participant can request help using the appr
81. between the Entry Queue and target conference To define a new On Going Conference Reservation or Meeting Room Conference using an existing Entry Queue 1 Expand the Meeting Rooms Entry Queues amp SIP Factories tree A list of Entry Queues Meeting Rooms and SIP Factories is displayed below the Meeting Rooms Entry Queues amp SIP Factories icon 2 Right click the Entry Queue icon to be used for creating the new target conference then click Create Reservation From Entry Queue e Meeting Rooms Entry Queues amp SIP Factories 14 Audio rh ay Ayi Delete Del IA S ca Copy Entry Queue Ctrl C Create Reservation From Entry Queue 233 De Properties PP En MGC Manager User s Guide Volume The Conference Properties General dialog box opens Conference Properties x General Scheduler Settings Participants Video Sources Resource Force Meet Me Per Cont Recording Name Finance Conf Entry Password Duration 2 00 a Web Chairperson Password Billing Numeric ID MCU Product Management User Defined 1 E V Enty Queue Access User Defined 2 V Meet Me Per Conf User Defined 3 Tr Conference Type Media Supported Network r Wideo Session Standard Audio C IP Video Switching Meeting Room Video Audio IP ISDN Transcoding ATM MPI Operator Continuous Presence Classic 7 Remarks Update Remark Remarks History
82. box opens This dialog box displays the participant s video layout and video forcing settings the participants that are forced to each of the layout windows For information about this dialog box see ISDN Participant Properties Video Sources on page 5 50 If problems are indicated during the participant s connection process to the conference and you want to further investigate the reasons click the H245 tab The Participant Properties H245 dialog box opens Identification Advanced Connection Infol Connection Infoz Video Sources H245 Disconnection Cause Resource Details Remote Capabilities Remote Communication Mode a Displa ys ine h261 75200 Bps endpoint s actions Feeder a when establishing connection with the MCU r nonstandard 77 Local Communication Made gr28 60 h261 320000 Bps CF at 30 fps Displa ys the MCU s Annes D actions when establishing connection with the participant OF Cancel Apply This dialog box indicates the capabilities exchanged between the MCU and the endpoint 5 71 Chapter 5 Monitoring Conferences The following information is displayed in the H245 tab Table 5 19 IP Participant Properties H 245 Remote Lists the participant s Line Rate and Audio Video Capabilities capabilities as received from the remote site Remote Displays the actual capabilities used by the endpoint Communication when establishing the
83. button SR on the Q amp A toolbar The participant s Q amp A icon is replaced by the standard participant icon according to the participant s role Clearing Q amp A Queues The chairperson and the operator can clear the Q amp A queue at any given time during the Q amp A session remove the participants currently waiting to ask questions from the queue using the following methods e The chairperson can enter the appropriate code on the DTMF input device The default code for this action is 24 e The operator can click the Clear Q amp A button ae on the Q amp A toolbar The Q amp A queue is emptied and all participant Q amp A icons are replaced by standard participant icons according to their role MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Managing Voting Sessions In a voting session participants express their preference on a set of choices using the touch tone keypad or remote control during an On Going Conference The system uses digits to correlate participant votes to the items for which they are voting A voting session can include up to 10 choices for one subject Each choice is assigned a digit between 0 to 9 and a descriptive title For example in an employees meeting the employees have to vote for one of the benefit plans suggested by the management Each plan is assigned a digit for example if there are 5 plans the choices can be 0 to 4 and a short description A voting session consists of three main stages
84. click the On Going Conference icon and then click Properties The Conference Properties dialog box opens 6 37 Chapter 6 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences 6 38 Click the Video Sources tab The Conference Properties Video Sources dialog box opens International Sales Properties Product Management x The video General Scheduler Settings Participants Video Sources Resource Force Ongoing State Video Session Video Layout ay out Video Switching T Aut m poo Transcoding eer o o Re AG lt selected for Continuous Presence 1 2 z 4 the conference Background a MV Layout Border E P Auto Select Video V Speaker Notation i la yout Audio Muted Participants win do W Alice Josh Yolanda Yolanda If Auto Auto Select Select is TEENIS Lecture Mode selected the E Same Layout system chooses the Interval Sec boa Select Unforced Participants participant The name of the participant currently viewed in this window In the Video Layout pane in the window to which you want to force a participant select the participants name from the list The participant selected for a certain video window is viewed in this window until further changes take place Repeat the previous step to force participants to other windows Windows that are not assigned any participant display the current speaker and
85. conference are listed in the Status pane table providing quick and easy access to such information as conference dial in numbers H 323 service prefixes conference numeric ID and passwords MGC Manager VERSION 7 5 0 13 File Edit View Template DataBase Directory Options Window Help PARTICIPANTS QUEUE FILTER alaala a5 EGA i L F6 Field 7 L F6 Field 8 E F6 Field 9 J Sales Aug 22 Aug22 743 0 2201 E MGC 25 S Engineering ES Aug 22 Aug22 745 o 2298 146752 J H pug Product Management Eijeudget Aug 22 Aug 22 H k MCU Configuration On Going Conferences 3 H 9 Budget DP Engineer ing 745 i Sales 5 On Going Gateway Sessio fe Participants Queue O X gt Ifa Name Status Connection Network __ Participant Numbers JP Connection Type Audio_ Video sync Tx Rate Rx Rate Eijeudget Product 3 Connected Not Full Alan lt Con H323 172 22 172 74 Bet Dial out q M OK 128 128 Debbie Con H323 172 22 169 72 ger Dial out q E amp M OK 128 128 a Donald P Con H323 172 22 172 13 Ret Dial out el I OK 128 128 Karen D gt Disc ISDN 79320 Buh Dial out q ae Lisales Product O Connected Empty 8 Nancy D Disc H323 172 22 172 191 Bed Dial out d l TH A Neil D gt wait H323 172 22 172 245 57 Dial in di St OK oo 0 ad Ready Poteo
86. dialog box The new layout is displayed on the participant s endpoint However the layout selected for the conference remains unchanged and is viewed by all conference participants in Conference Layout view If required repeat this procedure to modify Personal Layouts for other participants Quad Views layouts are available only when the conference is defined as Continuous Presence Quad Views The Visual Effects selected for the conference apply to personal layout at the time of change and if Visual Effects are modified for the conference they are not applied to the Personal Layout Changing the Video Layout for the Conference During Continuous Presence conferences you can change the video layout that was set for the conference To change the video layout during a Continuous Presence conference l 2 In the Browser pane expand the On Going Conference list Right click the On Going Conference icon and then click Properties The Conference Properties dialog box opens 6 35 Chapter 6 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences 3 Click the Video Sources tab The Conference Properties Video Sources dialog box opens Budget Properties Product Management x General Scheduler Settings Participants Video Sources Resource Force Ongoing State Meet Me Per Conf Recording Video Session i Video Layout Yideo Switching I Auto m we Do Se m cs Transcoding Layout o E a Em Hl
87. dialog box See Optional To modify the automatic card selection by the MCU on page 4 63 Video Continuous Presence conferences set to Quad Views COP conferences or Continuous Presence with visual effects are all routed to the Video card Video conferences are routed to the Standard Audio card when the MCU includes both the Standard Audio and the Audio cards When an IVR Service is used the conference is run on the Audio card Video Switching conferences run on the Standard Audio card allow up to 16 participants 12 video and 4 audio only to connect to the conference The operator can increase the number of participants up to 30 by setting the audio bridge component of the standard Audio card to 1 30 in the system cfg For more details see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Il Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings Video Switching conferences run on the Audio card allow up to 100 participants at 128 Kbps to connect to the conference without special configuration Audio Only conferences are automatically routed to the Audio card to enable the IVR functionality Only Audio 12 24 24 48 and 48 96 cards support T1 CAS participants Video conferences that run on MCUs with a Video card have additional features such as Quad Views Visual Effects and activation of the Click amp View application on the participant endpoint s screen Operator conferences can run on both Standard Audio and Audio cards
88. different video port on the video card full Transcoding per participant and Personal Layout selection of video layout per participant are available during the conference In Continuous Presence Quad Views sessions layouts intended for large conferences 10 participants are available for selection This mode is available only with the Video card Continuous Presence Software Software CP conference is a software solution for IP Only conferences that use fewer video card resources In this mode only two types of video layouts are available for selection 2x1 and 2x2 If the conference includes fewer participants than windows the empty layout windows are grayed For a detailed description of Software CP conferences see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Chapter 1 Video Quality Parameters The main parameters that define the quality of a video conference are e Line Rate The transfer rate of video and audio streams The higher the line rate the better video quality that can be viewed In Video Switching conferences all conference participants must connect using the same line rate therefore the participant with the lowest line rate connection determines the line rate for the conference For more information see Conference Properties Settings Parameters on page 4 29 e Audio Algorithm The audio compression algorithm determines the quality of the conference audio For more information see Conference Properties S
89. e Name and IP address or Alias e IP address and Alias when both provided e Name or Phone Number 4 67 Chapter 4 Defining Conferences and Participants If a conflict 1s detected in the Reservation or in an On Going Conference the Participants Scheduling Conflicts window opens listing the found data Participants scheduling conflicts i S i x The following parties are booked in the system Reserved Participants Phone Ip Start Time MV David 9251000 Dial out Engineering Res 02 04 2003 18 00 David 9251000 Dial out Sales 1 Conf 02 04 2003 17 51 Deborah Dial in Engineering Res 02 04 2003 18 00 Deborah 9251010 Dial out Sales 1 Conf 02 04 2003 17 51 M Edward 172 22 138 100 Dial out Engineering Res 02 04 2003 18 00 Edward 172 22 138 100 Dial in Sales 1 Conf 02 04 2003 17 51 gt Include selected participants and schedule Back to reservation Cancel scheduling The following information is displayed Table 4 4 Participants Scheduling Conflicts window Requested Lists the names of conflicting participants requested to join Participants the conference currently being created Reserved Lists the names of participants already scheduled in Participants previously created conferences whose parameters match those of the newly requested participant Phone IP Lists the phone numbers or IP addresses of listed participants Lists the aliases of listed participants Conn Type Indicates the part
90. ee 1 2 3 4 5 10 Yolanda l Yolanda Auto Select 7 Lecture Mode None Lecturer name ala INET Interval fis Sec Select Unforced Participants x e The Audio Muted Participant box lists all the participants currently connected to the conference A clear check box indicates that the participant s audio channel is in the normal mode unmuted while a checked box indicates that the participant s audio channel is muted 3 Select the check boxes of the participants to be muted Alternatively to mute all the participants except those who are video forced that is those who are displayed in one of the video layout windows click the Select Unforced Participants button All the participants that are not video forced are checked You can now unmute and mute an individual participant in the Audio Muted Participants box 4 Click OK The participants audio icon in the Audio column in the Monitor and Status panes now indicates that the audio channel was muted by the operator 6 53 Chapter 6 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences Locking Unlocking a Conference 6 54 The operator or chairperson can lock or unlock an On Going Conference to dial in participants In addition you can lock a conference during setup whether you are defining a new conference in the Reservation template or in the Conference Properties dialog box and if required un
91. enable this function a DTMF code must be configured These operations are listed and defined in the IVR Service DIMF Codes dialog box The same operations are also available from the MGC Manager application For a description of the IVR Message Service setup see Chapter 6 IVR and Entry Queue Services 6 92 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Table 6 5 Operations performed during a conference using DTMF codes DTMF Function SilencelT Menu Everyone The DTMF code to be used to play the SilencelT menu This code is used by the participant that who is muted due to a noisy line Unmute and Return to Conference Everyone Unmutes and returns the participant to the conference Return to Conference Muted Everyone Returns the muted participant to the conference while remaining muted Adjust SilencelT Sensitivity and Unmute Everyone Used by the muted participant to return to the conference unmuted while reducing the noise detection sensitivity This option should be used if you do not want the system to identify a faint noise as a noisy line Disable SilencelT and Unmute Everyone Disables the SilencelT option unmutes the line of the participant who is placed on hold by the SilencelT mode and returns the participant to the conference Start Recording Chairperson Starts a recording session Stop Recording Chairperson Stops a recording session Pause Recording Chairperson Pauses a recording session
92. from the system 2 or more means that the conference will be activated twice or more and the conference will remain in sleep mode passive in between recurrences If you have selected Meet Me Per Conference instead of or in addition to Entry Queue Access and you want to manually assign the dial in MGC Manager User s Guide Volume numbers use the same method as described in Defining Conference Dial In Numbers for ISDN PSTN T1 CAS Connections on page 7 5 20 Click OK in the Meeting Room Properties dialog box to complete the Meeting Room definition 21 The new Meeting Room is added to the Meeting Rooms list permission a system indication is displayed informing that you do not have the Virtual Conference Suite installed in your system e Up to 2000 Meeting Rooms can be defined per MCU e The Meeting Room will fail to start when the dial in number allocated to the conference is in use by another reserved conference or if the MCU has run out of resources 2 5 e lf you try to define a Meeting Room without the appropriate customer Using Meeting Rooms for Ad Hoc Conferencing in Avaya Environment Ad hoc conferencing is enabled in Avaya environment using Meeting Rooms The administrator must configure the ACM and MGC for Ad Hoc conferencing In the MGC Manager define one or several new Meeting Rooms In the Avaya Call Manager ACM application define the video conferencing parameters using the the names of the Me
93. ideo Services B F Click amp View video Welcome Side Chapter 11 Click amp View 10 Select the Enable Video Services check box Selecting this checkbox also enables the Click amp View checkbox Select the Click amp View check box Continue following the directions for completing the wizard until you reach the DTMF codes dialog box DTMF codes x Name TMF Code Permissions 87 Conference Termination Chairperson Start Click amp View ws Everyone Change to Chairperson 78 Everyone Increase Listening Volume 76 Everyone Decrease Listening Volume 76 Everyone Override Mute All but Me Everyone SilencelT Menu 9 Everyone Unmute amp Return to Conference 1 Everyone Return to Conference Muted 2 Everyone lt Back Finish Cancel Help This dialog box lists the default DTMF codes of the various functions that can be performed during the conference by all the conference participants or exclusively by the conference chairperson For a list of available DTMF codes see Using DTMF Codes During a Conference on page 6 88 To modify the DTMF code assigned to a function in the Name field click the function whose code you wish to modify 11 12 13 14 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume The appropriate DTMF code appears at the bottom of the list x Name TMF Code Permissions Conference Termination 87 Chairperson Start Click amp View Change to
94. in undefined participants may connect to the conference if Allow Undefined Participants is selected in the Participants tab and if there are available resources The conference may also include defined dial in participants These participants are identified by their CLI number ISDN or Alias H 323 automatically detects the participant s line rate and connects the participant at the line rate appropriate to the endpoint up to the maximum line rate defined in the conference settings This option is advantageous when all participants are connected at the same line rate defined for the conference When the Auto Rate Detect option is active for a dial out participant the system For more details about template definition see MGC Manager User s Guide Volume IT Chapter 7 When defining the participant during an On Going Conference the participants default parameters are set according to the conference media and type For example when defining the participant during an On Going Audio Only conference the Audio Only check box is selected and only Audio Only participants can be defined 4 85 Chapter 4 Defining Conferences and Participants To define a new participant during an On Going Conference or Reservation Definition e Inthe Conference Properties Participants dialog box click the New button Default Conference Properties Product Management The Participant Properties Identificatio
95. is a piece of the picture that contains four blocks Without this annex the transmitting encoder can only choose one motion vector for optimal prediction of the macro block 4 46 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Table 4 7 Conference Properties Advanced Settings Media Continued Annexes cont e Annex N Reference Picture Selection Mode It enables the conference to recover efficiently after transmission errors have occurred in the macro blocks and were reported via a relevant message to the speaker encoder Annex P Reference Picture Resampling It enables the transmitting encoder to apply a resampling process to the previous decoded reference picture in order to generate a warped picture for use in predicting the current picture The main purpose of this annex is to support the relationship of the current picture to a previous picture which had a different source format such as CIF QCIF or 4CIF To add participants to the conference You can add participants to the conference either by selecting the participants from the Participant database or a Participant Template file or by defining them directly during the On Going Conference 9 Click the Participants tab to add participants to the On Going Conference 4 47 Chapter 4 Defining Conferences and Participants The Conference Properties Participants dialog box opens Default Conference Properties Product Management E x General Setting
96. is disabled and the operator must login each session To create a login record 1 On the File menu click Preferences and then click Create Login Record MGC Manager File Edit View Template DataBase Directory Options 4 Download MCU Software 7 Preferences x Login Marne Duke Password Ee Cancel 2 Enter your Login name and Password and then click OK MGC Manager User s Guide Volume From this time on you will not be prompted to supply your user Login Name and Password whenever you connect to an MCU until you clear the Login Record To clear a login record You may need to disable your login record in order to maintain site security for instance when you go home after a day s work e Inthe File menu click Preferences and then click Clear Login Record MGC Manager File Edit View Template DataBase Directory Options wi Download MCL Software eo alse Preferences Create Leginece BE Clear Login Record Display MECU Memory The Login Record is cleared You will now be prompted to supply your Login Name and Password whenever you connect to an MCU unless you create a new Login Record 3 37 Chapter 3 MGC Manager Basics 3 38 Defining Conferences and Participants Defining new conferences is one of the major tasks to perform in the MGC Manager The system allows you to set up any type of Audio Only or video conference This chapter describes t
97. it at a later time Reservation 9 1 Chapter 9 Conference Reservations Table 9 1 Factors in Deciding Conference Reservation Methods Continued For these conditions There is no Reservation template containing a conference with the properties needed for this conference If the conference is to start immediately you can define an On Going Conference For more details see Chapter 4 About Participants Alternatively define a conference Reservation in which the current date and time are selected as the conference start date and time For more details see Defining a New Reservation on page 9 3 Define a new Reservation directly For more details see Defining a New Reservation on page 9 3 Define a new Reservation template either in the Database or in a Reservation Template file and use this reservation template to start a new On Going Conference or schedule a reservation For instructions on setting up a Reservation template in the database see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Chapter 7 Defining a Reservation Template in the Database For instructions on setting up a Reservation template in a Reservation Template file see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Chapter 8 Creating a new Reservation Template file MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Defining a New Reservation To schedule a new Reservation directly 1 Connect to an MCU and expand its tree For
98. last speakers Selecting the Black Screen option displays a dark grey window instead of a participant To cancel the video forcing for a window select Auto Select from the participants list In such a case the switching between participants is audio activated MGC Manager User s Guide Volume To Video Force interactively 1 Right click the On Going Conference icon and then click Video Force Drag amp Drop 4 oO I International Sales Paste Fariclpanit aste FariGlpanit Me VoH Yolanda Auto Select bd 6 39 Chapter 6 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences 6 40 2 In the Browser pane drag and drop the participant icon from the On Going Conference to the appropriate video layout window in the Video Layout window 3 The participant name appears in the field at the bottom of the video layout windows You can also video force participants to the video windows by selecting the participants name from the window s list 4 Click Apply to update the conference video layout and continue with forcing to other windows or click OK to apply the changes and exit this dialog box Video Forcing at the Participant Level For each conference participant you can select the participants to be viewed in each of the video layout windows assigned to them 1 Right click the icon of the participant whose video layout you want to force and then click Properties Disconnect Participant Ctrl T
99. name 6 49 Chapter 6 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences 6 50 To copy the participant Properties from a Database Participant template L Open the Participants in Database window as described in Chapter 3 Using Default Templates to Start a Conference on page 3 25 Expand the Groups tree until you locate the participant you want to copy Right click the icon of the participant to copy and then click Copy or use the appropriate shortcut key the default key is lt Ctrl gt lt C gt Mew Participant F Copy As Ctrl g Faste Ctrl Delete Del Dial In Ctrl I Properties The participant is copied to the clipboard Alternatively to copy the participant under a new name a Click Copy As The Participant Properties dialog box opens b Type a new name for the participant or modify any of the participant s properties such as the User Defined fields c Click OK The participant is copied to the clipboard under the new name In the On Going Conferences list right click the conference icon to which to copy the participant and then click Paste Participant Meeting Rooms Entry Queues amp SIP Factories 20 4 By 46788 a AMIT New Participant Fe Copy Meeting Roon Paste Participant As Ctrl P Delete Del Print Meeting Room Properties MGC Manager User s Guide Volume The participant s details will be copied to the new
100. nn Cf ESAE PESER 1 2 3 4 5 10 Classic Background com x V Layout Border V Speaker Notation E Audio Muted Participants BPE Auto Select aa Auto Select x Lecture Mode T Se Layout None Lecturer name I Timer Interval 5 Sec Select Unforced Participants x e re 4 To select another video layout click the arrow next to the numbered Video Layout icon indicating the required number of windows and click the desired video layout A pop up menu appears displaying the available video layouts for the selected number of windows Alternatively click the Auto Layout checkbox to let the system automatically select the video layout according to the number of participants 5 Click Apply to save these changes and modify additional properties or click OK to confirm and exit the Conference Properties dialog box The video layout is updated for all participants endpoints For more details see Auto Layout on page 4 58 Modifying Video Layouts in Lecture Mode Settings During Continuous Presence conferences you can select the Lecture Mode Lecture Show or Presentation Mode settings change their properties or deselect them For a detailed description see Chapter 10 Lecture and Presentation Options 6 36 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Video Forcing The operator can select which participant will appear in each o
101. of Ad Hoc conferences For details see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Chapter 3 Ad Hoc Auto Cascading MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Table 8 1 Entry Queue Definitions Parameters Continued ee Ce VTX 1000 Select this check box to create a VTX 1000 enabled Entry Queue Participants connecting to VTX 1000 enabled Entry Queues are initially assigned wide band resources If the endpoint is not identified as VTX the wide band resources are subsequently released Ad Hoc Select this check box to enable Ad Hoc conferencing When an Ad Hoc conference needs to be created the Target Conference properties are taken from the Profile assigned to the Entry Queue For more details see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Il Chapter 3 Ad Hoc Conferencing and External Database Authentication Note e Profiles must be defined before enabling the Ad Hoc conferencing option The Entry Queue can also be used for standard conferencing In that case participants can be moved to target conferences with properties identical to the Target Conference Setting Properties defined in the Entry Queue Profile Select the Profile to be used for the definition of the target conference in Ad Hoc conferencing The Profiles list includes all the profiles currently saved on the MCU Note Profiles must be defined before enabling the Ad Hoc conferencing option Target Conferences Audio Only Select this check box to crea
102. of the participant to add to the queue click Q amp A Management and then click Add Participant to Q amp A G Debbie H323 Disconnect Participant Ctrl T Copy Participant Chrl c Cu Ctrl Delete Del Exclusive Speaker gA Management Add Participant To G amp A Change to Chairperson Move Participant ta First Position it Gesi Move Participant to Last Position iq gre athend FZ Hold Ta Home Sont FS Move Participant Position Up iq grees Move Participant Position Down ip i44 Unmute Audic Ctrl U Mute video Block Audio Turn OFF AGC Properties The participant icon changes to indicate that the participant was added to the Q amp A queue 2 On Going Conferences 2 H JEI Default _video je g 3 Cay Polycom QA 6 75 Chapter 6 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences 6 76 In addition the Monitor pane displays information on the participant s position in the Q amp A queue and how long the participant has been waiting in the queue to ask the question T Name Status Connection Network PhonetiP_ Connection Typ Q amp A position Q amp A waiting Time Audio_ video Sh Polycom Q Hp 3 Connected Not Full vo Q i roa ae Lynne JD Disconnec 172 22 132 183 h Dial out d l vag aa Debbie H323 Connected 172 22 132 6 BEF Dial out 00 16 52 C d Os ae Duke Knoop De Connected 172 22 133 39 Q Dial out 00 16 49 a an c T rog ae Michelle MD Connected 1
103. open Content out Outgoing data media channel in H 239 and People Content conferences FECC in Indicates whether the incoming FECC channel is open FECC out Indicates whether the outgoing FECC channel is open No other information is relevant for this channel T120 in Indicates whether the incoming T 120 channel is open T120 out Indicates whether the outgoing T 120 channel is open 5 59 Chapter 5 Monitoring Conferences 5 60 Table 5 16 IP Participant Properties Connection Info1 Parameters Field Option Channels Status cont Faulty Bit Rate Packet Loss Fraction Loss Peak Number of Packets Jitter Peak Notes e The FECC channels appear in the Channel list only when FECC is enabled for the conference e When FECC is enabled T 120 channels are disabled and vice versa A red exclamation point indicates a faulty channel condition enabling further investigation if required This is a real time indication when resolved the exclamation point disappears The actual transfer rate for the channel If FECC is enabled for the conference this column indicates the FECC channel transfer rate 6 4 or 4 8 if encryption is enabled for the participant Indicates the accumulated count of all packets that are missing since the channel opened This field is for information only and does not cause the display of the exclamation point as it may indicate a problem at the connection stage and not a
104. option to enable participants using Restricted lines the Line Rate for each channel is 56 Kbps instead of 64 Kbps to connect to the Entry Queue and be moved to a Video Switching conference set as Restricted lines Network Services The Network Services table displays the list of ISDN Table PSTN dial in numbers assigned to the Entry Queue Dial in numbers are relevant to ISDN participants only IP participants use a dialing string composed of the H 323 Network Service Prefix and the Entry Queue Numeric ID H 323 participants can dial in to an Entry Queue by dialing the IP Network Service Prefix and the Numeric ID of the Entry Queue using the following format Prefix Entry Queue Numeric ID For more information see Enabling Entry Queue Access for Conferences on page 8 17 4 Click the Plus button to assign dial in numbers to the Entry Queue The Meet Me Service dialog box opens Meet Me Service X Semice Hame Dial in Humber 1 Dial in Humber 2 Cancel Chapter 8 Entry Queues Operator Conferences and Attended Conferencing 5 Define the ISDN dial in numbers assigned to the Entry Queue Table 8 2 Dial in Numbers Table SS eaaa Service Name Type the name of the ISDN Network Service to be used by participants to connect to the Entry Queue exactly as it is defined in the ISDN Network Services list the system is case sensitive Dial in number Enter the first dial in number to be assigned to
105. or clerical errors Information in this document is subject to change without notice MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Table of Contents Before YOU Begin ci cc aeedwe eds eset awde dae ee ewe es 1 1 System Requirements cccccccsssssssssseseeeceeeeeccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaneaaas l 1 Pregu En aene EEE E E AA l 1 About the MGC Manager User s Guides cccceeeeeseeseseeeeeeeeeeees 1 2 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I sssoooooonononsesssssssss 1 2 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I eee 1 3 MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition 1 5 MC OMVCUTIONS serena a E co ceee wanna 1 6 MGC Manager Overview 0 0 cece eee ees 2 1 MCU Mana SEMOMD scccnsccscntantosespaxcrezececosusboasneanneacesteveneseoaniactoreaeseosatens 2 2 MGC System Main Pate iss sscessovcesccscdactuncnedssediensndacuesveatdeiaveeesesiens 2 3 Universal Transcoding siaceatirees seieatduesudasansunsdesearmenandunanumaweasiedanens 2 3 Dynamic Continuous Presence CP cccccscessseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeees 2 4 Multiple Switching Modes sesiiccsutcsaseisiuarsrevesetssectniteaietstertscabaceusers 2 6 IVR Enabled Conferencing ssoosooosooeereerrrrerreesssessssessesssssssssss 2 6 Attended CONICLENCING seereis Ena S 2 7 EDGrypHON saisimcniuaesnssacannmssodacrimenacwssieibradotadtouneesiconspiaabsananantaauvsandnd 2 7 Single Dial Entry Queue sscssvcnsessscctascuatensstscaretorarnestreerr
106. out connection indicates the MCU CLI number as seen by the participant This is the number entered in the MCU Number field in the Network Service Note For Audio Only participants only one channel is displayed 9 45 Chapter 5 Monitoring Conferences Table 5 11 ISDN Participant Properties Connection Info1 Continued H221 Indicates the synchronization status Counters Status I sync loss Checked when there is a general synchronization problem with the MCU r sync loss Checked when there is a general synchronization problem with the participant site l video sync loss Checked when there is a video synchronization problem in the MCU r video sync loss Checked when there is a video synchronization problem in the participant s endpoint The counter indicates the number of times the system tried to synchronize When the synchronization is lost an exclamation point appears on the Conference icon and the Participant icon Down Speed Downspeeding occurs during call setup and is an automatic process performed by the MCU During call setup Downspeeding allows Bonded calls to connect with missing or unsynchronized channels by excluding these channels from the call setup process This results in a lower line rate for the connection However if the channels are restored the original line speed is restored Downspeeding is supported in Continuous Presence and Transcoding video sessions only The Dow
107. parameters as described in Chapter 4 Defining a New On Going Video Conference on page 4 20 You must first add a defined participant from the Participants Tab to attend the conference prior to selecting the Video Sources tab and enabling the Lecture Show option To define a new Lecture Show conference 1 Click the Participants tab The Conference Properties Participants dialog box opens MGC Manager User s Guide Volume 2 Select the participant to act as the conference lecturer You can also select any number of participants to attend the conference For details on how to select participants refer to Chapter 4 Conference Properties Participants Options on page 4 48 3 Click the Video Sources tab The Conference Properties Video Sources dialog box opens 4 Inthe Lecture Mode list select Lecture Show The Lecture Show icon appears at the top right corner of the dialog box Default Conference Properties Product Management x General Settings Participants Video Sources Resource Force Meet Me Per Conf Recording Icon Video Session Lecturer Layout Video Switching I Auto a sir 7 ES indicating aH ee Transcoding Layout bj s Ta af mn 4 tat g sac rs i that Lecture Continuous Presence 1 2 4 at 10 T Show is active Background i 4 F Layout Border 7 4 F Speaker Notation Audio Muted Participants F Same Layo Lectu
108. performed with the IVR module For a detailed description see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Chapter 2 AV Message Services and Greet and Guide Conferences Unattended Conference An unattended conference is usually a reservation less conference that is started by participants from their endpoint In an unattended conference it is the conference chairperson who controls all features and functions of the conference either via the touch tone telephone a DTMF input device such as a remote control or via the Internet Conference participants can perform simple operations such as muting or unmuting their line or modifying their volume from their touch tone telephone or DTMF input device This type of configuration requires the installation of the Audio card in the MCU Although an operator is not needed for unattended conferences one can be on hand to help participants during the on going conference via the MGC Manager or WeBcommander applications IVR enabled conferences and conferences accessed via the Entry Queue require the installation of the Audio card in the MCU MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Conference Media Types Conferences can be of two media categories Audio Only and Video and Audio Audio Only Conferences Audio Only conferences include only Audio participants and enable the use of the IVR module capabilities In an Audio Only conference participants can connect to the conference using differen
109. range of dial in numbers The Aad Dial in Range dialog box opens Add Dial in Range First Phone Number Last Phone Number EEO Cancel In the First Phone Number box enter the first dial in number in the range of numbers to be used for filtering In the Last Phone Number box enter the last dial in number in the range of numbers to be used for filtering To use one number enter the same dial in number in the First and Last Phone Number boxes Click OK The dial in numbers range appears in the Participants Queue Filter dialog box Repeat steps 1 4 to define additional dial in number ranges to be filtered To remove a range of dial in numbers select the range to remove and click the minus icon When no dial in number ranges are defined in the filter dial in number is not used as a criterion for displaying a participant in the Participants Queue window 8 39 Chapter 8 Entry Queues Operator Conferences and Attended Conferencing Table 8 4 Participants Queue Filter Parameters Continued Add to Personal This check box is selected by default Favorites Select this check box to save the filter for future use and add it to the list of filters that you can use When viewing the list of Filters in the Filter list in the MGC Manager Toolbar the Filters are labeled Personal Filter Name Add to Public This check box appears only if you have the Favorites permission to create modify Public filters
110. s Guide VoicePlus Edition Chapter 5 To define a new Video Entry Queue 1 Connect to an MCU and expand its tree 6 Product Management Normal 2 Right click the Meeting Rooms Entry Queues and SIP Factories icon and then click New Entry Queue cy Mew SIP Factory Print All aai Faste irl ne Paste As Ctrl P Paste Entry Queue As Cini e Paste SIP Factory As MGC Manager User s Guide Volume The Entry Queue Properties dialog box opens Entry Queue Properties F3 Alpha 02 x Entry Queue Settings Name Entry Queue Service z Numeric ID Cascade YT 1000 Target Conference Settings T AdHoc Audio Alg Auto Profile bi Video Format Auto ki Target Conferences mo Frame Rate Auto ki C IF Only Video Protocol Auto Encryption F Annex Hl Annex P Annex F Video Switching Line Rate 2 Restricted i Transcoding Continuous Presence Diakin Number 1 Diakin Number 2 Cancel 3 Define the following parameters Table 8 1 Entry Queue Definitions Parameters eee Entry Queue Settings Enter the name of the Entry Queue using up to 20 characters If the name is already used by another Entry Queue Meeting Room or conference an error message is displayed when completing the Entry Queue definition Chapter 8 Entry Queues Operator Conferences and Attended Conferencing 8 6 Table 8 1 Entry Queue Definitions
111. settings of all participants except yourself press pound five Change password To change the chairperson or conference password press star seven seven Place conference on hold To place the conference on hold press star one Reinstate on hold conference To reinstate a conference on hold press pound one Mute dial in participant To mute dial in participants press star eight six Cancel Mute dial in participant To cancel the muting of dial in participants press pound eight six Start voting session To start a voting session press star eight one Stop voting session To end a voting session and get the results press pound eight one Chairperson Chairperson Everyone Everyone Chairperson Chairperson Chairperson Chairperson Chairperson Chairperson Chairperson Chairperson Chairperson 6 89 Chapter 6 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences 6 90 DTMF Function New voting session To start a new voting session press star eight two Cancel voting session To cancel the voting session press pound eight two Ask a question To ask a question press star twenty two Cancel my question To cancel a question press pound twenty two Next in line question To let the next questioner ask a question press star two three End current question To terminate the current question press pound two three Cancel all questions To cance
112. signal received from various ports Video The unit on the video card that manages the video signal received from one endpoint T 120 Bridge The resource on the data card that manages the data conference T 120 Codec comprises the T 123 protocol The resource that transfers the data from the endpoint to the MCS in a T 120 conference IP A network interface module that handles IP participants Board ID Identifies the MCU slot in which the card that handles the participant is installed Unit ID Identifies the unit on the card that handles the participant Allocated Indicates whether the MCU resources listed in the Resource Type column are used to run the conference or not Note The video card is used only in Continuous Presence conferences Net Resource Displays information about the network interface module Details that handles the monitored participant 5 52 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Table 5 14 ISDN Participant Properties Resource Details Continued Pane Table Coum Option Description Parameter Net Resource The number of the participant s channel Details cont Board ID The slot number in which the Network card used to handle the participant is installed Unit ID The span that handles the participant in the conference Port ID The port number on the Network card that was allocated to the participant Allocated Indicates whether the Network card installed in the MCU is used
113. standards voice video and data that comprise a telephone network There are two types of ISDN lines BRI and PRI B 5 Appendix B Glossary rem Explanation Term ITU T Standard International Telecommunications Union Telecommunication Standardization Sector formerly CCITT An international group that produces official standards for telecommunications LAN Local Area Network A group of computers and other devices linked via a network s operating system Line Rate The amount of bandwidth used by a communication device measured in Kbps kilobits per second Leased Line A dedicated PRI line supplied by the telephone company See also PRI line Low Speed Data A data channel that allows the participant to transfer commands from one endpoint to the camera of another endpoint and control its camera from far See also FECC LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol Multipoint Control Unit Device which allows more than two sites to be connected in a video conference Multi Protocol Interface that supports connection to endpoints using communication protocols such as V 35 RS 449 and RS 530 over a serial connection Network Service A collection of spans from a fixed service provider Network services can be any of the following types e Private Network e Public Utility including e Long distance service Local service PTT PBX local switchboard leased line Null modem cable A serial cable design
114. the Browser pane the Monitor pane or the Status pane of the main window right click the participant s icon and then click Properties The Participant s Properties Identification dialog box opens Enter general information about the participant into the User Defined fields and then click OK Debbie Properties Video Sources H245 Disconnection Cause Resource Details Advanced Connection Infot Connection Info2 Identification Participant IP Alias Name Interface Type Alias Type Extension Identifier String User Defined 1 User Defined 3 User Defined 2 _ User Defined 4 Broadcasting Yolume 5 T Audio Only OK Cancel The information is updated 6 23 Chapter 6 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences Adjusting the Broadcasting and Listening Volume 6 24 The broadcasting and listening volume of the participant s audio transmission can be changed during an On Going Conference This operation is applicable to all interface types To adjust the broadcasting and listening volume for the participant 1 Inthe Browser Monitor or Status panes right click the participant s icon and then click Properties Alternatively double click the participant icon The Participant Properties dialog box opens 2 If required click the Identification tab The Participant Properties Identification dialog box opens Debbie
115. the IVR Service DTMF Codes assigned to the conference e The DTMF codes and the permission to use them can be modified for individual IVR Services Table 6 5 lists the operations that can be performed by all participants or the chairperson during an On Going Conference Table 6 5 Operations performed during a conference using DTMF codes DTMF Function Request private assistance Everyone To request private assistance press star zero Request assistance for conference Chairperson To request operator s assistance for the conference press zero zero Mute my line Everyone To mute your line press star six Unmute my line Everyone To unmute your line press pound six Lock conference Chairperson To lock the conference to dial in participants press Star seven zero Unlock conference Chairperson To unlock the conference press pound seven zero MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Table 6 5 Operations performed during a conference using DTMF codes DTMF Function Secure conference To switch the conference to secure mode press star seven one Unsecure conference To cancel the secure mode press pound seven one Increase my broadcasting volume To increase your volume press star nine Decrease my broadcasting volume To decrease your volume press pound nine Mute All except me To mute all participants except yourself press star five Cancel Mute All except me To cancel mute
116. the Q 931 standard Appendix B Glossary Lists and describes terms frequently used in the MGC Manager User s Guides and terms related to video conferencing MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Il Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings Describes advanced video conferencing features Includes step by step instructions for setting up large Video Switching conferences auto detection of participant line rate LSD Far End Camera Control FECC simple and Star Cascading conferences Dual Stream modes encryption automatic extension of conference duration and more Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services Describes how to define IVR Message Services and Entry Queue Services how to download voice messages to the Audio card and how to check the status of messages in the MCU memory 1 3 Chapter 1 Before You Begin Chapter 3 Ad Hoc Conferencing and External Database Authentication Describes Ad Hoc conferencing and external database authentication including different scenarios and authentication procedures Includes instructions on how to define Profiles and set up Entry Queues for Ad Hoc conferencing Chapter 4 AV Message Services and Greet and Guide Conferences Describes the Greet and Guide mode and options Includes step by step instructions for setting up AV Message Services and Greet and Guide conferences and their monitoring and management Chapter 5 H 243 Conferences Includes step by step instructions for setti
117. the conference Disconnect Click this button to disconnect the participant from Reconnect the conference The button changes to Reconnect Click Reconnect to connect a disconnected participant to the conference 5 44 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Table 5 11 ISDN Participant Properties Connection Info1 Continued Member in Checked boxes indicate which multimedia channels Audio Video and Data 1 120 are connected Sometimes if the participant is partially connected only the audio channel is connected The LSD check box indicates that the LSD channel is open For more details see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Chapter 1 Note For Audio Only participants only the Audio check box is checked Channels Status Displays the status of each of the participant s channels in a table You can use the cursor to change the width of the columns or use the scroll bars to browse The status table columns are e Channel Indicates the number of channels used by the participant and whether the channel is connected which is indicated by a check mark or disconnected Participant Phone In a dial in connection indicates the participant s CLI Calling Line Identification as identified by the MCU In a dial out connection indicates the participant s phone number dialed by the MCU for each channel MCU Phone In a dial in connection indicates the MCU number dialed by the participant In a dial
118. to from a COP conference or from an Entry Queue to a COP conference They must connect directly to the COP conference To interactively move a participant from one conference to another 1 Expand the On Going Conferences list in the Browser pane to display the source conference icon and the destination conference icon 2 Drag the icon of participant from the source conference and drop it on the icon of the destination conference to move while pressing down the lt Shift gt or lt Ctrl gt key Then drag and drop them To move several participants at the same time click the icons of the participants fs on the destination conference icon ae On Going Conferences Bs The Drag Confirmation dialog box opens 3 Click Yes to confirm the action The participant is moved to the destination conference MGC Manager User s Guide Volume To move a participant to another conference using the right click menu l In the Browser Monitor or Status pane expand the participants list in the source conference Right click the icon of the participant you want to move click Move Participant and then click the name of the destination conference from the list of active conferences Disconnect Participant Ctrl T Move Participant Overseas Copy Participant ctrl E Cut Ctrl Delete Del Exclusive Speaker O84 Management b Unmute Audio Ctrl U Mute Video Block Audio Turn OFF AGC Properties
119. to monitor all conferences according to the last Monitoring Filter that was set for any conference in the MGC Manager When this feature is enabled the system automatically displays all the conferences and all the participants that require the operator s attention in the Monitor pane To toggle between automatic and manual monitoring e On the Options menu click Monitor All to activate automatic monitoring Options Window Help Communication Conf Alert Fip Configurations Beep on faults Drag contirmation set Reservation Creator v Enable Crash Dump monitor dialog Audio Look amp Feel v Monitor All Configure Indications Configure Shortcuts Stop Current Indication Repeating Configure Proxy Settings Open Diagnostic tool Mark Faulty Participants in Red A check mark next to Monitor All indicates that the option is activated Each click of the Monitor All option enables or disables this option 5 27 Chapter 5 Monitoring Conferences Secure Conference Mode 5 28 Enabling the Secure mode locks the conference and prevents participants and operators from joining the conference A secure conference cannot be monitored or controlled in any way While a conference is in the Secure mode the operator cannot view the participants list or any other conference properties but can manually terminate it The conference chairperson can enable or disable the Secure mode from the DTMF input device touch tone telep
120. video capabilities Match conference video settings with remote device video capabilities Match conference video settings with remote device video capabilities Match conference video settings with remote device video capabilities Match conference video settings with remote device video capabilities Match conference video settings with remote device video capabilities Match conference video settings with remote device video capabilities Appendix A Disconnection Causes Table A 2 Secondary Disconnection Causes Continued Category Possible Solution Remote Device does not support the current video parameters cont The participant video settings are not compatible with the Conference On Port video settings The participant video settings are not compatible with the Conference protocol New conference H 264 settings are not compatible with remote device settings Remote device failed to change its video parameters New conference video settings are not compatible with remote device video settings The endpoint cannot re open the video channel after the conference video mode was changed The outgoing video channel failed to reopen in a COP conference Match conference video settings with remote device video capabilities Force the conference video settings to match remote device video capabilities Force the conference video settings to match remote device video capabilities For
121. video layout changes to full screen The conference switches to the Presentation Mode 10 13 Chapter 10 Lecture and Presentation Options Lecture Show The Lecture Show feature offers users the possibility of hearing or viewing a broadcast without participating in the conference as they can only hear and see the lecturer The participant hears the conference broadcast and is unable to interact or communicate visually or verbally as his her audio and video channels are automatically muted The lecturer or moderator is not able to receive any video or audio from any of the participants during the broadcast of the lecture show Lecture Show Guidelines e Requires the selection of one participant as conference lecturer e Lecturer selection is mandatory at the reservation stage The lecturer cannot be changed or deleted during the On Going Conference e All participants excluding the lecturer have their audio and video automatically muted by the MCU Participants can only hear and see the lecturer e Full screen 1x1 format is the only layout that may be selected for the Lecture Show e Participants connecting to the conference prior to the lecturer moderator logon hear and see only themselves Lecture Show Definition 10 14 When defining a new On Going Conference Reservation or Reservation template set the conference as a Standard conference and define the Conference Properties General Schedule Settings and Participants
122. who is viewed in full screen Lecture Mode Lecture Mode enables automatic switching between the conference participants in the speaker window allowing the conference speaker to see all the other conference participants including Continuous Presence layout while he she is speaking The lecturer is the only one seen by all the other participants throughout the conference in full screen While the lecturer is speaking the system automatically switches between participants according to a predefined interval showing them sequentially in the lecturer s video window Lecture Mode is set at the conference level only Lecture Mode and Lecture Show are disabled in a Software Continuous Presence conference The following features are available in Lecture Mode Selection of the conference lecturer 10 1 Chapter 10 Lecture and Presentation Options Availability in Video Switching Transcoding and Continuous Presence Classic conferences in Continuous Presence Classic conferences running on a standard Video card this option is unavailable for asymmetrical video layouts in which at least one window is larger than the others such as 3 1 5 1 8 1 etc The automatic switching is suspended when one of the participants begins talking and it is resumed automatically when the lecturer resumes talking Can be activated deactivated during an On Going Conference Lecture Mode Definition 10 2 A conference can be set to Lecture
123. 1 CAS Participant Identification Participant This parameter is enabled for the Dial out connection Numbers type or when the Dial in Meet Me Per Conference MCU option is selected Type the participant s number including country and area codes when required to be dialed by the operator when connecting the participant to the conference Add a semicolon between numbers when several numbers are to be assigned to a participant one for each channel For example 9251222 9251223 9251xxx in aggregation mode 4 90 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Table 4 6 ISDN ATM MPI T1 CAS Participant Identification Continued Participant If the Meet Me Per MCU option is enabled the CLI Numbers number is used to identify the participant and route cont them to the appropriate conference Enter the participant s CLI number Note In order to support Bonding with specific telecommunication switches the pound key symbol needs to be added to the Dial out number sequence MCU Numbers Available only for the Dial in connection Enter the MCU number as allocated to the MCU by the carrier The dial in numbers are defined in the ISDN Network Services Span dialog box Add a semicolon between numbers when several numbers are to be assigned to the MCU If left blank when the conference starts the MCU automatically assigns a dial in number from the list of numbers defined in the ISDN Network Service Note During
124. 22 13 Dial out ees G2 _ Dih H 4 Video Overseas re 172 22 13 Dial in ay ne Duke Knoop bs Frank be Michelle z K Nadine gt Default Audio ici Default_Video ie Sw CP ie ideo Switch Se weboffice_al pig sp weboffice_v1 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Right click the icon of the participant to copy and then click Copy or use the appropriate shortcut key the default key is lt Ctrl gt lt C gt Delete Dial In Ctrl I Link participant Properties The participant details are copied to the clipboard Alternatively to copy the participant under a new name a Click Copy As The Participant Properties dialog box opens b Change the participant s name and then click OK The participant s details will be copied to the clipboard under the new name In the On Going Conferences list right click the conference icon to which you wish to copy the participant and then click Paste The participant s details will be copied to the new conference under the same name Alternatively to copy the participant s details to the new conference under a new name a Click Paste Participant As The Participant Properties dialog box opens b Type the name that you wish to save the participant as or modify any of the participant s properties such as the User Defined fields c Click OK The participant s details will be copied to the On Going Conference under the new
125. 22 188 106 80 x F3 Alpha 07 F3 Alpha07 172 22 188 107 80 L F3 Alpha 08 L F3 Alpha08 172 22 188 108 80 i F3 Alpha 09 L F3 Apha09 172 22 188 109 80 F3 Alpha 10 F3 Aapha10 172 22 188 110 5001 F3 Alpha 11 F3 Alpha11 172 22 188 111 80 im FS Alpha 12 lr3 alphat2 172 22 188 112 80 F3 Alpha 13 L F3 Apha13 172 22 188 113 80 F3 Alpha 14 L F3 Apha14 172 22 188 114 80 F3 Alpha 20 L F3 Apha20 172 22 188 120 80 F3 Alpha 21 L F3 Alpha21 172 22 188 121 80 F3 Alpha 22 F3 Alpha 23 Name Status Connection Network Connection Type _ Audio video Participant Numbe F3 Arrow 01 F3 Arrow 02 F3 Arrow 03 F3 Arrow 04 F3 Arrow 05 F3 Arrow 06 4 gt Ready A list of MCUs appears below the MCUs Network icon 3 21 Chapter 3 MGC Manager Basics 2 Double click the MCU icon Alternatively right click the MCU icon and then click Connect Connect IF Configuration Hew Reservation Resource Report System Gonhiguration DR MEU Tine Faults MEU Utils Retrieve Diagnostic Files Fast Configuration Wizard Play Batch IP Terminal SMP Greate S51 Gertificate Request Send S50 Certificate Stop Current Indication Repeating Remove MEU Reset Mia Properties The Logon dialog box opens Loon xl Login Name Password Cancel Each time the MGC Manager connects to an MCU the operator is re
126. 3 a Debby 172 22 132 21 H323 C Mark ISDN 397 ISDN ART Rick Ison 79397 ISDN Egoe 172 22 133 67 H323 E Sharon IP 172 22 133 67 H323 iljstan_1sDN_pial in 397 ISDN Fa Wands 172 22 132 146 H323 Dial out Dial in Dial in Dial out Dial out Dial out Dial in Dial in Figure 3 5 Participant Templates File Window Participants Queue Window The Participants Queue window contains a list of the participants who are waiting for operator assistance This window automatically opens the first time you start the MGC Manager and remains open until you close it You can open this window manually by clicking the Participants Queue button on the Main toolbar Participants Queue Product Management 172 22 138 116 Queue Access Time Destination Conf Operator Called Nu M HDebbie Onhold Wrong Conf Password Connected Oct 21 2003 02 37 09 PM party Attended Wrong Conf Password Oct 21 2003 04 21 10 PM Product Management ACCORD by you Attended Wrong Conf Password Oct 21 2003 04 21 21 PM International Sales ACCORD by you M nadine cell Onhold Wrong Conf Password Secondary Oct 21 2003 02 37 21 PM party Figure 3 6 Participants Queue Window This window is used mainly in attended conferencing MGC Manager User s Guide Volume MGC Main Window View Modes You can select the View mode of the MGC Manager Main window and whether or not to show or hide various components of the Main window Selectin
127. 3 Seb Dia out il TM OK 128 128 A 8 DIAL OUTO04 mil Connected 1004 Beh Dial out i Ta OK 128 128 A a DIAL OUTOOS a gt Connected 1005 Beh Dial out Sa OK 128 128 A vtaL ourons D gt connected 1006 Beh Dia out Qi Se O K 128 128 A 8 DIAL OUTOO7 D Connected 1007 Bek Dial out Qi Ga OK 128 128 i 3 DIAL OUTO8 ald Connected 1008 Beh Dial out il se OK 128 128 A 3 DIAL OUTOD9 aii Connected 1009 Be Dial out il Te OK 128 128 A Ready l oa In addition you can enable the SilencelT option to automatically mute the audio participants who are identified as having a noisy line SilenceIT uses an algorithm that detects continued background music or other noise that is not in the range of human speech SilenceIT can be applied to Audio participants in Audio Only and Video conferences This feature is enabled for conferences with an IVR Service during the conference setup reservation stage using the Conference Properties Settings tab option For a detailed description of the SilenceIT feature see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Chapter 2 Using SilencelT 5 33 Chapter 5 Monitoring Conferences Viewing the Participants Queue You can view the Participants Queue list in the Browser pane the Status pane or in the Participants Queue window MGC Manager VERSION 7 5 0 13 File Edit View Template DataBase Directory Options Window Help PARTICIPANTS QUEUE FILTER
128. 30 minutes enter 0 30 For duration of 90 minutes enter 01 30 Setting the conference duration to 99 59 will cause the conference to be extended indefinitely when the Auto Extension mechanism is enabled For more details about the Auto Extension mechanism see MGC Manager User s Guide Volume ll Chapter 1 Billing Enter the conference billing code if one is defined The billing code can be assigned to the conference by your reservation system or it can be allocated by the conference chairperson or contact person MCU Displays the name of the MCU to which you are currently connected read only Conf Entry Enter a numeric password that participants will use to Password access the conference If left blank the MCU automatically assigns a password to the conference once the conference definition is completed provided the MCU is configured to automatically assign passwords For more details about the MCU configuration see the MGC Administrator s Guide Chapter 5 Edit system cfq Note This field is applicable only to IVR enabled conferences which are configured to prompt for the entry password or to conferences accessed from an Entry Queue that use passwords as the routing method 4 22 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Table 4 4 Conference Properties General Continued Web Chairperson Enter a numeric password that participants will use to Password identify themselves as the conference chairperson This
129. 4 Click the Settings tab The Conference Properties Settings dialog box opens Default Conference Properties Product Management Video Rate In vWut Conference Gn Port E F Mute Meet Me parties Gn Hold Ej 16 Siren 7 G728 m Nore xl ka ka ks m In the Msg Service Type field select IVR to enable IVR services 6 Select an IVR service from the Msg Service Name drop down list in which the Click amp View option is enabled 11 10 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Using the Click amp View Application When a participant connects to a Click amp View enabled conference a Click amp View splash screen is displayed From this point on until the end of the conference the participant may modify his personal video layout or return to the conference video layout The chairperson may also modify the conference layout The Click amp View application is activated from the endpoint s DTMF input device such as a remote control or a virtual remote control To activate the Click amp View Application e Enter the appropriate DTMF code via the DTMF input device The default DTMF code for activating the Click amp View is double asterisk This code can be modified in the IVR service On Polycom ViaVideo you can use the virtual remote control to enter the appropriate DTMF code Click the asterisk key twice to heen activate the Click amp View Call Controls application The Click a
130. 4 Viewing Site Names in Video cecccecccccccccceccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeas 5 36 Conference Level Monitoring essesesssssessssssssssssssossssseereeterrrerereeese 5 37 Participant Level Monitoring xcs cnsccnsivesarsascvieersezorescinicsincveareticasaseneess 5 41 Displaying Participant Properties ccccccceseececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 41 Monitoring ISDN ATM MPI T1 CAS Participants 5 42 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Monitoring IP H 323 and SIP Participants ee 5 57 Monitoring Gateway Sessions cccccceccecceceeceteeeseeesssesssesssseeseseeeees 5 77 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences 6 1 RUNS Wy AA EE E E E E T 6 2 Participant Level Operations crccsccsonsincadsavecndscecedasunsssidedasiisscesisacuesorssones 6 5 Connecting and Reconnecting Dial Out Participants 6 5 Changing the Participant Connection Type Dial In Dial Out 6 6 Changing the Participant s Line Rate Before Connection 6 7 Disconnecting and Deleting Participants cceccccceeeeeeeeees 6 10 Changing the Properties of a Disconnected Participant 6 12 Naming Undefined Dial in Participants 2 0 eccceeeeeeeeees 6 13 Moving Participants Between Conferences ccccceeeeeeeeees 6 15 Designating an Exclusive Speaker cccccccecccceeeceeeeeeeeeeees 6 18 Changing a Participant s Status to Conference Chairperson 6 19 Des
131. 5 Min Video Fi E fa m v V Exit Tone Roll Call announcement Arasoma ut Frame Rate Auto X Talk Hold Time M5 H Sec Quality auto x Audio Mix Depth cE 4 Sites M Amer 7 AnnexP 7 Annex F OK cance _ Apply Help 6 55 Chapter 6 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences The Locked Conference icon appears in the Status column in the Monitor and Status panes when the conference is locked and is removed when the conference is unlocked To lock or unlock a conference using the Conference toolbar 1 Expand the On Going Conferences list and then click the icon of the conference to lock or unlock 2 On the toolbar click the Lock Conference button a to lock the conference or the Unlock Conference button a to unlock the conference The Unlocked Conference icon appears in the Status column in the Monitor and Status panes when the conference is locked and is removed when the conference is unlocked 6 56 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Changing the Conference and Chairperson Password During an On Going Conference the conference and or chairperson password can be modified by the chairperson or participant depending on the permission configuration using DTMF codes or by the operator via the MGC Manager For DTMF operations see Using DTMF Codes During a Conference on page 6 88 To modify the conference or chairperson password l Lj 3
132. 56 Define the Video Layout and other video settings MGC Manager User s Guide Volume 12 Click the Meet Me Per Conf tab The Conference Properties Meet Me Per Conf dialog box opens Default Conference Properties Product Management E x General Settings Patticipants Video Sources Resource Force Meet Me Per Conf Recording Meeting Room Limited Sequences Number of Occurrences fi Meet M e Service ISDN Service ISDN Network Servi Dial in Number 1 Dial in Number 2 H 323 Network Servi H 323 Service Prefix Cancel Help 13 Define the dial in numbers or the H 323 Network Service to be used by participants to connect to the conference as described in Defining Conference Dial In Numbers for ISDN PSTN T1 CAS Connections on page 7 3 14 Click OK Defining Conference Dial In Numbers for ISDN PSTN T1 CAS Connections The conference phone numbers may be assigned by the operator or automatically by the system When allocated by the system a single number which is derived from the dial in numbers defined in the ISDN T1 CAS Network Service is assigned to the conference The assigned dial in number can only be viewed in the Status or Monitor panes of the Main Window once Chapter 7 Meet Me per Conferences and Meeting Rooms 7 6 the conference or reservation is saved on the MCU This number is then given to all ISDN conference participants
133. 72 22 132 112 Dial out 00 16 47 W a a or 4 The Q amp A Position column shows the order of the participants who have requested to ask a question in the Q amp A queue The Q amp A Waiting Time column displays the length of time the participant has been waiting in the Q amp A queue In the above figure the Q amp A columns were moved to the left By default these columns are located on the right of the Monitor and Status panes and you must use the scrolling arrows to display them Changing a Participant s Position in the Q amp A Queue You can change the position of any participant in the Q amp A queue when you want certain participants such as participants designated as VIP to ask questions first and others to be moved to the end of the queue To change the participant s position in the Q amp A queue e Select the participant to move by clicking the Participant icon and then on the Q amp A toolbar click Move Participant to First Position in Q amp A Tay button or Move Participant to Last Position in Q amp A La button MGC Manager User s Guide Volume e Alternatively change the position of a participant in the Q amp A queue by right clicking the Participant icon clicking Q amp A Management and then clicking the position to which the participant should move pee Debbie Disconnect Participant Ctrl T Move Participant j Copy Participant Cirle Cut Ctri x Delete Del Exclusive Speaker O84
134. 8 60 Performing Operations using Shortcut Keys cc00eeeeee 8 61 Moving a Participant Interactively 00 0 0 cccseeeeeseesseeeseeeeeeeees 8 62 Moving a Participant to the Operator Conference by Double Clicking the Participant s Icon eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 62 Moving Multiple Participants to the Home Conference 8 63 vii Table of Contents Conference Reservations 000 eee eee eens 9 1 Defining a New Reservation cccsessssessesseesssesesseseeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 9 3 Completing the Reservation Definition cceeeseeceeeeeees 9 7 Listing the Current Reservations ccseeeesesessssseseeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeees 9 8 Re seryationis ICONS cecccancceacecnceoseziacsscaqsesenesacssencecectncactepeaetemssccnsaas 9 8 Deleting a Reservation siisncesnwceunitssccsuewnnsnaiacduasseusenssnsnseacencauianesaecenanes 9 10 Re sched ling Reservation xisiiceciccsnsiterevvsaditsuscstweeaeevenie N 9 11 Scheduling a Conference Reservation from a Reservation Template BAe ASC T E E AAA T E E E A A tones 9 13 Recurrent Reserv QUI ONS gaini 9 17 Defining the Reservation Recurrence Properties 006 9 17 Deleting Recurring Reservations from the Reservations List 9 22 Lecture and Presentation Options 00005 10 1 MECC MIS INOS ea E 10 1 Lecture Mod Definition icessercsoiaretassedeaeeiesbvactenchcneiseresincewescniaes 10 2 Lecture Mode Monitorin
135. Advanced parameters because the MGC Manager uses the optimal parameters Highest Common based on the Video Session type conference line rate and the endpoint s capabilities However if you do want to force the use of a specific video parameter such as the H 264 video protocol or to use various conferencing options such as FECC or COP click the Advanced button Advanced settings are described in detail in the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume IT Chapter I Advanced Conference Settings All the fields in the Settings dialog box display the default values defined in the MGC Database Manager Conference Defaults according to the conference type selected in the Properties General dialog box For more details on the Conference Defaults definition see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Chapter 6 Defining Conference Defaults To define the conference media and additional settings 5 Define the following parameters Table 4 5 Conference Properties Settings Parameters Restricted Select this option if all participants use restricted lines whose line rate for each channel is 56 Kbps instead of 64 Kbps If only some of the participants use restricted lines do not select this option Instead select the restricted option when setting the parameters of the relevant participants and set the conference video session type to Transcoding Note This option is relevant only to ISDN lines therefore it is disabled for
136. Auto Termination parameters for this type of conference to make sure that the conference ends when participants are no longer connected to the conference When an IVR Service is assigned select the Start Conf Requires Chairperson and Terminate After Chairperson Exits options optional For a detailed description of the Settings parameters see Chapter 4 To define the conference media and additional settings on page 4 29 Click the Participants tab to define the participant connection to the conference MGC Manager User s Guide Volume The Conference Properties Participants dialog box opens x General Settings Participants Video Sources Resource Force Meet Me Per Cont Recording Pre Defined Participants Conference Participants Name Name Duke Jack_IP Nadine ISDN Rick_ISDN gt gt Roger_IP Sandy lt lt Stan_ISDN_Dial in E Wanda Del IV Allow Undefined Parties Min Participants 3 a Max Participants 255 H Pre Defined Participants File JAccordDB Group My Group P Dial Out Manually Browse From directory OK Cancel Help The Allow Undefined Parties check box is automatically selected to allow undefined participants to connect to the conference without the prior setting of their parameters The remaining parameters are the same as those for the Meet Me Per Conference definition For more details see Chapter 4 To add participants to the confer
137. C 50 Front accessible cards Hot swappable cards MGC 100 MGC 50 amp MGC 100 MGC 50 Self configuring cards LED status lights on the front panel of all cards MGC 100 MGC 50 amp MGC 100 MGC 50 or status indications on the LCD window MGC 25 Notifications to the MGC Manager to ensure fast problem isolation and resolution Software updates via the Internet or intranet MGC Manager Basics The MGC Manager is a Windows based operator controlled interface installed on a user provided PC Starting the MGC Manager Application At the end of the MGC Manager software installation the MGC Manager application folder is added to the Programs menu under the Start menu To start the MGC Manager Application In the Start gt Programs menu click the MGC Manager ver 9 0 folder and then click the MGC Manager ver 9 0 icon Accessories Microsoft Office j iC Adobe Photoshop 7 0 Snaglt 6 MSN Messenger 7 0 Beyond Compare 2 a rE EA E GudvidConvert x CDR hlp Ta Database Manager AE IP_Term DE E Se MGC Manager ver 9 0 MGC Manager ver 9 0 hlp T UNInstall MGC Manager ver 9 0 The MGC Manager main window opens 3 1 Chapter 3 MGC Manager Basics The MGC Manager Main Window When you open the MGC Manager application the main window is displayed
138. Direct Conference Dialing and Access Via IVR Interactive Voice Response IVR is an application that allows callers to communicate with the conferencing system over the DTMF input device such as a telephone for audio participants or the endpoint s remote control for video participants VR automates the connection process and the various requests during the On Going Conference To enable the participants and chairperson to perform operations during the conference an IVR Service must be assigned to the conference The IVR Service is used for both attended and unattended conferences In IVR enabled conferences participants dial the conference dial in numbers and enter the conference IVR queue as part of the connection process Once in the IVR queue they have to enter the conference password and other personal information using touch tone codes as input to menu driven scripts and voice prompts that are part of the IVR Service Once the correct information is entered the participants connect to the conference This ensures that only authorized callers join the conference In addition participants can request the operator s help while waiting in the conference IVR queue or during the On Going Conference and the conference chairpersons can perform various operations from their endpoint during the On Going Conference 4 77 Chapter 4 Defining Conferences and Participants 4 78 MCU Conference Numeric ID 1222 Password 34567
139. Entry Queue to the conference is done either according to the conference numeric ID or the conference password depending on the system configuration According to the selected routing method you must assign this conference a numeric ID and or conference password 8 17 Chapter 8 Entry Queues Operator Conferences and Attended Conferencing If the routing method is password define a conference and chairperson password or leave it blank and the MGC Manager will allocate a password automatically Even if the routing method is according to conference password a numeric ID is assigned to the conference If you leave the Numeric ID field blank the MGC Manager will automatically allocate a Numeric ID The Numeric ID length is defined in the system cfg If no IVR is assigned to the conference or the assigned VR Service is not configured to prompt for conference Entry Password you do not need to define one The Web or Chairperson Password can be assigned to the conference if the conference is monitored from the WebCommander application or if an IVR Service is assigned to the conference and you want to enable the chairperson functionality Using an Existing Entry Queue to Define a Target Conference You can define a new On Going Conference Reservation or Meeting Room Conference using an existing Entry Queue ensuring that the target conference will have the same properties as the Entry Queue This results in a smooth connection
140. F4 gt When you place the presently attended participant on hold and he she is the last participant in the Participants Queue the following message appears MGE Manager E Z This participant has been placed on hold and is the last participant in the queue Do you want bo assist this participant Yes Mo Click Yes to attend a participant that was placed on hold Click No to leave the participant on hold in the Participants Queue 8 52 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Attended Participants Management Operators can manage attended participants by performing the following operations Move a participant to an Operator conference Attend a participant Move a participant to the Home destination conference Place a participant on Hold Attended participant operations can be performed in many ways The participants can be selected from different places and the operations can be performed using different tools The participants can be selected from the following places Browser Status and Monitor pane On Going Conference list MGC Manager VERSION 7 5 0 14 loj x File Edit View Template DataBase Directory Options Window Help EOE Field 6 L F6 Field 7 t F6 Field 8 J Disconnected 172 22 172 74 H323 Bed Dial out 0 Field 9 W P Connected 172 22 172 13 H323 Bed Dial out o L MGC 25 W e P Connected 79320 ISDN Bed Dial out q l 0 E
141. Faulty indicator exclamation point appears next to a channel and you want to investigate the source of the problem you can display additional information for that channel 2 Inthe Channel Status table click the Channel to investigate and then click the Channel Info button The Channel Info area opens Debbie Properties Identification Advanced Connection Infot Connection Info2 Video Sources H245 Disconnection Cause Resource Details p Member In m Video in Channel Info MCU Address fi 72 22 190 28 49376 Party Address fi 72 22 1869 72 49160 Media Info Algorithm h263 Participant State Connected IV Audio 7 T120 FECC i V Video Content Domea Channels Status Channel Faulty BitRate Pac Fraction L Jitte Vi H225 i H245 Algo E Zi Audoin 240 5 078 0 0 112 Resolution C Audio out 0 00 0 0 3 6 oar F Channel Index 822 ideo oul Content in Content out T120 in RTP Statistics Accumula Interval RTP packets Actual loss 1 000 0 D 1 lt lt Channel Info Out OF Order 0 ooo o 0 0 Syne Counters Status Fragmented 0 6000 0 D 0 Jitter Mecha Channel Source _ Pos Video switch Jitter buffer size 110 170 Video Debbie 5 2 Late packets 0 0 00 0 O 0 Overflows 0 0 0 Sample Packe 20 0 170 Error Resilie gt
142. GC Manager Main Window MO RMem20 Frag 0 Portgo scre ML Port Indicator You can display the main window and any other window such as template lists and databases in various ways The MGC Manager maintains the last display each time it is opened 3 2 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume The MGC Manager main window is divided into the following sections Table 3 1 MGC Manager Main Window Details EEE Displays titles of available menus Status pane Status bar The MGC Manager has several toolbars for quick access to commonly used tasks The toolbars are displayed in the default positions but can be moved drag and drop anywhere in the window The MGC Manager maintains their last positions when the application is closed and restarted Displays the MCUs defined in the MGC Manager Each MCU tree can be expanded to display options for setting up and managing conferences and configuring the MCU Displays status information for the MCU s cards On Going Conferences Reservations Meeting Rooms and conference participants Displays details of several conferences and participants simultaneously and provides management options for the monitored items Displays the memory utilization indicators and the communication port between the MCU and the MGC Manager The P Mem column displays the usage of RAM measured by Partition The R Memcolumn displays the usage of RAM measured by Region The Frag col
143. Guide Volume Operator Conferences An Operator conference is a side conference that enables the operator to assist participants without disturbing the On Going Conferences and without being heard by other conference participants The operator can move a participant from the Entry Queue conference IVR Queue Participants Queue Welcome Queue Greet and Guide or On Going Conference to a private one on one conversation in the Operator conference An Operator conference can have up to two participants only the operator and a participant An Operator conference is required to manage attended conferences Chapter 8 Entry Queues Operator Conferences and Attended Conferencing Defining a New Entry Queue If the destination conference is set to Video Switching its audio video and line rate settings must be identical to the Entry Queue settings otherwise participants cannot move to the target conference 5 e Entry Queues can only be defined in MCUs containing an Audio card e If you have not already done so define the Entry Queue Message Service in the MCU IVR Services before defining the Entry Queue For more details see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services e Entry Queues can be encrypted For more details see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Chapter 1 Media Encryption e The definition of the Audio Only Entry Queue is described in the MGC Manager User
144. Guide Volume II Chapter 5 If the FECC LSD option was enabled for a video conference displays the name of the participant who is the current holder of the FECC LSD token and can control the far end camera For more details on this option see Far End Camera Control FECC and Low Speed Data LSD in the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume ll Chapter 1 If the FECC LSD option was enabled for a video conference and the LSD channel rate was defined displays the line rate used to transfer the FECC commands For more details on this option see Far End Camera Control FECC and Low Speed Data LSD in the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Chapter 1 Click this button to withdraw the FECC LSD Token from the current participant For more details on this option see Far End Camera Control FECC and Low Speed Data LSD in the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Chapter 1 Displays the name of the participant holding the chair token For more details see the H 243 Chair Control in the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Il Chapter 5 Click this button to withdraw the chair token from the current holder and return it to the MCU for assignment to other endpoints 5 39 Chapter 5 Monitoring Conferences Table 5 9 On Going Conference Properties On Going State Continued Content Token If the conference was defined as a video session with Holder Dual Stream H 239 People Content or People and Content
145. H 264 H 264L video protocols only the standard H 264 is supported or Dual Stream Mode People amp Content VO and Visual Concert PC amp FX Transcoding A conference in which all participants see the same video picture full screen but participants can use the endpoint s highest video and audio capabilities to achieve the best video quality display Because each video participant is connected using the endpoint s highest possible video quality this conference type requires appropriate video card resources for processing different inputs from the endpoints Transcoding is performed between different line rates audio algorithms video formats video frame rates aggregation modes Bonding H 221 and data rates Continuous Presence CP A conference in which several participants can be viewed simultaneously and each connected endpoint uses its highest video audio and data capabilities Therefore this conference type requires appropriate video card resources for processing different inputs from the endpoints You can select the arrangement of the video windows Video Layout when several participants are viewed simultaneously The video layout can be selected from the following categories Classic Quad Views and Software MGC Manager User s Guide Volume In Classic Continuous Presence conferences there are 21 layout options to display participants depending on the number of connected participants As each participant uses a
146. IVR Queue or a Greet and Guide Queue are moved to the Participants Queue where they wait for the operator to assist them The operator s role during this stage is to move the participants from the Participants Queue to the destination conference During an On Going Conference the operator can take part in the conference and perform various tasks for example assist participants privately conduct a voting session manage a Question and Answer session place participants on hold and lock the conference to dial in participants Unattended Conferences In unattended conferences participants use DTMF codes in response to menu driven voice prompts and in this way are guided to the conference Unless there is a problem in the connection or the participant did not enter the correct conference Numeric ID or password operator intervention is not required In unattended conferences the operator usually leaves the management of the conference to a designated participant usually the chairperson meeting organizer The conference chairperson can perform certain operator s functions such as start a voting session control the Question and Answer session mute incoming parties place the conference on hold and lock or unlock the conference All operator functions can be performed either via the WebCommander interface or using DTMF codes from the participant s endpoint Participant Level Operations The following operations can be performed at the par
147. Info2 Auto Video Bit Fiabe Hy Apply d Clear the AGC check box to disable the AGC feature for this participant e Click OK to apply the change 6 32 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Video Management Operations Controlling the Video Layout During the conference operators can adjust several video layout parameters on the participant level and on the conference level Changing Video Layout for the Participant In Continuous Presence conferences Personal Layout is a customized display layout that is viewed only by the participant for whom it was defined Video display layouts available for the conference and Personal Layouts are determined by the type of the Continuous Presence mode that was selected for the conference at reservation stage during the conference definition Classic or Quad Views You can modify the Personal Layout for a participant using the following applications e MGC Manager the operator selects the personal layout for a participant in the Participant Properties Video Sources dialog box e WebCommander the meeting organizer selects the personal layout for a participant in the On Going Conference window For more information see the MGC WebCommander User s Guide e Click amp View participants can change the layout from their endpoint by entering the appropriate DTMF codes Ly Personal Layout is disabled if Same Layout was selected for the conference 6 33 Chapter 6 Opera
148. MCU software Note If Roll Call is enabled for the conference the Entry Tone is replaced by a playback of the recorded participant name End Time Alert Tone Select this option to enable the End of Conference reminder tone to be played once to all the connected participants n minutes before the end of the conference This tone is unique and is embedded in the MCU s software Note If the automatic extension of the conference is enabled for the MCU in the confer cfg file selecting this option also enables the automatic extension of the conference duration for this conference For more details see the MGC Administrator s Guide Chapter 5 MCU Utilities 4 41 Chapter 4 Defining Conferences and Participants Table 4 7 Conference Properties Advanced Settings Media Continued Exit Tone Roll Call Select this option to enable an Exit Tone to be Announcement heard by all connected participants when a participant leaves the conference This tone is unique and is embedded in the MCU s software Note If Roll Call is enabled for the conference the Entry Tone is replaced by a playback of the recorded participant name Talk Hold Time Indicate the minimum period in seconds that a participant has to speak to become the main speaker During this period no other participant is allowed to become the main speaker This parameter is designed to prevent participants from becoming the main speakers when coughing laughi
149. MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Initially the command buttons are displayed with the default shortcut keys If you modify the shortcut key configuration the command button shortcut key display is updated accordingly You cannot close the Attended Participant dialog box when a participant is being attended and is currently located in the Operator conference To close this window you must first move the participant from the Operator conference to the destination conference click the Move button while clearing the Auto Attend Next Participant check box To connect a participant to his her destination conference In the Conferences area of the Attended Participant window select the destination conference of the attended participant and then click the Move button Attended Participant Karen x m ttened Participant Participant Name Karen M VIP I Chair Person User Defined 1 User Defined 3 User Defined 2 User Defined 4 Disconnect i Li Broadcasting Yolume 5 Listening Yolume 5 Apply m Operator i Broadcasting Yolume 5 Listening Volume 5 ___ Join Mute Audio M Conferences Search Value oOo O O Search In Ongoingmeetinas Conference Name Numericld User Defined 1 User Defined 2 User Defined 3 Meeting Type Sep 18 2005 0 Ongoing Meeting 2930 oly
150. New Conference Click this button to create a new On Going Conference and move this participant to it The Conference Properties General dialog box opens letting you define the conference parameters Start Meeting You can move a participant to a Meeting Room only Room if the Meeting Room is active However the first participant connecting to the Meeting Room cannot be moved from the attended Participants Queue to the Meeting Room unless it is first manually activated To manually activate a Meeting Room 1 Inthe Search In list select an option to list Meeting Rooms 2 Inthe Conferences list select the Meeting Room to activate and then click the Start Meeting Room bution Auto Attend Next Select this check box to automatically attend to the Participant next participant in line When the current attended participant is moved to his her destination or Home conference the system automatically moves the next participant in line to the Operator conference The sequential order of participants in the queue is determined by the Next By selection 8 46 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Table 8 5 Attended Participant Dialog Box Fields Continued Next By Determines the sort order of the Participants Queue When the Auto Attend Next Participant is selected this field determines who is the next participant in line that should be automatically moved to the Operator conference The list may be sorted according to the fol
151. Participants For H 323 participants the dialing string is composed of the MCU prefix in the Gatekeeper and the conference ID As shown in Figure 4 4 the IP Network Service Prefix was defined according to the ISDN number and the conference numeric ID was defined to match the ISDN number allocated to the conference For example Gatekeeper Prefix 925 Conference ID 1222 Conference Name Conference The participant dials 9251222 or 925CONFERENCEL1 Undefined Dial in H 323 Participants Conference Access Using an IP Address If there is no gatekeeper defined for the network H 323 participants dial the IP address of the IP card and the conference Numeric ID separated by For example IP address of the IP card 172 22 30 40 Conference ID 1222 The participant dials 172 22 30 40 1222 If an Entry Queue was set as default if dialing to the conference using the IP address of the IP card or the Network Service Prefix fails because the conference Numeric ID is incorrect the call will be routed to the default Entry Queue MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Dial in SIP Participants For SIP participants the dialing string is composed of the conference name and domain name in the following format conference_name domain_name For example conference1 polycom com If the IP address of the MCU IP card is known the SIP endpoint can dial the IP address of the IP card or its host name and be routed to the default Entry Queue
152. Plan SCS Number of voters fo Choices 0 Existing Pension Plan 1 1 1 ABC Pension Plan Voti ng poz Pension Plan Voting settings 3 PAT Pension Plan results 4 option 4 5 Joption 5 6 option 6 f loption 7 D 0 8 foption8 Djs al ae UU ap E TAA Ahe l i option 3 I Show results as percentage with reference to E Anonymous Yote Voters only All Participants Start Time Sep 05 2005 14 59 14 PM Sd ME Apply Details Results OK Cancel Restart Voting Cancel Voting Save Resuts New Vote Command buttons 6 82 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume The Voting dialog box is divided into three main sections The Voting Settings pane where you define the voting session parameters such as the voting subject and choices and whether the voting 1s anonymous The Voting Results pane where the system displays the voting results updating them as the voting session progresses You can select the viewing mode of the voting results Command buttons where you click a button according to the operation to be performed 2 Inthe Voting Settings pane define the voting session parameters as follows Table 6 3 Voting Parameters Title Type in the Voting subject This title is also used as the file name when saving the results to a file Choices The digits 0 to 9 on the left which cannot be modified represent the digit that should be pressed on the telephone keypad or
153. Polycom proprietary version of the H 264 standard H 264 is supported by Polycom s iPower endpoint Note The Highest Common mechanism supports only H 263 with 30 frames per second in CIF format All other H 263 capabilities are disabled Video Format This parameter specifies the resolution and is enabled only in Video Switching mode and when the video protocol is set to H 261 or H 263 When forcing the conference resolution by selecting CIF or QCIF if a participant s endpoint does not support this format the participant is connected as Secondary audio only In all other instances and in Continuous Presence conferences this parameters is set to Auto letting the system select the best resolution for the conference according to the endpoints capabilities For H 261 the following options are available e QCIF Quarter Common Intermediate Format Resolution 144 lines 176 pixels per line one fourth the resolution of CIF e CIF A video format that supports both NTSC and PAL signals Resolution 288 lines 352 pixels per line Data rate up to 30 frames per second For the H 263 protocol you can select additional options These options are important for displaying content when selecting the H 239 People Content Dual Stream mode Typically the People resolution is CIF of up to 30 fos while the Content resolution is VGA SVGA XGA or NTSC 4 44 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Table 4 7 Conference Properties Ad
154. Repairs 1 000 oO OD 1 7 l video syne loss I rvideo syne loss I FECC Token I Content Token OK Cancel The Channel Info pane displays additional parameters relating to the transmission of packets and their processing by the MCU for the selected channel The information is specific to the type of channel you select in the Channels Status channels list for example Video In or Video Out Audio In or Audio Out etc You can resize the column width or use the scroll bars to browse 5 63 Chapter 5 Monitoring Conferences The following detailed information is displayed in the Channel Info pane Table 5 17 IP Participant Properties Video In Channel Info MCU Address The IP address of the H 323 card installed in the MCU to which the participant is connected and the UDP port number allocated to the participant incoming media stream on the MCU side Party Address The IP address of the participant and the port number allocated to the media stream on the participant side Media Info This table provides field value information about currently used video properties and settings Algorithm Indicates the audio or video algorithm and protocol Frame per The number of audio frames per packet that are packet audio transferred between the MCU and the endpoint If the only actual Frame per Packets are higher than Frame per Packets declared during the capabilities exchange a Faulty flag is displayed Resolution Indicates th
155. TMF code on the DTMF input device The default DTMF code for this action is 23 e The operator can end the questioner session by right clicking the Current Questioner icon clicking Q amp A Management and then clicking Stop questioner session ii ae ay D bie at Disconnect Participant Ctrl T i Move Participant j Copy Participant Cirle Cut Crx Delete Del Exclusive Speaker O84 Management Move Participant te First Position th Tes Move Participant te Last Position in Qe Mute Audio Ctrl M i F l a Mave Dea eee Ue in m Seats Move Participant ee Dow if Gas Turn OF AGC uals Eee a aes Properties 6 79 Chapter 6 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences 6 80 e The operator can end the questioner session by clicking the Current Questioner icon and then clicking the Stop Questioner icon eal on the Q amp A toolbar The selected participant s icon reverts to the passive normal status Removing Participants from the Q amp A Queue You can remove a participant from the Q amp A queue at any time during the Q amp A session In such a case the session will continue as before but the participant will not be able to ask questions in this session You can remove a participant in one of the following ways e Right click the participant s icon click Q amp A Management and then click Remove Participant from Q amp A e Select the participant s icon and then click the Remove Participant from El O amp A
156. The volume scale is from 1 to 10 where 1 is the weakest and 10 the strongest volume The volume of each endpoint s audio at connection time is set to 5 One movement of the volume slider increases or decreases the volume by one unit equivalent to 3db Disconnect Click this button to disconnect the participant from the MCU Apply If you have modified any of the participant volume levels Broadcasting or Listening click this button to apply the changes and affect the participant volume If any of the other participant properties were modified click this button to update the Participant Properties Identification parameters Broadcasting If necessary adjust the level of sound transmitted by Volume the operator to this participant Listening Volume If necessary adjust the level of sound heard by the operator Join To join a conference select the conference in the Conferences list and then click this button 8 44 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Table 8 5 Attended Participant Dialog Box Fields Continued End Join Click this button to end the Join operation Mute Unmute Click this button to mute the operator audio Audio Conferences Search Value Enter the first letters of a conference name or the information in one of the User Defined fields to determine the conferences to be listed according to the selected Search In criteria Search In Select the list that is to be used to search for the destination c
157. U Mute Video Block Audio Turn OFF AGC Properties The selected participant becomes the conference speaker and all the other participants are automatically muted by the system hd The Exclusive Speaker icon is displayed in the Audio column in the Monitor and Status panes d The Muted by MCU icon is displayed in the Audio column of all other participants MGC Manager User s Guide Volume To cancel the Exclusive Speaker mode e In the Browser pane the Monitor pane or the Status pane of the main window right click the participant s icon and then click Cancel Exclusive Speaker Alternatively the chairperson can cancel the Exclusive Speaker mode by entering the DTMF code assigned to this function The default code is lt 5 gt Changing a Participant s Status to Conference Chairperson During On Going Conferences operators can designate a participant to function as the conference chairperson The chairperson can perform various operations during the conference such as lock or unlock the conference to undefined dial in participants initiate a voting session become the conference exclusive speaker while muting all other participants and more Participant can designate themselves as chairperson using a DTMF code the default code is lt 78 gt In this case the system requests the participant to enter the Chairperson password in order to become the chairperson If the participant entered an incorrect pass
158. UU 188201 Normal H R MCU Configuration On Going Conferences 3 o GE H Minor2 H 9 Minor3 S On Going Gateway Sessions 0 amp Participants Queue 0 HEEN Reservations 0 Name _ S J Co N Participant Numbers IP Address SIP Address Connectio Audio Video Sync fay Major 2 QQ daout c 1 7300851 Res Dial out il O K g Meeting Rooms Entry Queues J dialo D c 1 70821001 Ret Dial out i a O K 10 188203 Normal hmo L Sn HLO 18833 Major amp dial in2 D C 1 M1001 1001 1001 1001 1001 1001 P 730 Ba Dial in e a OK ELL 18834 Normal Bilminor 1 Sin u y zel 18835 Major dial n3 C 1 M851 851 851 851 851 851 P 7300100 3 Dialin ei T OK oo A Maine Ready E sO Mem10 Portso NUM 7 18 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Meeting Room Icons The following icons indicate the different statuses of Meeting Rooms Table 7 3 Meeting Room Types and Icons Meeting Rooms Entry Queues amp SIP factories A category in the MCU tree that lists the Meeting Rooms Entry Queues and SIP Factories defined in the system Active Meeting Room Video A video Meeting Room that was activated when the first participants or chairperson connected to it Active Meeting Room Audio An Audio Only Meeting Room that was activated when the first participants or chairperson connected to it Pas
159. V0 displays the name of the endpoint that is currently broadcasting the content For more details see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Il Chapter 1 Withdraw Click this button to withdraw the Content token from Content Token the current holder and to return it to the MCU for assignment to other endpoints Refresh Video Click this button to refresh the video image 5 40 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Participant Level Monitoring Participants can join conferences in one of the following three ways e Via an Entry Queue e Directly to an VR enabled conference e As a pre defined dial in or dial out participant The connection process can be monitored by the operator When joining via an Entry Queue or directly to a conference the connection process can be attended or unattended The attended process is described in Chapter 8 Entry Queues Operator Conferences and Attended Conferencing In unattended conferencing the operator is involved only if there are problems that require attention Displaying Participant Properties In addition to the information that is listed in the Status and the Monitor panes you can view detailed information regarding the status and properties of each listed participant using the Participant Properties dialog boxes This information is especially useful when a problem occurs during the connection of the participant to the conference To display the participant s properties e
160. We POLYCOM gt MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Version 9 0 4 August 2010 DOC2233A Trademark Information Polycom the Polycom Triangles logo and the names and marks associated with Polycom s products are trademarks and or service marks of Polycom Inc and are registered and or common law marks in the United States and various other countries All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners Patent Information The accompanying product is protected by one or more U S and foreign patents and or pending patent applications held by Polycom Inc 2010 Polycom Inc All rights reserved Polycom Inc 4750 Willow Road Pleasanton CA 94588 2708 USA No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical for any purpose without the express written permission of Polycom Inc Under the law reproducing includes translating into another language or format As between the parties Polycom Inc retains title to and ownership of all proprietary rights with respect to the software contained within its products The software is protected by United States copyright laws and international treaty provision Therefore you must treat the software like any other copyrighted material e g a book or sound recording Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this manual is accurate Polycom Inc is not responsible for printing
161. When checked the audio transmission from the conference to the participant s endpoint is blocked but the participant will still be heard by other participants 5 48 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Table 5 12 ISDN Participant Properties Connection Info2 Continued Attending Displays the participant or operator status in an Attended conference IVR enabled or Greet and Guide e Oper Participant This option is checked when viewing the operator parameters Attending This option is checked when the participant is in an Attended state Participant Displays the status of the Attended participant Attending State e Attended The participant is being assisted by the operator in an Operator conference On Hold The participant was placed on hold and hears background music In video conferences the participant also views the Welcome slide For more details on Attended conferences see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume ll Chapter 4 If the participant is in a Continuous Presence conference click the Video Sources tab to check the video layout selected for the participant or to select another video layout The Participant Properties Video Sources dialog box opens Identification Advanced Connection Infot Connection Info2 Video Sources H221 Disconnection Cause Resource Details Auto Select Y y A Personal Layout Conference Layout OK Cancel 5 49
162. When the chairperson requests a roll call the recorded names of all conference participants are played back to the conference If Roll Call is disabled for the conference but enabled in an assigned IVR Service the particpants names are recorded as they enter the conference and can be played during the conference if enabled 4 40 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Table 4 7 Conference Properties Advanced Settings Media Continued Roll Call cont Note e This option is available only for IVR enabled conferences and only when the Roll Call option is selected in the definition of the IVR Service assigned to the conference It requires the installation of the Audio card in the MCU If Entry Tone and Exit Tone are enabled for the conference the participant name is played back to the conference when the participant enters or leaves the conference If the Roll Call option is disabled for the conference but enabled in the assigned IVR Service Roll Call cannot be requested during the On Going Conference However the participant name is recorded as the Roll Call option can be enabled during the On Going Conference Entry Tone Roll Call Select this option to enable an audio tone to be Announcement played when a participant audio or video connects to the conference This tone is heard by all the participants currently connected to the conference but not by the connecting participant The tone is embedded in the
163. Yiew Template DataBase Directory Options Window Help peel ee aE ee i ye Y Ale TAa 171 178 Normal Browser pane M0 188 124 Falcon Normal t J 188201 Normal flato Connected lab01 fiel Ret Dis i a i 188 203 Normal Ai i02 Connected lab02 fiel eh D Q l see S ta tus pane U 18833 Normal pt 18835 Normal 6 Normal H k MCU Configuration On Going Conferences 1 Gi mrO2 ar labO1 AF 02 On Going Gateway Sessions 0 d Participants Queue 0 4 Reservations 0 an Meeting Rooms Entry Queues amp SIP Factories 2 iii mgc 25190106 Connecting L mac 50 18830 Normal Monitor ane F La mac 50 188 31 Major p m sN ihih mac 50 188 31 ID 80 0 Connected Empty fil j i ae 2 A Di ted H323 172 22 18 Bek LU MGC 25B Connecting ul OTIC Gee mml plus Connecting dmoz 6 ID 5995 2 Connected J Drediict Mananamant 262 f Cannectina gt Jitem Product Management 0 Connected Empty Ready E Y Memi0 Port 80 I Num You can adjust both the columns and the rows in the Monitor and the Status pane tables to suit your monitoring priorities e To modify the order of columns select and drag the column labels to the desired location Chapter 5 Monitoring Conferences e To sort items in a column click a column heading once for descending order and click again
164. a 20 Ready N FX 11 ile ISDN 54 4 F3 Alpha 11 fe 1 Connected d Feb 22 2005 08 19 00 PM_ 02 00 00 Mar 01 2005 08 19 00 PM_ 02 00 00 Mar 01 2005 08 15 00 PM_ 02 00 00 Dragging the Browser pane edge Name Status Connection Type Connection Audio _ Participant Numbers IP_ dno valid F3 Alp 11 ID 59 B 4 Biles IP 54 2 F3 Abha 11 ID eG 1 Connected 3 0 Connected Empty Single Participant Yta IP 54 3 F3 Aha 11 ID eG 0 Connected Empty ger Dial out D Disconnected i 172 22 186 11 Single Participant test F3 Alpha 01710 10 Exclusive Speaker nthe Mem10 Portsoo1 Figure 3 9 Resizing Window Panes 3 11 Chapter 3 MGC Manager Basics Multiple Window Display You can display the application windows in various ways To change the display of multiple windows On the Window menu click Cascade Tile Horizontally or Tile Vertically Window Help New Window Cascade Tile Horizontally Tile Vertically Arrange Icans Window Display Options 1 Reservations in 4ccordDB 3 Templt1 s 4 Participants in 4ccordDB The open windows are displayed in the selected view as in the Cascade view shown in Figure 3 10 MGC Manager VERSION 7 5 0 17 File Edit View Template DataBase Directory ede Window fe PARTICIPANTS Ka QUEVEFILTER DELETE FILTER JAI O 2S lta ol A OOEAEEERE
165. a logon record is created See Connecting to an MCU on page 3 21 Showing and Hiding the Toolbars By default all toolbars are displayed below the main menu You can show or hide them as needed To show or hide a toolbar e On the View menu click the name of the toolbar to show or hide A check mark is placed next to the toolbar name on the menu to indicate its display and is removed when the toolbar is hidden Conference Toolbar onf Participants Toolbar articipants Queue Toolbar Articipants Queue Filter Status Bar Indications Log Horizontal view Participants Queue Window 3 9 Chapter 3 MGC Manager Basics Showing and Hiding the Status Bar The Status bar is displayed along the bottom of the Main window by default To show or hide the Status bar On the View menu click Status Bar If the Status Bar is not currently displayed a check mark is placed next to Status Bar on the View menu and the Status Bar is displayed If the Status Bar is currently displayed the check mark next to Status Bar on the View menu is removed and the Status Bar disappears View s Main Toolbar w Conference Toolbar w Conf Participants Toolbar Participants Queue Toolbar Participants Queue Filter A QBA Toolbar q Status Bar Horizontal wiew Participants Queue Window Showing and Hiding the Memory Indicators 3 10 The Memory Indicators are displayed in the Status bar at the bottom of the Ma
166. ab is enabled if the Meet Me Per Conference option was selected in the On Going Conference Properties General dialog box or if you are defining a Meeting Room In this tab you can assign the dial in numbers to the conference for ISDN and IP participant connections Callers wishing to participate in a Meet Me Per Conference conference or Meeting Room must dial one of the dial in numbers and are automatically connected to the appropriate conference For a description of the Meet Me Per Conference and Meeting Room options see Chapter 7 Meet Me per Conferences and Meeting Rooms 4 65 Chapter 4 Defining Conferences and Participants Recording 24 Click the Recording tab to define recording parameters The Conference Properties Recording dialog box opens Properties Product Management x General Settings Patticipants Video Sources Resource Force Recording r Recording V Enable Recording Recording Link Name R2IP v Start recording Immediately X Immediately 25 If required configure recording for the conference using the following parameters Table 4 2 Conference Properties Recording Enable Recording Select this option to enable recording Recording Link Select the recording link from the list Name Start recording Select when to start recording the conference e Immediately e Upon Request 4 66 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Completing the Confere
167. abled conferences are initially assigned wideband resources If the endpoint is not identified as VTX 1000 the wideband resources are subsequently released All defined participants in VTX 1000 enabled conferences are allocated wideband resources Note This option is enabled if the VTX 1000 option is enabled for the MCU in the system cfg file and if the the Audio 12 24 24 48 or 48 96 card is installed in the MCU Audio Alg Select the preferred audio algorithm for the type of conference you define This parameter represents the compression ratio Very high compression ratio may require more resources 4 33 Chapter 4 Defining Conferences and Participants Table 4 5 Conference Properties Settings Parameters Continued Audio Alg cont The available audio algorithms are e Auto 8 G 729 G 723 1 16 Siren7 G 728 24 Siren1 4 G 722 1 Siren7 32 Siren1 4 G 722 1 Siren7 48 Siren14 G 722 G 711 56 G 722 G 711 56 G 711 Audio Algorithm 8 G 729 G 723 1 is the most compressed audio and 56 G 711 is without audio compression If set to Auto the system tries to connect the participants using the best possible audio algorithm for the conference Notes e 8 G729 G 723 1 is available only for IP Only conferences and the Audio 12 24 24 48 or 48 96 card is installed in the MCU In Video Switching conferences all participants must use the same audio algorithm as this influences the video bandwidth Participant
168. ables the chairperson or user depending on System settings to dial out during an On Going Conference to a participant inviting them to join Displays Invite for the chairperson and the invited participant MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Additional Participant Statuses Table 5 3 lists additional participant icons that are displayed when the participant is connected to an IVR enabled conference If none of these statuses occur the Status column in the Status pane remains empty Table 5 3 Participant in 1VR enabled Conference Status Icons i e The participant is connected to the MCU and has entered the Entry Queue or the IVR queue The participant was moved to the Operator conference and is being assisted by the operator The participant has requested the operator s assistance The participant has requested the operator s assistance for the conference Usually this means that the operator is requested to join the conference The participant was placed on hold is not currently taking part in any conference While on hold the participant hears background music and in video conferences views the Welcome slide 5 21 Chapter 5 Monitoring Conferences Participant s Audio Status Table 5 4 lists icons that indicate the current audio status of the participant Table 5 4 Participant Audio Status Icons C The audio channel of the participant is connected The audio channel is disconnected
169. activated Video Switching Transcoding Continuous Presence conference until the lecturer connects to the conference In Continuous Presence conferences the selected video layout at the time of the reservation is the one that is activated when the conference starts Once the lecturer is connected the conference switches to the Lecture Mode The order in which the system switches from one participant to another is defined by the order in which the participants were added to the conference The switching occurs according to the time interval defined for the conference In a Continuous Presence conference all the participants are displayed on the lecturer screen hence the Timer is insignificant The Timer is active when the number of participants exceeds the number of windows in the selected video layout In that case when the switching is performed the system refreshes the display while replacing the last active speaker with a speaker who was invisible during the last display interval When one of the participants is talking the automatic switching is suspended showing the current speaker and it is resumed when the lecturer resumes talking If no lecturer is selected for the conference Auto Select the speaker becomes the conference lecturer with all the inherent prerogatives and adopts the lecturer s status including the video forcing options in Continuous Presence conferences If the lecturer is disconnected during the On Going Confer
170. airperson Password 6 94 Inviting Video Participant ccccccccssssssssesseeeeesssesseeseeeeeeeeeees 6 96 Disconnecting Invited Participants cseeeseeeeeseeeeeeees 6 98 Invite Mode Automatic Termination ccccceeeeeeeereees 6 98 Managing Secure Mode Conferences cccccccecssseeeeeesnetsseees 6 99 Operations Performed During On Going Gateway Sessions 6 100 Meet Me per Conferences and Meeting Rooms 7 1 Defining a Meet Me Conference v2 csccessncecsnsanssnssecetecadandocseedesccacctesstnts 7 2 Defining Conference Dial In Numbers for ISDN PSTN T1 CAS CO MMC CHONG se E E E E ET 7 5 Monitoring Meet Me Conferences cccccsseesssssesseseeseeceeeeeeeeeeees 7 10 WIC Wie ROOMS serrin A eeiuedisanscuneanniiess 7 11 Defining a New Meeting Room ceccccccceccceceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeees 7 12 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Using Meeting Rooms for Ad Hoc Conferencing in Avaya Eos MP AMS e E E EA deasupascastedeaedet es 7 17 Lisung Mecina ROOMS siepe 7 18 M c ne Room ICONS ssserisatasceateasccancatescecctsanacamnaetesdensedadanedsneeaeeee 7 19 Meeting Room Right Click Functions cceeeeseee 7 19 Entry Queues Operator Conferences and Attended COMON lt cccunwes 65604600048 60458450 AARE RA 8 1 Defining a New Entry Queue cccccccsssessssesessseessesssssssseeseeeeeeeeeeeees 8 4 Listing Entry Queues u ccccccccesss
171. ame card must handle all four participants Using the Resource Force tab you can place the first two conferences with two participants each on different video cards saving the resources for the other two conferences with four participants each 20 Click the Resource Force tab The Conference Properties Resource Force dialog box opens Properties Product Management g x General Settings Patticipants Video Sources Resource Force Recording Audio Audio Card Type fuo Slot Bridge Id Auto Selection x Video Video Card Type Auto Slot Bridge Id Auto Selection wf Data Slot Bridge Id Auto Selection Auto Selection 21 In the Audio area select the type of Audio card to use for the conference and the specific card to use by selecting the MCU slot in which the card is installed Select Auto to enable the automatic selection of the resource MGC Manager User s Guide Volume 22 In the Video area select the type of Video card to use for the conference and the specific card to use by selecting the MCU slot in which the card is installed Select Auto to enable the automatic selection of the resource 23 In the Data area select the specific card to use for the conference by selecting the MCU slot in which the card is installed Select Auto to enable the automatic selection of the resource Meet Me Per Conference The Meet Me Per Conference t
172. an IVR Service was assigned to the conferences by entering the conference VR queue where participants are prompted for an entry password and or chairperson password depending on the IVR Service configuration Once the participants provide the correct information they are admitted to the conference Wait for the Operator s assistance The IVR Service assigned to the conference is set to attended mode On Hold for Operator Assistance Entry Queues are defined separately in the MGC Manager application For more details see Chapter amp 4 79 Chapter 4 Defining Conferences and Participants 4 80 MCU Conference Numeric ID 1234 Password 34567 Numeric ID Password an ae E N 1300 ISDN PSTN J7 Endpoint OG Entry IVR Sm Pe Queue Service aef Numeric ID 1222 ISDN PSTN IP Network Service Endpoint Prefix 925 Conference2 Numeric ID 1300 Password 71356 Figure 4 6 Conference Access via Entry Queue using Numeric ID and Conference IVR In Figure 4 6 one or several dial in numbers and a Numeric ID are allocated to an Entry Queue In addition a numeric ID is assigned to each conference and a conference password and chairperson password may be defined The dial in number which is usually the same for all participants regardless of the conference they attend and the appropriate conference numeric Ds are communicated to conference participants Whe
173. an On Going Conference the MCU numbers are listed in the Network Phone IP column of the main window Status pane The format number of digits depends on how the dial in numbers are forwarded from the PBX switch to the MCU if the PBX truncates part of the number Extension Can be used to define a recording participant if not Identifier String using the recording links for example to record with a Prairie external recording system For a description of recording options and setup see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume ll Chapter 9 Recording This option can also be used when you want to define an extension for dial out participants 4 91 Chapter 4 Defining Conferences and Participants Table 4 6 ISDN ATM MPI T1 CAS Participant Identification Continued Meet me per Available only for the Dial in connection Select Party The participant dials a single number for each group of channels in use Channel The participant dials a different number for each channel MCU Conference A single dial in number DID is assigned to all the conferences running on a certain MCU The MCU phone number is entered in the Network Service Span and Phones dialog box The participants are routed to the appropriate conferences according to their phone numbers CLI that are entered in the Participant Numbers box When a participant dials in using the MCU number the MCU identifies the participant phone number and rout
174. and locally without an option to save the filter for future use or add it to the list of filters Two types of filters may be defined personal filters and public filters Personal filters are created by all the operators and are for their personal use Public filters may only be defined by a database user with permission to create public filters and who has logged into the database For more details about defining permissions to create public filters see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume ll Chapter 6 Defining Permissions To define Participants Queue filters The default Filter is All all participants waiting in the Participants Queue appear in the Participants Queue window You can create a new filter and save it for future use 1 Log into the database 2 Inthe MGC Manager window from the Filter toolbar in the Filter list select New Filter PCOS EPAITE DELETE FILTER New Filter MGC Manager User s Guide Volume 3 Click the Participants Queue Filter button DELETE FILTER New Filter gt The Participants Queue Filter dialog box opens Participants Queue Filter 4 Define the filtering options You can select the status es of participants to be monitored or select to monitor the participants that dialed specified dial in numbers 8 37 Chapter 8 Entry Queues Operator Conferences and Attended Conferencing You can define the following filtering parameters Table 8 4 Par
175. arded as a result of arriving later than the set jitter buffer size e Accumulated N total number of packets that arrived later than set in the jitter buffer size since the channel opened Interval N number of packets that arrived later than set in the jitter buffer size in the last RTP report interval default interval is 5 minutes Peak the highest number of packets that arrived later than set in the jitter buffer size in a report interval from the beginning of the channel s life span Overflows The number of times the jitter mechanism is reset due to bitrate overflow Overflow is the excess flow of packets not processed High values may indicate a problem with the network or an endpoint Sample packet The time a packet is delayed in the jitter buffer until it is interval used This information is used as part of a random sampling procedure for internal behavior tracking Error Indicates the state of the RTP mechanism that repairs Resilience video frames resulting from packet loss to improve video quality Repairs The number of repaired packets video only 5 67 Chapter 5 Monitoring Conferences 3 Click the Connection Info2 tab The Participant Properties Connection Info2 dialog box opens Duke IP Properties Video Sources H245 Disconnection Cause Resource Details Identification Advanced Connection Infol Connection Into2 Connection Time Loopback Status Jan 07 2003 16 28 38 PM M al M T1120
176. at is configured to support Ad Hoc reservation less conferencing The conference is created according to the Profile assigned to the Ad Hoc enabled Entry Queue For a detailed description of this feature refer to the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume IT Chapter 3 Ad Hoc Conferencing and External Database Authentication 8 1 Chapter 8 Entry Queues Operator Conferences and Attended Conferencing Attended and Unattended Conferences and Entry Queues Conferences can be attended or unattended In unattended mode connection to the conference is automatic and the whole conference can be run without operator intervention In attended mode the operator connects participants to the conference and actively manages the conference Conferences are set as attended when assigning an IVR Service set to attended mode Entry Queues can also be attended or unattended For conferences accessed by an Entry Queue the attended or unattended mode of the Entry Queue determines the connection mode of the conference In an unattended Entry Queue the routing to the destination conference is automatic In attended Entry Queues routing to the destination conference is done by the operator and requires the presence of an Operator conference e The initial setting of an Entry Queue or conference as unattended or attended is done in the Entry Queue Service or IVR Service by selecting or clearing the On hold for Operator Assistance option in the Wel
177. ay The other participants only view the speaker lecturer or the active speaker in full screen Select the conference lecturer by choosing his her name from the Lecturer name drop down list The list includes the names of all the conference participants currently connected to the conference Enable or disable automatic switching between participants displayed on the lecturer monitor window by selecting or clearing the Timer check box 10 7 Chapter 10 Lecture and Presentation Options 10 8 Change the number of seconds a participant is displayed in the lecturer window before switching to the next participant by entering a new value in the nterval field In the Status column of the Monitor and Status area the Lecture Mode icon and indication is displayed The lecturer is indicated with the following icon amp You can mute and unmute participants and perform additional operations as described in Chapter 6 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Presentation Mode Presentation Mode is available in Continuous Presence conferences In Continuous Presence conferences set to Presentation Mode when the current speaker s speech extends a predefined time the conference layout automatically changes to full screen displaying the current speaker as the conference lecturer on all the conference participant monitors When the Presentation Mode is active the speaker views
178. ayed only if the Show User Defined Fields in Participant Parameters box is selected in the Database Manager gt Defaults gt User Defined Defaults You can control the volume of the audio transmitted from the participant to the conference broadcasting volume and from the conference to the participant listening volume To adjust the volume move the slider The volume scale is from 1 to 10 where 1 is the weakest and 10 the strongest volume The volume of each endpoints audio at connection time is set to 5 One movement of the volume slider increases or decreases the volume by one unit equivalent to 3db When checked indicates an Audio Only participant This option is automatically selected for T1 CAS participants and cannot be canceled When checked changes the participant s status to VIP to distinguish participants who require special attention Note The VIP status can also be changed during the On Going Conference 4 93 Chapter 4 Defining Conferences and Participants Table 4 6 ISDN ATM MPI T1 CAS Participant Identification Continued Save Participant Optional When checked saves the participant definition as a template in the User Defined template file or in the selected Database Group Note This check box appears only when defining a participant for a Reservation template in the Participant Template file or when defining a participant during a conference when Database Group is the source Partici
179. bbie ISDN DI Duke DO Duke Knoop Duke video duke video E1111 T Allow Undefined Parties Min Participants Max Participants 4uto Pre Defined Participants File C Documents and Settings Nadine Desktop triall usr F Dial Gut Manually Browse From database From directory OK Cancel Help 6 Click OK to complete the selection To copy the participant properties from an On Going Conference or Reservation 1 In the Browser pane expand the Reservations or the On Going Conferences list and then expand the On Going Conference icon to list its participants 2 a MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Right click the icon of the participant to copy and then click Copy Participant or use the appropriate shortcut key the default key is lt Ctrl gt lt C gt D Delete Exclusive Speaker O84 Management Unmute Audio Ctrl U Mute video Block Audio Turn OFF AGC Properties Right click the conference icon to which to copy the participant and then click Paste Participant or use the appropriate shortcut key the default key is lt Ctrl gt lt V gt g Meeting Rooms Entry Queues amp SIP Factoriesi20 BP 46788 New Participant Fe Copy Meeting Room Paste Participant Cirt Paste Participant As Cirl P Delete Del Print Meeting Room Properties The participant s details are copied to the selected conference under the same name
180. ccurrences Ends a repeating reservation after a specific number X of occurrences End By dd mm yy Specify a date for the last occurrence of the recurring reservation The MGC Manager calculates the number of occurrences according to the selected frequency and the date range MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Click OK Define the remaining conference parameters if you are defining a new reservation directly using the standard workflow as described in Chapter 4 About Participants on page 4 17 Once the reservation has been defined the system automatically creates the recurring reservations The name of each recurring reservation is derived from the name of the first reservation followed by sequential numbers using the format lt name gt _X where X is its sequential order For example if the first reservation is named Marketing and the number of occurrences is three the system creates three reservations naming the first Marketing _1 the second Marketing _2 and the third Marketing _3 MGC Manager ERSION 7 0 0 39 10 x File Edit View Template DataBase Directory Options Window Help PAA TICIPANTS GUEUE FILTER fay oo inh wj Product Management Normal R MCU Configuration za On Going Conferencesi3 S On Going Gateway Sessions 0 fe Participants Queue 0 Reservations S ae Ash_serv1 Brand Marketing_ 2 ae Brand Marketi
181. ce Printing Conference Data 6 68 Once a reservation is made the system allocates the appropriate resources to the conference You can print this data for example the conference name ID start time duration line rate or the participant parameters to a printer file or clipboard to be used by other applications The printed data of reservations can be sent to the conference participants in advance letting them know the actual conference settings and the dial in numbers they will use when connecting to the conference The printed data can be used to keep record of all On Going Conferences and planned activities for the MCU or operators You can print data for a single On Going Conference or Reservation or for all the On Going Conferences or Reservations Before printing conference information to a printer make sure that a default printer is defined in your workstation To print details of a single conference 1 Expand the On Going Conferences list or the Reservations list 2 Print conference details using one of the following options MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Inthe Reservations list right click the reservation whose data you want to print and then click Print Reservation n ocom 3 Mew Participant Copy Res Paste Participant trl Paste Participant 45 tbtri P Delete Del Print Reservation Properties Inthe On Going Conferences list right click the conference who
182. ce Direct Leased Line connection ISDN connection only Audio Indicates whether the participant s audio is connected and the status of the audio channel For details see Table 5 4 Video Indicates whether the participant s video channel is connected and the status of the video connection For details see Table 5 5 Sync Indicates whether the participant s site is synchronized For H 323 participants indicates the general synchronization status of Video Switch Protocol Sync Loss and Video Intra Sync e OK there is no synchronization problem l sync loss there is a general synchronization problem with the MCU r sync loss there is a general synchronization problem with the participant site l video sync loss there is a video synchronization problem with the MCU r video sync loss there is a video synchronization problem with the participant site To see the number of times that the sync loss problem occurred either in the remote or the local site see the Sync Loss Cont and V Sync Loss Count columns The line rate in which data sent from the MCU is received by the endpoint For H 323 participants indicates the total line rate of all the channels agreed rate in which data sent from the MCU is received by the endpoint 5 18 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Table 5 2 On Going Conference Monitor Pane Columns Continued Column Description Name Rx Rate The line rate in which data sent from th
183. ce definition you want to update and click Properties The On Going Conference Properties dialog box opens Click the General tab The On Going Conference Properties General dialog box opens Enter text up to 300 characters in the Remarks box To add multiple remarks click Update Remark which moves the previous remark to the Remarks History box and writes it to the CDR file and then repeat step 3 Click OK The dialog box closes and the new remark is written to the CDR file and moved to the Remarks History box Broadcasting Annex D Still Video Image Slide An endpoint with Annex D capabilities can send an Annex D still video image slide to the MCU to be broadcast to all other participants in a Transcoding or a Continuous Presence video conference When an endpoint sends the Annex D image the following operations are performed by the MCU The MCU automatically switches the video layout to Full Screen 1x1 The MCU video forces the sender to be seen by all participants when an MCV Multipoint Command Visualization signal is sent from the endpoint The MCU transmits the Annex D image in full 4CIF quality to all the connected conference participants An Annex D slide can be transmitted by an endpoint using one of the following methods The endpoint first requests the chair token and becomes the chairperson Sometimes during the conference while acting as the chairperson the endpoint may send the Annex D still image
184. ce the conference video settings to match remote device video capabilities Force the conference video settings to match remote device video capabilities Force the conference video settings to match remote device video capabilities Remote device shut its Disconnect and reconnect video channels the remote device Video stream violation due to incompatible annexes Video stream violation during session The incoming video rate is incompatible with the conference rate A 20 Disconnect and reconnect the remote device Disconnect and reconnect the remote device MGC Manager User s Guide Table A 2 Secondary Disconnection Causes Continued Category Possible Solution Video channel H 323 card failure Reset the H 323 card rejected by inadequate H 323 card resources Conferencing Video connection for Set the video conference Limitation SIP participant is to CP or Video Switching temporarily unavailable with defined video parameters A 21 Appendix A Disconnection Causes A 22 B Appendix B Glossary This appendix lists the terms and abbreviations that are related to the MGC functionalities and technologies and are commonly used in the MGC Manager documentation rem Explanation Term AMI Alternate Mark Inversion A T1 line coding format inverting alternate ones Asynchronous A transmission method used by dial up modems Data is transmitted using a start bit at the beginning of a c
185. cipant s definition can be saved in the database or in the Participant Template file that appears in the Pre Defined Participants file box For more details on defining new participants see Defining Participant Properties on page 4 85 Allow Undefined Select this check box to allow undefined dial in Parties participants to connect to the conference without prior definition of participant properties In such a case participants connect to the conference until the number of participants exceeds the conference limit as set in the Max Participants parameter or the MCU configuration limit or until the MCU resources are used up Note This option is automatically selected for the Meet Me per Conf and Meeting Room type of conference or for conferences accessed from an Entry Queue Min Participants Define the total number of participants for which the system reserves resources This number should include the number of defined and undefined participants For example enter 5 if the conference includes two defined participants and you want the system to reserve resources for three additional undefined participants If you enter 0 no resources will be reserved for the conference However participants will be able to connect to the conference if resources are available Note The number of participants who can connect to the conference is limited by Max Participants limit if defined or by the maximum number of participants per confe
186. cipants name by entering a new name in the Name field enter information in any of the user defined fields 2 If required adjust the broadcasting listening volume using the slider change the VIP status by selecting or clearing the VIP check box an On Going Conference only if the participant is disconnected from the The participant s Identification and Advanced parameters can be modified during fs conference 3 Click the Connection Infol tab 5 43 Chapter 5 Monitoring Conferences The Participant Properties Connection Infol dialog box opens Video Sources H221 Disconnection Cause Resource Details Identification Advanced Connection Info Connection Info2 Participant State Member In Connected 7 Audio 1120 Video m FECC LSD T Content Channels Status Participant Phone MCU Phone vi 1 79343 1111111 H221 Counters Status M syne loss 0 M syne video loss 0 rsync loss 0 I rsyne video loss 0 Down Speed I Chair Token J FECC LSD Token Content Token OK Cancel The following information is displayed in Connection Infol Table 5 11 ISDN Participant Properties Connection Info1 Participant State Indicates the connection status of the participant as it appears in the Monitor and Status panes If there is a problem the appropriate status appears For example Disconnected indicates that the participant was disconnected from
187. ck Mute Audio to mute the audio signal or 6 25 Chapter 6 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences 6 26 Mute Video to suspend mute the video transmission from the endpoint to the conference Disconnect Participant Ctrl T Move Participant Copy Participant Chrl C Cu Chrl Delete Del Exclusive Speaker ge Management Moute Audio Ctrl M ute Video Block Audio Turn OFF AC Properties Alternatively to mute the audio channel select the participant s icon and then press the appropriate shortcut key combination the default shortcut key combination is lt Ctrl M gt The menu changes to UnMute Audio or UnMute Video respectively The status of the audio channel in the Audio column in the Status and Monitor panes changes to Mute Audio The status of the video channel in the Video column in the Status and Monitor panes changes to Mute Video Muting is also indicated by an icon a or Gi in the Audio or Video columns of the Monitor and Status panes To unmute a participant using the participant right click menu In the Browser pane Monitor pane or the Status pane right click the participant icon and then click Unmute Audio to unmute the audio MGC Manager User s Guide Volume channel or Unmute Video to resume the video transmission to the conference Yolanda Disconnect Participant Ckrl T Move Participant F Copy Participant Ctrl Cut Cr Delete Del Exclu
188. ck the Advanced tab The participant s Properties Advanced dialog box opens Properties Terminal X Taken from service X 4 95 Chapter 4 Defining Conferences and Participants 3 If required define the following parameters Table 4 7 ISDN ATM MPI T1 CAS Participant Advanced Aggregation Select the aggregation method for ISDN ATM MPI video participants e Auto Connects participants to the conference according to the conference settings and their endpoint capabilities When connecting to the conference the endpoint and the MCU exchange capabilities information During this exchange the MCU identifies the aggregation mode used and connects the endpoint accordingly H221 The standard communication protocol in which a different number is assigned to each channel When connecting the participant to the conference Dial out each of these numbers are dialed Bonding A communication protocol that aggregates two to thirty 64 Kbps B channels to act as one large bandwidth channel If this option is enabled set the Connection Type in the Identification tab to Dial out and enter the Phone number in the Bonding Phone Number field Multi Rate A communication protocol in which channels are aggregated to form one dedicated line The MGC Manager currently supports aggregation of 6 channels to form one line rate of 384 Kbps 64 X 6 384 In such a case the network ensures that all six channels are synch
189. clicking the Auto Layout check box to let the system automatically select the video layout according to the number of participants connected to the conference or select the Video Layout a Determine the number of windows to appear on the screen by clicking the arrow next to the numbered layout icon A pop up menu opens displaying the available layouts for the selected number of windows according to the selected Continuous Presence mode Classic video sessions can have up to nine windows If there are 10 or more participants voice activated switching occurs Quad Views video sessions can have up to 16 windows If the conference includes more than 16 participants voice activated switching occurs 4 55 Chapter 4 Defining Conferences and Participants Software Continuous Presence has only two layout options two and four video windows Table 4 9 lists the layouts available for each type of Continuous Presence video session Table 4 9 Conference Properties Video Sources CP Layout Menus ae wee Video Layout Menu View Classic Video Layout Quad Views Video Layout oO ooo poog ME O EE gm 3 4 5 Software IP only conferences 4 o b Inthe Video Layout pop up menu click the thumbnail of the desired layout The selected layout appears in the Video Layout pane Table 4 10 lists the available layouts for the selected number of windows in each Continuous Presence mode Table 4 10 Video Windows Layout Option
190. com Sep 19 2005 0 Ongoing Meeting Polycom 4 gt IV Auto Attend Next Participant Next By Time z JV Include On Hold Participants To Home Conf F3 Hold F4 Move F5 The participant moves to the selected conference Alternatively press the selected shortcut key combination as it appears on the Move button the default shortcut key is lt F5 gt If the participant s conference is not running you can click New Conference in the Conferences area to start a new conference for the participant then select the conference and click Move If the participant s Meeting Room is not active select the Meeting Room from the list and then click Start Meeting Room Once the Meeting Room is active click Move 8 49 Chapter 8 Entry Queues Operator Conferences and Attended Conferencing e When you move the attended participant to his her Home destination conference and he she is also the last participant in the Participants Queue the following message appears MGC Manager 4 a X AN The participants queue is empty If the Participants Queue includes only On Hold participants the following message is displayed MGC Manager This participant has been placed on hold and is the last participant in the queue Do vou want bo assist this participant Yes Mo Click Yes to attend a participant that was placed on hold Click No to leave the participant on hold in the Participants Queue 8 50
191. come Message dialog box When selected callers have to wait for the operator s assistance in order to connect to the conference If this check box is cleared the connection process is automatic For a detailed description of the Entry Queue or IVR Service definition see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services e Unattended conferences can also be created using SIP factories For more information see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Chapter 3 SIP Factories When an Entry Queue or conference is unattended the participants are guided to the conference using menu driven scripts that are part of the Entry Queue Service or IVR Service DTMF codes entered using the telephone touch tone keypad or the endpoint s DTMF input device usually a remote control are the callers input to voice prompts The operator is not involved in the connection process unless the participant fails to enter the destination conference password or numeric ID depending on the system configuration and the operator assistance option is enabled in the Entry Queue Service or IVR Service With some endpoints video and IP telephones the participants can add the conference numeric ID or conference password to the dial in number to form one string in TCS4 or H 323ID format Using this string the participant can connect directly to the conference without accessing the Entry Queue first MGC Manager User s
192. con 6 20 Designating a VIP Participant MGC Manager User s Guide Volume During an On Going Conference you can designate a participant who requires preferential attention during the conference This designation is the VIP status However the VIP status does not change the role of the participant VIP participants are indicated with the V P ia icon To designate a participant as VIP l In the Browser pane the Monitor pane or the Status pane of the main window right click the participant s icon and then click Properties The Participant s Properties dialog box opens Click the Identification tab The Participant s Properties Identification dialog box opens Select the VIP check box to assign the new status to the participant and then click OK John Properties Video Sources H245 Disconnection Cause Resource Details Identification Advanced Connection Infot Connection Info2 Name lJ ohn Connection Type Interface Type Dial out H323 Participant IP Signaling Port 172 22 133 i720 Alias Name Alias Type Jiohnt H323 ID Extension Identifier String User Defined 1 User Defined 2 User Defined 3 User Defined 4 Listening Yolume 5 Broadcasting Volume 5 Audio Only OK Cancel Apply 6 21 Chapter 6 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences The selected participant becomes a VIP in the On Going Conference a
193. conference under the same name Alternatively to copy the participant s details to the new conference under a new name a Click Paste Participant As The Participant Properties dialog box opens b Type the participant name or modify any of the participant s properties such as the User Defined fields c Click OK The participant s details will be copied to the new conference under the new name or with the modified properties To move the participant s details using the drag and drop method l In the MGC Manager expand the On Going Conferences or Reservations list until you locate the source conference from which to copy the participant In the Reservations database expand the Groups tree until you locate the source conference from which to copy the participant Inthe Participants database expand the Groups tree until you locate the participant to copy In the MGC Manager expand the On Going Conferences list until you locate the destination conference to which to copy the participant Click the icon of the participant that you want to copy and then drag the participant icon to the icon of the destination conference The participant is copied to the new location 6 51 Chapter 6 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences Muting Audio for a Conference 6 52 The MGC Manager enables you to mute several participants at the same time using the Conference Properties Video Sources dial
194. configuration A different Entry Queue may be defined for Video and for Audio Only participants or the same Video Entry Queue can be used by all participants provided that the audio algorithm is set to G 711 telephone standard For a detailed description of Entry Queues see Chapter amp Attended and Unattended Conferences Audio Only and Video conferences can be managed by an operator or run unattended in which case the participants manage the conference themselves with the meeting organizer optionally having additional privileges In unattended conferencing no operator is available for assistance during the connection process or during the On Going Conference Participant connection to the conference is guided by voice prompts and participants or meeting organizers can control certain aspects of the conference In attended conferencing an operator controls the connection process of participants and the On Going Conference An attended conference is a service designed usually for large conferences that require the personal touch There may be configurations where the MGC system is set to unattended mode but operator assistance is available upon request The conferencing attended unattended mode is set in the IVR module either at the Entry Queue level in the Entry Queue Service or the conference level in the IVR Service Operator Attended Conferences In many attended conferences the operator manages and controls participant
195. connection with the MCU Mode Local Displays the actual capabilities used by the MCU Communication when establishing the connection with the Mode participant 6 Click the Disconnection Cause tab to view the causes for the participant s inability to connect to the conference The Participant Properties Disconnection Cause dialog box opens Raymond Properties Identification Advanced ConnectionInfol Connection Info2 Identification l Advanced Connection Info Connection Info2 Video Sources H245 Disconnection Cause Resource Details Video Sources SDP Disconnection Cause Resource Details rm Call Disconnection Reason r Call Disconnection Reason Operator Disconnect Bonding Failure Operator Disconnect Bonding Failure No Net Connection Bad H243 Connection C No Net Connection eee eens Participant Hang Up C Resource Defficiency Rationi Hangtp e SS C V Gate No Response C Gatekeeper Failure C Gate No Response C Gatekeeper Failure Security Failure H323 Failure Secunty Failure note Cause ae Remote busy Video Disconnection Reason Secondary Incoming video channel does not match conference video settings m Video Disconnection Reason Secondary Incoming video channel does not match conference video settings Remote device does not support the current video parameters Remote device does not support the current video
196. corresponds to a Click amp View DTMF command the appropriate help topic is displayed For example enter 2 on the DTMF input device and the system displays the Personal Layout topic POLYCOM Help topic describing how to change the participant s Personal Layout display To modify your Personal Layout enter 2 then enter the code for the desired layout My IP 172 22 133 39 jim t J9 f PN VideoMail Call Controls Returning to the Previous Screen a If you are in the Video Layout menu screen you can return to the previous screen by entering the appropriate DTMF code default code is pound key on the DTMF input device If you are in the Help screen selecting the back option closes the Help topic and displays the Click amp View Main menu screen To return to the previous screen Enter the pound key on the endpoint s DTMF input device 11 24 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Requesting Operator Assistance a4 You can request the operator s assistance by entering the appropriate DTMF code on the DTMF input device To request Operator Assistance from the Click amp View screens e On the DTMF input device enter zero 0 to request the operator s assistance The Click amp View application closes and you are returned to the conference to wait for operator assistance There is no indication on your endpoint s screen that you have been added to the Participant Queue Assistance R
197. current event It can indicate problems with the network which may affect the audio and video quality The ratio between the number of lost packets and the number of transmitted packets since the last RTCP report Peak in parentheses indicates the highest ratio recorded since the channel opened The number of received or transmitted packets according to the channel type since the channel has opened This field is for information only and does not cause the display of the exclamation point Displays the network jitter the deviation in time between the arriving packets as reported in the last RTCP report This is usually caused by network congestion or route changes Peak in parentheses reflects the maximum network jitter since the channel opened Indicates the time it takes a packet to travel from one end to another in milliseconds The listed value is derived from the RTCP report MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Table 5 16 IP Participant Properties Connection Info1 Parameters Sync Counters Status Channel The channel type Source The name of the participant currently viewed by this participant In a Software Continuous Presence conference the Source displays the names of the participants currently viewed in the Video Layout window Position The video layout position indicates the place of each participant as they appear on screen during an On Going Software Continuous Presence conference For example I
198. d MGC Manager A This participant has been placed on hold and is the last participant in the queue Do vou want bo assist this participant Yes Mo 8 51 Chapter 8 Entry Queues Operator Conferences and Attended Conferencing Click Yes to attend a participant that was placed on hold Click No to leave the participant on hold in the Participants Queue To place a participant On Hold e Inthe Attended Participant window click the Hold button Attended Participant Karen x r Attened Participant Patticipant Name Karen M VIP I Chair Person User Defined 1 User Defined 3 User Defined 2 User Defined 4 Disconnect j f 1 Broadcasting Volume 5 __ Listening Volume 5 Apply Operator 1 i r Broadcasting Yolume 5 __ Listening Volume 5 Join End Join Mute Audio r Conferences Search Value FO Search In Ongoingmeetings ss Conference Name Numericld User Defined 1 User Defined 2 User Defined 3 Meeting Type 4CIF 2228 Sep 18 2005 0 Ongoing Meeting Polycom Finance Sep 19 2005 0 Ongoing Meeting gt New Conference Sti J Auto Attend Next Participant Next By Time S A IV Include On Hold Participants To Home Conf F3 Close Alternatively press the selected shortcut key combination as it appears on the Hold button the default shortcut key is lt
199. d IP only H323 call close Remote The endpoint rejected the reject call IP only H323 call close Remote The gatekeeper could not unreachable find the endpoint s address IP only H323 call close The reason for the Unknown reason disconnection is unknown for example the endpoint disconnected without giving a reason IP only H323 call close Closed The MCU disconnected by MCMS the call IP only H323 call close Need A card failure occurred maintenance IP only H323 call close Small The gatekeeper allocated bandwidth insufficient bandwidth to the connection with the endpoint IP only H323 call close The gatekeeper rejected Gatekeeper reject ARQ the endpoint s ARQ IP only A 7 Appendix A Disconnection Causes Table A 1 Primary Disconnection Reasons Continued H323 Failure cont H323 call close No port There are no ports left in left the IP card IP only H323 call close The gatekeeper sent a Gatekeeper DRQ DRQ IP only H323 call close No For internal use IP only destination IP value H323 call close Remote The endpoint did not has not sent capability send its capabilities to the gatekeeper IP only H323 call close Audio The endpoint did not channels not open open the audio channel IP only H323 call close Need to For internal use IP only wait T120 board H323 call close Bad There was a problem in remote cap the capabilities sent by the endpo
200. d e P card e MUX card Available Conference Types Video and Audio Audio Only Video and Audio Audio Only Video and Audio Functionality Enables Standard Meeting Rooms Meet Me Per Conference Video conferences Enables ISDN and PSTN participants Enables VoIP H 323 participants SIP participants require installation of an IP card No IVR enabled features No Entry Queues No Video capabilities No encryption capabilities Enables Standard Meeting Rooms Meet Me Per Conference Video conferences Enables VoIP H 323 participants SIP participants require installation of an IP card IVR enabled features Audio Only and Video Entry Queues COP conferences Video capabilities No encryption capabilities Enables Standard Meeting Rooms Meet Me Per Conference Video conferences Enables VoIP H 323 participants Enables SIP participants IVR enabled features Audio Only and Video Entry Queues COP conferences Video Capabilities Encryption capabilities Chapter 4 Defining Conferences and Participants 4 16 Configuration Guidelines IVR enabled Video conferences and Entry Queue Access conferences require the installation of the Audio card in the MCU Video Continuous Presence conferences are routed to the Standard Video card when the MCU includes both Video and Video cards The operator can change this selection manually when setting up the conference in the Conference Properties Resource Force
201. d Participants Defining a New On Going Video Conference To define a new On Going video conference 1 Connect to an MCU and expand its options tree For details see Chapter 3 MGC Manager Basics 2 Right click the On Going Conferences icon and then click New Conference e IN Product Management Normal MCU Configuration z ul a Pa a See a Ee a T LEE E E e e New Conference PRIME Ally es Haste is Fo t PSS Hye Paste SIP Factory Hs 4 20 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume The conference properties are logically grouped in the following tabs General lets you define the basic conference parameters such as name duration password and type of access Here you also define the conference type media network and type of video session Settings tets you define the conference video options such as COP FECC Encryption cascading and more as well as the media technical parameters such as line rate audio algorithms and video options Participants lets you set options for participant connections and add participants from the Participants database templates or define new participants Video Sources lets you select the preferred video display and layout when the video session is Continuous Presence not applicable with other types of video session and to enable the Lecture Mode not applicable with Continuous Presence So
202. d and blocked by the MCU Audio transmission from the conference to the participant site is blocked video only The audio channel of the participant is muted by the participant and by the MCU Audio transmission from the conference to the participant is blocked video only The audio channel of the participant is muted by the operator and by the MCU Audio transmission from the conference to the participant is blocked video only The audio channel of the participant is muted by the participant operator and the MCU The audio channel of the participant is muted by the participant the operator and the MCU Audio transmission from the conference to the participant is blocked video only 5 23 Chapter 5 Monitoring Conferences Participant s Video Status Table 5 5 lists icons that indicate the current video status of the participant Table 5 5 Participant Video Status Icons LC The video channel of the participant is connected The participant is disconnected from the video conference The video channel could not be connected therefore the participant is connected as Secondary audio only The video channel is muted by the participant from the endpoint The video channel is muted by the operator The video channel is muted by the participant and by the operator E The video channel is muted by the MCU Lecture Show The video channel is muted by the participant and the MCU i Lecture Show i Th
203. d processing time for an Annex D image is 2 seconds When the request to send the Annex D image is received the Video MCU can be in one of the following states Table 6 1 Annex D Image Processing and Video MCU State Video MCU state when receiving Annex D image The Annex D sender is video muted The chair request image transmission is denied Some of the other endpoints are video The request is accepted These muted participants are able to see the image but are not seen by other participants Video MCU behavior The Lecture Mode is ON and the The chair request image transmission sender of the Annex D image is not the is denied lecturer The Lecture Mode is ON and the The request is accepted sender of the Annex D is the lecturer 6 66 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Table 6 1 Annex D Image Processing and Video MCU State Continued Video MCU state when receiving Video MCU behavior Annex D image The Video Force feature is enabled The request for Annex D overrides the and a participant other than the sender forced video therefore the Annex D is selected in the full screen 1x1 processing continues The operator selects forces an The chair request image transmission endpoint other than the sender in the is denied According to H 320 full screen window at the conference recommendation level The following operations can be performed during the transmission of Annex D images e Spea
204. d starting an On Going Conference as well as instructions for defining new participants Chapter 5 Monitoring Conferences Describes options available during On Going Conferences for general monitoring conference level monitoring and participant monitoring MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Chapter 6 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences A description of operations that can be performed during an On Going Conference Chapter 7 Meet Me per Conferences and Meeting Rooms Describes the methods for reservation less conferencing and how to define Meet Me conferences Describes how to monitor On Going Meet Me conferences and how to set up and monitor Meeting Room conferences Chapter 8 Entry Queues Operator Conferences and Attended Conferencing Describes Entry Queues and Operator conferences Includes step by step instructions for setting up Entry Queues and Operator conferences Lists all the Attended Conferencing options Chapter 9 Conference Reservations Describes how to define and schedule conference Reservations and recurring conferences Chapter 10 Lecture Mode and Presentation Options Describes and includes step by step instructions for setting up and monitoring Lecture Mode Presentation Mode and Lecture Show conferences Chapter 11 Click amp View Describes how to activate and use the Click amp View application Appendix A Disconnection Causes Lists the various disconnection causes according to
205. d the Status panes indicates the conference is now locked When unlocking the conference this icon is removed from these columns To lock and unlock a conference from the Conference Properties dialog box P Expand the On Going Conferences list right click the conference icon and then click Properties The Conference Properties dialog box opens Click the Settings tab The Conference Properties Settings dialog box opens Select the Conference Lock check box to lock the conference or clear it to unlock the conference Budget Properties Product Management x General Scheduler Settings Patticipants Video Sources Resource Force Ongoing State Meet Me Per Cont Recording M General Settings Restricted Line Rate 2B Msg Service Type ke Video Rate In ut Msg Service Name F Conference Gn Port T Encryption F Silence Vix 1000 lt lt Basic l I Conference Lock Chair Control None _ e Meath Dalles Cascade None z F Start Conf Requires Chairperson F OnHold Master Name None T Terminate After Chairperson Exits J Enable Invite T120 Rate N one 7 Auto Termination FECC LSD Rate None Before First Join 5 Min After Last Quit fi Min Media Settings Audio Ala fa uto Dual Stream Mode fin one r Pene T Roll Call Pro Moation None 7 M Entry Tone Roll Call announcement aien Auto V End Time Alert Tone
206. data is copied to the clipboard from where it can be pasted in other text processing applications MGC Manager User s Guide Volume The following is a sample of Reservation or Conference information The first section lists the Reservation general parameters and the second section lists the Participants parameters Operator Data OperatorName Duke Reservation Data Reservation Name Polycom Id 1122 Conf Entry Password Web Chairperson Password Start Time Feb 10 2004 07 07 00 PM Duration 02 00 00 Line Rate 2B Restrict No Audio Alg Auto Video Protocol Auto Video Format Auto Frame Rate Auto T120 Rate None Attended None AV Message Name Operator Conference No Talk Hold Time 1 5 Audio Mix Depth 3 Video Layout Single Frame Lecture mode Off VideoSession Video Switching Cascade Mode Participants Lynne Connection Type Dial Out Interface Type H323 Service Name 323 IP 172 22 132 183 Signaling port 1720 Alias name Alias Type H323 Id Channel Width 64 kbps Number of Channels 2 Bonding Mode Auto Chair No Voice Data Node Type Terminal Restrict Only No Duke IP Connection Type Dial Out Interface Type H323 Service Name 323 IP 172 22 133 39 Signaling port 1720 Alias name Alias Type H323 Id 6 71 Chapter 6 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences Channel Width 64 kbps Number of Channels 2 Bonding
207. dden Faulty An exclamation point appears next to the secure secure conference icon when one of the following conference statuses occurs e Empty No participant was defined for this conference or none of the defined participants are connected Single Party Only one participant is defined or only one of the defined participants Is connected Not Full Not all of the defined participants are connected Faulty Connection Participants are connected but the connection is problematic and the conference cannot run normally Resource Deficiency The resources currently installed in the MCU such as audio cards are insufficient for the requested conference Bad Resources A fault occurred in one of the cards Due to the locked nature of conference no action can be taken to resolve these problems End of The secure conference is about to end conference alert for Secure conference 5 29 Chapter 5 Monitoring Conferences Dynamic Highest Common Mechanism in Video Switching 5 30 In Video Switching conferences the Highest Common mechanism enables the MCU to select the optimal video parameters for the conference according to the highest video capabilities that are common to all the endpoints participating in the conference The Highest Common mechanism improves the connectivity between endpoints eliminates Secondary connections and facilitates Entry Queue Access and participant s moves during conferenc
208. ded On hold by IVR Faulty connected Dec 10 2003 15 18 35 Audio 1 ACCORD by you M Liz Onhold On hold by IVR Connected Dec 10 2003 15 19 57 Audio 1 M Michelle Onhold On hold by IVR Connected Dec 10 2003 15 18 40 Audio 1 Ta Zoe Onhold Asked for private help Dec 10 2003 15 18 55 Audio 1 The following participant parameters are displayed in the Participants Queue window Table 8 3 Participants Queue Parameters Name The participants name and an icon indicating the participant status Possible statuses are On Hold Attended or Wait For more information about participant statuses see Chapter 5 Additional Participant Statuses on page 5 21 State The reason the participant is moved to the Participants Queue and the connection status Queue Access The date and time the participant entered the Time Participants Queue 8 34 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Table 8 3 Participants Queue Parameters Continued Destination The name of the destination conference when Conference known or the name of the Entry Queue to which the participant has connected The conference name is known when the participant was connected to the conference and is moved from the conference to the Participants Queue or the Operator conference For example when the participant has requested assistance Operator The login name of the operator who is assisting the participant This information is useful when there are several ope
209. defining a new filter see Chapter 8 Using Participants Queue Filters on page 8 36 Table 3 7 Participant Queue Filter Toolbar Buttons Participant Queue Lists the Participant Queue filters New Filter Filter List currently defined in the system PARTICIPANTS Participant Queue Opens the Participants Queue Filter aes Filter dialog box where you define a new Participants Queue Filter Delete Filter Deletes the selected Participant DELETE FILTER i Queue Filters Q amp A Toolbar MGC Manager User s Guide Volume The Q amp A toolbar is enabled when you click an icon of a participant in an On Going Conference or the icon of a participant waiting in the Q amp A queue The Q amp A toolbar contains the following buttons Table 3 8 Q amp A Toolbar Buttons Next Questioner Add Participant to Q amp A Remove Participant from Q amp A Ask Question Stop Questioner Move Participant to First Position in Q amp A Clears all participants from the Question amp Answer Q amp A queue Lets the next participant in the Q amp A queue ask questions Adds a participant to the Q amp A queue Removes a participant from the Q amp A queue Lets the participant ask a question even if he or she is not next in queue Stops the current questioner Moves the participant to the first place in the Q amp A queue enabling this participant to become the next questioner 3 19 Chapter 3
210. definition of Audio Only T1 CAS participants see the MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Chapter 2 Defining Participant Properties H 323 the endpoint uses the H 323 protocol SIP the endpoint uses the SIP protocol The selection of the Interface Type changes the displayed fields in the Participant Properties dialog box 4 89 Chapter 4 Defining Conferences and Participants ISDN ATM MPI T1 CAS Participant Definition ISDN ATM MPI T1 CAS participants have the same parameters as they all use the H 320 communication protocol To define a new ISDN ATM MPI T1 CAS participant x x Identification Advanced Identification Advanced Name Name Connection Type 4E Connection Type Interface Type SD Dial out Participant Numbers Participant Numbers MCU Numbers MCU Numbers Se Extension Identifier String Extension Identifier String Meet me per Bonding Phone Number Meet me per Bonding Phone Number Party v Party X User Defined 1 User Defined 2 User Defined 1 User Defined 2 User Defined 3 User Defined 4 User Defined 3 User Defined 4 Broadcasting Volume 5 Listening Yolume 5 Broadcasting Volume 5 Listening Volume 5 i ute fhe a eP a elie het MY hs Teer wis T Audio Only J YIP Save Participant Cancel Hep Ao caos Hep 1 Define the following ISDN ATM MPI T1 CAS parameters Table 4 6 ISDN ATM MPI T
211. deo conference view a video slide On Hold and The conference was placed on Locked hold and is locked to dial in participants IVR Service A video conference with an enabled IVR Service Participant is in the Entry Queue The participant is connected to the MCU and has entered the Entry Queue or the IVR queue Voting Voting session Is in progress where participants express their preference on a set of choices using the touch tone keypad Exclusive A text indication that this Speaker participant is the conference s Exclusive Speaker in this mode all other participants are automatically muted An icon is displayed in the Audio column Connected Lists the number of participants currently connected to the conference 5 14 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Table 5 2 On Going Conference Monitor Pane Columns Continued Column Description Name gt Connection Indicates the connection status of the conference or a participant Additional statuses are available during a Greet and Guide conference Conference Connection Status No Indication The conference is running smoothly No participant was defined for this conference or none of the defined participants are connected Not Full Not all the participants who were defined for this conference are connected Faulty Participants are connected but the Connection connection is problematic therefore the conference cannot run normally
212. des capabilities for management and monitoring of participants and conferences including the following Lecture Mode Lecture Show or Presentation Mode in Continuous Presence conferences Far End Camera Control FECC LSD in video conferences H 243 Cascading conferences H 243 Chair Control for video conferences Streaming of video and data according to endpoint type Dual Stream Management and monitoring of Voting and Q amp A sessions Automatic termination of idle no participants conferences Automatic extension of conference duration Control of listening and broadcasting audio volume for individual participants Automatic detection and muting of noisy line participants SilenceIT Auto Gain Control AGC noise and audio volume regulation for individual participants Advanced control and greetings for attended conferences Conference control via DTMF codes from user s endpoint or telephone Entry exit and end of conference alert indications Media encryption Modification of certain conference properties Option to add and invite new participants during conference Display of all defined reservations for multiple MCUs Easily accessed Call Detail Records CDR Cut copy amp paste and or multiple drag amp drop of participants Active display of all system resources Active display of all conferences and participants from multiple MCUs Real time monitoring of each participant s connection status and properties MGC Manager
213. details see Chapter 3 Connecting to an MCU on page 3 21 e UU Product Management Normal mE MCU Configuration i a ON Going Conferences 0 i ae On Going Gateway Sessions 0 i tes ae Participants Queue EEE Reservations 0 meia Meeting Rooms Entry Queues amp SIP Factories 6 2 Right click the Reservations icon and then click New Reservation ER Reservations 1 2 m Hew Reservation New Operator Reservation Print All Faste Etr Paste As GirltP Paste SIP Factory As 9 3 Chapter 9 Conference Reservations The Reservation Properties General dialog box opens allowing you to define the general parameters of the Reservation Default Conference Properties Product Management Update Remak In the Name box enter the Reservation name Define the Reservation type duration and other general parameters as for an On Going Conference For more details see Table 4 4 Conference Properties General on page 4 22 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume 4 Click the Scheduler tab The Reservation Properties Scheduler dialog box opens Default Conference Properties Product Management x General Scheduler Settings Participants Video Sources Resource Force Recording Starting Date KE Octob 3 4 5 10 11 12 17 18 19 Z 25 26 3 1 2 er 2004 Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu 29 30 6 7 13 14 20 21 27 28 3 4
214. dial in number will be used for all dial in connections or a different dial in number will be assigned to each conference or each participant In addition to the dialing method you must define whether the conference is operator Attended or Unattended When defining a conference you select the media resources Audio Only or Video amp Audio the parameters which determine the quality of the media transmission and the operations that can be performed during the conference Scheduled Conferences Standard conferences can be arranged ahead of time and are scheduled to start immediately or later Scheduling involves the definition of all the conference parameters including the conference type attended unattended mode line rate media quality and the conference participants optional Reservation Templates containing conference parameters can be used to schedule conferences saving the need to repeatedly define new similar conferences with the same parameters Different templates can be defined for specific conference settings Conferences can be scheduled via the MGC Manager the browser based WebCommander application or via Microsoft Outlook using the MGC Personal Scheduler Add on On Going Conferences An On Going Conference is a conference that starts immediately or when the scheduled reservation date and time is reached An On Going Conference can be started in one of the following ways e From the On Going Conferences New C
215. display up to 33 characters of the site s name depending on the window s layout size Figure 5 1 shows an example site name display in the Polycom ViaVideo endpoint window POLYCOM Full Screen Adeo Only Y A Videohiail Figure 5 1 Site Name Display in ViaVideo The system can only display the site names that have been defined in the endpoints Endpoint site names are displayed when the appropriate flags have been enabled in the system cfg file e The endpoint site names cannot be modified from the MGC Manager or the Ly Click amp View applications e With H 320 participants the Chair Control parameter must be set to Auto e Display of participant names is not available in conferences using QCIF video format e H 320 participant names in VSW conferences can be displayed by setting the FECC CHAIR flag in the System cfg to NO For more details see MGC Administrator s Guide Chapter 5 Edit system cfg 5 36 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Conference Level Monitoring In addition to the general conference information that appears in the Status and the Monitor tables you can view the details of the conference current status and setup parameters using the Conference Properties dialog boxes While checking the properties you can also edit several parameters To view parameters of an On Going Conference 1 Inthe Status pane Browser pane or Monitor pane right click the icon of the co
216. ds and is not required for participants connecting to conferences running on Video cards that provide high quality video combined with high line rates using one video port instead of two The MGC unit can provide high quality video 30 frames per second for incoming and outgoing video streams for line rates up to T1 E1 in Transcoding and Continuous Presence conferences This is done by allocating two video ports to the participant One video port is used for encoding while the other is used for decoding the incoming video stream Select this option to enable the high quality video feature for the participant Note e To work with 30 frames per second the High Frame Rate flag in the system cfg must be enabled To work with bit rates higher than 768 Kbps the High Bit Rate flag in the system cfg must be enabled This option is disabled for Video Switching conferences Enable PSTN For internal use only Dial in 4 Click OK to complete the definition of the H 323 or SIP participant The participant is added to the On Going Conference Reservation or to the Reservation Template depending on the conference definition mode 4 109 Chapter 4 Defining Conferences and Participants 4 110 Quality of Service for IP Participants Quality of Service QoS is a collective measure of the level of service delivered to a customer QoS is the level of assurance for an application that the network can meet its service requirements
217. e 1 Inthe Browser Status or Monitor pane display the list of participants in the Operator conference 2 Right click the icon of the participant to be placed on hold and then click Hold Move Participant F Copy Participant Ctrl C Cut Ctrl Delete Del Exclusive Speaker O84 Management F athend FZ To Home Conf F3 Mute Audio Ctrl M Mute video Block Audio Turn OFF AGC Properties The Participant icon changes to Hold in the Status column of the Home conference participants list in the Monitor and Status panes and in the Participants Queue 8 59 Chapter 8 Entry Queues Operator Conferences and Attended Conferencing To place a participant on hold in the Participants Queue tree or the Participants Queue window 1 Display the list of participants in the Participants Queue in the Browser or Status pane or in the Participants Queue window 2 Right click the icon of the participant to be placed on hold and then click Hold To Home Conf Polycom F3 Move F Operator Guidance Delete Del Stop Monitoring The Participant icon changes to Hold in the Status column of the Home conference participants list in the Monitor and Status panes and in the Participants Queue Performing Operations using the Participants Queue Toolbar You can perform operations using the Participants Queue toolbar from the following panes and lists e Browser Status and Monitor panes On Going Conferences list e Br
218. e Table A 1 Primary Disconnection Reasons Continued SIP Failure cont SIP client error 488 SIP forbidden SIP global failure 603 SIP global failure 604 SIP global failure 606 The endpoint sent a SIP Client Error 488 Not Acceptable Here response IP only The SIP server rejected the request The server understood the request but is refusing to fulfill it IP only A SIP Global Failure 603 Decline response was returned The participant s endpoint was successfully contacted but the participant explicitly does not wish to or cannot participate IP only A SIP Global Failure 604 Does Not Exist Anywhere response was returned The server has authoritative information that the user indicated in the Request URI does not exist anywhere IP only A SIP Global Failure 606 Not Acceptable response was returned IP only Appendix A Disconnection Causes Table A 1 Primary Disconnection Reasons Continued SIP Failure cont SIP moved permanently SIP moved temporarily SIP not found SIP redirection 300 SIP redirection 305 The requested resource is no longer available at the Server and no forwarding address is known IP only The endpoint moved permanently The user can no longer be found at the address in the Request URI IP only The remote endpoint moved temporarily IP only The endpoint was not found The server has definitive information tha
219. e Properties General dialog box Remarks entered previously by the operator or other operators can be read during the On Going conference Remarks can also be added from the Web via the WebCommander application The remarks are added to the CDR file for retrieval during the billing stage Remarks are added in the On Going Conference Properties General dialog box in the Remarks field Previous remarks written for the conference are displayed in the Remarks History box in the ascending order latest entry at top of the list deb5 Properties Product Management B x General Scheduler Settings Participants Video Sources Resource Force Ongoing State Recording Name deb5 Conf Entry Password 123244 Duration 2 00 Web Chairperson Password 321 960 Billing Numeric ID 2365 MCU Product Management User Defined 1 a Entry Queue Access User Defined 2 P ya VEE eT Coni User Defined 3 PO r Conference Type Media Supported Network r ideo Session Standard Audio C IP Video Switching Meeting Room Video Audio G A Transcoding Update Remark Remarks History 27 09 2004 16 05 14 POLYCOM rem3 27 09 2004 16 05 08 POLYCOM rem2 27 09 2004 16 04 35 reservation remark MGC Manager User s Guide Volume To enter a remark during an On Going Conference I Expand the On Going Conference list right click the On Going Conferen
220. e participant s icon e Double click the icon of the participant you want to attend The participant is automatically moved to the Operator conference and the Attended Participant window opens For more details see The Attended Participants Dialog Box on page 8 41 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Moving Multiple Participants to the Home Conference When several participants are placed on hold they can all be selected using standard Windows multi selection options and then moved to the appropriate conference together To move several participants who are on hold to the Home conference l List the participants who are on hold in the appropriate conference or in the Participants Queue tree or the Participants Queue window Select the participants that are on hold Move the selected participants to their destination conferences using one of the following methods a Using the To Home Conference option in the right click menu Right click the icon of one of the highlighted participants and then click To Home Conf b Using the Move option in the right click menu Right click the icon of one of the highlighted participants and then click Move A list of conferences appears Click the name of the conference to which to move the participants c Using the Participants Queue toolbar Click the icon of one of the highlighted participants Click the To Home Conf E button on the Par
221. e Conference Properties Participants dialog box opens Polycom Properties Prod Mgmt i E x General Scheduler Settings Participants Video Sources Resource Force Ongoing State Pre Defined Participants Conference Participants Debbie H323 Roger Audio Nadine Daisy DI ddd Debbie Debbie H323 debbie ISDN DI Duke Knoop Duke video duke video E1111 F Allow Wndetined Parties Min Participants fo Pre Defined Participants File C Documents and Settings Nadine Desktop triall usr F Dial Gut Manually Browse From database From directory 3 Click the New button The Participant Properties dialog box opens 4 Set up the required properties in the Identification and Advanced tabs of the Participants Properties dialog box 5 Click OK The new participant is listed in the Conference Participants list 6 Click OK to complete the conference editing and return to the MGC Manager main window The participant s name appears in the Monitor and Status panes of the main window 6 44 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume To add a Participant Template to the conference You can add a participant template to the conference from the Participant database or from a Participant Template file l In the On Going Conferences list right click the conference icon and then click Properties The Conference Properties dialog box opens Click the Participants tab The C
222. e VIP status does not change the role of the participant Questioner A participant who is currently waiting in the Question and Answer queue Current questioner The current questioner in a Question and Answer session Disconnected participant When any type of defined participant is disconnected from the conference the respective icon is disabled Faulty connected or Attended participant An exclamation point next to the icon indicates that the participant has a problem and requires operator s assistance The cause of the problem is listed in the Connection column 5 12 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Table 5 2 On Going Conference Monitor Pane Columns Continued Column Description Name gt Status Displays additional information about On Going Conferences and their participants and the number of connected participants Locked The conference is locked to dial in cen ear participants 5 Lecture Mode The conference is set to Lecture amp Mode For details see Chapter 10 Lecture Mode Definition on page 10 2 Presentation The conference is set to Ea Mode Presentation Mode For details see Chapter 10 Presentation Mode Monitoring on page 10 12 5 13 Chapter 5 Monitoring Conferences Table 5 2 On Going Conference Monitor Pane Columns Continued Column Description Name 7 On Hold The conference is on hold all participants hear background music and in a vi
223. e allocations Meeting Room conferences are defined once but can be activated many times when required When using the Meet Me Per Conference option there is no need to specify the capabilities of each endpoint they are automatically detected and are assigned the conference parameters Any participant who dials the conference number can connect to the conference until all the MCU resources are utilized or the maximum number of participants per conference is reached However resources may be reserved for a specific number of undefined participants In such a case additional undefined participants may be allowed to join the conference if there are enough resources available Chapter 7 Meet Me per Conferences and Meeting Rooms Defining a Meet Me Conference The Meet Me Per Conference option is enabled in three stages Enabling the Meet Me Per Conference option in the Conference Properties General dialog box Specifying that undefined participants may connect to the conference in the Conference Properties Participants dialog box and defining the number of participants if any for which MCU resources should be reserved You can also define the maximum number of participants allowed in the conference Defining the conference dial in number s in the Conference Properties Meet Me Per Conference dialog box You can also create a Meet Me Reservation or Reservation template To define a new Meet Me Conference l 2 In
224. e endpoint is received by the MCU For H 323 participants indicates the total line rate of all the channels agreed rate in which data sent from the endpoint is received by the MCU Retries Left Indicates the remaining number of attempts the system makes to reach disconnected participants and connect them to the conference You set this parameter in the Options menu Communication option Once the participant connects to the conference the number of retries is set to 0 Media Identifies the participant s media types Audio Video and Data Member Video Identifies the participant who is viewed by other conference Sources participants In a Video Switching conference the current video source is the speaker of this conference In a Continuous Presence conference depending on the Video Layout several participants may be viewed simultaneously Channels Identifies the number of channels that are used for connecting this participant Note This parameter is not displayed for H 323 participants Aggregation Displays the aggregation method of the channels that are used for connecting this participant H 221 Bonding or Multi Rate Note This parameter is not displayed for H 323 participants The participant ID as assigned by the system Sync Loss For ISDN ATM MPI participants indicates the general Count synchronization status R indicates the endpoint remote status while L indicates the MCU status A dash indicate
225. e following video layouts are available in Continuous Presence Classic and Quad Views Each layout is represented by a DTMF code Table 11 2 Available Video Layouts 11 16 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Table 11 2 Available Video Layouts Continued DTMF Code Classic CP Quad Views CP On the endpoint s DTMF input device enter the DTMF code displayed next to the desired layout For example if the desired layout in Continuous Presence Classic is the 5 1 layout enter 5 as the DIMF code The Click amp View application closes and the new conference layout is shown on the endpoint s screen The new layout is viewed from any endpoint that is not currently using a personal layout Viewing the New Layout in the MGC Manager The MGC Manager application is updated with the new layout selected for the conference The new layout can be checked in the Conference Properties Video Sources dialog box Polycom Classic Properties Product Management E f x General Scheduler Settings Participants Video Sources Resource Force Ongoing State Meet Me Per Conf Video Layout Video Session Video Switching Transcoding Background au gt Auto Selec MV Layout Border a MV Speaker Notation e Audio Muted Participants luto Select uto Seler Duke IP v Roger Vv Varda _ Due Ie Ey Auto Selec Duke IP Au
226. e is enabled and the video settings are forced by the MCU When Video Protocol is set to H 263 or H 264 and the endpoint does not support it the participant is connected as Secondary Audio only During an On Going ISDN ATM MPI conference this setting may be disabled Recording Designate the participant as an audio recording port connected to an external recording device Select one of the following e None The participant is not connected to an external recording device e Dial up The participant is used as the recording port to an external device For more details see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Chapter 9 Recording 4 97 Chapter 4 Defining Conferences and Participants 4 98 Table 4 7 ISDN ATM MPI T1 CAS Participant Advanced Continued Encryption Auto Detect Restrict Only Media information can be encrypted using an AES 128 algorithm The Encryption options are affected by the settings of the participant level flag in the system cfg Select the appropriate encryption setting for the participant e Auto The conference encryption setting encrypted non encrypted is applied to the participant In this mode the participant connects as encrypted only if the conference is defined as encrypted Off The participant joins the Conference as non encrypted On The participant joins the Conference as encrypted For more details about encryption see the MGC Manager User s Gu
227. e of the Home conference to which to move the participant b Using the To Home Conference option in the right click menu Right click the icon of the participant to be moved to the Home conference and then click To Home Conf Pa foe Attend Fz Attend with Details Hala To Home Conf 4udio 1 F3 Move Operator Guidance Delete Del Stop Monitoring The participant connects to the Home conference and is removed from the Participants Queue and or the Operator conference The Attended or Hold icon in the Status column of the Monitor and Status panes disappears MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Placing a Participant On Hold A participant can be placed on hold while in the Participants Queue or when participating in an Operator conference Usually the participant waiting in the Entry Queue or Participants Queue is first assisted by the operator and is then placed on hold until all the participants pertaining to the same conference are assisted and placed on hold Once all the participants are on hold they can all be connected at the same time in one operation to the conference In addition a participant in an On Going Conference can be placed on hold when he she is to be excluded from the conference for a short period To do so you have to first move the participant from the conference to the Operator conference and then place him her on hold To place a participant on Hold in the Operator conferenc
228. e played indicating that the conference is secured The voice message will be played only if it is configured in the IVR Message Service and if the appropriate audio file has been downloaded to the Audio card When the chairperson secures the conference the following operations cannot be performed by operators or outside participants e Join or attend the conference e View and control the participants of the conference e View and monitor the conference properties e Implement Voting 6 99 Chapter 6 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences Operations Performed During On Going Gateway Sessions 6 100 On the conference level you can terminate the gateway session in the same way as with the standard conference On the participant level you can perform the following operations in the same way as with the standard conference e Mute or unmute the participant audio channel For details see page 6 25 e Mute or unmute the participant video channel For details see page 6 27 e Delete the participant from the conference this will cause the termination of the gateway session Meet Me per Conferences and Meeting Rooms Meet Me Conferences are conferences that allow undefined dial in participants to connect to them by dialing a predefined number They are defined once and when the conference ends they are deleted from the MCU Meeting Rooms are reserved conferences based on Meet Me Conferences without resourc
229. e use Note This check box appears only when defining a participant during the definition of a Reservation template in the database Optional Click the Advanced tab The Advanced parameters definition may be skipped for most participants if the default settings are used The ZP Participant Properties Advanced dialog box opens x Identification Advanced Video Bit Rate KBits sec Auto V Auto Video Bit Rate Service Name Video Protocol awo xl Recording None ss M AGC Encryption fawo x Node Type Terminal v Quality Of Service Enhanced Video For Standard Video Cards only Not required for Video Enable PSTN Dial in V Save Participant Cancel Help H323 and SIP Participant Advanced Properties 4 105 Chapter 4 Defining Conferences and Participants 3 Define the following parameters Table 4 9 IP Participant Properties Advanced Video Bit Rate This option is enabled when the Auto Video Bit Kbits sec Rate check box is cleared It allows you to specify the participant s video transfer rate When adding a new participant during an On Going Conference this option defaults to the conference setting Note It is recommended to use multiples of 100 kilobits per second Auto Video Bit Rate Select this check box to use the Line Rate defined for the conference or clear it to define the video rate for the participant This check box is automatically selec
230. e video channel is muted by the operator and the MCU Lecture Show The video channel is muted by the participant the operator oe and the MCU Lecture Show 5 24 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Monitor Filter Using the Monitor Filter feature you can select to view only those participants who have connection problems or require the operator s assistance Participants may need assistance when e they are unable to connect to the conference e manual dial out is selected for a conference e they have requested help e they were placed on hold e the line is noisy e they are waiting in the Question and Answer queue To display only those participants who require your attention 1 Expand the On Going Conferences list 2 Right click the icon of the conference whose participants you want to monitor and then click Monitor Filter E VOICI Mew Participant Fa Terminate Del Copy Conf Chr Paste Participant Ctrl V Paste Participant As Ctrl F Participants Monitoring Filter E4 Next questioner Clear QBA Lock Conference Faulty participant Participants Requesting Assistance YOUNG Asked question I j LJ Noisy Line Print Reservation Data Video Force Drag amp Drop Properties Cancel The Participants Monitoring Filter dialog box opens 3 Select the check boxes to indicate the participant statuses that you want to monitor Clear the check boxes of the participant statuses that you d
231. e video resolution in use If the actual video only resolution is higher than resolution declared in the capabilities exchange the Faulty flag is displayed For example if the declared resolution is CIF and the actual resolution is 4CIF the Faulty flag is displayed Frame Rate The number of video frames per second that are video only transferred between the MCU and the endpoint Annexes video Indicates the H 263 annexes in use at the time of the only last RTCP report If the actual annexes used are other than the declared annexes in the capabilities exchange the Faulty flag is displayed Channel Index For Polycom Internal use only RTP Statistics This information may indicate problems with the RTP Packets network which can affect the audio and video quality Actual loss The number of missing packets counted by the IP card as reported in the last RTP Statistics report If a packet that was considered lost arrives later it is deducted from the packet loss count Packet loss is displayed 5 64 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Table 5 17 IP Participant Properties Video In Channel Info Continued Actual loss with the following details cont Accumulated N number of lost packets accumulated since the channel opened Accumulated percentage of lost packets out of the total number of packets transmitted since the channel opened Interval N number of packets lost in the last RTP report interva
232. eams prior to mixing and dynamically changes the amplification of the input signal to provide a constant output amplitude The intensity of input signals can vary due to the following factors e Microphone properties and adjustments e Background noise e Speaker s distance from microphone e Speaker s manner of speech e The AGC option is applicable to all participants using Audio resources e The AGC option is enabled in the system cfg in the AUDIO PLUS FLAGS section By default the AGC flag is set to YES and when defining new participants the AGC option is selected In some cases you may need to disable AGC for a participant during the conference if the line is too noisy and affects the quality of the audio achieved by the AGC mechanism You can enable or disable AGC using the participant right click menu or from the Participant Properties dialog box To disable AGC for an On Going Conference participant 1 Inthe Status or Monitor panes right click the participant icon and then click Turn off AGC 2 Alternatively disable AGC from the Participant Properties dialog box a In the Status or Monitor panes right click the participant icon b Click Properties The Participant Properties dialog box opens 6 31 Chapter 6 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences c Click the Advanced tab Duke IP Properties WieoSouces H28 DecomectonCaue Remuce Dt Connection Info Connection
233. econd When operating with CIF the amount of data to transmit cannot exceed 256 K bits where K equals 1024 The CIF video format has the capacity to transmit video images of 352x288 pixels at 36 45 Mbps and 30 frames per second A 4CIF format has four times the capacity of CIF QCIF has quarter the capacity of CIF Another term for span a T1 or E1 line Codec Coder decoder A device that converts voice and video into digital code and vice versa Refers to the endpoint video camera and video board that are used for videoconferencing Conference Connection between two or more endpoints exchanging video and audio information If only two endpoints are involved a conference is called point to point and no MCU is required If more than two endpoints are involved it is called a multipoint conference and an MCU Multipoint Control Unit is required as the management system See also MCU CSU Channel Service Unit Customer provided equipment that is used as an interface between a communication network and the data terminal D Channel The channel in a span or in a group of spans which is used to transmit signaling information between the public or private switch and the MGC 100 B 3 Appendix B Glossary term Explanation Term Dual Tone Multi Frequency A system of coded signals used by touch tone telephones in which a specific sound frequency or tone is assigned to each key so that the signal can be easily recognized by a co
234. ed Participants in IVR enabled conferences can be in one of the following stages Greeting Welcome Attended On Hold and Conferencing Using an IVR service the participant is guided to the conference using a voice prompt menu and DTMF input from the participant endpoint The connection is automated but an Operator is at hand to assist the caller In IVR enabled conferences set as Attended with Operator assistance the Operator controls the participant connection to the conference moving the participant from one stage to another The move is performed either interactively using drag and drop using the right click pop up menu or the appropriate buttons on the Attended Participant Conference toolbar Special icons are used to indicate the participant status in an attended conference e In the Greeting state the participants connect to the Entry Queue or directly to an VR enabled conference where they hear a welcome message and view a welcome video slide and are guided through their connection process using voice prompts In the Entry Queue participants are routed to the destination conference according to conference Numeric ID they enter Participants connecting directly to an IVR enabled conference are allowed in to the conference once they have entered the appropriate conference or chairperson password If the Entry Queue or the IVR enabled conference is set to Attended mode The Entry Queue service or the IVR service is configured t
235. ed Yes the reservation is removed from the Reservations list MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Rescheduling Reservations In some cases you may want to reschedule a conference reservation so it will start earlier immediately or later than scheduled If the MCU time is changed for example to adjust to daylight savings time the reservations are automatically updated To reschedule a conference reservation 1 Expand the Reservations list or double click the Reservations icon 2 Right click the Reservation icon and then click Properties in Mew Participant Fe Copy Res Paste Participant trl Paste Participant 4s tbri P Delete Del Print Reservation The Conference Properties dialog box opens 3 Click the Scheduler tab to define the conference start date and time Chapter 9 Conference Reservations The Scheduler dialog box opens x General Scheduler Settings Participants Video Sources Resource Force Meet Me Per Conf Recording Starting Date Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat 26 27 28 29 30 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Z 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 1 2 3 4 5 6 Starting Time 11 31 Reservation Recurrence Cance _ Help 4 Select the required date and start time To start the conference immediately change the date to the current date and the starting time to the current time 5 Click OK The Conference Prope
236. ed once and when the conference ends it is automatically deleted from the MCU You can schedule an On Going Conference a Reservation or a recurring Reservation For a detailed description of regular and recurring Reservations see Chapter 9 Meeting Room A conference without resource allocation or starting date and time that is defined once but can be activated many times A Meeting Room remains in a passive state between activations until the first participant connects to it and activates the conference When activated it becomes an On Going Conference This is one of the reservation less methods used for on demand conferencing For a detailed description of Meeting Rooms see Chapter 7 Operator A special conference used to assist participants in Attended conferences It enables the operator to have a private one on one conversation with one participant at a time without disturbing the On Going Conferences or being heard by other participants For a detailed description of attended conferencing see Chapter 8 The conference general and media parameters are defined in the same way for all these conference types MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Single dial Entry Queue An Entry Queue is a special routing lobby to which one or several dial in numbers are assigned Once connected to the Entry Queue participants are routed to their destination conference according to the conference Numeric ID or password depending on the MCU
237. ed to eliminate the need for communication equipment when two digital devices are directly connected to each other B 6 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Explanation Term Port One of 23 channels in a T1 PRI one of 24 channels ina T1 leased line or one of 30 channels in an E1 PRI POTS Plain Old Telephone System Conventional analog telephone line PRI Priority Rate Interface An ISDN interface designed for high volume data communication Consists of 23 B channels of 64 Kbps each and one D channel of 64 Kbps In Europe the PRI line provides 30 B channels one D channel Quarter CIF A video format with image size of 176x144 pixels that transmits 9 115 Mbps at 30 frames per second a quarter of the capacity of CIF See also CIF Quality of Service QoS defines the performance of a network service such as the average delay between packets RS 232 A standard for serial interface connection SIP Session Initiation Protocol An application layer protocol designed to work over IP networks A SIP service defines the properties and the IP addresses of the SIP network components Span An ISDN line or leased line A span may be of either T1 United States or E1 Europe type Also called a circuit Switched 56 line A line using protocols pre dating the ISDN protocols also called a robbed bit signaling line or a pre ISDN line T 120 A standard for data and application sharing Users can share and manipulate data as if th
238. eeeeeeeeess 3 36 Defining Conferences and Participants 4 1 ADout OPM Pe NC eS a ceaeeceessaasceneussasacnaiactes eacsduneaartadaasy aia O 4 1 Sehediled Confrontos sersisrnsnn n ene 4 2 O Going ConferentES sxnidancecricseresscsndcnaindeindoemmnsetnniaatee aunts 4 2 RS OE A E E E 4 3 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume On demand Reservation less Conferencing cceceeeeeeeees 4 3 Ad Hoc Conterencin sic eee es 4 3 Meetme OO UNS cis te sata aati amc aenceat aie cmak aeecenb ace 4 3 CO RICRO MOC VCS alii rrs ii a a rntaaaaatus 4 4 Single dial Entry Queue sasas naikina 4 5 Attended and Unattended Conferences 20 cccccccccecceeeeeeeeees 4 5 Unattended Confere ness cena AE 4 6 Comerence Media Typos cererii Geant Roti a teemieaiiases 4 7 Audio Only Conferences ansari reatet ia E 4 7 Vide CONTCICI CES fees che a N 4 7 Video Conference Settings 0s iwcin iene ai aa 4 7 VIdeo SESSION VY PCS sis hcsc edind i ctisace Sena eekeeooetaeecmnees 4 7 Video Quality Paramete ersa 4 9 Additional Video Conference Types ccccccccccsetseereeseees 4 10 Conference Types by Media ccccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 4 13 Conference Media Type According to MCU Configuration 4 14 Configuration Guidelines aar 4 16 ADOUL Participants 505 cs sccuwasanich quceeacastinstenweoantawhasns slew aabearietsuideawsiemees 4 17 Participant RoS ayan E 4 17 Participant Connection Types sessessssseesereeeess
239. efining Conferences and Participants Cascading Cascading enables users to run conferences that are distributed among two or more conferences and MCUs A participant who dials from one MCU to another establishes the link between the conferences The conferences that are part of a cascading conference may be run e onthe same MCU to overcome the maximum number of participants per conference e on separate MCUs to utilize additional resources or connect participants to their local MCU In addition you can enable H 239 People Content dual stream mode conferences with H 323 cascading The Highest Common mechanism is disabled in Cascading conferences When defining a Cascading conference all the cascaded conferences must be set to the same video protocol For a detailed description of Cascading conference options see Defining Cascading Conferences in the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume IT Chapter I Advanced Conference Settings For information about H 243 and MIH Cascading conferencing see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Chapter 5 T 120 Conference The MGC Manager enables you to define conferences using the T 120 standard that contains a series of protocols and specifications for application sharing in multi point data communications The following options are available depending on the participant equipment and software e Application sharing allowing two or more conference participants to work on t
240. efining Conferences and Participants You can view the Network Service Prefix in the Network Service Properties H 323 dialog box Network Service Properties x Settings DNS Settings H323 SIP Security Span Forwarding Gatekeeper Use Gatekeeper Of f Specify Auto Preferred Gatekeeper IF Address or Mame i 92 168 33 193 Alternate Gatekeeper IF Address or Mame Fort Paa o Service Mode Board Hunting r V Refresh H 323 Registrations Every fi z0 Seconds Cancel Apply Help chosen as the Service Mode in the IP Network Service Properties H323 dialog box Currently only Polycom RadVision and VCON MXM gatekeepers are known to support the Network Service Prefix option Gatekeepers of other manufacturers may encounter problems while defining such a conference For gatekeeper functionality and interoperability see the MGC Manager Administrator s Guide Chapter 3 Defining an IP Network Service s The gatekeeper s behavior is dependent on the type of gatekeeper service 4 74 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Conference Access for Undefined Dial in Participants Undefined participants can access a conference directly or via an Entry Queue When dialing directly to the conference if an IVR was assigned to the conference the participant first enters the VR Queue and after interacting with the IVR system and providing the appropriate information joins the conference Co
241. eived by the MCU The remote device encryption algorithm message was not received by the MCU The encryption setup process did not end on time The V Gate was unable to negotiate a connection with the endpoint Video participant parameter ATM only The endpoint failed to encrypt ISDN only The endpoint does not support the local encryption key exchange algorithm ISDN only The endpoint does not support the local encryption algorithm ISDN only The endpoint did not open the encryption signaling channel ISDN and IP The MCU did not receive the remote encryption key exchange algorithm capabilities from the endpoint ISDN only The MCU did not receive the remote encryption algorithm capabilities from the endpoint ISDN only The encryption setup process did not end on time ISDN only MGC Manager User s Guide Table A 1 Primary Disconnection Reasons Continued Security Failure Remote device cannot cont encrypt The remote device failed to start encryption Remote devices selected encryption algorithm does not match the local selected encryption algorithm Encryption key exchange failed Bonding Failure Bonding failure Long delay between channels Internal error No answer from remote participant The endpoint failed to encrypt ISDN only The endpoint failed to start the encryption system ISDN only The encryption algorithm selected by the endpoint does n
242. elds are displayed only if the Show User Defined fields option in the Conference Properties is selected in the Database Manager User Defined Defaults The titles of the User Defined fields can also be modified in the Database Manager gt Defaults gt User Defined Defaults and then loaded to the MGC Manager application To modify the Conference User Defined fields 1 Right click the On Going Conference icon and then click Properties The Conference Properties General dialog box opens Polycom Properties Product Management x General Scheduler Settings Participants Video Sources Resource Force Ongoing State Recording Polycom Conf Entry Password ft 234 Duration 2 00 Web Chairperson Password 096892 Billing JEMEA_MRKT Numeric ID arnam Name MCU marketing_all staff T Ent Marketing dept EMEA H contact Julie P r Conference Type r Media m Supported Nere POST Standard C udio C p Video Switching Meeting Room Video Audio P ISDN Transcoding ATH MPI fe Operaa Continuous Presence Remarks Update Remark Remarks History z Cancel App Heb 2 Modify the information in the User Defined fields and then click OK 6 63 Chapter 6 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences Adding Remarks During an On Going Conference 6 64 Operators can add remarks during an On Going Conference in the Conferenc
243. elephone number that has been input by the user Rather each domain through which the request passes would be given that opportunity As an example a user in an airport might log in and send requests through an outbound proxy in the airport If the users enters 411 this is the phone number for local directory assistance in the United States this number needs to be interpreted and processed by the outbound proxy in the airport and not by the user s home domain In this case tel 411 is the correct choice 4 102 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Table 4 8 IP Participant Properties Identification Continued Alias Name If you are using the endpoint s alias and not the IP H 323 Only address first select the type of alias and then enter the endpoint s alias as registered with the gatekeeper Enter the alias name using the naming conventions appropriate to its type see following Alias Type Each alias can be of a different type H 323 Only H 323 ID alphanumeric ID E 164 digits 0 9 URL ID URL style address Email ID email address format Transport ID IP address port number Party Number identical to the E 164 format Notes e Select the appropriate alias type before entering an alias name Although all types are supported the type of alias is dependent on the gatekeeper s capabilities The most commonly supported alias types are H 323 ID and E 164 Refer to your gatekeeper documentation for i
244. ence 1 Right click the On Going Conference icon and then click Properties The Conference Properties dialog box opens 2 Select the Participants tab and ensure that there is at least one Participant in the Conference Participants list 10 6 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume 3 Click the Video Sources tab The Conference Properties Video Sources dialog box opens Test Properties Product Management k p x General Scheduler Settings Participants Video Sources Resource Force Ongoing State Lecturer Layout Icon indicating that B E e B R 2H Lecture Mode is 1 3 4 5 10 active Background ea JV Layout Border wi MV Speaker Notation P Audio Muted Participants Auto Select Lecture Mode Lecture Mode z Lecturer name JV Timer J Same Layout Interval jis Sec Josh o O Select Unforced Participants OK Cancel Apply Help You can perform one of the following operations Enable or disable the Lecture Mode from the Lecture Mode drop down list select None to disable the Lecture Mode or select Lecture Mode to enable it Change the video layout for the lecturer in Continuous Presence mode by selecting another video layout For conferences running on a standard video card the asymmetrical video layouts such as 3 1 4 1 5 1 and 8 1 are disabled in Lecture Mode The selected layout affects only the lecturer displ
245. ence on page 4 47 15 If you have selected Continuous Presence as the conference Video Session click the Video Sources tab to select the appropriate Video Layout for the conference For more details see Chapter 4 To define the Video Sources settings on page 4 54 7 15 Chapter 7 Meet Me per Conferences and Meeting Rooms 16 Click the Meet Me Per Conf tab 17 18 19 The Meet Me Per Conf dialog box opens Default Conference Properties Product Management i x General Settings Participants Video Sources Meet Me Per Conf Recording Meeting Room Limited Sequences Number of Occurrences fi 4 Meet Me Service ISDN Service ISDN Network Servi Dial in Number 1 Dial in Number 2 H 323 Service H 323 Network Servi H 323 Service Prefix Cancel Help This dialog box enables you to define the Meeting Room s specific parameters Select the Limited Sequences check box to limit the number of activations If this check box is cleared the number of activations is unlimited and the Meeting Room can be saved on the MCU forever or until deleted from the MCU In the Number of Occurrences box enter the number of Meeting Room activations 0 means that the conference has an unlimited number of activations and can be in sleep mode passive forever 1 means that the conference will be activated once and then it will be deleted
246. ence the conference resumes the audio activation mode During the On Going Conference you can e Enable or disable the Lecture Mode 10 5 Chapter 10 Lecture and Presentation Options Select a new lecturer If the Lecture Mode is used in a Video Switching conference only the lecturer can send an Annex D still image Otherwise the request to broadcast an Annex D still image is rejected Below is an example of a conference in Lecture Mode MGC Manager VERSION 7 5 0 15 loj x File Edit view Template DataBase Directory Options Window Help PARTICIPANTS QUEUE FILTER L F6 Field 9 MGC 25 pug Product Management Minor Sep25 Sep 25 1148 MCU Configuration Sep 25 Sep 25 1145 On Going Conferences 2 Activities H a budget 8 Alan 3 Debbie 8 Donald On Going Gateway Sessions 0 di Participants Queue 0 Reservations O 4 ra Meeting Rooms Entry Queues amp Name Status Connection Network _ Participant Nulmbers IP Connection Type Audio Video Sync T 0 Conrected i als 172 22 172 74 Debbk on 172 22 169 72 e BEOR 172 22 172 13 Bes Diakout i EM ok 3 Reb Dial out d TH ok 3 Be Dial out d St oK 3 Ready Port 4 Participant designated as Lecture Mode conference status the Lecturer indication To control the Lecture Mode during an On Going Confer
247. ence directly from the Entry Queue without password prompting and the chairperson functionality is disabled for the conference Complete the conference definition and click OK 8 21 Chapter 8 Entry Queues Operator Conferences and Attended Conferencing Operator Conferences In attended conferences participants accessing the Entry Queue or the conference IVR queue are moved to the Participants Queue where they wait for the operator to assist them The operator then moves the participants from the Participants Queue to the destination conference During an On Going Conference the operator can take part in the conference and perform various operations such as conduct a voting session manage a Question and Answer session and place participants on hold An active Operator conference is required to assist participants during an attended conference A chairperson using DTMF codes or the WebCommander application can perform some conference management tasks in an unattended conference where no operator is required These functions are described in Chapter 6 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences However a chairperson cannot assist or manage participants Operator Functions Requiring an Active Operator Conference 8 22 On Going Attended Conferences require an active Operator conference to run on the same MCU as the attended conference The attended mode 1s usually defined in the Entry Queue Service or the IVR Service
248. ence level or at the participant level using the MGC Manager or the WebCommander application Operations at the participant level affect individual connections while those at the conference level affect all participants of the conference Some conference level operator s actions affect individual participants for example when during a Q amp A Question and Answer session they grant individual participants permission to ask questions and add them to the queue Operators can terminate a conference before the originally scheduled ending or extend its duration Alternatively they can disconnect an individual participant while the conference is in progress or temporarily mute the transmission to enable other participants to hold a private discussion Operators can manage video sources establish an operator controlled dial out connection during the conference and add new participants while the conference is in session Some conference management tasks can also be performed by chairpersons from their endpoint using DTMF codes or the WebCommander application This chapter describes the activities and options available to the operator or the chairperson during an On Going Conference Chapter 6 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences Overview The MGC Manager operator performs different roles during attended and unattended conferences Attended Conferences In attended conferences participants accessing an Entry Queue an
249. ence templates and participant templates are displayed in two separate windows e Reservations in Database Window The Reservations in Database window displays the list of currently available Reservation Templates stored in the database This window is used to initiate On Going Conferences or conferences that automatically start at a predetermined time This window automatically opens the first time the MGC Manager application is started and remains open until it is closed U Reservations in AccordDB E E Root Name LineRate Audioalg Video Session Meet me Per Conf gt Default Le cst Default Audio ia Default Audio ici Default_COP d Defaut_COP 384 kbps Auto Continuous Presence Classic sei Default_Video ci Default_Video 384 kbps Auto Continuous Presence Classic p D rim Sw CP Ermi Sw CP 384 kbps Auto Continuous Presence Software p a Ad dE Video Switch JP video Switch 384 kbps 56 G722 G711 Video Switching WebOffice Figure 3 2 Reservations in Database Window MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Participants in Database Window The Participants in Database window displays the list of currently available Participant Templates stored in the database This window is used to add participant definitions to a Reservation or to an On Going Conference You open this window from the Database menu Participants in AccordDB E loj x Name Channels Aggregation a Stan_ISDN_Dial in i Wanda UserGr
250. ences list right click the icon of the conference to which to add the participant and then click New Participant Alternatively use the shortcut key default key is lt F8 gt Monitor Monitor Filter Mew Participant Fa Terminate De Copy Conf Ctrl C Paste Participant Ctrl Paste Participant 45 Ctrl P Next Questioner Clear QGBA Lock Conference Voting Print Reservation Daka Video Force Drag amp Drop Properties The Participant Properties dialog box opens Set up the required properties in the Identification and Advanced tabs of the Participants Properties dialog box Click OK The new participant is added to the conference The participant s name is listed in the Monitor and Status panes of the main window To define a new participant from the conference toolbar l Expand the On Going Conferences list click the icon of the conference to which to add the participant and then click the New Participant button on the Conference toolbar The Participant Properties dialog box opens Repeat the steps 2 and 3 as in the previous procedure 6 43 Chapter 6 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences To define a new participant from the Conference Properties dialog box 1 Expand the On Going Conferences list right click the icon of the conference to which to add the participant and then click Properties The Conference Properties dialog box opens 2 Click the Participants tab Th
251. ending State T Audio T Video Block I Audio r Gatekeeper Status Requested Bandwidth m Gatekeeper State ARG 768 KBPS Admitted Allocated C DRO 768 KBPS None Request Info Interval IV Gatekeeper routed 0 Sec OK Cancel Apply In the Mute By Operator box select the Audio check box to mute the audio channel and or select the Video check box to suspend the video transmission to the conference A check mark appears in the selected check box Click OK The dialog box closes The icon for muted Audio or Video appears in the Monitor and Status panes of the main MGC Manager window To unmute a participant using the Participant Properties dialog box l Repeat the steps for muting the participant clearing the Audio or Video check boxes to resume the audio and or video transmission to the conference Click OK The dialog box closes The icon for transmitted Audio or Video appears in the Monitor and Status panes of the main MGC Manager window MGC Manager User s Guide Volume For a detailed list of all status icons related to muting unmuting the conference participants see Table 5 4 on page 5 22 Blocking Unblocking Audio You can block the audio transmission from the conference to a certain endpoint preventing this participant from hearing the conference audio Unblocking releases the audio to the endpoint Blocking the audio sent to the endpoint does not mute the endpoint s audio and the ot
252. ening or broadcasting volume and move the participant to the destination conference Home conference The Attended Participant dialog box also provides tools to easily filter the list of On Going Conferences for the appropriate destination conference create a new On Going Conference start an existing Meeting Room and place a participant on hold When moving the participant to the destination conference the next participant waiting in the Participants Queue can be automatically moved to the Operator conference to the Attended stage speeding up the operator s work 8 33 Chapter 8 Entry Queues Operator Conferences and Attended Conferencing Listing Participants in the Participants Queue Window The Participants Queue list contains all the participants who are currently waiting for operator assistance and the participant that is currently being assisted by the operator in the Operator conference upgrading to version 6 0 the Participants Queue window is automatically displayed empty To bring the window on top from the window menu select the Participants Queue window When starting the MGC Manager for the first time in a new installation or after To display the Participants Queue window e On the Main toolbar click the Participants Queue Window icon Far The Participants Queue window opens Participants Queue Prod Mgmt 172 22 138 116 E 0 x Destination Conf Called Number vie TA Debbie Atten
253. enthesis next to the Meeting Rooms Entry Queues amp SIP Factories icon Each Th Entry Queue is identified by a name and icon You can also view the list of Meeting Rooms Entry Queues and SIP Factories in the Status pane This enables you to easily retrieve the dial in numbers assigned to the Entry Queue and is especially useful when the dial in numbers were automatically allocated by the system MGC Manager User s Guide Volume To view the list of Entry Queues in the Status pane click the Meeting Rooms Entry Queues amp SIP Factories icon The list of Entry Queues Meeting Rooms and SIP Factories is displayed in the Status pane Name Status Duration 1D Dial in Number Entry Password Chairperson Password Enc H323 Service Prefix to 02 00 00 152952 265293 02 00 00 095081 162540 02 00 00 056392 294281 02 00 00 300422 169831 02 00 00 146752 126191 02 00 00 The dial in number allocated to the Entry Queue is listed in the Dial in Number column This is the number that should be used by all ISDN PSTN callers connecting to conferences which are accessed from the Entry Queue If more than one Entry Queue is defined for example when the audio messages and prompts are played in different languages or for different video settings the dial in number determines which Entry Queue is used to access the conference In addition the H 323 Service Prefix is displayed as well as the Entry Queue nume
254. ently connected to the conference 4 45 Chapter 4 Defining Conferences and Participants Table 4 7 Conference Properties Advanced Settings Media Continued Quality When 4CIF is enabled for MCU in the configuration file you can define the video quality for the 4CIF transmission Select the appropriate option according to the type of video display e Auto to allow the system to automatically select the optimal 4CIF video quality per endpoint based on the endpoint s capability Motion to optimize the video display for motion for example when displaying a sporting event or when showing people or objects in movement Sharpness to optimize the video display for details for example when displaying still objects or video conference presenters or lecturers Note Quality options are enabled only for CP Classic and Quad Views conferences set to H 263 Annexes In Video Switching conferences set to the H 263 protocol Annexes can be activated to improve specific aspects of video display quality When the Video Format is set to Auto the system selects the appropriate annexes according to the endpoint s capabilities Annexes are required for the Dual Stream mode but can also be selected independenily You can select an the following annexes e Annex F Advanced Prediction Mode It enables the transmitting encoder to use four motion vectors for every macro block one motion vector per block A macro block
255. equest in the MGC Manager Application When the participant requests help from the Click amp View application the participant is added to the Participant Queue in the MGC Manager window In addition an icon is displayed in the Status column indicating that this participant is waiting for assistance File Edit view Template DataBase Directory Options Window Help PARTICIPANTS QUEUE FILTER The status of a Product Management Normal participant who R MCU Configuration evii a On Going Conferences 2 D Connected 172 22 140 63 Ret Dial out Il has requested H 0027 i Connected 172 22 132 6 Zik Dial out i assistance International Sales 172 22 133 39 Zut Dial out f Th S a i k participant is oue also added to P GL osh the participant J On Going Gateway Sessions 0 On Going Gat y5 0 queue H amp Participants Queue 1 H Reservations 5 a Mame Status Connection Netwerk PhonetiP Connection Type Audio video sy 172 22 140 63 get Dial out g W TConnected 172 22 132 6 ge Dial out cr connected 172 22 133 39 get Dial out ins a Wait For Assistance Connected 172 22 133 67 get Dial out io 11 25 Chapter 11 Click amp View 11 26 A Appendix A Disconnection Causes If a participant was unable to connect to a conference or was disconnected from an On Going Conference the Participant Properties Disconnection Cause dialog box indicates the cause ca
256. erence by connecting to the Multipoint Control Unit MCU The MGC unit can connect the endpoints via ISDN T1 CAS IP SIP and H 323 ATM and serial connections MPI allowing participants from any deployed network to participate in one conference Figure 2 1 shows a basic multipoint conferencing scheme and connection types ATM FVC Figure 2 1 Multipoint Video Conferencing using an MGC unit 2 1 Chapter 2 MGC Manager Overview MCU Management The MGC unit is controlled by the MGC Manager application The MGC Manager connect to the MGC unit using e Ethernet LAN other than the LAN used for conferencing e TCP IP Internet e RS 232 e Dial up modem Up to 30 local or remote MGC Manager workstations can connect to a single MGC unit simultaneously A single MGC Manager operator can control multiple MGC units and conferences The MGC unit can also be controlled through a Web browser via the MGC WebCommander application Using the MGC Personal Scheduler add on conferences can be scheduled from the MCU in Microsoft s Outlook Figure 2 2 illustrates the MGC Manager system components LAN WAN MGC Manager Workstation i ee Xare X zus 5 ON aans SS hes Se il St a My Sis yr MGC 100 Figure 2 2 MGC Manager MCU Connection 2 2 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume MGC System Main Features The MGC main features are e Universal Transcoding e Dynamic Continuous Presence e M
257. erence must be running in order to monitor the Participants Queue If no On Going Operator Conference is active the operator will not be able to attend to the participants waiting in the queue Only the participants in an IVR enabled conference in which the Enable Operators Assistance option is activated for the IVR Service can request help during the conference Only the participants in an Entry Queue or IVR enabled conference that is set for the Attended mode On hold for Operator Assistance selected in the IVR Service Properties Welcome Message tab are automatically moved to the Participants Queue when connecting to the conference To display the participants waiting in the Participants Queue l 2 Connect to the MCU and expand its options tree Expand the Participants Queue icon to list the participants in the Browser pane or click the Participants Queue icon to display the list in the Status pane Alternatively click the Participants Queue button in the main toolbar to display the participants waiting in the queue in a separate window For the detailed description of the Participants Queue tools and management see Listing Participants in the Participants Queue Window on page 8 34 5 35 Chapter 5 Monitoring Conferences Viewing Site Names in Video During Continuous Presence video conferences you can view the endpoint site names in the endpoint s video layout windows Both H 320 and H 323 endpoints can
258. erence that is accessed via an Entry Queue MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Defining On Going Conferences You can reserve a conference in advance for details see Chapter 9 or request to start a conference as soon as possible In addition to the Standard conference definition that is described here the following conference types may be defined e Meet Me per Conferences For details see Chapter 7 e Meeting Rooms For details see Chapter 7 e Entry Queues For details see Chapter 8 e Operator conferences For details see Chapter 8 Preparatory Tasks Before you start setting up a new conference it is recommended to check the dial in numbers defined in the ISDN Network Service the IP Service Prefix defined in the IP Network Service for H 323 dial in and the participants endpoint connection parameters dial number and video capabilities Defining a New Audio Only Conference Lg For the description of the Audio Only conferences definition see the MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Chapter 2 Defining Standard Audio Only Conferences and Reservations If the Audio Look and Feel mode is set for the system the conference properties and defaults are automatically set to Audio Only and the video parameters are hidden The Audio Look and Feel mode is set in the MGC Manager Options menu For more details refer to the MGC Administrator s Guide Chapter 5 4 19 Chapter 4 Defining Conferences an
259. erences and perform various operations while conferences are running Three levels of monitoring are available with the MGC Manager e General Monitoring You can monitor the general status of all On Going Conferences and their participants in the MGC Manager main window e Conference Level Monitoring You can view additional information regarding a specific conference and modify its parameters if required using the Conference Properties option e Participant Level Monitoring You can view detailed information on the participant s status using the Participant Properties option During attended conferences you can monitor the status of the participants waiting in the Participants Queue This chapter describes the status indicators and icons and the various monitoring options and methods according to these levels and according to the type of participant or the type of connection to the conference This chapter also includes a description of gateway sessions monitoring Chapter 5 Monitoring Conferences General Monitoring You monitor a conference to keep track of its participants and its progress When monitoring a conference you can check whether all its participants are correctly connected and whether errors and faults have occurred The MGC Manager allows operators to monitor several On Going Conferences from the same or different MCUs simultaneously The On Going Conference information is easily available and clearly represent
260. es The Highest Common mechanism is applied to these video parameters e Video Protocol e Video Format e Video Frame Rate e H 263 Annexes N F T and I e ProMotion The selected common video is dynamically adjusted with each participant connection to and disconnection from the conference The Highest Common mechanism is available with both H 320 and H 323 endpoints When the conference line rate is lower than 384 Kbps the system first tries to connect the participants using the H 264 video protocol Only 1f the endpoint does not support H 264 the system tries to connect the participants using H 263 or H 261 For example if all the connected endpoints support the H 263 video protocol the conference video protocol is set to H 263 When an endpoint connects to the conference using H 261 the conference Video Protocol changes to H 261 and all the endpoints will now connect to the conference using H 261 When this endpoint leaves the conference the Video Protocol changes back to H 263 followed by the endpoints changing to video protocol H 263 In this example if the Video protocol was set to H 263 the endpoint connecting using H 261 would have been connected as Secondary without the video channel as it could not meet the conference settings When monitoring Video Switching conferences the participant s video parameters can change during the conference reflecting changes in the conference video settings according to partic
261. es the participant to the appropriate conference This option should be used only with PBXs supporting the CLI Caller ID option Bonding Phone Available only for the Dia l out connection type and Number should be used only if Bonding is the selected Aggregation method for the participant Enter a single number for all the aggregated channels The system automatically assigns the appropriate numbers to the remaining channels With some switches Bonding is supported only when the pound key symbol is added to the Dial out number sequence If left blank the MCU automatically assigns the first number that appears in the Participant Phone Number box as the bonding number when the conference starts 4 92 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Table 4 6 ISDN ATM MPI T1 CAS Participant Identification Continued User Defined fields 1 4 Broadcasting Volume Listening Volume Audio Only VIP In any or all of the four User Defined fields enter general information for the participant such as the participant s E mail address telephone number company name location or any required information The titles of the User Defined fields can be modified in the Database Manager gt Defaults gt User Defined Defaults and loaded to the MGC Manager application For details see Chapter 3 Loading the User Defined Default Set to the MGC Manager Application on page 3 31 Note The User Defined fields are displ
262. esources to be used in the conference as described on page 4 63 By default the Operator conference is scheduled to run on the Standard Audio card To enable the operator to assist participants in an Entry Queue IVR Queue or an IVR enabled conference the operator must run on the Audio card In that case select the Advanced card type in the Conference Properties Resource Force dialog box Debbie Properties Product Management x General Settings Participants Resource Force Audio Card Bridge Id Auto Selection Selection Auto Selection Video Video Card Type Auto Slot Bridge Id Auto Selection M m Data Slot Bridge Id Auto Selection Auto Selection 8 27 Chapter 8 Entry Queues Operator Conferences and Attended Conferencing 11 Click OK The Operator conference is added to the list of On Going Conferences WS mey Configuration E Bee on Going Conferences 2 Ef Product Management Narmal 3 e H T Finance i a On Going Gateway Sessions 0 i oa Participants Queue a g Reservations 0 B83 Meeting Rooms Entry Queues amp SIP Factories 14 Reservations database by selecting the Copy Conf option from the right click pop up menu For more details see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Chapter 8 Templates Handling 5 To save this conference for future use copy the conference to a Group in the The Operator confere
263. esources used to handle the participant in the conference click the Resource Details tab The Participant Properties Resource Details dialog box opens Karen Properties Identification Advanced Connection Infol Connection Info Video Sources H22 Disconnection Cause Resource Details Resource Details Net Resource Details Channel Boardid Unitid Fortid Allocated 1 1 2 Board Id Unit Id Allocated MUs 3 1 YES AUDIO CODEC 15 3 YES AUDIO BRIDGE None None HO VIDEO None None HO T120 BRIDGE None None HO T120 CODEC Hone Hone HO IF None None HO K 1 OF Cancel Apply This dialog box lists the resources that may be used to handle the participant s call The following information is displayed Table 5 14 ISDN Participant Properties Resource Details Pane Table Resource Details Column Parameter Option Description Displays information about the MCU cards which handle the participant connection 5 51 Chapter 5 Monitoring Conferences Table 5 14 ISDN Participant Properties Resource Details Continued Pane Table So umn Option Description Parameter Resource Resource Displays the type of MCU cards used to Details cont Type run the conference The following types are listed e MUX the Video MUX card used to handle H 320 video calls Audio Codec The port that performs the audio encoding and decoding Audio Bridge The audio bridge that mixes the audio
264. esssreesssssssssssssssssss 4 18 Defining On Going COnlerenCes ecacicerecceencereintentenvicecuntuminaadicnss 4 19 Preparatory Tasks satiirinen n a 4 19 Defining a New Audio Only Conference ceecccccceeeeeeeeees 4 19 Defining a New On Going Video Conference 000008 4 20 Completing the Conference Definition ccccccceceeeeees 4 67 Resolving Scheduling Conflicts cc cc cceccssseseeteeeteeseees 4 67 Joining an On Going Conference sesser nan 4 70 Conference Access for Defined Dial in Participants 4 70 ISDN PariC DAWES scovesce ce tea T 4 70 H 323 Participants Simple Dial in no Gatekeeper 4 7 H 323 Participants Simple Dial in with Gatekeeper 4 72 H 323 Participants Advanced Dial 1n ccccceeeeeneees 4 73 Conference Access for Undefined Dial in Participants 4 75 Table of Contents Conference Direct Dialing and ACCESS eeccceeeeeeeeeeteees 4 75 Direct Conference Dialing and Access Via IVR 0 4 77 Conference Access via Entry Queue cccccccceeseeeseeneeeees 4 78 Conference Access for Dial out Participants cccceeeeeeees 4 84 Defining Participant Properties cccccccessssessseseeseececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 85 ISDN ATM MPI T1 CAS Participant Definition 4 90 IP H 323 and SIP Participant Definition cece eee 4 101 Quality of Service for IP Participants 0 0
265. eted by a Welcome video slide and audio messages and wait for the operator to connect them to the appropriate conference For more details see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Chapter 4 IVR to create an IVR enabled conference in which participants are guided through their connection process by an automated voice system For a detailed description see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Chapter 2 Note The Greet and Guide options Welcome No Wait and Attended Wait should be selected only if Standard Audio cards and no Audio cards are installed in your MCU If an Audio card is installed in your MCU select the IVR option for attended and voice guided connections to the conference Message If you have selected a Message Service type other Service Name than None select the name of an IVR Service for an IVR enabled conference or the name of the AV Message Service for Welcome No Wait or Welcome Wait conference Note If left blank the system automatically selects the default IVR or AV Message Service depending on the attended conference type Conference On Select this option to enable to run a video conference Port COP using only one video resource for the entire conference instead of one video resource per participant This option is available if Continuous Presence Classic amp Quad Views is selected in the Conference Properties General tab For more details see Conference On Port COP
266. eting Rooms defined in the MGC Manager Once Avaya endpoints request to start a video conference the Avaya Call Manager ACM will initate a call to the one of the Meeting Rooms configured in its application Chapter 7 Meet Me per Conferences and Meeting Rooms Listing Meeting Rooms To view the Meeting Room list 1 Inthe MCU tree expand the Meeting Rooms Entry Queues amp SIP Factories tree When the Meeting Room is activated it is also added to the On Going Conferences list to enable the operator to monitor its status and its participants o On Going Conferences 3 2 i ima Administration EY Aviv i oe Participants Queue gi Sean Meeting Rooms Entry Queues E Ee Administratio a a Audio A0 Finance Taie On Going Gateway Sessions Reservations 0 SIP Factories 1E An Active Meeting Room Monitoring active Meeting Rooms is similar to monitoring any other Meet Me Conference For details see Monitoring Meet Me Conferences on page 7 10 MGC Manager ERSION 8 0 0 12 Ioj xj File Edit View Template DataBase Directory Options Window Help PARTICIPANTS QUEUE FILTER MCUs Network H LU Product Management Normal t dalout Connected 7300851 ISDN ger D dil a o dial out2 D Connected 70821001 ISDN ge D il Th 0 aa Product Management 25 LUU 171 178 H 188 124 Falcon Normal E
267. ettings Parameters on page 4 29 e Video protocol video format frame rate annexes and interlaced video mode These parameters define the quality of the video images Setting the video protocol to H 263 results in a better image quality than using H 261 and H 264 protocol provides better compression of video images in line rates lower than 384 Kbps However not all endpoints support H 263 or H 264 therefore in a Video Switching session which requires that all participants use the same video protocol video format and frame rate it is the endpoint that supports the lowest video quality that dictates the video settings for the conference For more information see Conference Properties Settings Parameters on page 4 29 e Encryption is available at the conference and participant level based on AES 128 Media Encryption and DH 102 Key Exchange standards Chapter 4 Defining Conferences and Participants 4 10 For more information on encryption see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Il Chapter 1 Media Encryption Additional Video Conference Types Video conferences can include additional features for example to increase the number of participants in a single conference or to allow application sharing during the conference Conference On Port COP In a Conference On Port all participants use a single video port for the conference This enables the selection of a video layout for the conference but all the part
268. etween the incoming video rate of a single endpoint and the video rate of the outgoing stream 4 times the incoming video rate of a single endpoint For more details see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Chapter 1 Software Continuous Presence Settings Message In conferences with Message Services participants Service Type are greeted upon their connection to the MCU and are guided to their destination conferences either by an operator attended conferences or by menu prompts and voice messages unattended conferences In addition IVR Message Services enable participants to control their connection to the conference and chairpersons to control the conference and perform various operations Select the type of Message Service for the conference e None default to indicate a standard conference without any message services Welcome No Wait for a Greet and Guide unattended conference run on a standard Audio card Participants are greeted by a Welcome video slide and audio messages and after a predefined period are automatically connected to the appropriate conference For more details see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Chapter 4 4 31 Chapter 4 Defining Conferences and Participants Table 4 5 Conference Properties Settings Parameters Continued Message e Attended Wait for a Greet and Guide Attended Service Type conference run on a standard Audio card cont Participants are gre
269. eue If you select this check box the Meet Me per Conf check box is enabled Clear this check box if you do not want to allocate an additional dial in number for direct dial in to the conference and force the access to the conference only through the Entry Queue same as the Entry Queue properties otherwise participants will not be able to If the Meeting Room is accessed via an Entry Queue its line rate must be the Ls move from the Entry Queue to the Meeting Room 5 If Entry Queue Access is selected and Password is used as the routing method or it is an VR enabled Meeting Room with password request enter the Conference Entry Password and the Chairperson Password optional If you leave these fields blank the MCU allocates them once the Meeting Room is saved to the MCU 6 Enter the conference Numeric ID If left blank the system automatically allocates the Numeric ID once the Meeting Room is saved on the MCU 7 Ifrelevant enter the information in the User Defined fields 8 Define the Media type as Audio or Video and Audio 9 Select the video session type as in a standard video conference For more details see Chapter 4 To define the conference General parameters on page 4 21 10 Click the Settings tab 7 13 Chapter 7 Meet Me per Conferences and Meeting Rooms 7 14 11 12 13 14 The Conference Properties Settings dialog box opens Default Conference Properties Product Management E
270. ey were in the same room An 1 5 Mb digital switched line used in the United States ToS Type of Service Tos defines optimization tagging for routing audio and video packets WAN Wide Area Network A communications network that services a geographical area larger than the LAN B 7 Appendix B Glossary Abbreviation Term Explanation Whiteboard An on screen shared notebook for placement of shared documents B 8
271. f the IP card or its alias SIP participants dial the conference URI name and domain name Notes e Dial in T1 CAS participants can only connect as undefined participants e Undefined participants can join conferences by dialing in as long as there are sufficient card resources Dial out At the conference start time the MCU calls the participant When defining the participant you must enter the participant s contact details dial Number IP address or Alias SIP URI Note If the Dial Out Manually option is disabled in the Conference Properties Participant tab the MCU automatically calls the participant at conference time If this option is enabled the operator must connect the participant Direct For participants who are directly connected to the MCU through a leased line This connection type is applicable to ISDN MPI and T1 CAS interfaces No dialing is required MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Table 4 5 Participant Properties Identification Continued Interface Type Select the network type used by the participant to connect to the conference ISDN for endpoints connecting via ISDN or PSTN lines ATM for endpoints using the ATM network MPI for endpoints using a serial connection T1 CAS for endpoints using a Channel Associated Signaling CAS connection As T1 CAS participants are Audio Only the MCU must be configured to allow them in video conferences For more details on the
272. f the video layout windows or in full screen Video forcing can be applied at the conference level or at the participant level Video forcing at the conference level applies to all the conference participants while video forcing at the participant level applies only to the participant whose video layout is being modified Video Forcing Guidelines e A participant cannot appear in two or more windows at the same time When attempting to select a participant who was already selected in another window the system clears the participant from the first window and assigns the participant to the second window e Video forcing performed at the participant level overrides the conference forcing e A participant cannot view him herself in a layout window unless the Same Layout option is checked e A participant should be assigned to the same type of layout window for the conference layout as that in the participant level This is especially important when the video layout is set to mixed size windows such as 1 4 1 5 1 7 and 1 8 e When changing the Video Layout at the conference level the video forcing settings are cancelled and video switching is audio activated Video Forcing at the Conference Level There are two methods to perform video forcing at the conference level e In the Conference Properties Video Sources dialog box e From the Conference right click menu To define Video Forcing in the Conference Properties 1 Right
273. ference at 384 Kbps e SW CP Software Continuous Presence H 323 only at 384 Kbps e Video Switch Video Switching at 384 Kbps In order to run a Default_ Video or Default COP conference the Video card and the MGC Manager version 5 6 or later must be installed in your system When you first start the MGC Manager application the Reservations in Database window automatically opens listing the Default group However if you are logged out you must log in 3 25 Chapter 3 MGC Manager Basics For a detailed description of the login process see MGC Manager User s Guide Volume IJ Chapter 7 Logging into the User Tables of the Database U Reservations in AccordDB D Root gt Default Ree i 993 Default Audio JEI Default COP ici Default _video ici Siw CP fa ideo Switch J Weboffice Name LineRate Audioalg t mC i Default Audio ic DeFault_COP ic Default_Video ic SW CP 051 video Switch 384 kbps Auto Continuous Presence Classic 384 kbps Auto Continuous Presence Classic 384 kbps Auto Continuous Presence Software 384 kbps 56 G722 G711 Video Switching Figure 3 11 Reservations in Database Window To start an On Going Conference from a Reservation template 1 Connect to an MCU If the Reservations in Database window 1s hidden behind other Meet Me Per Conf windows display it on top of the MGC Manager Main window on the Window menu click Reservations in l
274. ference is identified the participant is moved to that conference and the operator moves the next participant in line to the Operator conference Lg An active Operator conference must run on the same MCU as the Participants Queue to be able to assist Participants waiting in the Participants Queue To move a participant to the Operator conference In the Participants Queue list in the Browser pane or in the Participants Queue window double click the icon of the participant you want to move to the Operator conference The participant is automatically moved to the Operator conference and the Attended Participant window opens Attended Participant Karen i x Attened Participant Participant Name Karen M YIP I Chair Person User Defined 1 User Defined 3 Ee Attended Participant User Defined 2 User Defined 4 Disconnect pa rame te rs i i 1 Broadcasting Volume 5 Listening Volume 5 Apply Uperator Broadcasting Volume 5 a a Listening Volume 5 ares yaa Operator options Join End Join Mute Audio m Conferences Search Value Search In Ongoing meetings Conference Name Numericld_ User Defined 1 User Defined 2 User Defined 3 Meeting Type Sep 18 2005 0 Ongoing Meeting Polycom Finance Sep 19 2005 0 Ongoing Meeting Conferences list V Auto Attend Next Participant Next By Time Z JV Include On Hold Participants To Home Conf F3 Hold
275. ference joined by the operator In an On Going Conference indicates the name of the operator who joined the conference the Operator conference name is identical to the operator s login name The password to be used by participants to enter the conference The password to be used by a participant to enter the conference as the chairperson The unique per MCU Conference Numeric ID as assigned by the operator or the system This number can be used by IP participants as a part of a dialing string when accessing the conference The IP Network Service prefix that can be used as part of the dialing string by IP endpoints Displays whether the conference is encrypted at the conference level MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Listing On Going Conference Participants in the Status Pane You can view the detailed status information of the participants in an On Going Conference To display participant information in the Status pane 1 Expand the MCU tree to list its options 2 Expand the On Going Conferences tree to view the list of currently running conferences 3 Inthe On Going Conferences list click the icon of the conference whose participants you want to view in the Status pane The participant details are displayed in the Status pane table You can adjust the columns order to suit your monitoring priorities MGC Manager VERSION 7 5 0 13 File Edit View Template DataBase Directory Options Window Help
276. field type the participant s new name team 1 Properties Video Sources H245 Disconnection Cause Resource Details Identification Advanced annection Infot Connection Info2 Connection Type ntertace Type Dial out z H323 Participant IP Signaling Port 172 22 132 146 Alias Name Alias Type wanda H323 ID Extension Identifier String User Defined 1 User Defined 2 User Defined 3 User Defined 4 Broadcasting Yolume 5 Listening Volume 5 T Audio Only M YIP OK Cancel Apply 4 Click OK The participant name is updated in the Browser Monitor and Status panes This name will also be saved to the CDR Call Detail Record file 6 14 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Moving Participants Between Conferences MGC Manager enables the operator to move one or more participants from one On Going Conference to another Moving can be done either interactively by drag and drop or from the participant s right click menu However differing resource requirements of the two conferences as well as the defined capabilities of the participant endpoints have to be taken into account Guidelines for moving participants It is only possible to move participants between On Going Conferences that are controlled by the same MCU and are run by the same type of audio and video card For example you cannot move a participant with the Audio card capability to a conference where pa
277. figuration dh nternational Sales Not Full Oct 21 2003 02 07 49 PM_ Oct 21 2003 04 07 49 PM 2108 2 4 On Going Conferences 2 Product Management Not Full Oct 21 2003 02 06 41 PM Oct 21 2003 04 06 41 PM 2107 2 o iy International Sales HDebbie re HEvan 8 IJosh HI Product Management 8 HDuke 8 HLynne ra HNadine On Going Gateway Sessions 0 aa Participants Queue 0 Reservations 0 p83 Meeting Rooms 20 Names Status Connection Network PhonelIP Connection Type Audio Video Sync Tx Rate Rx Rate Retries Left Media Mem JEP International Sales PM ID 2108 2 Connected Not Full JD Disconnected 172 22 12 146 get Dial out q ZB 2 Connected Not Full D gt Disconnected 172 22 182 183 get Dial out q Be To view the participants of another conference repeat step 2 For each monitored conference the system displays the conference status and lists the defined and undefined participants 5 9 Chapter 5 Monitoring Conferences Monitor Pane Information The list of participant details that is displayed in the Status pane is a partial list of the more commonly monitored details The Participant Properties dialog box contains more extensive participant information than that available in the Monitor pane Table 5 2 lists the Monitor pane columns and the information that is displayed i
278. followed by the ISDN number i e 9925100 and pound key For example 36 lt dialtone gt 99251000 MPI endpoint 37 The participant dials 37 followed by the service number MPI number astrisks and pound key For example 37 lt dialtone gt 5000 12345678 SIP endpoint 38 The participant inviter dials 38 followed by the E 164 alias or IP address and pound key For example e E 164 Alias 35 lt dialtone gt 1141 Note The User Name E 164 prefix must be in a numeric format and the domain name is the IP Service SIP server domain name e The endpoint address dial string substitute periods with an asterisk 35172 22 176 11 Video Invite can be used in Video Conferences to which an Invite enabled IVR Service is assigned Video Invite is enabled for the conference in the Properties Settings dialog box as for Audio Only and H 323 participants 6 97 Chapter 6 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences 6 98 Disconnecting Invited Participants To disconnect the last invited video participant and not the last dial in participant enter the DTMF code 35 for all invitee types Each time you enter 35 the system disconnects the most recent invited participant Invite Mode Exit The system automatically exists the video invite mode and returns the inviter to the ongoing conference when A dial tone is heard but no DTMF code is pressed within 5 seconds When a DTME code is activated but no n
279. for Dial out Participants In Video or Audio Only conferences dial out participants are connected directly to the conference In VR enabled Audio Only and Video conferences dial out participants enter the Entry Queue and or IVR queue where the participant may be requested to enter the conference password or any digit to confirm the connection Dial out to SIP Participant The dial out scenario is identical to the dial in scenario except for the initiating party that is the MCU In dial out conferences the endpoint clients need to be registered so the registrar can provide location details when the MCU invites them to join the conference For example the MCU dials endpoint1 polycom com SIP UA conf1 polycom com MCU endpoint1 polycom com a SIP UA Figure 4 8 SIP Environment Dial in and Dial out 4 84 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Defining Participant Properties You can define new participants while setting up an On Going Conference or a Reservation Particpants can also be defined while a conferences in progress by using the right click menu or the conference toolbar In addition you can define a participant template in the Participant Templates Database Participant Template file If Auto Detect is selected for the dial out participant you may define the participant s name and phone number and the system will automatically detect the participant capabilities and connect him her accordingly Dial
280. fot Connection Info2 Connection Time ET Loopback Status Jan 08 2004 10 48 15 AM rm al oe Disconnection Time Pista viet Jan 08 2004 10 48 03 AM ts ts Tx Rate Rix Rate Connection Retries Left 377 359 0 m Mute By Operator m Attending Audio Il Video F Oper Participant Mute By Participant F Audio Video H Hizndiog Mute By MCU Participant Attending State Block Audio Gatekeeper Status eres Requested Bandwidth C ARG 768 KBPS Admitte Allocated DRG es KBPS ane Request Info Interval vd Gate keeper O uted ose Sec OK Cancel Apply c Inthe Block box select the Audio check box d Click OK to apply the changes To release a blocked site and resume audio transmission e In the Browser pane Monitor pane or the Status pane right click the participant s icon and then click Unblock Audio Or e In the Participant Properties Connection Info2 dialog box clear the Block Audio check box and then click OK The Audio transmission to the participant site is resumed MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Enabling Disabling Auto Gain Control AGC The Auto Gain Control AGC mechanism balances noise and audio volume of the received signals for all conference participants Different endpoints and phones produce different types of source noise and volume Auto Gain Control is applied to all incoming audio str
281. ft H323 call close No port left for video cont H323 call close Small bandwidth H323 call close No port left Called party not registered Caller not registered H323 call close ARQ timeout H323 call close DRQ timeout The required control ports exceed the number of ports allocated to control data in fixed ports IP only The required video content ports exceed the number of ports allocated to video content in fixed ports IP only The gatekeeper allocated insufficient bandwidth to the connection with the endpoint IP only There are no free ports left in the IP card IP only The called endpoint is not registered in the gatekeeper IP only The calling endpoint is not registered in the gatekeeper IP only The endpoint sent an ARQ message to the gatekeeper but the gatekeeper did not respond before timeout IP only The endpoint sent a DRQ message to the gatekeeper but the gatekeeper did not respond before timeout IP only MGC Manager User s Guide Table A 1 Primary Disconnection Reasons Continued H323 call close Alt An alternate gatekeeper Gatekeeper failure failure occurred IP only H323 call close A gatekeeper failure Gatekeeper failure occurred IP only H323 Failure H323 call close Remote The endpoint was busy busy Applicable only to dial out and IP only H323 call close Normal The call ended normally for example the endpoint disconnecte
282. ftware Resource Force lets you view and select the Audio and Video resources to run the conference according to the available MCU resources If your MCU contains both standard Audio and Audio cards and standard Video and or Video cards you can select the Audio card type and or the Video card type to run the conference Recording lets you define recording options for the current conference Meet Me per Conference lets you define Meeting Rooms and Meet Me Per Conference reservation templates Enabled only when the Meet Me Per Conf option is selected in the General properties To define the conference General parameters The options in Properties General tab allow the setup of different types of conferences according to their general properties Selections made in this dialog box affect the other On Going Conference parameters and enable other tabs 4 21 Chapter 4 Defining Conferences and Participants 3 Define the following parameters Table 4 4 Conference Properties General Name Mandatory Enter a unique conference name using up to 80 characters Note If the name is already used by another conference Meeting Room Entry Queue or Reservation in the same or partially overlapping time frame an error message Is displayed requesting you to enter a different name Duration Define the duration of the conference using the format HH MM default 2 00 maximum 99 59 For example to define a duration of
283. functions and operational requirements H 242 ITU T standard that defines initiation of communications between systems and capabilities negotiation procedures H 243 ITU T standard that defines initiation of communications between systems and capabilities negotiation procedures in multipoint conferences H 261 ITU T standard that defines the Px64 video coding algorithm H 263 ITU T standard that provides improved compression and quality of video images at a line rate lower than 384 Kbps This standard is not supported by all codecs H 264 A proprietary Polycom Video compression standard H 264 ITU T standard that provides improved compression and quality of video images in lower line rate connections and is part of the Highest Common mechanism in Video Switching conferences H 320 ITU T standard that defines how the H series video conferencing recommendations work together H 323 ITU T standard for audio video and data communications across IP based LAN networks including the Internet IMUX or Inverse A feature that allows high speed serial data streams to be Multiplexing divided into multiples of 56 or 64 Kbps for transmission over public digital switched networks PSTN At the remote end all the channels are phase aligned and synchronized to recreate the original data stream IP Internet Protocol The working protocol that forms the basis of the internet Integrated Services Digital Network A set of protocol and interface
284. g cccccccccccceccccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeaaaaees 10 5 Presentation Mode lt 2 sxssestassqsatonsnaeensecscancnscaaeteseecacactenadasstuataceonnsdsoaae 10 9 Setting the Presentation Mode for a Conference 0 10 10 Presentation Mode Monitoring ccccccsesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 10 12 Enabling the Presentation Mode during an On Going COn TENCE sre S eee 10 13 e re O a asnsasaseenes oa ceceensoatcoenes eee tee ceaanndaanseeaessaiamectccee 10 14 Lecture Show DeMiiO M5 icciestrasiwacsemencancocwcnsddeneedacdeheaseecvertbece 10 14 Lecture Show Monitoring ccccccceesssssssseeeeeeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeees 10 16 CGM VION Shi i ieee ss cb hedee bce aediaande daadenes 11 1 Enabling the Click amp View Application cccccccceseseeseeeceeeeeeeeeeees 11 2 Enabling the Click amp View Application for a Conference 11 8 Using the Click amp View Application ccccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 11 11 Click amp View Menu Options cccccccccccsecccsessesssseeesseessseeeessseeseeees 11 13 Conference Layout Chairperson Only Options 00 11 15 Personal Layout Options cccessssseeesseeessessssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 11 18 Returning to the Conference Layout cccccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeees 11 22 OS I Holepi E 11 23 viii MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Returning to the Previous Screen c cc ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 11 24 Reque
285. g Conferences Listing On Going Conference Participants in the Monitoring Pane You can display several conferences and their participants in the Monitoring pane to monitor both the conferences and their participants in one window To display participant information in the Monitor pane 1 Inthe Browser pane expand the On Going Conferences list 2 Right click the icon of the conference to monitor and then click Monitor to view the conference and its participants in the Monitor pane c Product Management Minor pia MCU Configuration EI On Going Conferences 24 ERB budget A ay Sales EE n Going o 7 Monitor Filter Ta aa Participant EEN Reservation Mew Participant Fa ee Meeting Re Terminate Del Copy Conf Ctrlt c Paste Participant Girth Paste Participant As Girl P Next Questioner Clear QRA Lock Conference oting Print Reservation Data Video Force Drag amp Drop Properties 5 8 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume The conference details are listed in the Monitor pane Each row in the Monitor pane table represents a conference or a participant Each column contains status information about the item that is being monitored PARTICIPANTS QUEUE FILTER pc fa 2 5 P A 2 Rep 6334 Ge SB ileloiAaG Co GP alol Alel ODR 2 a AA 2 O70 ar MCUs Network Name sd Status Connection Startsat_ End Time 1D _ Connected _ Join col fig PM Major F MCU Con
286. g the View Mode You can change the view of the MGC Manager Main window by toggling between the horizontal and the vertical view When switching between the views you are required to restart the MGC Manager application The default window layout setting is the Vertical View In Horizontal View the Browser pane is displayed along the left side of the window and the Monitor pane is displayed underneath it along the bottom of the window MGC Manager ERSION 8 0 0 10 E 18 x File Edit view Template DataBase Directory Options Window Help 188 201 Normal H R MCU Configuration On Going Conferences 3 a TestConf 1 186 115 186 147 186 232 a re 186 234 a 186 235 Q 186 52 EH TestConf 2 TestConf 3 On Going Gateway Sessions 0 di Participants Queue 0 Eijmrae 6 ID 5828 Git siabos Git siabos Qiesiab10 Git siabz20 SA Testcont 1 188 201 ID 355 Ready Figure 3 7 MGC Manager Main Window Horizontal View H p83 Meeting Rooms Entry Queues amp SIP Factories 20 31 Connected 2 Connected PARTICIPANTS QUEUE FILTER Faulty Connection p Faulty Conn p Faulty Conn p Faulty Conn p Faulty Conn Not Full 3lab06 fi Bes Dial out 3lab09 Fi Reb Dial out 3lab10 fi Bet Dial out 3lab20 fi Bee Dial out l video sy l video sy l video sy l video sy P
287. haracter and a stop bit at the end The time interval between characters may be of varying lengths ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode High speed up to 155 Mbps high bandwidth network that integrates voice video and data ATM provides connectivity to LANs WANs private networks and sub networks ATM supports applications requiring high transmission speeds large transmission capacities and bandwidth on demand Audio Bridge Used to mix multiple audio inputs and to output composite audio to each of the endpoints connected to a conference B8ZS Bipolar 8 Zero Substitution A T1 line coding format substituting each group of eight consecutive zeros with an established pattern See also T1 line B 1 Appendix B Glossary Abbreviation Term Bandwidth Defines the information carrying capacity of a channel In analog systems it is the difference between the highest frequency that a channel can carry and the lowest measured in hertz In digital systems bandwidth is measured in bits per second The larger a connection s bandwidth the more data can be transmitted in a given amount of time allowing for greater video resolution and more sites in a conference See Line Rate BAS Bitrate Allocation Signal BAS codes are used to exchange information about capabilities and commands between devices at opposite ends of a digital video connection B Channel Bearer Channel A channel in a span or in a group of spans that carries audio visua
288. he participant IP only The endpoint did not respond in the given time frame IP only A SIP Invite was sent via TCP but the endpoint was not found IP only Appendix A Disconnection Causes Table A 1 Primary Disconnection Reasons Continued SIP Failure cont SIP transport error SIP unauthorized SIP unsupported media type A 18 Unable to initiate connection with the endpoint IP only The request requires user authentication IP only The server is refusing to service the request because the message body of the request is ina format not supported by the requested resource for the requested method Table A 2 Secondary Disconnection Causes Category Incoming video channel does not match conference video settings Remote Device does not support the current video parameters The incoming video parameters are incompatible with the Conference Video parameters Parameters in the Software CP conferences are incompatible with the incoming video parameters Remote device is not compatible with the conference video settings Inadequate video card resources When moved to a Transcoding or Continuous Presence conference the participant s video capabilities are not supported by the video cards Video connection could not be established The remote device lacks VCPC or VCFX capabilities MGC Manager User s Guide Match conference video settings with remote device
289. he process of defining Standard On Going video conferences and adding participants to the Conference For information about Audio Only conferences see the MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition About Conferences MGC Manager provides several methods to initiate and schedule conferences to suit many different needs The following methods are available e Scheduled conferences for setting up individual conferences that start immediately On Going Conferences or later Reservations e On demand reservation less conferences that are set up once and used many times Meeting Rooms and Entry Queues Each method is represented in the MCU tree by an appropriate entry or icon The scheduling method is also reflected in the selection of the conference type The following conference types are available e Standard a scheduled On Going Conference or Reservation that runs once and is deleted from the system once it ends e Meeting Room a conference that is defined once and used many times for unscheduled ad hoc conferencing e Operator Conference a special conference designated for operator usage in attended conferencing 4 1 Chapter 4 Defining Conferences and Participants For each conference you specify whether participants connect to the conferencing system by dialing in to the conference or by having the conferencing system MCU dial out to the participant For dial in connections you have to define whether a single
290. he same document application even if only one participant has the application In application sharing one participant launches the application and it runs simultaneously on all the other computers e File transfer to all conference participants e Chat or Whiteboard in which participants communicate with each other by writing In all these modes the participants can view and hear each other For more information on advanced video settings see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Chapter I Advanced Conference Settings MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Conference Types by Media Table 4 2 details the conference and session types according to Audio and Video media options Table 4 2 Conference Types by Media Media Conf Type Network Session Type Availability Audio Standard and All Audio Only Available for ISDN Meeting ISDN ATM and IP Room MPI T1 CAS Requires an MGC IP unit equipped with an Audio card Operator All Audio Only ISDN ATM i T1 CAS Video Standard and All e Video Video conferences Meeting ISDN ATM Switching connect T1 CAS IP Continuous Only Presence Classic Quad Views Video Software CP is Switching available for IP only Transcoding conferences Continuous Presence Classic Quad Views Software Operator All Transcoding Video conferences ISDN ATM connect T1 CAS MPI T1 CAS endpoints as Audio IP Only 4 13
291. heck box Select the conference Media Audio Only or Video Network and Video Session as described for On Going Conferences For details see Table 4 4 Conference Properties General on page 4 22 6 Click the Settings tab The Conference Properties Settings dialog box opens 7 Define the conference settings parameters as for any Standard video conference For more details see Table 4 5 Conference Properties Settings Parameters on page 4 29 8 Click the Participants tab The Conference Properties Participants dialog box opens x General Settings Participants Video Sources Resource Force Meet Me Per Conf Recording Pre Defined Participants Conference Participants Name Sandy Stan_ISDN_Dial in Wanda Allow Undefined Parties Min Participants E Max Participants 255 Pre Defined Participants File JAccordDB Group My Group I Dial Out Manually Browse From directory OK Cancel Chapter 7 Meet Me per Conferences and Meeting Rooms 9 If required add defined participants to the conference as for On Going Conferences For more details see Table 4 8 Conference Properties Participants Options on page 4 48 10 Define the following participant parameters Select the Allow Undefined Parties check box to allow participants to connect to the conference without prior setting of their parameters 1 e undefined participants
292. her conference participants can still hear the participant This feature is applicable only to video participants The audio transmission to a participant site can be blocked either in the participant right click menu the Block button on the Participants toolbar or in the Participant Properties Connection Info2 dialog box To block audio transmission to the participant sites l In the Browser pane Monitor pane or the Status pane right click the participant s icon and then click Block Audio The participant s audio icon rat in the Audio column in the Monitor and Status panes now indicates that the audio transmission to the participant s site is blocked Alternatively block audio transmission to the participant site from the Participant Properties Connection Info2 dialog box a b Disconnect Participant Ckri T Move Participant Copy Participant ut Delete Exclusive Speaker gA Management Mute Audio Mute Video Black Audio Turn OFF AGC F Chrl ic Cr Del Ctrl M Right click the participant s icon and then click Properties The Participant Properties dialog box opens Click the Connection Info2 tab 6 29 Chapter 6 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences 6 30 The Participant Properties Connection Info2 dialog box opens Yolanda Properties Video Sources H245 Disconnection Cause Resource Details Identification Advanced Connection In
293. hone or the endpoint s remote control using the appropriate DTMF code the default code is 70 During the secure conference the chairperson and participants can perform various operations such as voting and Q amp A sessions via their DTMF input device using the appropriate DTMF codes However because secure conferences cannot be monitored these operations or status changes are not displayed in the MGC Manager Monitor pane A special icon is used to indicate that the conference is in Secure mode MGC Manager VERSION 7 5 0 17 0 x Fie Edit View Template DataBase Directory Options Window Help Ce e 2 S g sie MCUs Network Alpha 2 t Alpha 3 SFinance ES 10 24 Oct 29 2003 12 24 Oct 29 2003 2263 2 o Alpha 4 Alpha 12 Alpha 14 M j m Product Management Major HEE meu contigueat 4 ateway SESsions 0 Name status Connection Network Phone IP ai Participants Queue 0 q Finance Product Management ID 2263 ES 2 Connected be Reservations 2 ga Meeting Rooms 20 Sales MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Secure Conference Icons Table 5 7 lists the icons and definitions that indicate the current status of a Secure conference Table 5 7 Secure Conference Status Icons eee ee ee Secure The audio only or video On Going Conference is conference inthe Secure mode the conference properties and the participants list are hi
294. ice is used cont depending on the selected connection type For example if the selected connection type is ISDN the default ISDN Network Service is used For more information on Network Services refer to the MGC Administrator s Guide Volume II Chapter 3 Sub Service Name This field is applicable to ISDN participants only If a sub service is used enter the sub service name exactly as it appears in the selected Network Service definition If left blank the default sub service defined in the selected Network service is used Node Type Select the node type from the drop down list The available options for ISDN ATM MPI participants are e MCU Choose this setting for a dial out participant in a DTMF Enabled Cascaded conference e Terminal default Use this setting at all other times Num type Select the type of communication line for ISDN ATM MPI participants The available options are National International Network Specific Subscriber Abbreviated Taken from Service These options represent programs provided by the carrier and are defined in the Network Service Select Taken from Service to indicate that the program should be retrieved from the Network Service definition Save Participant These check boxes are the same as the check boxes that Participant Linked appear in the Properties Identification dialog box For more information see the description of Save Participant on page 4 94 4 Click OK t
295. icipant s connection type e Dial in e Dial out Conf Name Lists the names of the conferences in which each participant is defined 4 68 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume l Table 4 4 Participants Scheduling Conflicts window Continued Conf Type Indicates the conference type e Res Reservation e Conf On Going Conference Start Time Date and start time of each conference Date and termination time of each conference conference is being scheduled while the WeobCommander application checks The MGC Manager application checks for conflicts on the MCU on which the for conflicts on multiple MCUs To resolve a scheduling conflict 1 Inthe Participants scheduling conflicts table select an action a Select the check boxes of non conflicting participants in the Requested Participants column to retain these participants in the currently scheduled conference or Clear the check boxes of conflicting participants in the Requested Participants column to exclude these participants from the currently scheduled conference 2 Click one of the following option buttons Include selected participants and schedule Select this option to allow the system to ignore the found conflict and to schedule the conference Back to reservation Select this option to return to the current conference definition without scheduling the conference and to redefine the conference parameters Cancel scheduling
296. icipant is connected but Connection problems occurred in the connection such as synchronization loss Secondary The participant is connected Connection without video audio only This status occurs when the participant s endpoint does not support the video parameters required by the conference Noisy Line The line of this participant was detected by the system as noisy Note This indicator is used only when the automatic noisy line detection option was enabled in the system cfg ISDN H 323 Lists the type of Network used by SIP MPI or the participant to connect to the T1 CAS conference Participant Displays the participant and MCU phone numbers or IP address Numbers alias depending on the supported network and connection type IP Address In dial in connection displays the CLI number ISDN or IP SIP Address address alias of the participant calling the MCU marked by the letter P and the MCU number or IP address alias dialed by the participant marked by the letter M In dial out connection displays the dialed number ISDN or IP address alias H 323 of the participant Chapter 5 Monitoring Conferences Table 5 2 On Going Conference Monitor Pane Columns Continued Column Description Name Connection Identifies the defined type of participant s connection to the Type conference cane Dial out The MCU conference dials to the i participant Dial in The participant calls the MCU conferen
297. icipant to be moved to the Operator conference and then click Attend Disconnect Participant Ctrl T Move Participant d Copy Participant ctrl E Cut Ctrl Delete Del Exclusive Speaker O84 Operations Hold To Home Gon Fa Mute Audio Ctrl M Block Audio Turn OFF AGC Properties The participant is moved to the Operator conference while his her icon remains in the conference list and in the Participants Queue list An exclamation point appears next to the Participant icon in the Name column of all panes and in the conference tree ij In addition the Attended icon Ain is displayed in the Status column of the Participants List in the Monitor and Status panes 8 55 Chapter 8 Entry Queues Operator Conferences and Attended Conferencing 8 56 To move a participant to the Operator conference from the Participants Queue tree or Participants Queue window L Display the list of participants in the Participants Queue in the Browser or Status pane or in the Participants Queue window Right click the icon of the participant to be moved to the Operator conference and then click Attend or Attend with Details Attend ACCORD Attend With Details ACCORD Hald To Home Conf 4udio 1 F3 Fz Delete Del Stop Monitoring If you click Attend the participant is moved to the Operator conference and still appears in the Participants Queue If you click Attend with Details the participant is moved
298. icipants To set the video layout visual effects If the Continuous Presence conference is handled by a Video card you can add visual effects such as borders and colors to the video layouts display on the endpoints You can also modify the visual effects when the conference is running The following modification options are available e Background Color the color displayed when a video window is empty for example when the video layout contains more windows than connected participants e Layout Border you can add a frame around video layout windows displayed on the participant s endpoint The thickness of the border and its 3 D effect are fixed but the color can be changed e Speaker Notation you can change the color of the border around the window of the speaker to highlight it on the endpoint display The visual effects are illustrated in the Polycom ViaVideo window Layout Border Directory a FE Speed Dial POLYCOM MGC 03 16 15 lt O O amp Wolume Mite PIP Full Screen deo Dry OA Speaker Notation Background Color 4 60 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Background color 16 Click the arrow next to the Background color box The Color dialog box opens Background Basic colors T Layout Border Speaker Notation id E EEEH T ll NEEE SEE ll 158888 SEER ll JERE 2 Define Custom Colors gt gt Canos You can select a col
299. icipants including the speaker view the same layout and the same participants Personal layout selection is not available in COP and the video quality is determined by the highest common video parameters and by the video line rate In order to maintain a minimum video quality for a Conference On Port there is a minimum threshold line rate that participants must support in order to connect with video This minimum threshold line rate 1s determined according to the conference Line Rate Participants attempting to connect at rates below the minimum threshold are connected as Secondary Audio Only For example if the conference Line Rate is 768 Kbps participants must connect with a minimum line rate of 384 Kbps If they connect at a lower rate 128 or 256 Kbps they will connect as Secondary Audio Only Table 4 1 lists the minimum line rates necessary to connect to a Conference On Port Table 4 1 Conference On Port Line Rate Minimum Thresholds Defined Conference Minimum Participant Line Rate Necessary for Line Rate in Kbps Video Connection in Kbps 128 Participants will connect with video if a video session can be established MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Conference On Port setting is suitable for large Continuous Presence conferences up to 128 participants for a single video card for which you do not have enough available video resources or if several Continuous Presence conferences are running on the MCU at the sa
300. ick the conference icon or click the plus icon next to the gateway Session The list of participants of the gateway session opens In Figure 5 3 the IP participant dials the GW Service prefix the pound sign and the ISDN phone number of the H 320 endpoint The system displays the phone number of the ISDN participant 293711111 and the alias of the H 323 endpoint initiating the gateway session The same numbers appear as the participant names H ce On Going Gateway Sessions Ej H323 0 H320 29971 111 _5793 cee T S32 0GateWayPartyOutie937 11114 a 323GateWayPartyIn Figure 5 3 Gateway Session H 323 Participant Status Indicators As shown in Figure 5 4 the H 320 endpoint dials to an H 323 The dialing string is comprised of the MCU ISDN dial in number one of the numbers allocated to gateway calls and the H 323 alias in E 164 format The H 323 is entered as the extension number and is sent to the gateway in TCS4 format The system displays the ISDN endpoint s CLI number or NOCLI if no CLI number is detected as part of the gateway session name and the ISDN participant name A Qn Going Gateway Sessions See H3Z0 NOCLOH323 TC54_ 1 1014 pan a Ss20GatewWayPartyIn NOCci a i 323Gatew av Parkut NONE Figure 5 4 Gateway Session ISDN Participant Status Indicators Operations Performed During On Going Conferences During an On Going Conference the operator can perform many management tasks at the confer
301. ide Volume ll Chapter 1 Media Encryption Select this option to enable the MGC unit to automatically detect the line rate and video capabilities of incoming ISDN calls and connect the participant accordingly without prior definition of the participant properties The participant can be connected at the maximum line rate set for the conference When this option is selected the following parameters are automatically detected by the MCU and therefore are disabled Aggregation Number of Channels Video Protocol and Restrict Only Note This option is disabled for participants using the MPI and ATM Interface Types Select this check box to indicate that the ISDN ATM MPI participant is using a restricted line whose transfer rate per channel is 56 Kbps instead of 64 Kbps This option is valid for a participant in Transcoding or Continuous Presence conferences only MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Table 4 7 ISDN ATM MPI T1 CAS Participant Advanced Continued The Auto Gain Control AGC mechanism regulates audio noise and volume by balancing the received signal to all participants Different endpoints and phones produce specific source noises and volume To provide a constant output amplitude AGC can be applied to all incoming audio streams prior to mixing thereby dynamically adjusting the amplification of the input signal AGC is automatically enabled for all participants Clear this check box to disable this option f
302. ignating a VIP Participant sscssciesece tescaecesecnentoncccnssetdansenssasocns 6 21 Modifying a Participant s User Defined Properties 6 22 Adjusting the Broadcasting and Listening Volume 6 24 Muting Unmuting Participant s Audio or Video eeeeees 6 25 Blocking Unblocking Audio ccceeeeccccsccccceeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeenes 6 29 Enabling Disabling Auto Gain Control AGC eee 6 31 Video Management Operations ccecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeennnnnaaeeeeees 6 33 Controlling the Video Layout cccseecssesessseseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 6 33 Changing Video Layout for the Participant eee 6 33 Changing the Video Layout for the Conference 6 35 Modifying Video Layouts in Lecture Mode Settings 6 36 Video OCG erren iaoeia 6 37 Video Forcing at the Conference Level ee ccecceceeees 6 37 Video Forcing at the Participant Level sosoo 6 40 Conterence Level Operations ciiacascestxacensd initiciecerentisusceiaeeiasenuaecds 6 42 Adding New Participants to a Conference cececeeeeeeeeeees 6 42 Muting Audio for a Conference ccccccccseseeeceeeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeees 6 52 Locking Unlocking a Conference ccccccceeeeccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 54 Changing the Conference and Chairperson Password 6 57 Table of Contents vi Changing the Conference Duration ccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 58 E
303. in window To show or hide the Memory Indicators On the File menu select Preferences and then select Display MCU Memory If the Memory Indicators are not currently displayed a check mark is placed next to the Display MCU Memory option and the Memory Indicators are displayed If the Memory Indicators are currently displayed the check mark next to the Display MCU Memory option 1s removed and the Memory Indicators disappear File Download MCU Software ES a ea ee ee e Create Login Record Clear Login Record Exit MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Resizing the Window Panes The main window is made up of three panes Each pane can be resized vertically or horizontally by dragging one of its sizing handles either up or down or side to side This feature allows you to set the pane s size to best display additional information It is especially useful when you have a long list of MCUs or when you monitor many conferences and participants Fs MGCManager VERSION G O0IO Le File Edit Yiew Template DataBase Directory Options Window Help o Awos QJ 188203 Major 18833 Major ot Q 18834 Minor st fig 18835 Major ui 6 Normal oe OC 25 190 106 mgc 5018830 Normal ga MCU Configuration H is Cards a3 Connections BA IVR Msg Services Network Services 3 Operators GateWay Configuration T Profiles aig Reco
304. indicating that Presentation Mode is active Presentation Mode M Timer 3 Inthe Interval field select the amount of time in seconds to wait before the speaker automatically becomes the conference lecturer and the video layout changes to full screen 4 Click OK 10 11 Chapter 10 Lecture and Presentation Options Presentation Mode Monitoring 10 12 When an On Going Conference is running in Presentation Mode the Presentation icon appears in the Status column of the Status and Monitoring panes The icon of the participant who is the current lecturer changes to the Lecturer icon MGC Manager VERSION 7 5 0 15 File Edit View Template DataBase Directory Options Window Help PARTICIPANTS QUEUE FILTER MCU Configuration On Going Conferences 3 ao Empty Sep 25 Sep 25 8 Alan Debbie 8 Donald On Going Gateway Sessions 0 a Participants Queue 0 Reservations 0 H p83 Meeting Rooms Entry Queues amp Simulated MCU i Yudit s Eidbudget Product Management I 0 Connected JF nance Product Managemert T Presentation S Dial 172 22 172 74 Da Dial out 172 22 169 72 3 Diakout 172 22 172 13 Buk Dial out Presentation Mode status indication Participant designated as the Presenter budget Empty No Sep 25 Sep 25 Finance i Sep 25 Sep 25 di ii qi
305. ine a new participant The Participant Properties Identification dialog box opens Defining participant properties is described in detail in Defining Participant Properties on page 4 8 4 53 Chapter 4 Defining Conferences and Participants To define the Video Sources settings 12 Click the Video Sources tab to select the Video Layout and add visual queues to the video display of the conference The Conference Properties Video Sources dialog box opens Default Conference Properties Product Management x General Settings Participants Video Sources Resource Force Recording Video Session Video Layout g Video Switching E Auto F oO E o Sean f Transcoding Layout LJ E HU v Us OOO m v m y 1 2 z 4 St 10 Background E V Layout Border ea V Speaker Notation a Audio Muted Participants Auto Select v Lecture Mode Same Layout None v Lecturer name F Timer Auto Select Interval 5 Sec Select Unforced Participants OK Apply Help Video Sources comprise these groups of parameters Video Session is a read only area which indicates which video session type and Continuous Presence mode you selected in the Conference Properties General dialog box Visual Effects determine the look of the layout windows Using these options you can modify the colors of the window background borders and speaker i
306. information can be encrypted using an AES 128 algorithm The Encryption options are affected by the settings of the participant level flag in the system cfg Select the appropriate encryption setting for the participant e Auto The conference encryption setting encrypted non encrypted is applied to the participant In this mode the participant connects as encrypted only if the conference is defined as encrypted Off The participant joins the Conference as non encrypted On The participant joins the Conference as encrypted Note SIP protocol does not support this type of encryption For more details about encryption see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Chapter 1 Node Type Select the node type from the list e Terminal The default This setting is applicable for all settings that are not DTMF enabled cascaded conferences MCU Select this setting for a dial out participant in a DTMF enabled cascaded conference For more details see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Chapter 1 Quality Of Service Click this button to modify the QoS setting for this participant If no changes are made the definitions are taken from the Network Service definition For details see Quality of Service for IP Participants on page 4 170 4 108 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Table 4 9 IP Participant Properties Advanced Continued Enhanced Video This option is applicable to Standard Video car
307. ing volumes e MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I e MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II e MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition The content of these volumes is listed below The VoicePlus Edition includes information required to use the MGC VoicePlus bridge and Audio Only conferencing features In addition to the User s Guides the MGC kit includes MGC Administrator s Guide MGC 50 100 Getting Started Guide MGC 25 Getting Started Guide MGC Getting Started Guide MGC 50 100 Hardware and Installation Manual and MGC Hardware and Installation Manual Listed below are chapters and topics included in the volumes of the current user guides MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Chapter 1 Before You Begin Provides a general description of MGC unit system requirements and prerequisites Lists and briefly describes the chapters that comprise the MGC Manager User s Guides Chapter 2 MGC Manager Overview Provides a general description of the MGC unit and its main features Chapter 3 MGC Manager Basics Contains introductory information about the MGC Manager application and describes the application s main window menus and toolbars Includes step by step instructions for connecting to an MCU Chapter 4 Setting up Conferences Includes a general description of video conference types functions and parameters Describes participant roles and parameters Provides step by step instructions for setting up an
308. ing to the selected sort order Next By as all other participants waiting in the queue When cleared participants placed on hold will not be automatically moved to the Operator conference for assistance and you have to manually select them in the Participants Queue To Home Conf F3 Click this button to move the participant to his her Original conference when the conference is known without selecting the conference name The participant s destination conference is known in advance when participant is defined prior to conference start or when the participant was moved from the conference to the Participants Queue for assistance Hold F4 Click this button to place the participant on hold When placed on hold the participant hears background music and an icon indicating that the participant is on hold is displayed in the Status column of the Monitor and Status panes In addition the participant icon in the Participants Queue window changes to On Hold Note When placing a participant on hold the waiting time in the queue is reset to zero Move F5 Click this button to move the participant to the selected conference in the Conferences list Next F6 This button is disabled when the Auto Attend Next Participant option is selected Click this button to attend the next participant listed in the Participants Queue sorted according to the Next By criteria Close Click this button to close the dialog box 8 48 ct
309. int IP only H323 call close The endpoint did not Capabilities not accept the capabilities accepted by remote sent by the gatekeeper IP only H323 failure Internal error occurred IP only H323 call close Remote The endpoint stopped stop responding responding IP only H323 call close Master A People Content slave problem cascading failure occurred IP only SIP Failure SIP bad name The conference name is incompatible with SIP standards IP only A 8 MGC Manager User s Guide Table A 1 Primary Disconnection Reasons Continued SIP Failure cont SIP bad status A general IP card error occurred IP only SIP busy everywhere The participant s endpoints were contacted successfully but the participant is busy and does not wish to take the call at this time IP only SIP busy here The participant s endpoint was contacted successfully but the participant is currently not willing or able to take additional calls IP only SIP card rejected The IP card could not channels open the media channels IP only SIP client error 400 The endpoint sent a SIP Client Error 400 Bad Request response The request could not be understood due to malformed syntax IP only SIP client error 402 The endpoint sent a SIP Client Error 402 Payment Required response IP only SIP capabilities don t The remote device match capabilities are not compatible with the conference settings
310. ion MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Change the conference password Chairperson Place the conference on hold Chairperson Reinstate an on hold conference Chairperson Manage a Question and Answer session Chairperson Conduct a Voting session Chairperson Play the Help menu Enable or disable the Roll Call feature Chairperson Request a Roll Call and stop the Roll Call names review Chairperson End manually terminate the Conference Chairperson The IVR software module requires the installation of the Audio card in the MCU For a detailed description of the IVR module refer to the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Chapter 2 Attended Conferencing By using the MGC Manager system operators can manage the participant connection to the conference and perform the following operations Personally guide individual participants to the conference Monitor all participants who are currently waiting in the Entry Queue and IVR Queue regardless of their conference association Assist participants in the Entry Queue IVR queue or during the conference Conduct Voting sessions Control Question and Answer sessions Encryption is available at the MCU conference and participant level based on AES 128 Media Encryption and DH 1024 Key Exchange standards Encryption is supported in all types of audio and video conferences with ISDN and IP participants 2 7 Chapter 2 MGC Manager Overview Single Dial Entry Queue
311. ion User Defined fields in the Conference Properties and Participant Properties dialog boxes allow you to add general information about the conference or the participant These fields are also included in the CDR file which is used for reporting and billing purposes You can define the titles of the User Defined fields in the MGC Database Manager gt User Defined Defaults For more details see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume IT Chapter 6 Defining User Defined Defaults To view hide the User Defined fields and their titles in the Conference and Participant Properties dialog boxes you must load the Defaults to the MGC Manager To load the User Defined Defaults to the MGC Manager 1 In the MGC Manager window on the Database menu click Load Defaults from DB and then click Load Global Defaults to load the Defaults or Load Private Defaults to load the set designated for personal usage DataBase Directory Options Window Help Save Database Refresh Database Fa Filter Login Open D B Reservation Template Open D B Participant Template F Logout amp Clear Login Record Load Defaults From DB w Load Global Defaults Manage databases i aima aia i lt Database ODBC If Load Private Defaults is selected the Database Login window opens 2 Enter your Login Name and Password and click OK x Login Name admir Password T Create Login Record Cancel 3 31 Chapter 3
312. ion conference line rate and video settings must be identical to the Entry Queue settings otherwise the endpoint will experience connection failure If the participants are moved from a Video Switching Entry Queue to Transcoding or Continuous Presence conference they retain the video settings of the Entry Queue hence not using the endpoint s best capabilities To use the endpoint s highest capabilities set a different Video Switching Entry Queue for each combination of line rate and video settings used by most endpoints or define a Transcoding or Continuous Presence Entry Queue using video resources MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Table 8 1 Entry Queue Definitions Parameters Continued SS a a Transcoding Continuous Presence Select this option to define a Transcoding Continuous Presence Entry Queue When participants connect to this Entry Queue they use the MCU s video resources Participants connecting to this Entry Queue maintain their highest capabilities when moved to a Transcoding or Continuous Presence conference If the target conference is a Video Switching conference the audio video and line rates of the Entry Queue and the target conference must match or the endpoints will not be able to connect to the target conference Target Conference Settings Audio Alg Video Format Select the audio algorithm for the Entry Queue If target conferences are Audio Only conferences select G 711
313. ip the following step However when running conferences on MCU with mixed generation of card types Standard Audio and Audio Standard Video and Video you may want to override the system selection of cards that tries to maximize the use of the available resources as follows Audio Only conferences are always run on the Audio card IVR enabled Video conferences are run on the Audio card If the Video Services are enabled in the IVR Service the conference will also run on the Video card Standard Video conferences Video Switching and Continuous Presence Classic are run on the Standard Audio card and Standard Video card Continuous Presence Classic If Continuous Presence Quad Views is selected the conference will run on the Audio and Video cards 4 63 Chapter 4 Defining Conferences and Participants 4 64 Manually selecting the cards that will handle the conference allows you to overcome fragmentation in the standard Audio and Video cards For example the MCU includes two video cards six participants each and you want to schedule four conferences two conferences with two participants and two conferences with four participants When running these conferences the system assigns the first two conferences with two participants each to the same Video card while the third conference with four participants is assigned to another video card This results in insufficient resources for the fourth conference since the s
314. ipant connections and disconnections during the conference Sometimes lower video quality is viewed during the conference as a result of changes in the video protocol for example changing from H 263 to H 261 or video resolution for example from CIF to QCIF and other video parameters MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Audio and Visual Indications While defining the conference parameters you can enable any of the audio tones Entry tone Exit tone and End of Conference Alert tone to be heard during an On Going Conference If Roll Call is enabled for the conference the audio tones are replaced with an appropriate voice message and visual indications text and icon can also be displayed on the participant s endpoint The display of visual indications is enabled by setting the appropriate flags in the system cfg file For more details about these flags see the MGC Administrator s Guide Chapter 5 Table 5 8 Audio and Visual Indications on Participant Endpoints Event Audio Indications oe Text Indication Indication Participant The Entry Tone Indication format is Enters the played is heard by lt Name gt Joined Left n sites Conference all participants If e lt Name gt up to 15 Participant Roll Call is characters The name is Leaves the enabled the displayed Conference system replaces For defined the Audio tone with MRE participants as the recorded participant s name defined on the MGC and
315. ipants For a detailed description of the participant properties that are set up in the Identification and Advanced tabs see Chapter 4 IP H 323 and SIP Participant Definition on page 4 101 The participant s Identification and Advanced parameters can be modified during an On Going Conference only if the participant is disconnected To view and modify the participant s properties during a conference 1 Inthe Participant Properties dialog box click the Connection Infol tab The Participant Properties Connection Infol dialog box opens poly Properties Video Sources H245 Disconnection Cause Resource Details Identification Advanced Connection Infot Connection Info2 m Member In F Audio 7 1120 I7 Video Content Participant State Audio out 0 V Video in 28 9 0 0 00 V Video out 119 8 0 0 00 Content in Content out T120 in 7 Ivideo sync loss I r video sync loss I FECC Token M Content Token OK Cancel The Connection Infol window displays the information sent from the IP card to the MCU control unit This information is refreshed every two seconds The information is derived from RTP RTCP reports 5 57 Chapter 5 Monitoring Conferences Media channels The RTP information that is created by the RTP processor of the IP card includes packet loss overflow packet fragmentation jitter buffer
316. ist select the filter to modify and then click the Participants Queue Filter button The Participants Queue Filter dialog box opens 2 Select or deselect any of the filter criteria as needed 3 Click the OK button To delete a filter You can delete a personal filter or a public filter Gf you have the appropriate permission and you are logged into the database 1 Inthe Filters list select the filter to delete and then click the Delete Filter button A confirmation dialog box opens MGC Manager a k Ea AN Are you sure vou want to delete Filter DYI Yes No 2 Click Yes to confirm the deletion The filter is removed from the Filters list The Attended Participants Dialog Box In attended conferences all participants connecting to the Entry Queue or directly to an IVR enabled conference are automatically placed in the Participants Queue where they wait for the operator to connect them to the conference To connect the participant to the appropriate conference the operator has to move the participant to the Operator conference Attend state so he she can talk to the participant and find out the name or details of the destination conference In addition the operator usually needs to enter the participant s general parameters such as name E mail billing information and more 8 41 Chapter 8 Entry Queues Operator Conferences and Attended Conferencing 8 42 Once the information is entered and the target con
317. it s 2_Conference Recorder Name Stats Connection Netyfork Participant Numbers IP efit I g Lecture Sho Not Full J Disc H323 172 22 172 74 Bet Dial out i H33 172 22 169 72 Ret Dial out el a H323 172 22 172 13 Reb Dial out A oy Ready Port Z _ i Participant designated as Lectur Show conference status the Lecturer indication 10 16 11 Click amp View Click amp View is an endpoint application displayed on video endpoints that enables participants to modify their personal video layout and chairpersons to modify the conference video layout These operations are performed by entering the appropriate code on the endpoint s DTMF input device usually a remote control The Click amp View application is activated from the MCU e Click amp View requires Continuous Presence Classic or Quad mode Ly e Click amp View requires the Video and Audio cards e When Click amp View is enabled for the conference the Click amp View splash screen is displayed for 5 seconds on the participant endpoint If Click amp View is disabled for the conference no splash screen appears T POLYCOM we POLYCOM My IP 172 22 133 39 imma td 8 VideoMail Call Controls Figure 11 1 Click amp View Main Display Chapter 11 Click amp View Enabling the Click amp View Application The Click amp View application must be enabled in the VR Service assigned to a conference so participants can
318. itor filter For more details see Monitor Filter on page 5 25 When the Noisy Line monitor filter is enabled the Noisy Line icon il is used as an indicator in the Connection column in both the Status and Monitor tables MGC Manager VERSION 7 5 0 15 Name Status Connection Network PhonelP_ Audio video to oo H pun Alpha 14 Normal Connection Ty lt ig MCU Configuration Ea On Going Conferences 1 DIAL INOO1 i Connected M1001 1001 P d l a Rat Dial in ih Test_VSW_128_60P DIAL INOOZ Connected M1002 1002 P a Rat Dial in E DIAL INOO1 DIAL INOO3 ai Connected M1003 1003 P il a Bat Dial in 8 DIAL INOOZ re DIAL INOO4 ail Connected M1004 1004 P i T E Dial in 8 DIAL INOO3 8 DIAL INOOS a Connected M1005 1005 P il a Sa Dial in D1AL tnoo4 amp pa m mid Connected M 1006 1006 P a Bat Dial in 8 DIAL INOOS DIAL IN007 D Connected M 1007 1007 P Kil ch Rat Dial in 8 DIAL INO06 DIAL IN008 ou Connected m 1008 1008 P Qil see Sat Dial in DIAL IN0O7 DIAL IN009 m Connected M 1009 1009 P Kil Z Bat Dial in DLAINOOE F DIAL IN010 ail Connected M 1010 1010 P Kil T BA Dian z fh DIAL INOO9 yY r Name Status Commection Net work Phon Connection Audio video Syne _ Tx Rate Rx Rate ma DIAL OUTOO1 aii Connected 1001 Reb Dial out Q Ga OK 128 128 A Q Dia ouTooz gt Beh Dia out i Se OK 128 138 A re DIAL OUTOO3 aa Connected 100
319. ker changes in order to return to the proper image upon the completion of the Annex D transmission e Video mute requests from participants e Add delete participants by the operator The following requests or commands will be ignored during an Annex D broadcast e Video forcing by the operator at the conference level and at the participant level e Video forcing by the chairperson at the conference level and at the participant level e Video forcing by an endpoint at the conference level e Request to mute any endpoint including the slide sender e Request to start or end the Lecture mode e Changing the Lecture mode parameters e Changing the Video Layout parameters To run this feature video cards of version 1 4x and higher are recommended Sending an Annex D image using video cards of version 1 2x and below 1 MB cards will cause the VCP of the slide sender to stop encoding the video while receiving the slide During this time the image of the sender freezes at the remote sites 6 67 Chapter 6 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences Table 6 2 lists the transmission standards supported by Annex D Table 6 2 Annex D Format Support Standard Conference H 320 H 261 H 320 H 263 H 323 H 261 H 323 H 263 Type Video Supported Supported Supported Supported Switching Continuous Supported Supported Supported Supported Presence Software N A N A Not supported Not supported Continuous Presen
320. l default interval is 5 minutes Interval percentage of lost packets out of the total number of packets transmitted in the last RTP report interval default interval is 5 minutes Peak the highest number of lost packets in a report interval from the beginning of the channel s life span Out of Order The number of packets arriving out of order The following details are displayed Accumulated N total number of packets that arrived out of order since the channel opened Accumulated percentage of packets that arrived out of order out of the total number of packets transmitted since the channel opened Interval N number of packets that arrived out of order in the last RTP report interval default interval is 5 minutes Interval percentage of packets that arrived out of order out of the total number of packets transmitted in the last RTP report interval default interval is 5 minutes Peak the highest number of packets that arrived out of order in a report interval from the beginning of the channel s life span 5 65 Chapter 5 Monitoring Conferences Table 5 17 IP Participant Properties Video In Channel Info Continued Fragmented Indicates the number of packets that arrived to the IP card fragmented i e a single packet broken by the network into multiple packets This value can indicate the delay and reordering of fragmented packets that require additional processing but is not considered
321. l all questions press star two four Dial out to invitee To dial out to invitee press star four Admit invitee and continue dial out To admit an invitee and continue dial out press star one Disconnect invitee and continue dial out To disconnect an invitee and continue dial out press star two Admit invitee and return to the conference To admit an invitee and return to the conference press star three Disconnect invitee amp return to conference To disconnect an invitee amp return to conference press star four Invite H323 To dial out to H 323 participants and invite them to the conference Table 6 5 Operations performed during a conference using DTMF codes Chairperson Chairperson Everyone Everyone Chairperson Chairperson n 4 1 submenu 2 submenu 3 submenu 4 submenu Chairperson Chairperson Chairperson Chairperson Chairperson Chairperson MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Table 6 5 Operations performed during a conference using DTMF codes Code Invite ISDN 36 Chairperson To dial out to ISDN participants and invite them to the conference Invite MPI Or Chairperson To dial out to MPI participants and invite them to the conference Invite SIP 38 Chairperson To dial out to SIP participants and invite them to the conference Disconnect Invitee 35 Chairperson To disconnect the most recently invited participant Play Menu 83 Ever
322. l data The ISDN circuit switched bearer channel is capable of transmitting 64 Kbps of digitized information Explanation Bonding Bandwidth ON Demand INterpolarity Group A transmission protocol that aggregates two 64 Kbps B channels to function as one 128 Kbps channel When using several BRI channels Bonding means that only one D channel serves all BRI channels while the remaining D channels are used for data transfer See also BRI Bps Kbps Bits and kilobits per second a unit of bandwidth that is the amount of data that can flow during one second over a communications line using a transmission medium 1 Kbps 1000 Bps BRI Basic Rate Interface A type of ISDN connection for transmitting data consisting of 3 channels two B channels each of 64 Kbps and one D channel 16 Kbps Carrier A telephone or other company that provides telecommunication transmission services Cascading The use of two MCUs in a multipoint video conference Conference allowing for multipoint conferences with more than 12 video participants B 2 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Explanation Term CAS Channel Associated Signalling An interface for Audio Only conference participants See also T1 CAS CIF 4CIF QCIF Common Intermediate Format an optional part of the ITU T s H 261 and H 263 standards CIF specifies 288 non interlaced luminance lines that contain 176 pixels CIF can be sent at frame rates of 7 5 10 15 or 30 per s
323. layed on the endpoint s screen when a participant joins or leaves the conference or when the conference is about to end MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Conferencing Capabilities and Options Conference Reservations Features MGC Manager provides the following options Conferences can be reserved and scheduled ahead of time Reservations or set up to start immediately On Going Conferences Conference resources are defined and reserved during conference setup Recurrent conferences can be scheduled in advance a reservation can include recurrent conferences The central reservations database is easily accessed MGC Manager displays all the defined reservations for multiple MCUs Reservation less features Ad Hoc conferencing and Meeting Rooms Conference Setup Features The following options are available when setting up conferences Dial in for undefined participants Dial in with automatic line rate detection for defined participants Meet Me per Conference Meeting Rooms Dial out manual or automatic Automatic line rate detection for undefined dial out participants On demand conferencing Entry Queue access using one dial in number for all conferences Interactive Voice Response IVR software module for moderated conference access Greet and Guide with manual or automatic guidance to conferences 2 9 Chapter 2 MGC Manager Overview Conference Management and Monitoring Features 2 10 MGC Manager provi
324. le Room or copies the data to the clipboard For details see Chapter 6 Printing Conference Data on page 6 68 Properties Modifies the Meeting Room properties For details see Chapter 4 Defining a New On Going Video Conference on page 4 20 7 20 Entry Queues Operator Conferences and Attended Conferencing Entry Queues and Entry Queue Services An Entry Queue EQ is a special routing lobby to which one or several dial in numbers are assigned for both video and audio endpoints including PSTN VoIP H 320 H 323 SIP and T1 CAS endpoints Participants with the same capabilities audio only or video line rate video protocol video format etc dial the same dial in number and they are routed to the appropriate conference according to the conference numeric ID or the conference password they enter depending on the MCU configuration An Entry Queue Service must be assigned to the Entry Queue to enable the voice prompts guiding the participants through the connection process For video Entry Queues the Entry Queue Service can include a video slide that is displayed to the participants while staying in the Entry Queue during their connection process The Entry Queue remains in a passive state when there are no callers in the queue in between connections and is automatically activated once a caller dials its dial in number Ad Hoc enabled Entry Queue An On Going Conference is initiated from an Entry Queue th
325. list Only groups to which you have access are listed in the Groups list MGC Manager User s Guide Volume e Click OK The list of all the participants in the filtered category is displayed in the Pre Defined Participants list and the name of the participant s Group is displayed in the Pre Defined Participants File You can now add names from this list to the Conference Participants f In the Pre defined Participants list select the participants to add to the conference and click the Add gt button To add participants from the user template file a Click the Browse button to list the files stored on your computer The Open dialog box opens letting you select the Participant Template file usr b Using standard windows conventions select the Participant Template file and click Open The participants in the Participant Template file are listed in the Pre defined Participants list c Inthe Pre defined Participants list select the participants to add to the conference and click the Add J button If you are defining a conference that allows undefined parties that is with dial in participants who have not been defined before the conference start undefined participants for example an Entry Queue conference or Meet Me Per Conference the Allow Undefined Participants option is selected by default in this dialog box To add participants to the conference by defining new participants e Click the New button to def
326. ll the participants disconnect from the conference or if the meeting organizer has requested it To terminate a conference manually l In the Browser Monitor or Status panes expand the On Going Conferences list right click the icon of the conference to end and then click Terminate Monitor Monitor Filter Mew Participant Fa Copy Cont ctrl E Paste Participant Ctrl Paste Participant As Ctrl P Next Questioner Clear G amp A Lock Conference Voung Prink Reservation Data Video Force Drag amp Drop Properties Alternatively use the shortcut key The default key is lt Del gt or click the Terminate button zd on the Conference toolbar A dialog box opens prompting you to confirm the action MGC Manager i x IN Terminate Conference T120 alpha 7 Are You Sure ae Click Yes The conference is terminated The conference name and its icon are removed from the On Going Conferences list MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Enabling the End of Conference Reminder The End of Conference Reminder indication i appears in the MGC Manager before the end of the conference reminding you to extend the conference if necessary The indication remains on display until the conference ends This indication is displayed at a pre defined time before the end of the conference In addition to the display in the MGC Manager application to let the operator know that the conference is about to end
327. lock it while it is ongoing The purpose of conference locking 1s to e Limit the number of dial in participants connecting to the conference e Prevent additional participants from connecting to the conference once all the required participants are connected Save resources You can lock and unlock the conference from the right click menu from the toolbar or from the Conference Properties dialog box Alternatively the chairpersons can lock or unlock a conference from their endpoint using the appropriate DTMF code the default codes are Conference lock and unlock 70 and 70 To lock a conference from the Conference right click menu 1 Expand the On Going Conferences list 2 Right click the icon of the conference to lock and then click Lock Conference or Unlock Conference according to the current conference Lock status oe Monitor Monitor Monitor Filter Monitor Filter Mew Participant Fa New Participant Fa Terminate Del Terminate Del Copy Conf Cirle Copy Conk ChrlHec Paste Participant Ctrl V Paste Participant Ctrl Paste Participant 4s Ctrl P Faste Participant 4s Ctrl F Next Questianer Next Questioner Clear Qi Clear GRA Unlock Conference WEA Voting Print Reservation Data Print Reservation Data Video Force Drag amp Drop Video Force Drag amp Drop Properties Properties MGC Manager User s Guide Volume The Locked Conference icon a that appears in the Status column in the Monitor an
328. lowing criteria e Time The amount of time participants have been waiting in the Participants Queue This is the default sorting criteria When a participant is placed on hold his her time counter is reset Name The Participants Queue list is sorted by the participant name VIP Time Participants identified as VIP are listed first and the VIP list is sorted by time The remaining Standard participants are sorted according to the amount of time they have been waiting in the queue Requested Help Time Participants who have requested the operator s assistance are listed first and the list is sorted by time The remaining Standard participants are sorted according to the amount of time they have been waiting in the queue VIP Requested Help Time Participants identified as VIP are listed first and the VIP list is sorted by time Participants that have requested the operator s assistance are listed next The remaining Standard participants are sorted according to the amount of time they have been waiting in the queue 8 47 Chapter 8 Entry Queues Operator Conferences and Attended Conferencing Table 8 5 Attended Participant Dialog Box Fields Continued Include On Hold Select this check box to include participants placed Participants on hold in the list of participants to which the Auto Attend Next Participant option applies When selected the participants placed on hold will be attended accord
329. mat that is using digits 0 9 and This IP Network Service Prefix is also entered in the P Network Service Properties H 323 dialog box and is given to the participants as the dial in number Endpoint IP Endpoint IP 196 123 38 129 A 196 123 38 146 Ly E Alias 256 Alias 259 Endpoint Endpoint dials 45 dials 45 Gatekeeper MCU Conference1 Participant 1 alias 256 Participant 2 alias 259 Conference1 Participant 3 alias 378 IP card A Conference2 et Participant 1 alias 268 car Participant 2 alias 281 Participant 3 alias 224 Dials 148 A Endpoint IP 3 172 123 12 89 Alias 268 Figure 4 3 Advanced Dial in H 323 Participant Network Service Prefix 45 When the participants dial in the call arrives at the gatekeeper The gatekeeper locates the MCU and tries to allocate a port from the first free IP card If the resource is available the participant is connected and routed to the appropriate conference according to the IP address alias as defined in the Participant Properties dialog box If the resource is unavailable from the first IP card the system will look for the port on any available IP cards and allocate the resources automatically according to their availability If no port is available the connection will be rejected In this mode the system is enabled to automatically allocate resources to run conferences saving you time and effort in scheduling conferences 4 73 Chapter 4 D
330. mber For example if the conference name is Finance the name of the first participant to connect to the conference is Finance_ 000 MGC Manager VERSION 7 5 0 17 File Edit View Template DataBase Directory Options Window ee Alpha 12 eee Network Phane IP Retries Left Channels Aggregation Alpha 14 t pig Product Management Major Finance_ 000 D connected 172 22 133 67 Rat Dial in i T 0 g la xa MCU Configuration eo Finance_ 001 Audio Only D Connected M102 P 424 Dial in 0 1 1 H221 On Going Conferences 5 R ACCORD H i Finance 8 Finance_ 000 8 Finance_ 001 a rf Ifa Mame Status Connection Network PhonelP_ Connection Type Audio video Sync Tx Rate RxRate Retries Left Media Member iw Finance ProducNanagement ID 2467 2 Connected Hi Finance _ 000 Connected 172 22 133 67 By ib Dial in e ee OK 168 162 0 Audio video AA Finance _ 001 Audio Only D Connected M102 P424 Bak Dial in dl OK 64 64 D Audio H 4 gt Ready NUM 4 In the Monitor pane the Participant Numbers IP Address SIP Address column shows the number or IP address dialed by a participant to connect to the conference When ISDN participants dial in to the Meet Me Per Conference their CLI number as identified by the MCU appears with the prefix P The conference MCU number dialed by the participant appears with the prefix M In a dial ou
331. me and then click Save If Printer is selected the Print dialog box opens Select the required printer and then click OK The conference data is printed using the printer s current settings If Clipboard is selected the conference data is copied to the clipboard from where it can be pasted in other text processing applications 6 73 Chapter 6 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences Managing Question and Answer Sessions 6 74 The Question and Answer Q amp A session provides a method of organizing the participants questions or comments during a lecture or a large conference Usually during a large conference or lecture all participants excluding the lecturer or the main speaker are muted by the system A participant who wants to ask a question or comment on the subject being discussed presses the appropriate code on the DTMF input device the default code is 22 to enter the Q amp A queue The participants are placed in the Q amp A queue in the order in which they have requested to ask a question You can also place participants in the Q amp A queue from the MGC Manager application using the Q amp A Toolbar Once in the Q amp A queue you can select the participant to ask the question or let the next participant in line ask the question If the participant is muted by the MCU in the Exclusive Speaker mode you have to unmute the participant before you let him or her ask the question You can stop the que
332. me time and you do not have enough video resources to run all of them simultaneously Conference On Port guidelines e Limited to 128 participants with a single video card e Available only with the Video card e Lecture Show function is disabled e Not available with Cascading conferences Dual Stream Mode In this mode the endpoint sends two separate video streams video and data The data streams are treated differently by the endpoint and may be shown on separate screens Depending on the endpoints that send and receive the video streams the following dual stream modes are available e H 239 People Content e People and Content VO e Polycom Visual Concert PC FX e Duo Video For a detailed description of Dual Stream Mode video conferences see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Chapter I Advanced Conference Settings Lecture Mode Lecture Mode allows you to designate one participant as the lecturer The lecturer is the only one seen by all the other participants throughout the conference in full screen Lecture Mode enables automatic switching between the conference participants in the speaker window allowing the conference speaker to see all the other conference participants one participant after the other or all of them in a Continuous Presence layout For a detailed description of Lecture options that can be set in a video conference see Chapter 10 Lecture and Presentation Options Chapter 4 D
333. mp View application is displayed on the endpoint s screen POLYCOM we POLYCOM Figure 11 2 Chairperson Click amp View Display 11 11 Chapter 11 Click amp View aa 0 BGO POLYCOM mA 99A Figure 11 3 Participant Click amp View Display The conference view in the Click amp View main display area is 1x1 in Classic conferences only 11 12 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Click amp View Menu Options The Click amp View application has two modes Chairperson and Participant D POLYCOM Conference Layout POLYCOM Personal AARG Layout Back to previous Back to screen In the Main Conference Menu screen this Layout option closes the Click amp View application Request My IP 172 22 133 39 0 iz H E Eee Operator s z as Assistance A VideoMail Call Controls For the Chairperson the Home screen presents six options with the appropriate DTMF codes For a Participant five options are enabled while the conference layout option is disabled To activate each menu option use your DTMF input device to select a DTMF code see the Help screen Table 11 1 Click amp View Main Menu Options Description DTMF p Code Conference Layout Enables the Chairperson to modify the conference layout for all participants Layout the video layout displayed on his her screen This change does not affect other participants Personal Ea Enables each participant to modify 11 13 Cha
334. mplemented in IP only conferences Continuous Presence conferences can also be defined as Conference On Port COP to save video resources For more details see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings For more details on Video Session options see Video Session Types on page 4 7 Remarks Using up to 300 characters you can enter text such as any useful information to be viewed by other operators or the conference chairperson via the WebCommander application Remarks entered at the reservation stage conference setup are included with conference properties and in the records that are saved to the CDR file During an On Going conference you can add a new entry and save it using the Update Remark button 4 27 Chapter 4 Defining Conferences and Participants Table 4 4 Conference Properties General Continued Remarks History Displays all remarks that were entered and or updated for this conference by operators and were saved to the CDR file This field can be read during the conference but not at the reservation stage Entries are shown in ascending order latest entry showing at top of list 4 Click the Settings tab to define the conference technical parameters The Properties Settings dialog box opens x General Settings Participants Video Sources Resource Force Meet Me Per Cont Recording r General Settings Restricted
335. mputer The codes enable data input and control of voice processing systems DTMF signals can pass through the entire connection to the destination device and therefore are used for remote control after the connection with the MCU is established A 2 Mb digital switched line used in Europe Endpoint An endpoint is any videoconferencing unit Far End Camera Control In certain video cameras the accompanying software that enables a participant to control a remote camera Used in Continuous Presence video conferences in conjunction with the LSD option See also LSD Frame A group of bits that make up an elementary block of video data for transmission by certain protocols Frame Rate The number of video frames displayed on screen during one second measured in fps frames per second G711 ITU T audio algorithm 64Kbps 3 4 kHz G722 ITU T audio algorithm 64Kbps 7 kHz G728 ITU T audio algorithm 16Kbps 3 4 kHz Gatekeeper A type of server that performs two main functions translates LAN alias addresses of terminals and gateways to IP addresses and provides bandwidth management H 221 ITU T standard that defines how to multiplex video audio control and user data into one serial bit stream ITU T standard that defines simple multipoint control systems procedures and describes network maintenance functions B 4 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume rem Explanation Term H 231 ITU T standard that defines a set of MCU
336. n 14 To complete the Reservation definition procedure click OK from any Reservation Properties dialog box When adding a new participant to a Reservation the system checks whether a participant with the same name is already defined in any of the other conferences scheduled for the same time If the participant name already exists in any other conference scheduled to run at the same time the Participants Scheduling Conflicts window opens For more details see Chapter 4 Resolving Scheduling Conflicts on page 4 67 The reservation is saved on the MCU and it is added to the Reservations list 9 7 Chapter 9 Conference Reservations Listing the Current Reservations To list the reservations currently scheduled on an MCU 1 Connect to an MCU on which the Reservation was scheduled and expand its tree 2 Double click the Reservations icon or click the plus icon next to the Reservations icon The Reservations list for the selected MCU is displayed E Reservations ee eel ACCORD aa eas Finance ae a Human Resouces Int l Sales oe a eer a E Josh ee Manufacturing oa a Public Relations Ly Once a Reserved conference starts it is moved to the On Going Conferences list Reservations Icons Each reservation in the Reservations list is identified by an icon and its name Table 9 3 describes the reservation icons used to identify the reservation type Table 9 3 Conference Reservation Ic
337. n e By modifying the properties of an existing reservation e By using a reservation template from the Reservation database or the Res Template file Defining the Reservation Recurrence Properties The reservation s basic parameters are defined using standard parameter settings as described in Defining a New Reservation on page 9 3 The recurrence parameters of a reservation are defined in the Reservation Properties Scheduler tab To define Recurring Conference Properties 1 Define a new Reservation or display the properties of an existing reservation or reservation template Chapter 9 Conference Reservations 2 Click the Scheduler tab The Reservation Properties Scheduler dialog box opens Standard New Reservation Template Properties Product Management E General Scheduler Settings Participants Video Sources Resource Force Meet Me Per Conf Recording Starting Date KE October 2004 Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu 26 27 28 29 30 3 4 5 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 17 18 19 20 21 Z 25 26 27 28 31 1 2 3 4 2 9 16 23 6 Starting Time 11 31 4 Reservation Recurrence Cancel Select the date and the start time of the first reservation in the sequence Click this button to define the frequency at which the reservation Occurs 3 Define the start date and time parameters of the first reservation in the recurrence pattern For example if you are planning a weekly reservation that occur
338. n click the check box of the additional day of the week at which the conference is to be repeated and set the recurrence interval to 1 If Monthly is selected the system automatically sets the current day as defined in the Scheduler dialog box Chapter 9 Conference Reservations Table 9 4 Reservation Recurrence Parameters Continued Fics Cs Recurrence Pattern cont Range of Recurrence 9 20 The reservation recurrence parameters change to let you select the recurrence pattern choose either the specific day default of every x month s ora 33 kk specific sequence such as the first Thursday of every x month s Reservation Recurrence i x Recurrence Pattern Monthly Day js of every li monthis The third Thu of every 1 morth s Range OF Recurrence f End After ii Oecunrences End By Thu 15 July 2004 cat Day dd of every x months Repeats a conference on a specified day of the month ata specified monthly interval For example if the first reservation is scheduled for the 6th of the current month and the monthly interval is set to 1 the monthly reservation will occur on the 6th of each of the following months The 1st last weekday of every x months Repeats a conference on a particular week on a specified day of the week at a specified monthly interval For example a recurrent meeting on the third Monday of every two months End After x O
339. n with the gatekeeper and the bandwidth allocated to the participant ARQ Admission Request indicates that the participant has requested the gatekeeper to allocate the required bandwidth on the LAN Admitted indicates that the gatekeeper has allocated the required bandwidth to the participant DRQ Disengage Request the endpoint informs the gatekeeper that the connection to the conference is terminated and requests to disconnect the call and free the resources None indicates that there is no connection to the gatekeeper Requested The bandwidth in Kops requested by the Bandwidth participant from the gatekeeper in the Admission Request Allocated The actual bandwidth in Kbps allocated to the participant by the gatekeeper when the participant is admitted to the conference Requested Info Some gatekeepers request an alive and well Interval message from the endpoint to keep the resources allocated to it This box indicates the frequency with which this message is sent to the gatekeeper Gatekeeper Indicates whether the participant s call is routed via Routed the gatekeeper 5 70 Lists the endpoint s audio video and line capabilities as received from the remote site MGC Manager User s Guide Volume If the participant is in a Continuous Presence conference click the Video Sources tab to check the video layout selected for this participant The Participant Properties Video Sources dialog
340. n Mode Displays the penne Audio G728 endpoint s actions G 711 A law p law Other H263 soe G 722 64 48 56 Transfer Xfer_2x64 when establishing Other Derestrict i i o LSD MLP LSD Of connection with the LSD MLP MLP_Off MCU HSD HMLP H_Mlp_Off_Co Initial capabilities CIF at 15 fps Annex F QCIF SQCIF at 30 fps Restrict Cap of Restrict or Non Restrict b capabilities Displ he M A_Law m Local Communication Mode F ays the MCU s ave Transfer Xfer_2x64 a actions when Audio G728 establishin eu 6k Other H263 Ung pet Cap_2B Other Not_B6_HO connection with the VTT 29 97 Flite Seane a articioant s endpoint Y72997 Other Derestrict p p p hibe Car LSD MLP LSD_Off lt eave Lsd LSD MLP MLP_Off Dat Cac 300 HSD HMLP Hsd_Com_Off xer ap_ HSD HMLP H_Mlp_Off_Co b 4 b OK Cancel The H227 dialog box displays real time information about the capabilities that are being exchanged between the MCU and the endpoint during the connection process When the connection process is aborted you can use this information to identify the cause of the connection problem and the stage at which the connection process stopped Connection problems are caused by discrepancies between the participant s capabilities as received from the participant s endpoint the capabilities as defined in the Participant s Properties dialog box and the capabilities as defined in the Conference Properties dialog box
341. n dialog box opens 4 86 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume When defining a new participant the Participant Properties Identification dialog box opens Default Participant Properties x Identification Advanced Name Connection Type Interface Type Dialin ISDN x Participant Numbers MCU Numbers Extension Identifier String Meet me per Bonding Phone Number Party x User Defined 1 User Defined 2 User Defined 3 User Defined 4 Broadcasting Volume 5 Listening Yolume 5 Audio Only T VIP JV Save Participant Cancel Help The system displays the default parameters as defined for the default database template For more details see MGC Manager User s Guide Volume IT Chapter 7 Define the following parameters Table 4 5 Participant Properties Identification Name Enter a unique name for the participant using up to 80 characters 4 87 Chapter 4 Defining Conferences and Participants Table 4 5 Participant Properties Identification Continued Connection Type Select the connection type 4 88 Dial in Participants call the MCU at conference time When selecting this type the Meet Me Per options are enabled for ISDN MPI ATM participants ISDN MPI ATM participants dial the MCU s dial in number is provided H 323 participants dial the IP Network Service Prefix and the conference Numeric ID Alternatively they can dial the IP address o
342. n each column Columns are listed in their default order Each column can include an icon textual indication or both Table 5 2 On Going Conference Monitor Pane Columns Column Description Name 7 Name The name of the On Going Conference or participant and an icon indicating the conference and participant type and status Conference Indicators Video conference In this type of conference participants use audio and video channels to connect This conference may include both Audio Only and video participants Audio Only conference This type of conference can be run on an Audio Only MCU Voice Plus or on a unified MCU Note Audio Only conferences are described in the MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Operator conference Audio Only or video Allows the operator and a single participant to talk in a side conference without disturbing the On Going Conference For this purpose the participant is moved to the Operator conference from the Entry Queue IVR Queue Welcome Queue Greet and Guide or On Going Conference 5 10 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Table 5 2 On Going Conference Monitor Pane Columns Continued Column RO feonneton Desorpton Name cont er 0 End of conference alert Indicates is the conference is about to end Faulty audio or video conference An exclamation point next to the conference icon indicates that the conference has a problem and requires operator
343. n if another card has enough ports to allocate to that participant 4 71 Chapter 4 Defining Conferences and Participants 4 72 H 323 Participants Simple Dial in with Gatekeeper When using an H 323 alias to dial in to the MCU a gatekeeper is required to provide address translation and routing to the IP card When the participant connects to the conference the participant enters the alias of the IP card as the dialing string The Gatekeeper routes the call to the appropriate IP card according to the dialed alias MGC Manager determines the conference to which the participant is assigned according to the participant s defined alias or IP address The aliases for the participant and the card must be defined in the E 164 format that is using digits 0 9 and Endpoint IP Endpoint IP 196 123 38 129 A 196 123 38 146 Alias 259 oe gt Alias 256 MCU IP 172 22 138 146 Alias 146 Dials 146 Dials 146 Conference MG323 module A Gatekeeper Conference2 MG323 module B IP 172 22 138 148 Dials 148 Alias 148 Endpoint IP 172 123 12 89 Alias 268 E Figure 4 2 H 323 Participant Simple Dial in with Gatekeeper MGC Manager User s Guide Volume H 323 Participants Advanced Dial in In advanced dial in one ZP Network Service is defined for all the IP cards installed in the system This IP Network Service is registered in the gatekeeper using a prefix which is defined in the E 164 for
344. n participants dial in using the number communicated to them they connect to the Entry Queue where they are requested to enter the appropriate conference Numeric ID According to this conference ID participants are routed to the appropriate conference If the MCU is configured to prompt for conference password for routing from the Entry Queue to the destination conference as shown in Figure 4 7 one or several dial in numbers are allocated to an Entry Queue and a password is assigned to each conference The system also allocates a Numeric ID to the Entry Queue and each of the conferences When participants dial in using the number communicated to them they connect to the Entry Queue where they are requested to enter the appropriate conference password According to this password participants are routed to the appropriate conference MGC Manager User s Guide Volume MCU Conference1 Numeric ID 1234 Password 34567 Chairperson 89900 IVR Service Password H Password man 34567 E E inil J J 34567 71356 Joins as Chairperson ISDN PSTN Endpoint OA Entry Queue Numeric ID 1222 ISDN PSTN Endpoint IP Network Service Prefix 925 Conference2 Numeric ID 1300 Password 71356 Figure 4 7 Conference Access via Entry Queue using Conference Password and Conference IVR When an IVR Service is assigned to the conference participants are guided to the conference by
345. n the system cfg and will not be applied even if checked here Mute By When checked indicates that the participant has Participant muted the audio and or video transmissions from the endpoint to the conference Mute By MCU If checked indicates that the audio and or video transmissions from the endpoint have been muted by the MCU as in the Exclusive Speaker mode or in a Lecture Show Block When checked the audio transmission from the conference to the participant s endpoint is blocked but the participant will still be heard by other participants Attending Displays the participant or operator status in an Attended conference IVR enabled or Greet and Guide e Oper Participant This option is checked when viewing the operator parameters e Attending This option is checked when the participant is in an Attended state 5 69 Chapter 5 Monitoring Conferences Table 5 18 IP Participants Properties Connection Info2 Parameters ans Participant Displays the status of the Attended participant Attending State e Attended The participant is being assisted by the operator in an Operator conference On Hold The participant was placed on hold and hears background music In video conferences the participant also views the Welcome slide For more details on Attended conferences see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Chapter 4 Gatekeeper Status Indicates the status of the participants registratio
346. n the 2 x 2 Video Layout window participant Josh is indicated by a small blue box in the top left corner of the image Josh E Duke m i Val In all other conferences the Position indicator is a blue square and the participant s position is not indicated The position each participant occupies can be defined in the Conference Properties Video Sources window If no video forcing is applied Auto Select the system assigns participants to the video windows randomly There are three stages in the synchronization that occur during the connection between the endpoint and the MCU Video Switch Protocol and Video Intra These synchronization aspects indicate whether the video information has been correctly transmitted and received between the endpoint the MCU The system indicates if there was any problem in any of the synchronization stages between the endpoint and the MCU Check marks in any of the check boxes indicate that the system failed to synchronize and the cause of the failure Video Switch Video Switch is a certain pattern sequence of bits in the video information The identification of this pattern is used for the first stage in the synchronization process Once the synchronization is established the system moves to the next stage in the synchronization process This option is checked when there is a problem in the first stage of the synchronization The counter indicates the number of times the system tried to synch
347. n the Attended Participant dialog box the operator can place a participant on hold lt F5 gt In the Attended Participant dialog box the operator can move a participant to a selected conference lt F6 gt In the Attended Participant dialog box places a participant next in line for operator attention lt F8 gt Adds a new participant to an On Going Conference Reservation or Meeting Room 3 33 Chapter 3 MGC Manager Basics Table 3 10 Command Shortcut Keys Continued Refreshes the database lt F10 gt Temporarily moves the Operator to the conference for short announcements and assistance Operator Join lt F11 gt Ends the Operator s temporary connection to the conference and returns to the Operator conference End Operator Join lt F12 gt Moves the next participant in line from the Participants Queue to the Operator conference for assistance lt Del gt Terminates an On Going Conference or deletes a Reservation Meeting Room Participant or any template 3 34 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Disconnecting an MCU To disconnect the MGC Manager from an MCU 1 Inthe Browser pane right click the MCU icon and then click Disconnect u MCUs Network Mew Reservation Resource Report Dongle Information COR MCU Time Faults MEU Utils F Retrieve Diagnostic Files Fast Gonhiguration wizard Play Batch Telnet F IF Terminal SNMF Stop Curre
348. nce Definition 26 Click OK in any of the Conference Properties tabs to complete the conference definition The Conference Properties dialog box closes If all the requirements are met and the properties are configured correctly the new conference is added to the On Going Conferences list below the on Going Conferences icon and starts immediately You can click the conference icon to view its status in the Status pane of the MGC Manager main window For information on monitoring On Going conferences see Chapter 5 For information on operations that can be performed during the conference see Chapter 6 Resolving Scheduling Conflicts Upon completion of scheduling a Reservation or an On Going Conference the system checks for scheduling conflicts for individual participants A scheduling conflict for a participant results when two or more conferences are set up to occur at the same time or at overlapping times and contain one of the following parameters e Participants with the same name e Participants with the same ISDN T1 CAS phone numbers e Participants with the same IP address Alias Depending on the connection type that was defined for the participant MGC Manager looks for specific conflict criteria to determine if the participant is double booked Table 4 3 lists these criteria Table 4 3 Scheduling Conflict Criteria by Connection Type Connection Type Conflict Criteria Dial out H 320 e Name or Phone Number s Dial out IP
349. nce is identified by two icons ry Re fica Video Operator conference aim ai Audio Only Operator conference ip The Operator icon ti is used to identify the operator participating in an Operator conference 8 28 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Defining an Operator Reservation You can define an Operator reservation directly The definition procedure is similar to the definition of an On Going Operator Conference To define a new Operator Reservation 1 Expand the MCU tree 2 Right click on the Reservations icon and then click New Operator Reservation l pu Product Management Normal Hee ser MCU Configuration H 4 ae On g Conferences 1 ne on re Gateway Sessions 0 Paone r pai le i a Hew Reservation see Administ New Operator Reservation E budget ee A at Finance Paste Ctrl bo fe Planning Paste As Cirlt P n T Meeting Room Paste SIP Factory As The Reservation Properties General dialog box opens 3 Define the conference Media and Duration as described in the section Defining an On Going Operator Conference on page 8 24 4 Click the Scheduler tab The Conference Properties Scheduler dialog box opens Define the conference Start Date and Time 6 Define the remaining parameters as described in Defining an On Going Operator Conference on page 8 24 8 29 Chapter 8 Entry Queues Operator Conferences and Attended Conferencing S
350. nclude only dial in participants only dial out participants or both dial in and dial out participants Dial out Participant In a conference that includes only dial out participants each participant can be called individually by the conferencing system and connected directly to the conference usually without interaction with the IVR system The connection process can be initiated manually or automatically In the manual mode the operator or meeting organizer instructs the conferencing system to call the participant In the automatic mode the system calls all the participants one after the other Dial out participants must be defined mainly their name and telephone number in the MGC Manager or WebCommander by the meeting organizer operator Dial in Participant In a conference that includes dial in participants the participants can be defined in advance and they are identified by their Calling Line Identifier CLI number ISDN or IP address alias IP once they connect to the conference The conference can include anonymous undefined participants These participants were not defined by the operator meeting organizer prior to the conference start and they connect to the conference by dialing the conference dial in number and have entered the appropriate password if one was assigned to the conference Conferences that include undefined dial in participants must be defined as Meet Me Per Conference Meeting Room or a standard conf
351. ncryption check box to enable encryption at the conference level cannot be changed once the conference is running The participants encryption options however may be changed 5 The conference encryption setting is part of the conference reservation and 7 Define the remaining parameters as described in Chapter 4 Conference Properties Settings Parameters on page 4 29 8 Click the Participants tab The Conference Properties Participants dialog box opens Debbie Properties Product Management E x General Settings Participants Resource Force Pre Defined Participants Conference Participants Name 2 Search New F Allow Undefined Parties Min Participants Bs Max Participants fi Pre Defined Participants File c Debbie MGC data T emplate and MCU files participants usr I Dial Out Manually Browse From database From directory Cancel In an Operator Conference only one participant is defined the operator The operator adds the second participant interactively during an On Going Conference 8 26 10 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Define the operator as a new participant or if the operator is already defined in a Participant Template file or in the Participant database add the operator to the conference as described in Chapter 4 To add participants from the database on page 4 52 If required select the Resource Force tab to define the r
352. nd the VIP icon appears in the Name column To revert from the VIP status to regular participant 1 In the Browser pane the Monitor pane or the Status pane of the main window right click the participant s icon and then click Properties The Participant s Properties Identification dialog box opens 2 Clear the VIP check box and then click OK The selected participant reverts to a regular participant and the VIP icon is replaced by the Standard Participant icon Modifying a Participant s User Defined Properties 6 22 In the Participant Properties Identification dialog box User Defined fields 1 2 3 and 4 you can enter or edit additional information that identifies the participant such as the E mail address company name or job title You can also change the titles of the User Defined fields as required These fields are displayed by default however if you do not see them you can configure the dialog box to include them This is done in the Database Manager application The User Defined fields Participant Properties Identification are displayed only if the Show User Defined Fields in Conference Properties option is selected in the Database Manager gt User Defined Defaults For more details about loading the User Defined field titles see Chapter 3 Loading the User Defined Default Set to the MGC Manager Application on page 3 31 To modify User Defined fields l MGC Manager User s Guide Volume In
353. ndication These effects are applicable only to Continuous Presence conferences and only if a Video card is installed in the MCU 4 54 ct 13 14 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Audio Muted Participants The Unforced Participant and Audio Muted Participant options are active only during the On Going Conference see Muting Audio for a Conference on page 6 52 Video Layout determines the number and the arrangement of video windows displayed on the endpoint screens and if required select the participants to be displayed in the layout windows video forcing Video layout selection is applicable only to Continuous Presence conferences Lecture Mode enables you to set the conference to one of the lecturing modes For a detailed description of all Lecture Presentation options see Chapter 10 Lecture and Presentation Modes The Video Sources dialog box is hidden when defining an Audio Only conference or when the MGC Manager is configured to Audio Look amp Feel mode Optional Select the Same Layout check box to impose identical video layout settings to all participants In Video Switching and Transcoding conferences select this option 1f you want the speaker to view him herself instead of the previous speaker This option can only be selected during the conference definition stage but not when the conference is running For Continuous Presence conferences select the video layout by either
354. nding on the current participant status in the On Going Reconnect Conference this button allows you to disconnect or reconnect the participant 5 58 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Table 5 16 IP Participant Properties Connection Info1 Parameters Member In Channels Status Channels Audio Video T 120 Content and FECC The checked boxes indicate which multimedia channels audio video FECC Content and data are connected For example if the participant is partially connected only the audio channel is connected Indicates the channel types used by the participant and whether the channel is connected which is indicated by a check mark or not Incoming channels are the endpoint s capabilities as established in the signaling negotiations Outgoing channels are the MCU s capabilities as established in the signaling negotiations The following channels are listed H 225 The call signaling channel H 245 The Control channel over which the MCU and the endpoint capabilities are exchanged Audio in Incoming Audio channel for the media stream Audio out Outgoing Audio channel for the media stream Video in Incoming Video channel with a QCIF media stream with a fixed bitrate for all endpoints Video out Outgoing dynamic video channel with a CIF media stream and higher 4CIF bitrate for each participant Content in Indicates whether the incoming Content channel in H 239 People Content conferences is
355. ndividual conferences for all employees in an organization and it enables them to start On Going Conferences from their endpoints on the fly Meeting Rooms Meeting Rooms are unscheduled conferences that are created once and can be activated as many times as required A Meeting Room remains in MCU memory in passive mode until the first participant connects to it and activates the conference The Meeting Room owner informs the participants of the conference start date and time dial in number and the Numeric ID so they can join the conference When the conference ends the Meeting Room reverts to passive mode until the next activation and it can be modified between activations from the Meeting Rooms list Chapter 4 Defining Conferences and Participants Lj Using this method a separate Meeting Room must be defined for each employee in the organization which may be problematic in very large organizations where the number of required Meeting Rooms may exceed the limit of 2000 conferences stored in the MCU memory Meeting Rooms can be defined only if the appropriate Customer Permission defined in the system cfg is installed in the MGC Manager application For more details refer to the MGC Administrator s Guide Chapter 5 Edit system cfg CUSTOMER_PERMISSION Conference Types Depending on the scheduling method required the following conference types are available Standard An individual conference that is schedul
356. nference The following procedure is optional and should be used only if you want to manually allocate a specific number to the conference Otherwise skip this procedure and the MCU automatically allocates the dial in number 1 Inthe Conference Properties Meet Me per Conf dialog box in the Meet Me Service ISDN Service pane click the Plus button The Meet Me Service dialog box opens Meet Me Service x Service Name Dial n Number 1 Dial n Number 2 Cancel 2 Define the dial in numbers to be assigned to the conference as follows Table 7 1 Meet Me Service Options et eee Service Name Enter the name of the ISDN or T1 CAS Network Service to be used by participants to connect to the conference exactly as it is defined in the Network Services list the system is case sensitive Dial in Number Enter the first dial in number to be assigned to the 1 conference This number must be defined in the dial in numbers range defined for the selected ISDN or T1 CAS Network Service For more details regarding the dial in numbers range see the MGC Administrator s Guide Chapter 3 Note When connecting ISDN lines via a private PBX to the MCU the PBX may truncate the dialed numbers In that case the dial in numbers defined in the ISDN Network Service may include only part of the dialed string The operator must add the truncated digits to the dial in number conveyed to the participant Dial in Number En
357. nference the billing code can be modified by the chairperson or the operator via the MGC Manager To modify the Billing code Right click the On Going Conference icon and then click Properties The Conference Properties dialog box opens Click the General tab The Conference Properties General dialog box opens Polycom_ 3 Properties Prod Mgmt General Scheduler Settings Patticipants Video Sources Resource Force Ongoing State Conf Entry Password 292002 Web Chairperson Password 073670 Nunperic ID 2260 User Defined 1 OO Se User Defined 2 C ee ee User Defined 3 o Conference Type Media E Saai ERN Peh Audio IP H322 Meeting Room Cosplay Audio IP H323 C Operator ISDN ATH Flemarks Update Remark Remarks History Cancel Apply Help MGC Manager User s Guide Volume 3 Enter anew Billing code and click OK From this point on the modified Billing code is applicable to this conference Changing the Conference User Defined Parameters Lg During an On Going Conference the User Defined fields can be modified by the chairperson or the operator via the MGC Manager The User Defined I 2 and 3 fields enable you to enter general information about the conference such as the company name the contact person name the contact person s E mail or telephone number or any required information The User Defined fi
358. nference Direct Dialing and Access In this mode the conference is set as Meet Me Per Conference or Meeting Room no IVR service is assigned to the conference and a dial in number or dial string is assigned to the conference For a detailed description of Meet Me per Conference and Meeting Rooms definition see Chapter 7 The conference dial in number ISDN PSTN and T1 CAS dialing string H 323 or SIP URI SIP are given to all the conference participants who use it to directly connect to the conference Using this mode any participant who dials the conference number string can connect to the conference until all the MCU resources are utilized or the maximum number of participants 1s reached MCU Conference1 Qo Numeric ID 1222 dS Dial in number 9251222 IP Endpoint Qo 2 9251222 ISDN PSTN Endpoint oP e ael Conference2 Numeric ID 1223 Dial in number 9251223 ISDN PSTN IP Network Service Endpoint Prefix 925 Figure 4 4 Direct Conference Access 4 75 Chapter 4 Defining Conferences and Participants 4 76 Undefined Dial in ISDN Participants ISDN and PSTN participants dial the number assigned to the conference with the appropriate area codes As shown in Figure 4 4 the dial in number assigned to conferencel is 9251222 and the dial in number assigned to conference2 1s 9251223 Participants who dial 9251222 are automatically connected to conference Undefined Dial in H 323
359. nference is created and added to the list of On Going Conferences You can monitor the status of the conference and its participants as described in Chapter 5 When starting an On Going Conference the system checks if the participants assigned to this conference are already included in any other On Going Conference or Reservation that is scheduled to start at the same time If such participants are found the Duplicate Booking dialog box opens listing the conflicting participants For more details see Chapter 4 Resolving Scheduling Conflicts on page 4 67 If the MCU does not have enough resources to run the conference an appropriate error message Is displayed You can add participants to the conference or dial in participants can now connect to the conference For more information about participants connection to the conference see Chapter 4 Joining an On Going Conference on page 4 70 For more information about adding participants to the On Going Conference see Chapter 4 Conference Properties Participants Options on page 4 48 3 27 Chapter 3 MGC Manager Basics To schedule a conference to start later a Reservation 1 Right click the Reservation Template icon and then click Start The Conference Properties Schedule dialog box opens 2 Select the conference Starting Date and Time Click OK The conference is added to the Reservations list 3 28 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Viewing C
360. nference or failed to connect to the conference If you have difficulties connecting dial out ISDN participants make sure that the specific switch used for the connection does not require the addition of the pound key at the end of the dial string If it does modify the properties of the disconnected participant For listing of all participant connection status icons see Chapter 5 Monitor Pane Information on page 5 10 Changing the Participant Connection Type Dial In Dial Out 6 6 Sometimes you need to change the connection type used by the participant to connect to the conference For example when the participant cannot dial in and you want the MCU to dial to the participant You can toggle between the dial in and dial out connection type using the Participant Properties Identification dialog box or from the Participant right click menu gi The Connection Type parameter can be changed only when the participant is disconnected from the conference and both dial in and dial out parameters are defined in the Participant Properties Identification dialog box If the dial in phone numbers are not defined for the ISDN participant when switching to dial in and the Meet Me Per option is set to MCU Conference the system automatically allocates the appropriate phone numbers from the list of dial in numbers defined in the ISDN Network Service that was selected for participants If the Meet Me Per option is set to Party or Cha
361. nference properties from the clipboard to On Going Conferences list Reservations list Entry Queue list Meeting Room list or Reservations database 3 32 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Table 3 10 Command Shortcut Keys Continued lt Ctrl gt lt P gt Pastes participant properties from the clipboard into an On Going Conference Reservation or Conference Template while opening the Participant Properties dialog box for modification of the participant s settings Pastes conference properties from the clipboard to On Going Conferences list Reservations list Entry Queue list Meeting Room list or Reservations database or Template file while opening the Conference Properties dialog box for modification of the conference settings lt Ctrl gt lt R gt Connects reconnects a participant to an On Going Conference lt Ctrl gt lt T gt Disconnects a participant from the On Going Conference lt Ctrl gt lt M gt Mutes a participant audio channel lt Ctrl gt lt U gt Unmutes a participant audio channel lt Ctrl gt lt l gt Sets a participants Connection Type to dial in lt Ctrl gt lt A gt Sets a participant s Connection Type to dial out lt Shift gt lt F1 gt or Accesses the relevant Help topic lt F1 gt lt F2 gt Moves a participant to the Operator conference for assistance lt F3 gt Moves a participant from the Operator conference to the destination Home conference lt F4 gt I
362. nference to monitor and then click Properties Monitor Monitor Filter New Participant Fa Terminate Del Copy Conf Ctrlt c Paste Participant Girly Paste Farticipant 4s Girl P Next Questioner Clear QRA Lock Conference oting Print Reservation Data Video Force Drag amp Drop Properties The Conference Properties dialog box opens New tabs Ongoing State and Scheduler appear in the Properties dialog box For a detailed description of conference definition modifications that can be performed during a conference see Chapter 6 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences 2 Click the Ongoing State tab to view the current conference status 5 37 Chapter 5 Monitoring Conferences The Conference Properties Ongoing State dialog box opens x General Scheduler Settings Patticipants Video Sources Resource Force Ongoing State Meet Me Per Cont Recording Conference Status FECC LSD FECC LSD Token Holder El Empty None I One Participant At Most FECC LSD Rate I Not Full Off Withdraw FECC LSD Token I Faulty Connection I Resources Deficiency EDan Speed Chair Control Chair Token Holder ecording None MCU Name Product Management Audio Source Withdraw Chair Token Asher_ IP Exclusive Speaker Content None ae Content Token Holder Current Cascade Mode T None N one withdraw Content Token Refre
363. nformation see Presentation Mode on page 10 9 Lecture Show Enables the Lecture Show You must add at least one participant before selecting the Video Sources tab to activate this option When enabling the Lecture Show an indication the Lecture Show icon appears at the top right corner of the dialog box For more information see Lecture Show on page 10 14 Timer Select the Timer check box to enable the automatic switching between participants Interval This option is enabled when the Timer option is checked Define the number of seconds a participant is to be displayed in the lecturer window before switching to the next participant Lecturer name Select the Lecturer name from the drop down list The list displays the names of all the participants defined for the conference 10 4 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume 6 Click OK to confirm the conference settings viewed by the lecturer as all the conference participants see only the lecturer in full picture If an asymmetrical Video layout is selected for the lecturer i e 3 1 4 1 8 1 each video window contains a different participant i e one cannot be forced to a large frame and to a small frame simultaneously Forcing is enabled at the Conference level only It applies only to the video layout Lecture Mode Monitoring A conference in which the Lecture Mode is enabled is started as any other conference The conference runs as an audio
364. nformation on its supported alias types Extension Identifier This is the DTMF string sent to the recording or other String DTMF activated system an outgoing DTMF operation initiated by the MCU This is useful for identifying extensions associated with SIP users Each type of recording system has a specific DTMF string structure for example when using the Prairie recording services For more details see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume ll Chapter 9 Recording 4 103 Chapter 4 Defining Conferences and Participants Table 4 8 IP Participant Properties Identification Continued User Defined fields In any or all of the four User Defined fields enter 1 4 general information for the participant such as the participants E mail address telephone number company name location or any required information The titles of the User Defined fields can be modified in the Database Manager gt Defaults gt User Defined Defaults and loaded to the MGC Manager application For details see Chapter 3 Note The User Defined fields are displayed only if the Show User Defined Fields in Participant Parameters box is selected in the Database Manager gt Defaults gt User Defined Defaults Broadcasting You can control the volume of the audio transmitted Volume from the participant to the conference broadcasting volume and from the conference to the participant Listening Volume listening volume To adjust the v
365. ng In the Greeting stage participants connect to the Entry Queue or directly to an IVR enabled conference They hear a Welcome message view a Welcome video slide and are then moved to the Participants Queue where they wait for the operator to connect them to the conference Attended In the Attended stage participants are moved to the Operator conference where after a short conversation with the participant the operator moves each participant to the appropriate conference Home conference or places them on hold On Hold In the On Hold stage participants wait in the Participant s Queue where they hear background music view the same Welcome video slide and wait for the operator s assistance Participants are also placed on hold and moved to the Participant s Queue when they enter the wrong conference Numeric ID while in the Entry Queue or the wrong password This option must be enabled in the Entry Queue or the IVR Service and an Operator conference must be running on the MCU Conferencing In the Conferencing stage the participant is already connected to the On Going Conference During the conference operator assistance can be requested via DTMF codes but only if it is already configured in the IVR Service assigned to the conference For information about configuring IVR Services refer to the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services MGC Manager User s Guide Volume The
366. ng Rooms Entry Queues amp SIP Factories 1493 New Meeting Room New Entry Queue Mew SIP Factory Print All Paste Crit a Paste As crl F Paste Enty Queue 4s irl e Paste SIP Factory As The Conference Properties General dialog box opens Default Conference Properties F3 Alpha 03 xj General Settings Participants Video Sources Meet Me Per Cont Recording Name DefautConference Conf Entry Password sd Duration 20o oO y WWeb Chairperson Password sd Bilin fo Numeric ID ss MCU F3 Alpha 03 User Defined 1 Enty Queue Access User Defined 2 ooo ames Meet Me Per Cont User Defined 3 PO r Conference Type Media Supported Networkq r Wideo Session C Standard C Audio CIP Video Switching Meeting Room Video Audio IP ISDN Transcoding ATM MPI Operator C Continuous Presence Remarks Update Remark Remarks History The Meeting Room option is automatically selected in the Conference Type box The Meet Me Per Conference check box is automatically checked 7 12 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume 2 Define the Meeting Room Name and Duration The default Duration is set to 2 hours but may be modified The maximum duration that can be set for a Meeting Room is 99 hours Define the Billing Code if applicable 4 Select the Entry Queue Access check box to connect to the Meeting Room via an Entry Qu
367. ng or to prevent fast and frequent changes of the main speakers Audio Mix Depth Indicate how many of the loudest voices speaking at the same time are heard The value 3 indicates that the three loudest participants speaking at the same time are heard The maximum number of participants that can be mixed is 5 Pro Motion This encoding mechanism improves the video Interlaced Video quality in Video Switching conferences that are set Mode to NTSC or to PAL resolution Select one of the available options Auto PAL 50 fields NTSC 60 fields None default Note e Select Auto to enable the Highest Common mechanism The Highest Common mechanism is used when an endpoint using a Pro Motion NTSC format enters a conference in which all endpoints are set to Pro Motion PAL Interlaced Video or vice versa 4 42 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Table 4 7 Conference Properties Advanced Settings Media Continued Pro Motion cont e When a conference is set to PAL or NTSC then the endpoints sending unsupported Pro Motion video for example NTSC instead of PAL or vice versa or that do not support Pro Motion resolution will connect as Secondary audio only Video Protocol The Video Protocol parameter determines the video compression standard used by the endpoints The Video Protocol together with the Video Format Frame Rate and ProMotion determine the overall video quality of the conference In Continuous Pre
368. ng the Window Panes ccccccecccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaaeees 3 11 Multiple Window Display scossvasivadeusesvsvsearsasndavsanesncnddenssvosntabenss 3 12 The MGC Manager Main Menu ccccsssssseseesseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 13 The MGC Manager Toolbars cc siseiccicessseenediascnesnedroetimeidesonsdastoecrsen 3 14 Main Toolbar cxicesescedneacevessxtsoasenesosdaueteueednauonateetntanenecenenassusccuinands 3 14 Coni rence LoolDAN cpscprerieas onian a a 3 15 Participant Toolbar sessoscssaientincesdiaiasiareraatncadarennssaianansaaeionisienamnans 3 16 Participants Queue Toolbar 00 0 0 ccccccssssseeseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 18 Participant Queue Filter Toolbar cceccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 18 OF TOO aI aa E ET 3 19 Connecting toan MCU pniiniats sasosoupbacnsun ta ena adei aE 3 21 Using Default Templates to Start a Conference essnnnneeeonsnnseesseses 3 25 Reservation Templates ccccccccccccecccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaaaaaas 3 25 Default Reservation Templates ccccccccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 25 Viewing Conference Lists cccccsssssssssssssssssssssssssseseceececeeeeeeeeeeees 3 29 Loading the User Defined Default Set to the MGC Manager Application cccccccscscccssssssssssssessessssesssssseeeeceseceeeeeeeeeeess 3 31 Commands SHOMCUL KR CVS essari aa 3 32 IDISCOMMEC HA an MOU seiseanan Aa 3 35 Automating the Login Process cccsseessssessssesssesseeeeceeeeee
369. ng up and monitoring Cascading conferences according to H 243 In addition this chapter describes how to set up and monitor the H 243 Chair Control a part of the H 243 standard Chapter 6 Using a Database Describes the database file which must be registered in the ODBC of the operator s workstation during the installation procedure Includes a description of the registration procedure for both Access and SQL databases how to log into the Database Manager application how to define and modify databases and participant and general system defaults how to set up permissions and users Chapter 7 Database Templates Describes how to use the database tables and how to define conference and participant templates Chapter 8 Templates Handling Describes the operations that can be performed using conference and participant templates Chapter 9 Recording Describes how to record using the ReadiRecorder the RSS2000 and the Prairie Systems recording systems Chapter 10 Call Detail Records CDR Utility Contains the information required to view conference details Describes how to retrieve and archive the conference records Appendix A CDR Unformatted File Fields Contains details of the events fields and values that can be found in CDR unformatted files MGC Manager User s Guide Volume MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Chapter 1 Overview Provides a general description of the MGC unit s main audio feat
370. ng_ 3 i Brand Marketing_ 4 ae Brand Marketing_ 5 283 Meeting Rooms amp Entry Queues 7 Ere 4d Hoc 1 oe 4d Hoc 24 Ere Ad Hoc EQ 2 dl ash_servi O K Oct 25 20 02 00 00 107 dEl Brand Marketing_ O K Oct 31 20 02 00 00 188 Brand Marketing_ ae Brand Marketing_ ae Brand Marketing_ O K Nov O7 2 02 00 00 189 O K Nov 14 2 02 00 00 190 O K Nov 21 2 02 00 00 191 D AHEQ3 233 Default Conference DO v Mem20 The name of each of these reservations cannot be modified However the parameters of an individual recurrent conference can be modified 9 21 Chapter 9 Conference Reservations Deleting Recurring Reservations from the Reservations List When setting up recurring reservations these reservations can be deleted as a group occurrences using the standard Delete procedure For details see Deleting a You can delete an individual reservation out of the recurrence reservation fs Reservation on page 9 10 To delete a recurring reservation from a recurrent reservation icon 1 Right click one of the recurrent reservations icons and then click Delete All Reservation Recurrences Ee E Mew Participant F Copy Res Paste Participant Corey Paste Participant 4s otri P Delete Del Print Reservation Properties A confirmation box opens MGC Manager J xi A re you sure that you want to delete all occu
371. nnel and no CLI number is defined for the participant the system will reject the participant s call To toggle between Connection Types l In the Monitor pane Status pane or Browser pane list the participants defined for the conference 2 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Right click the participant s icon whose connection type needs to be changed and then click Dial In or Dial Out depending on the participant s current definition to select the desired connection type Connect Participant Ctrl F Copy Participant ctrl E Cut Ctrl Delete Del O84 Management j Properties The system toggles between dial in and dial out depending on the current participant connection type Changing the Participant s Line Rate Before Connection Lj You can modify the line rate for a disconnected ISDN participant to connect to the conference when there is a problem connecting the participant with the defined line rate This option is available in the Participant Properties Advanced dialog box or from the participant s right click menu The right click menu option is available only to ISDN ATM participants in CP Classic mode In the Video Switching mode the line rate of all participants must be the same To change the line rate from the Participant right click menu l 2 Expand the On Going Conferences or the Reservations list Expand the On Going Conference tree to display its participants 6 7 Cha
372. nnel via the participant s right click menu or in the Participant Properties dialog box A participant whose audio or video channel is muted hears and sees the other participants while the other participants cannot hear or see the muted participant Alternatively participants audio channel can be muted from their own endpoints through the endpoint application The default DTMF code for muting individual s audio transmission is 6 and 6 for unmuting the line e An endpoint muted by the operator remains muted until you unmute it Ly e Disconnecting and reconnecting participants unmutes muted participants e Only connected participants can be muted The Video Mute functionality can be disabled to prevent operators from stopping the video transmission from the participant endpoint to the conference The Video Mute functionality is disabled by manually adding the flag ALLOW_VIDEO_MUTE NO to the system cfg GENERAL section participant menus toolbar and the Properties dialog box You will still be able to select Video Mute however the video right click menu does not change to Video Unmute and the participant s video channel transmission will continue to be transmitted to the conference 5 Since the feature is controlled from the system cfg file it does not affect the To mute a participant using the participant right click menu e In the Browser pane the Monitor or the Status pane right click the participant icon and then cli
373. nsmission rate are indicated in the Participant Properties H221 dialog box When a dial out participant connects to the conference the system exchanges capabilities with the endpoint and attempts to connect the participant using Bonding If Bonding is unavailable the participant is connected in H 221 mode Once the aggregation method is determined the MCU attempts to connect the participant in the line rate defined for the conference If it fails the MCU will connect the participant using a lower line rate The Bonding option is enabled for the MCU in the system cfg file The Default setting is BONDING YES e The Bonding Yes No flag in system cfg enables the system administrator to disable the Bonding option when this feature is not required by the system If BONDING NO the system rejects all ISDN participants except participant using leased lines whose aggregation mode is set to Bonding Auto or Auto Detect at the reservation stage In such a case an appropriate error message is displayed BONDING_NOT_ SUPPORTED e When the Bonding fails and the H 221 is selected there may be problems connecting the participant if the operator entered only one dial number and the participant s line rate is higher than 2B 128 Kbps MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Monitoring IP H 323 and SIP Participants Using the Participant Properties dialog box you can monitor the properties of IP partic
374. nspeed process is enabled and disabled in the system cfg file When Down Speed is activated three types of messages can be displayed e Downspeeding Downspeed is in progress e Downspeeded The process is completed e Empty The process is inactive Chair Token When checked indicates that the participant is holding the Chair Token FECC LSD Token When checked indicates that the participant is holding the Data Token 5 46 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Table 5 11 ISDN Participant Properties Connection Info1 Continued Content Token When checked indicates that the participant is holding the Content Token When the connection process is completed successfully the transmission rate and the aggregation method used by the endpoint are displayed in the Monitor and Status panes To view general information regarding the participant connection and to optionally mute or unmute the participant s audio or video channels click the Connection Info2 tab The Participant Properties Connection Info2 dialog box opens Polycom 7 Properties Video Sources H22 Disconnection Cause Resource Details Identification Advanced Connection Infol Connection Intoz Connection Time Loopback Status May 21 2003 12 24 42 PM eal M ma Disconnection Time Aade Dl aes Tx Rate As Rate Connection Retries Left 128 128 0 Mute By Operator Attending T Audio Video Oper Participant
375. nt Indication Repeating Remove MEU pT Reset MCU Properties A dialog box appears prompting you to confirm the disconnection MGC Manager x A Disconnect MCU Product Management cm 2 Click OK to disconnect The MCU status indicator disappears from the Browser pane and the MCU icon is disabled Disconnecting the MGC Manager from an MCU does not change any MCU settings it merely terminates your access to the MCU so you cannot view or affect its contents Lg 3 35 Chapter 3 MGC Manager Basics Automating the Login Process 3 36 Each time the MGC Manager connects to an MCU the operator is required to log in to the MCU This becomes tedious when the operator connects and disconnects from several MCUs regularly The Create Login Record option allows you to define your Login Name and Password The definition remains in place until the Clear Login Record option is selected Using the Login Record automatically connects you to the MCU The Clear Login Record option deletes the last login record The next time you connect to an MCU you will be required to enter your name and password e The same Login Record is used for all MCUs If you have different login names and or passwords on different MCUs you may need to use the Clear Login Record option before attempting a connection using a different login name and password e When Strong Password is enabled for the MCU the Create Login Record option
376. ntry Queue oy Properties The default Entry Queue is identified by a bold name If several IP boards are associated with the IP Service in which Forwarding is checked in the H 323 Settings then an incoming call that will reach a fully loaded IP board will be forwarded to the next IP board MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Enabling Entry Queue Access for Conferences On Going Conferences are accessed from an Entry Queue if the Entry Queue Access option is selected during the conference definition in the Conference Properties General dialog box To enable an Entry Queue Access conference during the conference definition In the Conference Properties General dialog box select the Entry Queue Access check box Conference Properties x General Scheduler Settings Participants Video Sources Resource Force Meet Me Per Cont Recording Name Finance Conf Entry Password Duration 2 00 Web Chairperson Password Billing Numeric ID MCU Product Management Wess RRR Te lr C tt V Entry Queue Access User Defined 2 a Cdl da 2 User Defined 3 Conference Type Media Supported Networkq r Wideo Session Standard Audio IP Video Switching C Meeting Room Video Audio IP ISDN Transcoding ATM MPI Operator Continuous Presence Classic gt Remarks oo Update Remark Remarks History The routing from the
377. o wait for Operator Assistance the participants are moved to the Participants Queue where they wait for the operator to connect them to the conference e In the Attended state the participant is moved to the Operator conference where after a short conversation with the participant the Operator moves the participant to the appropriate conference Home conference or places the participant on hold MGC Manager User s Guide Volume e In the On Hold state the participant is placed on hold where she or he hears background music and view the same welcome video slide and wait for the operator s assistance Participants are also placed on hold and moved to the participants queue when they enter the wrong conference Numeric ID while in the Entry Queue or the wrong password where they wait for the operator to connect them to the conference This option must be enabled in the Entry Queue or the IVR Service and if there is an Operator conference running on the MCU e In the Conferencing state the participant is connected to the conference Operator assistance can be requested via DTMF codes during the On Going conference if it is configured in the IVR Service assigned to the conference Using the Main Window Panes for Monitoring You can view current statuses in the MGC Manager main window panes and tables that show conference connection media and participant indicators MGC Manager ERSION 8 0 0 10 x File Edit
378. o activate this option Click amp View closes and the endpoint s monitor displays the conference layout The Participant Properties are updated accordingly Duke IP Properties Identification Advanced Connection Infol Connection Intoz Video Sources H245 Disconnection Cause Resource Details EE gg nzn E E ow nu 1 a 4 4 B 10 Debbie IP Auto Select Black Screen Auto Select Iuto Select i Personal Layout f Conference Layout OF Cancel Apply 11 22 Getting Help MGC Manager User s Guide Volume pa 8 You can get help for the Click amp View options by entering the appropriate DTMF code in the Click amp View application To get help about Click amp View options I In the Click amp View screen on the endpoint s DTMF input device enter to activate the Help option BE ke Use the DT MF input device to select a AEAT Help topic describing the g amp Change Conference Layout lick amp View Home options PR and how to select an option using the DTMF input as Back to Conference Layout device Request Operator s assistance My IP 172 22 133 39 Emm ft J A P videohail Call Controls While viewing the Main Menu Help topic you can get help on the various Click amp View options 11 23 Chapter 11 Click amp View 2 On the endpoint s DTMF input device if you enter a number or symbol 1 2 3 0 or that
379. o not want to monitor You can request to monitor any or all options 5 25 Chapter 5 Monitoring Conferences 5 26 Table 5 6 describes the available categories of participant status that you can filter and view in the Monitor pane Table 5 6 Participant Monitoring Filters Faulty Participant Participants who have problems connecting to the conference or cannot connect their video channel join the conference as Secondary or whose endpoint has lost its synchronization Participants Participants who have requested the operator s Requesting assistance and are waiting to be assisted In Attended Assistance conferences this option also includes the participants who have to wait for the operator s assistance to connect to the conference Asked Question Participants who are waiting in the Q amp A queue Noisy Line Participants whose audio channel is detected as noisy The system uses a special algorithm to identify the endpoints that add background noise to the conference Noise on a line can be caused by a variety of sources ranging from background noise faulty equipment and noises emanating from the line itself Note The Noisy Line Detection feature is enabled disabled in the system cfg by defining the detection sensitivity For more information see Noisy Line Detection and Automatic Muting on page 5 33 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Monitoring All Conferences The system can be configured
380. o Sources Resource Force Meet Me Per Conf Recording Starting Date 4 October 2004 gt Starting Time 11 31 Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat 26 27 28 29 30 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 g Reservation Recurrence 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Z 25 26 27 28 29 30 I 1 2 3 4 5 6 Cancel _ The current date and time are displayed To define an On Going Conference skip this tab To schedule the conference to start later select the start date and time for the conference start For more details see Table 9 2 Scheduler Parameters on page 9 5 conference definition Otherwise the remaining tabs are the same as for On At this point if no changes are required in the template you can complete the fs Going Conferences continue with step 6 on page 9 6 9 Click OK The Reservation is saved on the selected MCU MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Recurrent Reservations You can preset conferences to occur repeatedly To do this you need to set the frequency that you wish the conference to occur while defining the reservation parameters The MGC Manager automatically creates duplicates of the original reservation scheduling them according to the selected recurrence frequency The number of duplicate reservations depends on the number of repeats defined for the reservation A recurring reservation can be defined in three ways e During the definition of a new reservatio
381. o complete the participant definition The participant is added to the On Going Conference Reservation or the Reservation Template depending on the conference participant definition mode MGC Manager User s Guide Volume IP H 323 and SIP Participant Definition The IP participant endpoint can be an H 323 or a SIP participant Most of the parameters are common to both IP participant types To define a new IP participant x x Identification Advanced Identification Advanced Name Name Connection Type Interface Type Connection Type Interface Type Dial out H323 Dial out he fp Participant IP Signaling Port Participant IP Signaling Port 0 0 0 0 fi720 0 0 2 0 5060 Alias Name Alias Type SIP Address H323 ID Extension Identifier String Address Type Extension ldentifier String SIP URI User Defined 1 User Defined 2 User Defined 1 User Defined 2 User Defined 3 User Defined 4 User Defined 3 User Defined 4 Broadcasting YVolume 5 Listening Yolume 5 Broadcasting Yolume 5 Listening Yolume 5 Audio Only M VIP T Audio Only M VIP V Save Participant Cancel Help V Save Participant H323 Participant Properties Cancel Help SIP Participant Properties 1 Define the parameters relevant to the participant type Table 4 8 IP Participant Properties Identification Enter the IP address of the participant s endpoint e For H 323
382. o the conference as a new participant Chapter 6 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences Changing the Properties of a Disconnected Participant 6 12 You can change several properties of a defined participant who is disconnected before reconnecting that participant The following participant properties may be modified in the Properties dialog box tabs Name Modify the automatically assigned name to the undefined dial in participant s real name to correctly display it in the Monitor and Status panes You can also modify the defined participant s name Participant name is also included in the CDR file which is used for billing For more detail about naming undefined Participants see Naming Undefined Dial in Participants on page 6 13 Connection Type Alter the participant connection from dial in to dial out or vice versa Phone Number or IP address Change the participant s dial in dial out phone number or IP dress as required Interface Type Change the participant s interface and protocol provided that the endpoint supports both ISDN and IP VIP status Change the participant status from or to VIP Participant State Reconnect the participant Mute By Operator Mute or unmute the participant audio and or video channel Service Type Change the name of the Network Service used to connect the participant AGC disable AGC when required enabled is the default Recording Change f
383. o the Entry Queue Conference ictor Properties E Video Sources H221 Disconnection Cause Resource Details Identification Advanced Connection Info Connection Info2 Name victo Connection Type Interface Type Dialout 7 isDN gt Participant Phone Numbers 789341111 MCU Numbers Meet me per Bonding Phone Number Party Y 789341111 User Defined 1 User Defined 2 User Defined 3 User Defined 4 Broadcasting Volume 5 Listening Yolume 5 OK Cancel MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Table 5 10 describes the user defined Identification properties that you can modify during an On Going Conference Other parameters are described in Chapter 4 Defining On Going Conferences Table 5 10 ISDN Participant Properties Identification Indicates the participant s name User Defined 1 4 These 4 fields enable you to enter additional information for the participant for example the E mail address or the telephone number or any other required information Broadcasting Indicates the volume at which the participant is heard by Volume other participants If not modified the volume stays at the default level 5 Listening Volume Indicates the volume at which the participant hears other participants If not modified the volume stays at the default level 5 While the participant is connected indicates whether the participant status is defined as VIP change the parti
384. og box This option is advantageous when you need to mute many participants during a conference In this dialog box the system lists all the participants currently connected to the conference You can manually select the participants to be muted by selecting the check boxes Alternatively you can mute all the participants that are not video forced selected for display in one of the Video Layout window by selecting the Check not Forced Parties button For example in a lecture conference the lecturer can be forced in one window while all the remaining participants that are not video forced are muted To mute audio at the conference level 1 Inthe Browser pane Monitor pane or the Status pane right click the On Going Conference icon and then click Properties Monitor Monitor Filter Mew Participant Fe Terminate Del Copy Conk Chr Paste Participant Ctrl Paste Participant 4s Ctrl P Next Questioner Clear QRA Lock Conference Woking Print Reservation Data Properties The Conference Properties dialog box opens MGC Manager User s Guide Volume 2 Click the Video Sources tab The Conference Properties Video Sources dialog box opens International Sales Properties Prod Mgmt x General Scheduler Settings Participants Video Sources Resource Force Ongoing State Video Session Video Layout o Switching E Auto EE oooo oo goo gege Laot E 2E ms Ool BSS
385. olume move the slider The volume scale is from 1 to 10 where 1 is the weakest and 10 the strongest volume The volume of each endpoint s audio at connection time is set to 5 One movement of the volume slider increases or decreases the volume by one unit equivalent to 3db Audio Only Select this option to define the participant as an audio only participant with no video capabilities VIP When checked changes the participant s status to VIP to distinguish participants who require special attention Note The VIP status can also be changed during the On Going Conference Save Participant Select this option if you want to save this participant as a template in the User Defined template file or in the selected database group Note This check box appears only when you define a participant while creating a new reservation template in the User Template file or when defining a participant during an On Going Conference and a database group Is selected as the source 4 104 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Table 4 8 IP Participant Properties Identification Continued Participant Linked Select this option to save the participant as a template in the database and link the participant to the Reservation template The participant is assigned to the selected database Group If this option is cleared the participant is embedded in the Reservation template and his her parameters are not saved in the database for futur
386. omatically extend or terminate a conference see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Chapter 1 Extending the Conference Duration Extending a Conference Manually You can manually extend the conference duration even after the conference has started To extend an On Going Conference 1 Inthe Browser Monitor or Status panes right click the icon of the conference whose duration you want to extend and then click Properties Monitor Monitor Filter Mew Participant F Terminate Del Copy Cont Chrl c Paste Participant Ctrl Paste Participant As Ctrl F Next Questioner Clear QA Lock Conference Voom Print Reservation Daka Video Force Drag amp Drop Properties The Conference Properties dialog box opens MGC Manager User s Guide Volume 2 Click the Scheduler tab and then modify the conference Ending Time F Polycom Properties Product Management EE November 2004 Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu 3 1 2 3 4 7 8 9 10 11 14 15 16 17 18 21 22 wee 24 25 28 29 30 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 3 Click OK to apply the settings The Conference Properties dialog box closes The conference s duration is adjusted to extend until the Ending Time you defined in the Scheduler 6 59 Chapter 6 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences 6 60 Terminating a Conference Manually You can manually end the conference before its scheduled end time Usually this option is used when a
387. ome conference to which to move the participant Using the To Home Conference option in the right click menu Right click the icon of the participant to be moved to the Home conference and then click To Home Conf Disconnect Participant Ctrl T Move Participant F Copy Participant Chrl C Cut Chrl Delete Del Exclusive Speaker O84 Management F Attend FZ ald To Home Conf F3 Mute Audio Chrl M Mute video Block Audio Turn OFF AGT Properties The participant connects to the Home conference and is removed from the Participants Queue and or the Operator conference The Attended or Hold icon in the Status column of the Monitor and Status panes disappears 8 57 Chapter 8 Entry Queues Operator Conferences and Attended Conferencing 8 58 To move a participant to his her Home conference from the Participants Queue tree or the Participants Queue window L Display the list of participants in the Participants Queue in the Browser or Status pane or in the Participants Queue window Move the participant to the Home conference using one of the following options a Using the Move option in the right click menu Right click the icon of the participant to be moved to the Home conference and then click Move A list of conferences appears Attend Fz Attend with Details Hold To Home Conf 4udio 1 F3 Audio 1 Operator Guidance Delete Del Stop Monitoring Click the nam
388. on Data Video Force Drag amp Drop Properties e On occasion the operator can disregard the participants position in the queue and allow them to ask the question To do this the operator uses one of the following methods Click the Participant icon mt and then click the Ask Question 2l button 2 on the Question and Answer toolbar Right click the Participant icon aj click Q amp A Management and then click Ask Question a Debbie Disconnect Participant Ctrl T Move Participant j Copy Participant Cirle Cut Ctri x Delete Del Exclusive Speaker O84 Management Remove Participant From QRA Move Participant to First Position in QBA Mute Audio Crit a pee Hee eh eee en ue videa i a i i r en i ade ucla ove Participant Position Up in Q Turn OF AGC Move e Position Down in Q amp A Properties 6 78 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume The selected participant s icon now indicates the change of status to current questioner Ep On Going Conferences Polycom QA Ending Participant Questions Ending the questioner session can be done by participants or by the chairperson e The participant can indicate that they have completed asking the question and are waiting for the answer To do this the participant enters the appropriate code on the DTMF input device The default code for this action is 22 e The chairperson can stop the current questioner by pressing the appropriate D
389. once the dial tone is heard enter the dial string of the invitee s endpoint as shown in Table 6 7 Invite Dial String Format With Invite participants are connected using the appropriate default IP ISDN and MPI Network Service DTMF codes X lenu i Erone Enable Rall Call ae Chairperson Invite H323 The DTMF codes can be modified or deleted if you want to disable the Video Invite feature The simplified Ad Hoc Conferencing option introduced in version 8 0 can also be used to invite ISDN MPI and SIP participants For more details see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Chapter 6 Setting the Video Invite Options in the IVR Service e To invite Audio Only PSTN participants use the Audio Invite DTMF options 4 6 96 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Table 6 7 Invite Dial String Format Endpoint DTMF Network Type Dial String Format H 323 endpoint The participant inviter dials 35 followed by the E 164 alias i e 1141 or IP ae and a pound key For example e Using the E 164 Alias 35 lt dialtone gt 1141 Note The invitee endpoint must be configured with an E 164 alias and this alias must be registered to the same gatekeeper as the MCU The endpoint s IP address 172 22 176 11 dial string substituts the periods with asterisk s 35 lt dialtone gt 1 72 22 176 11 Note Endpoint registration with the gatekeeper is not required ISDN endpoint The participant dials 36
390. onference Lists Each MCU has three conference lists assigned to it All conferences that are currently running are detailed in the On Going Conferences list All conference reservations defined on the MCU are detailed in the Reservations list Passive conferences which are activated when the first participant connects to the conference are listed under Meeting Rooms Entry Queues amp SIP Factories Before performing the following procedures connect to the MCU whose conference lists you want to display To view an MCU s list of On Going Conferences l a In the Browser pane expand the MCU tree to display its options Expand the On Going Conferences tree All currently running conferences are listed below the On Going Conferences icon Each conference is identified by an icon and a name wy Product Management Normal H BE mcu Configuration On Going Conferences 3 ci Administration HF HR Weekly H 4 Finance Coe Cotas age Participants Queue D Es Reservations 0 l Meeting Rooms Entry Queues amp SIP Factories 15 aa On first entry or if no conferences are running the On Going Conferences list is empty To view an MCU s list of reserved conferences l 2 In the Browser pane expand the MCU tree to display its options Expand the Reservations tree A list of reserved conferences is displayed below the Reservations icon Each reservation is identified by
391. onference Properties Participants dialog box opens The participants list is displayed according to the selected Reservation template However you can change the Database Group or the Participant Template file to display additional participant templates To add a participant from another Group in the database a Click the From database button The Open Parties in database dialog box opens Select the desired Group from the Group list and click OK The list of Participant templates in displayed in the Pre defined Participants box in the Conference Properties Participants dialog box To add a participant from a Participant Template file a Click the Browser button The Open dialog box opens Select the appropriate Participant Template file from the browser list and click Open The list of Participant templates is displayed in the Pre Defined Participants box in the Conference Properties Participants dialog box 6 45 Chapter 6 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences 6 46 5 In the Pre defined Participants list select the participant to add to the conference and then click the Move gt gt button The participant is added to the Conference Participants list Polycom Properties ProdMom General Scheduler Settings Participants Video Sources Resource Force Ongoing State Pre Defined Participants Conference Participants Debbie H323 Roger Yolanda Debbie H323 de
392. onference according to the Search Value e Ongoing meetings the system searches for the destination conference in the list of On Going Conferences running on the connected MCU Ongoing meetings 12h reservations the system searches for the destination conference in the list of On Going Conferences and Reservations scheduled to start in the next 12 hours on the connected MCU Ongoing MRs the system searches for the destination conference in the list of On Going Conferences and Meeting Rooms on the connected MCU All Ongoing Meetings 12h MRs the system searches for the destination conference in the list of On Going Conferences Meeting Rooms and Reservations scheduled to start in the next 12 hours on the connected MCU Conferences List This table displays the result of the search according to the Search Value and Search In criteria To move the participant to the destination conference select the conference from the list and then click the Move button or use the displayed shortcut key 8 45 Chapter 8 Entry Queues Operator Conferences and Attended Conferencing Table 8 5 Attended Participant Dialog Box Fields Continued Conferences List Note if the participant s destination conference is cont known for example when the participant has requested help the destination Home conference is automatically listed Click the To Home Conf button to move the participant back to his her original conference
393. onference definition e From a Reservation Template immediately e When the starting date and time scheduled in a Reservation is reached MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Reservations Reservations are conferences scheduled to start in the future You can schedule Reservations in using of the following methods From Reservations New Reservation definition e From a Reservation Template Start For a detailed description see Chapter 9 Conference Reservations On demand Reservation less Conferencing Reservation less conferencing enables participants to immediately start an On Going Conference from their endpoint with no advanced scheduling The MGC Manager offers two methods for Reservation less conferencing e Ad Hoc Conferencing e Meeting Rooms Ad Hoc Conferencing In Ad Hoc conferencing participants connect to an Ad Hoc enabled Entry Queue The participants are prompted for the destination conference Numeric ID If no conference with a matching Numeric ID is running and the participant is authorized to create a conference the system creates a new On Going Conference based on the conference parameters defined in the Profile assigned to the Entry Queue All other participants connect directly to the newly created conference In this method the conference Profile is created once and is used repeatedly to create numerous conferences This conferencing method is often used to eliminate the need to define i
394. onfiguration to join the conference 4 23 Chapter 4 Defining Conferences and Participants Table 4 4 Conference Properties General Continued Meet Me Per Conf Select this option to enable the Meet Me Per Conference tab Meet Me Per conference allows undefined participants to connect to a conference by dialing a pre defined dial in number Undefined participants are not defined prior to the conference start Note If Meet Me Per Conf is selected in addition to Entry Queue Access for the conference a dial in number is assigned to the conference which participants can use to connect to the conference directly not via an Entry Queue If you do not require the direct dialing to the conference and to save dial in numbers select either the Meet Me Per Conf option or the Entry Queue Access option User Defined 1 3 The User Defined fields enable you to enter general information for the conference such as the company name the contact person name E mail or telephone number or any other required information Note s e The User Defined fields are displayed only if the Show User Defined Fields in Conference Parameters option is selected in the Database Manager gt Defaults gt User Defined Defaults e The titles of the User Defined fields can be modified in the Database Manager gt Defaults gt User Defined Defaults and loaded to the MGC Manager application For details of defining the titles see the
395. onnecting and Reconnecting Dial Out Participants When the Dial Out Manually option is selected for the conference the operator has to manually connect dial out participants to the conference Sometimes when the connected participant is accidentally disconnected from the conference the operator has to manually re connect the participant to the conference To establish a dial out connection 1 Inthe Monitor pane Status pane or Browser pane list the conference participants 2 Right click the participant icon to connect to the conference and then click Connect Participant A Connect Participant Ctrl F Copy Farticipan Ctrl c Cut Ctrl Delete Del O84 Management b Dial In Ctrl I Properties Wait for the connection to be established During the connection process the participant s status which is displayed in the Status column changes from Standby to Connecting and the Connection icon is displayed in the Connection column When the connection is established the participant s status is indicated in the Status column of the Status pane and the Connection icon changes from Disconnected to Connected Connection ia Duke Connected fe Lynne sil Disconnected Chapter 6 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences OT Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each participant to be manually connected to the conference Use this procedure to reconnect participants who were previously disconnected from the co
396. ons eon een Conference Reservations category Includes the list of all al reservations currently scheduled on the MCU EE Video Conference Reservation A reserved video conference scheduled to start at a designated time 9 8 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Table 9 3 Conference Reservation Icons Continued eee Audio Reservation A reserved Audio Only conference scheduled to start at a designated time Audio Operator Conference Reservation A reserved Audio Only Operator conference scheduled to start at a designated time Video Operator Conference Reservation A reserved video Operator conference scheduled to start at a designated time Chapter 9 Conference Reservations Deleting a Reservation If the conference reservation is cancelled before it has started you can remove it from the Reservations list on the MCU and free the MCU resources for other conferences To delete a Reservation 1 Inthe Browser pane expand the Reservations list 2 Right click the Reservation icon to delete and then click Delete atl Public Relations Mew Participant FS Copy Res Paste Participant trl Paste Participant As tbri F Delete Print Reservation Properties A confirmation dialog box opens MGC Manager l x A Delete Reservation Public Relations 4re You Sure M 3 Click Yes to delete the reservation or No to cancel the deletion operation If you have select
397. opriate DTMF code from his her touch tone telephone or the endpoint s DTMF input device The participant can request Private assistance default DTMF code 0 or Conference assistance default DIME code 00 Participants waiting in the Participants Queue or conference for assistance are moved to the Operator conference for a one on one conversation with the operator For more information regarding the Participant Status icons see Chapter 5 Additional Participant Statuses on page 5 21 In attended mode the MGC Manager operator can perform one of the following actions e Once the participant connects to the Entry Queue or conference IVR Queue he she enters the Participants Queue where he she is moved by the operator to the Operator conference for assistance e After a short conversation with the operator the operator can move the participant to the appropriate conference Home conference or place him her on hold to wait until other participants in the conference are assisted e The operator can connect participants belonging to the same destination conference to their conference simultaneously by selecting the appropriate participants and moving them to the Home conference interactively or using the right click menu e The operator can move a participant from an On Going Conference to the Operator conference for a one on one conversation 8 23 Chapter 8 Entry Queues Operator Conferences and Attended Conferencing
398. or from the Basic Colors swatches or mix a new color to apply to the background To use a color from the predefined palette in the Basic Colors pane click the color to apply to the background and click OK The Background color box in the Video Sources tab shows the new color To mix a custom color click the Define Custom Colors button to expand the dialog box 4 61 Chapter 4 Defining Conferences and Participants The color matrix and color parameters are displayed Basic colors ET ee See Matrix cursor irr ims pi iat es a ee e Color slider EEE EEE ee EEE EH Custom colors EE E ip Hue 160 Red 22 s S g g g gg Sat 198 Green 22 Define Custom Colors gt gt CologS olid Lum f120 Blue 233 Color values Add to Custom Colors Selected color a Using the cursor click any color on the matrix Use the color slider to adjust the color luminosity The selected color shows in the Color Solid box Numerical values are displayed according to Red Green Blue color model and the Hue Saturation Luminance color model You can also select a custom color by modifying the numerical values b Click the Add to Custom Colors button to add the new color to the list of custom colors In the Custom Colors pane click the custom color that you defined d Click OK to apply the settings The Color dialog box closes The selected color is displayed as the current Background col
399. or in the Conference Properties Video Sources dialog box Layout borders and speaker notation are added and modified in the same way Layout border and or the speaker notation 17 Select the Layout Border check box to add borders to the video windows or select the Speaker Notation check box to highlight the speaker s window in the video layout 18 To apply a new color to the border and or speaker notation 4 62 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume To modify the color of the border default color is black of all windows in a video layout click the arrow next to the Layout Border color box To modify the color used to highlight the window click the arrow next to the Speaker Notation color box The Color dialog box opens 19 Select a color for the Layout Border and or the Speaker Notation using one of the methods described in step 16 on page 4 61 Click OK to apply the settings The Color dialog box closes The selected colors are displayed in the Conference Properties Video Sources dialog box Background im Layout Border Ea H Background ma Speaker Notation VEI H M Layout Border Pa Default Colors W Speaker Notation my Modified Colors Optional To modify the automatic card selection by the MCU The system automatically selects the cards that will run the conference according to the conference type and MCU configuration If you do not need to change the system automatic selection sk
400. or participant enters 9 and exits the menu Chairperson or participant enters the Please re enter the new password new password Password Press the pound key to complete confirmation request Chairperson or participant confirms The password has been successfully the password System confirms changed update While confirming the new password The new password is invalid chairperson or participant enters the existing password 6 94 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume If the user exits without confirming the password the password is not updated Changing passwords is not possible when a conference is in any of the following modes e Voting session e Invite session e Roll Call session e A participant is waiting in the Entry Queue In an Entry Queue both the conference and chairperson password need to be unique and cannot be identical to any other conferences that are accessed via the Entry Queue 6 95 Chapter 6 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences Inviting Video Participants Video Invite enables participants usually the Chairperson from any endpoint H 323 H 320 SIP MPI in a video conference to invite participants into the conference By default Invite options are automatically enabled in the IVR Service with the appropriate DTMF codes To invite H 323 ISDN MPI and SIP participants to the conference the chairperson or participant dials 35 36 37 38 and
401. or the participant Enhanced Video This option is applicable to Standard Video cards and is not required for participants connecting to conferences running on Video cards that provide high quality video combined with high line rates using one video port instead of two The MGC unit can provide high quality video 30 frames per second for incoming and outgoing video streams for line rates up to T1 E1 in Transcoding and Continuous Presence conferences This is done by allocating two video ports to the participant One video port is used for encoding while the other is used for decoding the incoming video stream Select this option to enable the high quality video feature for the participant Note To work with 30 frames per second the High Frame Rate flag in the system cfg must be enabled To work with bit rates higher than 768 Kbps the High Bit Rate flag in the system cfg must be enabled During an On Going ISDN ATM MPI connected conference this setting can be greyed out This option is disabled for Video Switching conferences Service Name Enter the name of the Network Service to be used to connect the ISDN ATM MPI T1 CAS participant to the conference exactly as it is defined in the Network Service list the system is case sensitive 4 99 Chapter 4 Defining Conferences and Participants 4 100 Table 4 7 ISDN ATM MPI T1 CAS Participant Advanced Continued Service Name If left blank the default Network Serv
402. ortso Chapter 3 MGC Manager Basics In Vertical View the Browser pane is displayed in full length along the left side of the window and the Monitor pane is displayed beside it below the Status pane MGC Manager ERSION 8 0 0 10 p le x File Edit view Template DataBase Directory Options Window Help PARTICIPANTS QUEUE FILTER ae MCUs Network ug Product Management Minor mm Product Management 25 Connec D connected 3lab02 fi SIP Reb Dial out ui 171178 Connecting si connected 3lab03 fi SIP Bet Dial out pm 188 124 Falcon Normal D connected 3lab04 fi SIP Bek Dial out m 188 201 Normal D Connected 3labOS fi SIP Zeh Dial out pug 188 203 Major p Faulty Co SlabO6 fi SIP Bet Dial out 29 18833 Major Connected 3lab07 fi SIP Zut Dial out pug 188 34 Minor D Faulty Co 3lab09 fi SIP Bet Dial out U 188 35 major D Faulty Co lab10 fi SIP Bet Dial out mm 6 Normal connected 3lab11 fi SIP Zut Dial out 5 MCU Configuration connected 3lab12 fi SIP Reb Dial out Ori Going Conferences 1 Connected 3lab13 fi SIP Reb Dial out i D connected lab14 fi SIP Bet Dial out oF ane D Connected 3lab1S fi SIP Bet Dial out oF sired D Connected 3lab16 fi SIP Reb Dial out oF aii D Connected 3lab17 fi SIP get Dial out BF siebos T i Bit 3lab06 amp F 3lab07 at
403. ot match the MCU s encryption algorithm ISDN and IP Encryption key exchange failed ISDN only Bonding negotiation failed For example the endpoint didn t reply ISDN only The bonding channels cannot be synchronized by the MUX because the delay in data transfer between the channels is too long or downspeed is required and the endpoint supports downspeeding but the MCU doesn t ISDN only Internal error occurred ISDN only Bonding failure due to timeout ISDN only A 3 Appendix A Disconnection Causes Table A 1 Primary Disconnection Reasons Continued Bonding Failure Error in dialing additional H 221 bonding error The cont channels endpoint declared less channels than the MCU wanted or an error occurred when attempting to open additional channels ISDN only Bad H243 Connection Full bitrate connection The system can not failure establish a connection with the participant using the maximum possible line rate capacity ISDN only Capabilities exchange The initial capabilities failure in establishing call exchange failed For example the endpoint didn t send any capabilities ISDN only Capabilities exchange Failure to exchange failure in change mode capabilities when the MCU requested that the endpoint change protocol For example the endpoint didn t reply ISDN only Unspecified Unspecified error occurred ISDN only Not received end of The endpoint did no
404. oups Gin Alan H323 Dial out Gy Debby J Administration J Operator 0 Potycom e BA Alan H323 Dial out D useri 0 userz2 WebOffice Figure 3 3 Participants in Database Window Polycom Proprietary Template Windows Polycom template files store participant and conference Templates in proprietary format The templates files are organized into two file types Reservation templates files and Participant templates files Reservation Templates File The Reservation templates file is a repository of templates that are used to initiate an On Going Conference or a Reservation The Reservation Templates ResTemplates File window opens from the Templates menu iol x Bo Conferences List dee Default Audio ie se Roger_IP Q Sandy SD Default COP pS s Standard New Reservation pts s SW Cont Pres dee video Switching Figure 3 4 Reservation Templates File Window Chapter 3 MGC Manager Basics e Participant Templates File The Participant templates file contains all the information required to define a participant in a conference and is used to add participants to conferences without having to define their parameters individually The Participant template Party Templates file opens from the Templates menu P Participants in AccordDB s loj x Name O Participant Numbers IP Address SIP Address Channels Aggregation a Alan H323 Dial 172 22 133 67 H32
405. ow configuration letting you configure the events that the system displays Viewing Toggles between Vertical and Horizontal display modes view modes of the main window Participants Queue Opens the Participants Queue window The Conference toolbar is enabled when you click an On Going Conference icon Conference Toolbar 3 15 Chapter 3 MGC Manager Basics The Conference toolbar contains the following buttons Table 3 4 Conference Toolbar Buttons p ome Add New Participant Adds a new participant to the conference Lock Unlock Locks or unlocks the conference to dial in Conference participants Place Cancel Conference on Hold Places a conference on hold or reinstates a conference that was placed on hold Start stop Voting Starts stops a voting session Terminate the Terminates the conference Conference Start Starts a recording session Recording Stop Stops a recording session Recording Participant Toolbar The Participant toolbar is enabled when a Participant icon 1s clicked oeaks Emm 3 16 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume The Participant toolbar contains the following buttons Table 3 5 Participant Toolbar Buttons es Mutes the audio channel transmission from the participant to the conference Mute Audio Unmute Audio Mute Video Unmute Video Block Audio Unblock Audio Connect Participant Disconnect Participant Delete Participant Unmute
406. owser and Status panes Participants Queue list e Participants Queue window To move a participant or place him her on hold using the Participants Queue toolbar 1 Select the icon of the participant to be operated on 2 Click the relevant button in the Participants Queue toolbar as follows Table 8 6 Participants Queue Toolbar Buttons Ean CE To move the participant to the Operator conference 8 60 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Table 8 6 Participants Queue Toolbar Buttons Continued Se To place the attended participant on Hold To move the participant to the Home destination conference For further details on the individual operations refer to the explanations in the section Performing Operations using the Right Click Menu on page 8 55 Performing Operations using Shortcut Keys You can perform operations using shortcut keys from the following panes and lists e Browser Status and Monitor panes On Going Conferences list e Browser and Status panes Participants Queue list e Participants Queue window To move a participant or place him her on hold using shortcut Keys 1 Select the icon of the participant to be operated on 2 Use the appropriate shortcut key as follows Table 8 7 Shortcut Keys Default Shortcut Operation Key To move the participant to the Operator conference To place the attended participant on Hold lt F4 gt To move the participant to the Home des
407. pant Linked This check box appears only when defining a participant during the definition of a Reservation template in the database Select this option to save the participant as a template in the database and link the participant to the Reservation template The participant is assigned to the selected database Group If this option is cleared the participant is embedded in the Reservation template and his her parameters are not saved in the database as a Participant template for future use Optional This field appears only when participant definition is done directly in the database and displays the label assigned to the participant The label is used for filtering the Participant Templates list in the database Non administrative users can assign only the labels assigned to them Users with administrator rights can assign any label created in the system During the Reservation Template definition the Label assigned to the Reservation Template is also automatically assigned to the Participant Template The labels are defined by administrators in the MGC Database Manager module For detailed information on template types and use refer to the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Chapter 7 Database Templates 4 94 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume The definition of the Advanced parameters may be skipped for most participants but if you need to change the defaults or define additional settings open the tab Cli
408. parameters Remote device failed to change its video parameters Remote device failed to change its video parameters Video stream violation during session Video stream violation during session Video channel rejected by inadequate H 323 card resources Video channel rejected by inadequate H 323 card resources Conferencing Limitation Cais Cause ot es Possible Solution Sele Pans Ee OK Cancel Apply E OK Cancel Apply H 323 Participant Properties SIP Participant Properties Disconnection Causes Disconnection Causes 5 72 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume The following information is contained in the Disconnection Cause dialog box Table 5 20 H 323 and SIP Participant Properties Disconnection Causes Category and Description Call The disconnection category Disconnection Reason Call Operator The operator disconnected the Disconnection Disconnect participant from the conference Reason cont The Cause field displays the name of the operator who disconnected the participant No Net The network channels could not be Connection connected This may also be caused when the communication lines are unavailable or busy Participant hang The participant disconnected from up the conference V Gate No Applicable in an ATM connection Response when the V Gate is unable to negotiate a connection with the endpoint Security Failure An encryption failure occurred
409. parameters and delays The RTP statistics are displayed in two views Accumulated and Interval Inthe Accumulated view the system displays statistics that it gathered since the session start since the participant connected to the conference In the nterval view the system displays the statistics for the last five minutes and it is updated continuously The RTCP information is taken from the RTCP reports sent and received by the MCU IP card to from the endpoints This information is refreshed every 5 seconds An exclamation point appears in the Faulty column in the Channel Status box when a faulty condition is detected for a channel for example the packet loss has exceeded a threshold defined in the system The parameters thresholds are defined in the system cfg file and are based on standard network behavior An exclamation point indicates that further investigation may be required using the additional parameters in the Advanced pane This is a real time indication when the faulty condition is resolved the exclamation point disappears The following information is displayed in the Connection 1 dialog box Table 5 16 IP Participant Properties Connection Info1 Parameters Participant The connection status of the participant as it appears in the State Monitor and Status panes If there is a problem with participant s connection the appropriate status indication appears for example Disconnected Disconnect Depe
410. participants Field Option Participant IP e Ina Dial out connection enter the IP address or alias of the endpoint to be called by the MCU If you entered only an alias the gatekeeper can resolve the participants alias into an IP address 4 101 Chapter 4 Defining Conferences and Participants Table 4 8 IP Participant Properties Identification Continued Participant IP e Ina Dial in connection the participants IP cont address or alias are entered The IP address or alias is used to identify and route the participant to the appropriate conference e For SIP endpoints Participant IP is optional as these participants are located by resolving their names into IP addresses by SIP proxy Signaling Port Indicates the signaling port used for participant connection e For H 323 the default port is 1720 e For SIP the default port is 5060 SIP Address Enter the endpoint address in the format SIP Only user name domain Note The SIP URI adheres to URI rules no spaces or special characters such as commas quotation marks inverted tags and so forth either in the user name or in the domain part Address Type Select the format in which the SIP address is written SIP Only e SIP URI Uses the format of an E mail address typically containing a user name and a host name sip user host For example sip dan polycom com TEL URI Used when the endpoint does not specify the domain that should interpret a t
411. perform all the functions of the standard participant but have additional privileges They can start a voting session designate himself herself as the conference speaker while muting all other participants and place the conference on hold and more Lecturer A standard participant or chairperson who is designated as the conference lecturer and is seen by all conference participants in full screen Operator can perform all the standard and chairperson s functions and additional operator specific functions Using the MGC Manager or the MGC WebCommander applications the operator can control and monitor all On Going Conferences simultaneously perform general MCU configuration and maintenance operations The operator does not have to participate in a conference in order to control it however in attended conferencing the operator can participate in the conference to manage it During On Going Conferences the operator can move participants between conferences assist participants who need help and terminate the conference before its scheduled time Chapter 4 Defining Conferences and Participants Participant Connection Types Conference participants can call the conference dial in or be called by the system dial out at the conference start or during the On Going Conference The method which participants use to connect to the conference influences the definition of the conference and the required caller information A conference can i
412. play but cannot be enabled with Lecture Show Auto Layout can be used with Same Layout and Conference On Port COP In this mode the system selects the layout as if one additional participant was added to the conference to show the speaker For example ina standard CP conference with five participants the system shows only four windows in the layout and the speaker cannot view himself But when Auto Layout is used in Same Layout or COP mode the system shows a 5 window layout for all five participants including the speaker Optional To force participants to a video layout window select the participant to be viewed by all the conference participants for a specific layout window You can force participants to a few of the Layout windows while in the other layout windows voice activated switching 1s performed Video forcing during conference definition is available only if participants were added to the conference in the Participants tab When the Same Layout option is selected forcing is enabled only at the conference level Lecture Mode and Click amp View are disabled In this mode self view may be implemented In screens with an asymmetric window layout for example 5 1 8 1 a participant cannot be forced to the large window and to the small window simultaneously Video Forcing can also be performed during the On Going Conference See Chapter 6 Video Forcing on page 6 37 4 59 Chapter 4 Defining Conferences and Part
413. pter 11 Click amp View POLYCOM My IP 172 22 133 39 P VideoMail Call Controls Figure 11 4 2x2 Click amp View Display 11 20 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume To View the Personal Layout in the MGC Manager The MGC Manager application is updated with the new layouts selected for the participant The new video layout can be checked in the Participant Properties Video Sources dialog box Identification Advanced Connection Infot Connection Info2 Video Sources H245 Disconnection Cause Resource Details o Ba oo 000 oooo E E mm Da 86s se 2 3 4 5 10 The Personal Layout selected by the participant Auto Select v Indicates that this participant is EA T currently viewing a Personal Layout as opposed to viewing the Conference Layout OK Cancel Apply Personal Layout may also be modified from the Participant Properties Video Sources dialog box by the operator or from the WebCommander application 11 21 Chapter 11 Click amp View Returning to the Conference Layout If a participant has selected a video layout other than the conference layout the participant can return to the conference layout display by entering the appropriate DTMF code in the Click amp View application To return to the conference layout display 1 From the endpoint activate the Click amp View application 2 Inthe Click amp View Home screen enter 3 on the DTMF input device t
414. pter 11 Click amp View Table 11 1 Click amp View Main Menu Options Continued Description DTMF p Code Return to Enables the participant to cancel his Conference her personal layout and view the layout currently selected for the conference Displays the Help screen selected in the Home Menu closes the Click amp View application for this participant Requests Operator assistance Adds the participant to the Participants Queue in the MGC Manager and exits the Click amp View application Operator Assistance E Displays the previous screen When 11 14 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Conference Layout Chairperson Only Options 1 The Chairperson can change the current conference layout for all the conference participants viewing the conference layout Participants who view their personal layout will not be affected However when they return to the conference layout they will view the new conference layout To select another layout for the conference 1 From your endpoint activate the Click amp View application 2 Inthe Click amp View Home screen enter 1 on the DTMF input device D POLYCOM This DTMF value activates the Change Conference Layout screen 11 15 Chapter 11 Click amp View The video layout options available in the Classic or Quad Views are displayed in the Conference Layout menu T POLYCOM Rta POLYCOM Conference Layout P VideoMail Call Controls Th
415. pter 6 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences 3 In the Monitor pane Status pane or Browser pane right click the icon of the participant to connect click Line Rates and then select check the desired line rate from the Line Rates list Copy Participant Ctrl C Cut Ctrl X Delete Del Q amp A Management gt Dial In Ctrl I Line Rates Auto 126 kbps 1B 56 kbps 1B 64 kbps 2B 2x56 kbps 2B 2x64 kbps 112 kbps 128 kbps 224 kbps 256 kbps 336 kbps 384 kbps 512 kbps 768 kbps T1 1472 kbps E1 1920 kbps Properties 4 The participant endpoint will connect to the conference using the selected line rate To change the line rate from the Participant Properties Advanced tab 1 Inthe Monitor pane Status pane or Browser pane right click the icon of the disconnected participant and then click Properties a Connect Participant Ctri R Copy Participant Chr Zut chrl Delete Del O84 Management F Dial In Ctrl I Line Rates The Participant Properties Identification dialog box opens 2 Click the Advanced tab MGC Manager User s Guide Volume The Participant Properties Advanced dialog box opens Karen Properties E Debbie Properties Terminal Z ISDN Participant IP Participant a For an ISDN participant adjust the line rate by selecting the settings in the Aggregation and Number of Channels field
416. quired to log into the MCU In an environment with several MCUs this can become a tedious task To facilitate the operator login process the MGC Manager creates a login record that can enable you to automatically log in to the MCU to which you are connecting For more information see Automating the Login Process on page 3 36 3 22 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Enter your Login name and Password and then click OK The connection to the MCU is initiated The status of the MCU connection as detailed in Table 3 9 appears in parentheses next to the MCU name Each MCU is initially configured with a default operator whose Login Name and Password are both POLYCOM Additional operators can be defined For details see the MGC Administrator s Guide Chapter 6 MGC Manager ERSION 8 0 0 10 File Edit Yiew Template DataBase Directory Options Window Help e MCUs Network m Product Management Minor L Product Management 25 Connecting 171 178 m 188 124 Falcon Major 188 201 OoOo d my 188203 Major my 18833 Major m 18834 Minor m 18835 Major ULL 6 Normal mgc 25 190 106 L mgc 50 188 30 Normal ug mgc 5018831 Major uo MGC 25A Minor g MGC 25B Minor plus p Product Management 258 Ready PARTICIPANTS p QUEUE FILTER m Product Management ui Prod
417. rate is set at the conference level and represents the transmission rate from the MCU to the endpoint combined video rate and audio rate For more details regarding the line rate settings for Software CP conferences see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Chapter 1 Software Continuous Presence Settings For Conference On Port conferences select the estimated highest transmission rate common to all participants In order to maintain a minimum video quality for a Conference On Port there is a minimum threshold line rate that participants must support in order to connect with video This minimum threshold line rate is determined according to the conference Line Rate For more details see Conference On Port COP on page 4 10 4 30 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Table 4 5 Conference Properties Settings Parameters Continued Line Rate cont Notes e A high line rate transmission is enabled with the Standard Video card version 1 43 and higher or with the Video card The MGC unit can automatically detect the line rate of incoming ISDN IP calls In such a case the conference line rate is the maximum rate for the participant connection The line rate of a conference with ATM participants can be either 2B or 256 Kops and up to 1152 Kbps including HO depending on the participant s endpoint capabilities Video Rate Applicable to Software Continuous Presence only In Out Displays the ratio b
418. rators logged into the same MCU from different computers Called Number The number the participant has dialed Usually identifies the dial in number assigned to the Entry Queue or Meeting Room Indicates whether the participant status is defined as VIP The Participants Queue window can be moved to any position on screen and you can configure its size as you can do with the MGC Manager Main Window and the Templates window application is saved for the next time you start MGC Manager it is displayed in The new placement of the window at the time you close the MGC Manager fs the same location 8 35 Chapter 8 Entry Queues Operator Conferences and Attended Conferencing 8 36 Using Participants Queue Filters You can determine the types of participants to be displayed in the Participants Queue window by creating filters that set criteria according to which participants appear do not appear in the list Use this option if you want to view participants connecting to a specific Entry Queue according to the Entry Queue s dial in number or to list all the participants of the selected status es Filters may be used in two modes when you are connected to the database and locally without logging into the database When you are connected to the database filters created and saved in the past may be used for the current session If you are not connected to the database you can only create a filter to be used immediately
419. rding Links 3 On Going Conferences 0 On Going Gateway Sessions 0 re Participants Queue 0 Reservations 0 3 Meeting Rooms Entry Queues amp SIP Factories 0 E mac so 18831 Major 2 Ba MCU Configuration Ready PARTICIPANTS QUEUE FILTER Ramu Configuration eo On Going Conferences On Going Gateway Sessions d Participants Queue BA S Reservations P33 meeting Rooms Entry Queues amp SIP Factories Dragging the Monitor pane edge Name ooo o o o o otas Connection Network _ Participar a dhonti 88 203 ID 44805 ee 0 Connected Empty 3 amp pstw D gt Disconnected ISDN diihzss mgc 50 188 31 ID 776 0 Connected Empty D Disconnected H323 E RMem13 PARTICIPANTS p QUEVE FILTER MCUs Network W Product Management Major MCU Configuration On Going Conferences 0 re Participants Queue 0 Reservations 3 g Regional Sales_ 3 tes Regional Sales_ 4 es Sales Quarterly_ 1 On Going Gateway Sessions 0 Meeting Rooms Entry Queues amp SIP Factc iy F3 Alpha 01 Minor F3 Alpha 02 F3 Alpha 03 F3 Alpha 04 F3 Alpha 06 F3 Alpha 07 F3 Alpha 08 F3 Alpha 09 F3 Alpha 10 u r3 F3 Alpha 12 Alpha 11 Normal F3 Alpha 13 F3 Alpha 14 F3 Alph
420. re Show F Timer Interval 5 Sec Select Unforced Participants x e Help 5 Inthe Lecturer Name list select the name of the participant to act as the conference lecturer 6 Click OK to confirm the conference settings 10 15 Chapter 10 Lecture and Presentation Options Lecture Show Monitoring A conference in which Lecture Show is enabled is started as any other conference The conference runs as a Video Switching Transcoding Continuous Presence conference until the lecturer connects to the conference If participants connect to the conference prior to the lecturer the participants view only themselves The operator can only add or disconnect participants to the On Going Conference extend the conference duration or terminate the conference before its scheduled end time For details how to perform these operations see Chapter 6 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences MGC Manager VERSION 7 5 0 15 lol x File Edit View Template DataBase Directory Options Window Help PARTICIPANTS QUEUE FILTER L F6 Field 9 L MGc 25 H Product Management Normal Not Full Sep 25 Sep25 1163 H MCU Configuration Empty Sep 25 Sep 25 1165 On Going Conferences 2 3 6 Finance On Going Gateway Sessions 0 di Participants Queue 0 Reservations 0 Meeting Rooms Entry Queues amp L Simulated MCU Yud
421. rence supported by the MCU 4 50 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Table 4 8 Conference Properties Participants Options Continued Max Participants Define the total number of participants who can connect to the conference at one time taking into account both the defined and undefined participants This option saves resources for other conferences When set to Auto the maximum number of participants is determined by the maximum number of participants in a conference supported by the MCU or by the availability of the MCU resources Pre Defined Displays the full path and file name of the selected Participants File database or Participant Template file from which the Pre Defined Participants list is read When the On Going Conference is defined the system automatically lists the Participant templates in the last used list file e To select participants from the database click the From Database button For a detailed description of the participants from the database options see To add participants from the database on page 4 52 To select a participants from a Participant Template file click the Browse button To list participants defined in an LDAP compatible directory click the Directory button Dial Out Manually Select this option to designate an operator controlled dial out conference connection If Dia Out Manually is checked the operator must connect each of the dial out participants The participant
422. ric ID Using these two numbers you can compose the dialing string for H 323 endpoints In the example shown here the Entry Queue named Engineering is assigned the numeric ID 5555 and the Service Prefix is 925 hence the dialing string from H 323 endpoints is 92555555 Although the list displays a conference password and a chairperson password they are not relevant to the Entry Queue only to the Meeting Rooms that are displayed in the same list Chapter 8 Entry Queues Operator Conferences and Attended Conferencing Setting an Entry Queue as Default 8 16 You can designate an Entry Queue as default to enable participants to be automatically routed to the default Entry Queue when there is a problem with the dialed string when dialing one of the following Network Service Prefix NID when the numeric ID is incorrect Network Service Prefix NID Password when the numeric ID is incorrect Network Service Prefix IP card address NID when the numeric ID is incorrect IP card address NID Password when the numeric ID is incorrect IP card address The default Entry Queue is defined for the MCU regardless of the dialed IP card The default Entry Queue can be deleted from the MCU To set an Entry Queue as default In the Meeting Rooms and Entry Queues list right click the Entry Queue and select Set as Default 3 iOO SIO Set s Default ue g Delete Del E a Copy Entry Queue Ctrl C l Create Reservation From E
423. rl Delete Del Exclusive Speaker O84 Management F Mute Audio Ctrl M Mute Video Block Audio Turn OFF AGE Properties Lj MGC Manager User s Guide Volume The status Disconnected appears in the Status column next to the participant s name and the appropriate icon is displayed in the Connection column To reconnect a disconnected participant right click the participant icon and then click Connect Participant For details see Connecting and Reconnecting Dial Out Participants on page 6 5 To delete a participant When a participant no longer needs to be part of a conference and there is no intention to reconnect you can delete the participant from the conference This action also releases the resources allocated to a participant 1 Inthe Monitor pane Status pane or Browser pane list the participants connected to the conference 2 Right click the participant icon and then click Delete i Duke Knoop Disconnect Participant Ctri T Copy Participant Chri Cu trl x Exclusive Speaker O84 Management F Mute Audio Ctrl M Mute Video Block Audio Turn OFF AGE Properties A message appears requesting you to confirm the deletion process 3 Click Yes to delete the selected participant The participant s name disappears from the participants list in the Monitor Status and Browser panes To reconnect a participant who has been deleted from a conference you must add the participant t
424. rom a standard participant to a participant used for recording the conference audio channel MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Naming Undefined Dial in Participants Dial in participants who were not defined prior to the conference start undefined participants are automatically named by the system when connecting to the conference This default name is derived from the conference name and a sequential number You can modify the automatically assigned name to the participant s real name to correctly display it in the Monitor and Status panes The name change is updated in the Call Detail Record CDR which is used for billing Usually an operator will change the name while attending the participant in the Operator conference You can also change the name of the participants who are waiting in the Entry Queue set to Attended mode or when they are connected to the conference To name an Undefined dial in participant 1 List the participants in the Operator conference in the On Going Conference or in the Participants Queues 2 Right click the participant icon and then click Properties Disconnect Participant Ckrl T Move Participant d Copy Participant ctrl E Cut Cr Delete Del Exclusive Speaker O84 Management Unmute Audio Ctrl L Mute video Block Audio Turn OFF AGT Chapter 6 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences The Participant Properties Identification dialog box opens 3 Inthe Name
425. ronize 5 61 Chapter 5 Monitoring Conferences Table 5 16 IP Participant Properties Connection Info1 Parameters Sync Counters Protocol Sync Loss Indicates whether the system was able Status cont to synchronize the bits order according to the selected video protocol H 261 or H 263 This option is checked when there is a problem in the second stage of the synchronization The counter indicates the number of times the system tried to synchronize Video Intra Sync Intra is a special video frame that is used for synchronization Indicates whether the synchronization on a video H 261 or H 263 Intra frame was successful Video Resolution The video resolution of the participant l sync video When checked indicates that there is a video synchronization loss 0 problem in the participant s endpoint The counter indicates the number of times the MCU had to re synchronize Note This parameter is only relevant in Continuous Presence conferences r sync video When checked indicates that there is a video synchronization loss 0 problem in the MCU The counter indicates the number of times the endpoint had to re synchronize Note This parameter is only relevant in Continuous Presence conferences FECC Token When checked indicates that the participant is holding the Data Token Content Token When checked indicates that the participant is holding the Content Token 5 62 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume If the
426. ronized and there are no intervals between the arrivals of the data packets Number of Indicates the number of channels used for a video ISDN Channels ATM MPI connection Select Auto to use the conference s Line Rate setting This is also the mode recommended for ATM connections If the participant s setting is different from the conference setting select the appropriate number of channels During an On Going Conference this setting may be disabled 4 96 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Table 4 7 ISDN ATM MPI T1 CAS Participant Advanced Continued Video Protocol Select the video compression standard e Auto Select this option to use the conference s Video Protocol settings and to enable the dynamic adjustment of the Video Protocol For more details see Defining Advanced Media Settings on page 4 40 H261 the video compression standard mandatory to all endpoints H263 a compression standard that provides improved video quality This standard is not supported by all endpoints H264 a video compression standard that improves video quality at a line rate lower than 384 Kbps H264 a Polycom proprietary standard for video compression that improves video quality at a line rate lower than 384 Kbps Note When video protocol is set to Auto in the Conference Properties Settings this overrides the Video Protocol settings in the Participant Properties Advanced dialog box as the dynamic mod
427. rrences of reservation Marketing Ce e 2 Click Yes to delete all recurring reservations To delete a recurring reservation from the Reservations icon 1 Right click on the Reservations icon click the Delete All Reservation Recurrences option to open the list of recurrent reservations and then select the reservation whose occurrences you wish to delete Delete All Reservation recurrences Print All Marketing Paste Girt Paste As Cirle Faste SIP Factory As 9 22 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume A confirmation box opens MGC Manager xi A re you sure that you want to delete all occurrences of reservation Marketing Yes No 2 Click Yes to delete all recurring reservations 9 23 Chapter 9 Conference Reservations 9 24 10 Lecture and Presentation Options This chapter describes three options for viewing a lecturer presenter in full screen during a conference e Lecture Mode all participants view the lecturer in full screen while the lecturer views all conference participants in either a Continuous Presence layout or for conferences defined as Video Switching by scrolling through the other participants in full screen e Presentation Mode Continuous Presence conferences may be defined to switch automatically to display the current speaker in full screen e Lecture Show broadcasting audio and video streams are muted for all conference participants besides the lecturer
428. rticipant disconnected from the conference V Gate No Response Applicable in an ATM connection when the V Gate is unable to negotiate a connection with the endpoint Security Failure An encryption failure occurred Bonding Failure The connection could not be established between the participant and the MCU when Bonding is used Bad H243 Connection Problems with the connection protocol Resource Deficiency Not enough hardware resources MUX video audio data or network cards to handle the participant call If there is a problem in the connection which is indicated by one of the call disconnection reasons the system displays an explanation for this problem For example if No Net Connection disconnection reason is selected the explanation called party line is busy appears in the Cause field For a detailed description of disconnection causes and parameters see Appendix A 5 54 Lists the endpoint s audio video and line capabilities as sent from the remote site MGC Manager User s Guide Volume If problems are indicated during the participant connection to the conference and you want to further investigate the reasons click the H221 tab The Participant Properties H221 dialog box opens Identification Advanced Connection Infot Connection Info2 Video Sources H221 Disconnection Cause Resource Details m Remote Capabilities Remote Communicatio
429. rticipants Video Sources Resource Force Meet Me Per Cont Recording M General Settings l Restricted Silence IT Msg Service Type Msg Service Name P V Tx 1000 lt lt Basic Line Rate 2B v Video Rate In 0ut l Conference Gn Port i Encryption Chair Control None v Cascade None X Master Name None v T120 Rate None FECC LSD Rate None z I Conference Lock F Mute Meet Me parties Start Conf Requires Chairperson M OnHold Terminate After Chairperson Exits T Enable Invite I Auto Termination Before First Join 5 EE Min After Last Quit fi Min Media Settings Audio Alg 16 Siren7 G728 v Dual Stream Mode None bd lt lt Basic F Roll Call Pro Motion Auto v I Entry Tone 7 Roll Call announcement V End Time Alert Tone f5 id Min r Exit Tone Roll Call announcement Talk Hold Time fi 5 Sec Audio Mix Depth E Sites Video Protocol Auto v Video Format ju o a Frame Rate bw o Quality uw o CY M Annex P AnnexP Annex F Queue 8 20 Cancel Apply Help MGC Manager User s Guide Volume You can modify the current line rate and video settings if required although it is not recommended as the conference will not be compatible with the Entry Queue Select the IVR Service for the conference If no IVR Service is selected participants access the confer
430. rticipants have only the Standard Audio card capability VoIP participants can be moved to any conference that is running on an Audio card In video Transcoding or Continuous Presence conferences participants can be moved between conferences unless The destination conference uses video Annexes which are not used in the source conference The destination conference is set to one of the Dual Stream options In Video Switching conferences participants can be moved between conferences if both the source and the destination conference have the same line rate and video settings When the video protocol is set to Auto it enables the dynamic adjustment of the highest common video in Video Switching conferences Therefore when moving a participant using the H 263 or H 264 video protocol to a conference that was set to Auto video protocol the system will automatically adjust the video protocol of that participant to the one currently set for the destination conference H 239 P C is not supported when participants are moved between conferences or in Attended Conferencing when participants are moved from the Operator conference to another conference FECC is not supported when participants are moved between conferences or in Attended Conferencing when participants are moved from the Operator conference to another conference Chapter 6 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences e SIP participants cannot be moved
431. rties Settings Parameters on page 4 29 8 Click the Participants tab The Reservation Properties Participants dialog box opens 9 Select the conference participants from the list or define new participants in the Participants dialog box as described in Chapter 4 Conference Properties Participants Options on page 4 48 10 If you are defining a Continuous Presence reservation click the Video Source tab Otherwise skip this step The Reservation Properties Video Sources dialog box opens 11 Select the desired video layout and the required visual effects only applicable to conferences run on the Video card as described in Chapter 4 Conference Properties Video Sources CP Layout Menus on page 4 56 12 Optional To force the system to use a specific audio video or data card of the selected MCU click the Resource Force tab The Reservation Properties Resource Force dialog box opens 9 6 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume 13 Select the appropriate card type to handle the conference For more information see Chapter 4 To define the Video Sources settings on page 4 54 The MGC Manager provides a digital recording option with the Polycom Conference Recorder enabling recording of the conference audio channel of both Audio Only and video conferences For more information see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Chapter 9 Recording Completing the Reservation Definitio
432. rties dialog box closes If the conference start Date and Time is scheduled in the future the conference remains in the Reservations list If the reservation is scheduled to start immediately the conference is launched and it is moved from the Reservations list to the On Going Conferences list 9 12 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Scheduling a Conference Reservation from a Reservation Template Database You can use Reservation templates to schedule a conference Reservation to automatically start at a predefined date and time To schedule a conference Reservation using a Database Reservation template 1 Connect to the MCU on which to run the reservation If you are already connected and logged in continue with step 4 on page 9 14 otherwise connect to the database as described in steps 2 through 3 2 Click Login on the Database menu DataBase Directory Options Window Help Save Database Refresh Database Fa Open DE Reservation lempate F Open DE Participant Template F Open 0 6 Master Template F Open WE Request Meeting Template k Logout amp Glear Login Record Load Defaults From DB b Master Reservations d Manage databases Database ODBC i The Database Login dialog box opens x Login Hame ACCORD Password Create Login Record cence For a detailed description of the database login process and default login names see Chapter 3 Using Default Templates to Start a Conference
433. ry Queue according to the target conference settings Auto select this option to let the system automatically select the appropriate compression method for connecting the participant to the target conference For a detailed description of the Video Protocol options see Chapter 4 Video Protocol cont on page 4 44 Annexes are additions to the Video Format when using the H 263 Video Protocol increasing the quality of the video display Select the Annexes for the Entry Queue if these annexes are used in target conferences Annexes N P and F are enabled only when defining a Video Switching Entry Queue and the Video Protocol is set to H 263 For more details on Annexes see Chapter 4 Annexes cont on page 4 47 Select the maximum line rate at which the endpoint will connect to the Entry Queue and the target conference For a Video Switching Entry Queue select the highest line rate common to all participants For Transcoding and Continuous Presence Entry Queues set the line rate to the highest line rate that can be used by the participants in the conference MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Table 8 1 Entry Queue Definitions Parameters Continued eo ee Line Rate cont If the target conference is Video Switching the Entry Queue line rate must be the line rate that is set for the target conference to enable the participant to move from the Entry Queue to the target conference Restricted Select this
434. s b For an IP participant clear the Auto Video Bit Rate check box and enter the required line rate in the Video bitrate box 3 Click OK 6 9 Chapter 6 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences Disconnecting and Deleting Participants On occasion a participant may not need to continue with the conference In such a case you can remove a participant from the conference by e Disconnecting the participant e Deleting the participant When you disconnect a participant resources remain allocated to that participant and the defined properties are retained by the system s memory therefore you can easily reconnect the participant if necessary This is useful when participants wish to discontinue temporarily with intention to return to the conference at a later stage Deleting a participant completely removes all participant information from the conference and releases the resources that were allocated to that participant Therefore to reconnect a participant who was deleted from the conference you have to define the parameters again as you would do for a new participant To disconnect a participant 1 Inthe Monitor pane Status pane or Browser pane list the participants connected to the conference 2 Right click the icon of the participant to disconnect and then click Disconnect Participant The participant is disconnected from the conference Disconnect Participant Ctri T Copy Participan brl 0 Cu Ch
435. s Number of Video Available Layouts Windows Classic mode Quad Views mode 4 56 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Table 4 10 Video Windows Layout Options Continued Number of Video Available Layouts Windows Classic mode Quad Views mode oo Oo a Software mode Quad Views mode 4 57 Chapter 4 Defining Conferences and Participants 4 58 Auto Layout When Auto Layout is selected the conference layout automatically changes when a new video participant connects or disconnects to reflect the new number of video participants Audio Only participants do not affect the selected layout The Auto Layout option can be disabled for the MCU by adding the appropriate flag to the system cfg file For more details see the MGC Administrator s Guide Chapter 5 Table 4 1 describes the video layouts that are used when the conference is set to Auto Layout in Classic or Quad View modes Table 4 1 Default Layouts for CP Classic and Quad Views Number of Video Auto Layout for Auto Layout for Participants Classic CP Quad Mode CP 15 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Table 4 1 Default Layouts for CP Classic and Quad Views Continued Number of Video Auto Layout for Auto Layout for Participants Classic CP Quad Mode CP Software Continuous Presence conferences cannot be set to Auto Layout The Auto Layout feature can be used with the Lecture Mode for the lecturer dis
436. s The MGC Manager uses several toolbars to provide quick access to functions These are the Main Conference Participant Participants Queue Participant Queue Filter and Q amp A toolbars You can hide display each toolbar and can move each one anywhere on the screen even outside the MGC Manager window For details see Showing and Hiding the Toolbars on page 3 9 To move a toolbar to a different location e Click the edge of the desired toolbar and drag it to the new location Main Toolbar The Main toolbar appears as follows Table 3 3 MGC Manager Main Toolbar Buttons a new Participant or Reservation Template file in the Polycom proprietary format Open Opens an existing Participant or Reservation E Template file Save Saves the changes made to a Participant or al Reservation Template file or to the database Not in use lg fie Not in use my yer 3 14 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Table 3 3 MGC Manager Main Toolbar Buttons Continued enon Fon oen a Refresh Refreshes the database to reflect all the changes mr made to the database User Tables by all the connected workstations Not in use pit 2 Opens the MGC Manager About window aoe Indications log Opens the Indications Log Event Collector window window that displays the events collected by the system when the Event Indication option is enabled Indications Opens the ndications Configuration wind
437. s connection to the conference Usually the name and the telephone numbers of each dial out participant are given to the operator at the time the reservation is made and the connection process can be initiated by the operator via the MGC system Dial in participants can also be greeted and guided to the appropriate conference by the operator Once the conference has begun operator assistance continues to be available upon request and the operator can perform various operations such as manage Question and Answer and voting sessions connect and disconnect participants mute unmute participants start Chapter 4 Defining Conferences and Participants Lj a lecturing session place the conference on hold and lock unlock the conference to dial in participants Participants Queue The Participants Queue 1s a list of all participants in all conferences that are waiting for the operator s assistance or who are on hold The Participants Queue is intended mainly for attended conferences The Participants Queue special toolbars command buttons and options provided in the Participants Queue window enable the operator to manage and control participant connection to the destination conference Greet and Guide conference Welcome Queue An Attended conferencing method using an AV Message Service instead of an IVR Service intended for MGC unit with the standard Audio and Video cards In MCUs with Audio and Video cards attended conferencing is
438. s remain in standby state until they are connected to the conference by the operator 11 Use one of the following methods to add participants to the conference Add participants from the database Add participants from the Participant Template file Define new participants 4 51 Chapter 4 Defining Conferences and Participants To add participants from the database a 4 52 Click the From database button to display the list of participants stored in the database in the Pre Defined Participants If you are not logged into the database the Database Login dialog box opens Database Login X Login Name POLYCOM Password 0 Create Login Record Cancel Enter your Login Name and Password and click OK The Open Parties in Database dialog box opens Open Parties in Database x Database Name AccordDE Filter Name D Label 7 None sz Group fe Foot x ema If more than one database is configured in your system select the appropriate database from the Database Name list Filter the list of participants by clicking the Name and or Label check boxes entering the appropriate character string in the Name field and or selecting the appropriate label from the drop down list The Group option is enabled by default displaying the highest Group in the Groups hierarchy to which the logged in user has access You may select another group from the Groups hierarchy
439. s Guide Volume II Chapter 5 This option is enabled when the Cascade option is set to Slave Select the name of the participant that acts as the link to the Master conference This option can be selected only when the link is defined in the Participants tab For more details see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Chapter 5 Select the T 120 data transfer rate if the Data card is installed in the MCU and you want to include data sharing in T 120 format in the conference The lower the rate the slower the transfer rate and the response time The same 1 120 rate must be used by all the conference participants therefore select the highest rate common to all participants Select None to disable the T 120 mode Note e When the conference line rate is 2B or 128 Kbps selecting a high T 120 rate results in a loss of video quality LSD channel is used to transfer the Far End Camera Control FECC commands enabling participants to control other video cameras from their endpoints For more details see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume ll Chapter 1 Note e In Video Switching conferences if an endpoint does not support FECC and cannot open the LSD channel the participant connects as Audio Only Secondary 4 37 Chapter 4 Defining Conferences and Participants Table 4 6 Conference Properties Advanced Settings General Continued Conference Lock Select this option to lock the conference to undefined
440. s Participants Video Sources Resource Force Recording Meet Me Per Cont Pre Defined Participants Conference Participants Name Name Alan Debbie Donald lt lt Del e EE 4 gt 4 gt Search New MV Allow Undefined Parties Min Participants Max Participants Auto Ex Pre Defined Participants File C Debbie MGC data T emplate and MCU files participants usr P Dial Out Manually Browse From database From directory 10 Add participants to the conference using the following options Table 4 8 Conference Properties Participants Options Pre Defined Lists the names of participants defined in the Participants Participant database User template file or in the LDAP directory depending on the selected Predefined Participant File The list is empty if no participant source file was selected or if the file is empty Conference Lists the names of participants who were added to Participants the conference 4 48 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Table 4 8 Conference Properties Participants Options Continued gt To add a participant to the conference from the selected participant s list in the Pre Defined Participants list click the name of the participant and then click the gt gt button The name of the participant is added to the Conference Participants list Note You can select several names at a time Add Participant To remove a par
441. s as voice activated e Lecture Mode The lecturer is viewed in full screen by all conference participants while the audience is scanned for the speaker s view e Presentation Mode When the speaker s presentation extends beyond a predefined time that speaker becomes the lecturer and the conference switches to Lecture Mode IVR Enabled Conferencing The Interactive Voice Response IVR is a software module that automates the connection process to the conference and lets participants and chairpersons perform various operations during the On Going Conference By combining the input of the caller with the menu driven scripts DTMF codes participants can call the conference dial in number and use a touch tone telephone or the endpoint s remote control to interact with the conferencing system Using IVR and DTMF codes participants and chairpersons can perform various management operations during a conference for example e Request personal assistance e Request assistance for conference Chairperson e Lock or unlock conferences to dial in participants Chairperson e Adjust the participant s broadcasting and listening audio volume All e Mute or unmute the participant s audio channel All e Mute all participants except the requesting participant Chairperson e Cancel the Exclusive Speaker mode Chairperson e Mute Meet Me dial in participants upon their connection to the conference Chairperson Encrypt
442. s assigned to the conference and the Audio card is installed in the MCU 4 38 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Table 4 6 Conference Properties Advanced Settings General Continued Terminate Select this option to automatically terminate the Conference after conference once the conference chairperson Chairperson Exits disconnects from the conference When the check box is cleared the conference automatically ends at the predefined end time or when all the participants have disconnected from the conference if Auto Terminate is selected Note This option is enabled only when an IVR Service is assigned to the conference and the Audio card is installed in the MCU On Hold Select this option to place the conference on hold While in On Hold state all the participants hear background music if an external device is attached to the Audio IO card Clear this check box to reinstate the conference Note A conference on hold can be released and placed on hold during an On Going Conference This option is enabled only for Audio Only conferences and only when an IVR Service is assigned to the conference and the Audio card is installed in the MCU Enable Invite Select this option to enable the nvite functionality in an IVR enabled conference When selected participants in the conference can invite new participants during the conference Note This option can only be activated during the conference definition stage It i
443. s assistance The cause of the problem is listed in the Connection column Secure conference A conference ea ea has been secured by the chairperson to prevent outside participants and operators from joining monitoring or controlling it For all secure conference statuses see Table 5 7 on page 5 29 Participant Indicators Dial in participants who were undefined prior to the conference Start are named using the conference name and a sequential number that appears between brackets Standard participant Any dial in or dial out participant connected to the conference Chairperson Leader The participant defined as the conference chairperson leader The chairperson can manage the conference using touch tone signals DTMF codes for example lock or unlock the conference to dial in participants initiate a voting session be the exclusive speaker mute all other participants Lecturer The participant defined as the conference Lecturer Chapter 5 Monitoring Conferences Table 5 2 On Going Conference Monitor Pane Columns Continued Column Description Name a ds Name cont Operator The participant defined as the MGC Manager Operator The operator manages an On Going Conference connects and disconnects participants moves participants between conferences assists participants and more VIP participant VIP chairperson A participant or a chairperson defined as a VIP for preferential assistance Th
444. s every Monday you need to select the date and time of the first Monday on which the conference will occur When defining a Monthly reservation the appropriate day of the month must be selected before defining the frequency at which the reservation occurs 9 18 5 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Click the Reservation Recurrence button to define the frequency at which the reservation occurs The Reservation Recurrence dialog box opens Reservation Recurrence x Recurrence Pattern Sun Wed Sat Range OF Recurrence Weekly i Recur every ii Week s on Mon Tue W Thu f End After i Oecunrences End By Thu 15 July 2004 mea l Fi The following parameters may be defined Table 9 4 Reservation Recurrence Parameters we jee T Recurrence Pattern Select the frequency Daily Weekly or Monthly at which the reservation occurs If Daily is selected the system automatically highlights all the days of the week To remove a certain day of the week from the recurrence schedule click the desired day to clear its check box If Weekly is selected the system automatically checks the day of the week according to the current day set in the Scheduler dialog box You can also define the recurrence interval in weeks For example if you want the reservation to occur bi weekly enter the value 2 in the Week s box To define a twice a week recurring reservatio
445. s that there is no sync loss problem while numbers indicate the number of times that the sync loss problem occurred at the remote or the local site 5 19 Chapter 5 Monitoring Conferences 5 20 Table 5 2 On Going Conference Monitor Pane Columns Continued Column Description Name r V Sync Loss Count Disconnec tion Cause Q amp A Position Q amp A Waiting Last Vote Sub Conference Name Indicates the video synchronization status R indicates the endpoint remote status while L indicates the MCU status A dash indicates that there is no sync loss problem while numbers indicate the number of times that the video sync loss problem occurred at the remote or the local site Displays the disconnection cause for a participant who is disconnected from the conference For the list of disconnection causes see Appendix A Indicates the position held by the participant in the Q amp A Queue 1 being the next to speak 2 being second up and so on This information is cleared when the participant begins to speak Displays the total time spent by the participant waiting in the Q amp A Queue This information is cleared when the participant begins to speak During a voting session displays the last vote that the selected participant entered using a DTMF code Indicates whether the participant is in an Invite Session The Invite option is available in Video or Audio Only Conferences and en
446. s the audio channel transmission from the participant to the conference Stops the video channel transmission from the participant to the conference Restarts the video channel transmission from the participant to the conference Blocks the audio channel transmission from the conference to the participant Restarts the audio channel transmission from the conference to the participant Connects the participant to the conference Disconnects the participant from the conference Deletes the participant from the conference The conference resources are released for the use of other participants Chapter 3 MGC Manager Basics Participants Queue Toolbar The Participants Queue toolbar is enabled when an Operator conference is running and a Participant icon is selected Ba ee The Participants Queue toolbar contains the following buttons Table 3 6 Participants Queue Toolbar Buttons Attend Participant Moves the participant to the Ca conference for operator s assistance Place Participant on Places the attended participant on Hold The participant hears an IVR message while on hold Move to Home Moves the participant to the Home Conference destination conference Participant Queue Filter Toolbar 3 18 The Participant Queue Filter toolbar options enable displaying the list of participants who are waiting to be connected to the conference according to selected criteria For instructions about
447. s valid only for conferences with an IVR service in which the Enable Invite messages and prompts are enabled For more information on Audio Invite refer to the MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition For more details on Video Invite see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Chapter 1 4 39 Chapter 4 Defining Conferences and Participants Table 4 6 Conference Properties Advanced Settings General Continued Auto Termination Select this option to automatically end the conference by the MCU and define the termination condition and the time period in minutes before the conference is considered idle e Before First Join No participant has connected to an On Going Conference for n minutes after it started Default is 5 minutes After Last Quit All the participants have disconnected from the conference and the conference is idle empty for a predefined time period Default is 1 minute Since empty conferences still use resources that were reserved for them this option is useful to save resources and billing costs Defining Advanced Media Settings 8 TIn the Media Settings area of the Conference Properties Settings tab click the Advanced gt gt button Table 4 7 Conference Properties Advanced Settings Media Roll Call Click this option to enable Roll Call for the conference Roll Call records the participant s name and plays it back when the participant enters and leaves a conference
448. s with endpoints that do not support the algorithm selected for the conference are connected as Secondary Audio only If the conference line rate is set to 2B or 128 Kbps to achieve the best audio and video quality select the most compressed audio algorithm for all participants in the following order G 728 G 722 G 711 When Siren7 16 24 or 32 bit is available select the audio algorithm in the following order Siren 7 16 G 728 G722 and G 711 Siren7 16 bit and G 728 algorithms are interchangeable and a participant using either one is fully connected when one of them is selected as the audio algorithm 4 34 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Table 4 5 Conference Properties Settings Parameters Continued Audio Alg cont If the conference line rate is higher than 128 Kbps to achieve the best audio and video quality select the audio algorithm in the following order G 722 1 32 G722 1 24 G 722 G711 When Siren7 16 24 or 32 bit is available select the audio algorithm in the following order G 722 1 32 Siren7 32 G 722 1 24 Siren7 24 G 722 Siren7 16 G 711 Siren 14 is available only when it is enabled in the system configuration file It should be used with conference rates higher than 128 Kbps only when all endpoints support this algorithm In Transcoding or Continuous Presence conferences you can select any of the available audio algorithms If set to Auto the system tries
449. se data you want to print and then click Print Reservation Data olycom Monitor Monitor Filter Mew Participant Fa Terminate Del Copy Conf Chrl c Paste Participant Ctrl Paste Participant 45 Ctrl F Next Questioner Clear eat Lock Conference Voom a Print Reservation Data Video Force Drag amp Drop Properties The Print dialog box opens Print Default x Name OF Operator Report To i File Printer i ClipBoard Cancel In the Name Of Operator field enter the name of the operator who initiated the report 6 69 Chapter 6 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences 6 70 4 Inthe Report To box select the report destination File to print the conference data to a text file Printer to print the conference data to a printer Clipboard to copy the conference data to the clipboard for use by other applications 5 Click OK If File is selected the Save As dialog box opens Save As 2 x Save irr Template and MCU files e g Fle Save az type Text File txt Cancel Ls Select the destination folder The system assigns the conference name as the default file name However you can define another file name Click Save If Printer is selected the Print dialog box opens Select the required printer and then click OK The conference data is printed using the printer s current settings If Clipboard is selected the conference
450. secetsnceniaess 2 8 Additional Video Features ccccsssssscscnececceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 8 Conferencing Capabilities and Options ssseessesesessssssssssssssssssssssssssssse 2 9 Conference Reservations Features ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 9 Conference Semp PEAUIECS son staderesbiemanaenduernae sunt doa danmateuderdaneniasouetes 2 9 Conference Management and Monitoring Features 2 10 MGC Hardware Enhancements cccccccccssccceeeseseseeeessesssseeeeseeeees 2 11 COMING CAV IY iosi eaten An EEr aiaa 2 11 Scalable Architecture srren i 2 11 Renan ee E 2 11 Mamen E erea E esoansseaioueleretace 2 12 MGC Manager Basics asnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 3 1 Starting the MGC Manager Application ccccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeees 3 1 Table of Contents The MGC Manager Main Window ccsesessssssssssseseceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeees 3 2 Additional Windows sccsseiscscbasinuvenwsscunaevenwdebdbesdedwbenededcecdeasacsatvennsice 3 4 Participants Queue Window sennsenssossssssessssessesseeeereerereeseee 3 6 MGC Main Window View Modes ccccceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeennnneeeeeeeeees 3 7 Selecting the View Mode srcstissiserenideuee k aiia nire Eni 3 7 Showing and Hiding the Toolbars 2 0 0 0 cccccccccecceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeees 3 9 Showing and Hiding the Status Bar ce eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 10 Showing and Hiding the Memory Indicators ceeee 3 10 Resizi
451. select their personal Video Layout from their endpoint You can create a new IVR Service or you can modify an existing IVR Service to enable the Click amp View application To enable the Click amp View application by defining a new IVR Service L 2 3 Connect to the MGC unit MCU Click the plus icon next to the MCU icon to expand its options tree Double click the MCU Configuration icon or click the plus icon next to it to display the MCU Configuration options Right click the IVR Services icon and then click New IVR Service o Ul Product Management Normal B 9 MCU Configuration E iji Cards ae Connections a we VR Msg Services Hew IVR Service cH g New Entry e Service Paste As Emit EH i Faste Dirty EA 2 Messages Status Hig Properties Ean Bie Recording Links Et Ai On Going Conferences 14 ce cia Budget es On Going Gateway Sessions 0 an a Participants Queue bs lt I Reservations o 5 233 Meeting Rooms Entry Queues amp SIP Factories 18 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume The VR Global dialog box opens ENGLISH a This dialog box enables you to define the general parameters of the IVR Service 5 Follow the directions for defining a new IVR Service in the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Chapter 2 Defining a New IVR Message Service 6 As you proceed through the wizard you will open the Video Services dialog box
452. sence conferences the system selects the best video protocol for the endpoint according to its capabilities In Video Switching conferences select Auto to let the system select the appropriate compression algorithm and enables its dynamic adjustment by the Highest Common mechanism Selecting one of the available protocols forces the endpoints to use only this protocol disabling the Highest Common mechanism Hence endpoints that do not support the selected protocol will connect as Secondary Audio Only Select one of the available protocols e Auto this option lets the system automatically select the compression algorithm and enables the Highest Common mechanism in Video Switching conferences This setting overrides the Video Protocol settings in the Participants Properties Advanced dialog box e H261 the video compression algorithm mandatory to all endpoints e H263 a video compression algorithm that provides a better video quality than H 261 This standard is not supported by all endpoints 4 43 Chapter 4 Defining Conferences and Participants Table 4 7 Conference Properties Advanced Settings Media Continued Video Protocol e H 264 a video compression standard that cont improves video quality at a line rate lower than 384 Kbps When H 239 P C option is selected H 264 is supported in the People channel in the same way as in a standard VSW conference and the Content channel only uses H 263 H264 a
453. set together with asymmetric conference layouts and the conference is scheduled to run on the Standard Video card the conference is rejected by the MCU 10 9 Chapter 10 Lecture and Presentation Options During an On Going Conference set to Presentation Mode that is running on the standard Video card asymmetric conference layouts are blocked and unavailable for selection When a conference set to both Auto Layout and Presentation Mode is run on the Standard Video card the definition of the layouts selected for Auto Layout changes For more details see the MGC Administrator s Guide Chapter 5 Confer cfg Flags Sections AUTO_LAYOUT and AUTO_QUAD_LAYOUT Presentation Mode must be enabled in the system cfg configuration file in the GENERAL section For more details see the MGC Administrator s Guide Chapter 5 Edit system cfg Setting the Presentation Mode for a Conference 10 10 The Presentation Mode can only be set in Continuous Presence conferences It is selected in the Conference Properties Video Sources dialog box To select a Presentation Mode Conference Click the Video Sources tab The Conference Properties Video Sources dialog box opens MGC Manager User s Guide Volume 2 Inthe Lecture Mode list select Presentation Mode The Presentation Mode icon appears at the top right corner of the dialog box Default Conference Properties Product Management Icon
454. settings because Auto enables the dynamic mode in which the video settings are forced by the MCU In sucha case the system first tries to connect the participant using the H 264 video protocol Only if the endpoint does not support H 264 the system tries to connect the participant using H 263 or H 261 If the conference video protocol is set to H 264 or H 263 and the endpoint does not support this protocol the participant is connected as Secondary audio only Recording Designate the IP participant as an audio recording port connected to an external recording device e None The participant is not connected to an external recording device e Dialup The participant is used as the recording port to an external device For more details see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Il Chapter 9 Recording The Auto Gain Control AGC mechanism regulates audio noise and volume by balancing the received signal to all participants Different endpoints and phones produce specific source noises and volume To provide a constant output amplitude AGC can be applied to all incoming audio streams prior to mixing thereby dynamically adjusting the amplification of the input signal AGC is automatically enabled for all participants Clear this check box to disable this option for the participant 4 107 Chapter 4 Defining Conferences and Participants Table 4 9 IP Participant Properties Advanced Continued Encryption Media
455. sh Video OK Cancel Apply Help The following conference parameters are displayed Table 5 9 On Going Conference Properties On Going State Conference Displays the possible faulty statuses of a conference Status A problem that occurred during conference for example a Resource Deficiency is indicated by a checked check box These statuses are also listed in the Connection column in the Monitor or the Status pane For a detailed description of conference statuses see Table 5 2 On Going Conference Monitor Pane Columns on page 5 10 Recording Displays the name of the participant port that was defined as the recording port for the conference The Recording Portis used for connection to an external recording device 5 38 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Table 5 9 On Going Conference Properties On Going State Continued Displays the name of the current conference speaker Exclusive Speaker Current Cascade Mode FECC LSD Token Holder FECC LSD Rate Withdraw FECC LSD Token Chair Control Chair Token Holder Withdraw Chair Token Displays the name of the Exclusive Speaker designated for the conference for example in Lecture mode You can select another speaker from the list during the conference If the Cascading option is enabled for the conference displays the name of the Master conference For a description of the cascading mode see the MGC Manager User s
456. sive Meeting Room Video A video Meeting Room that is in a passive mode waiting to be activated This Meeting Room uses both Audio and Video media Passive Meeting Room Audio An Audio Only Meeting Room that is in a passive mode waiting to be activated Meeting Room Right Click Functions The following options are available when right clicking the Meeting Rooms icon Table 7 4 Meeting Room Right Click Options Right click E New Participant Adds a new participant to the Meeting Room For details see Chapter 6 Adding New Participants to a Conference on page 6 42 Copy Meeting Copies the Meeting Room properties to a template Room another MCU or the same MCU under a different name 7 19 Chapter 7 Meet Me per Conferences and Meeting Rooms Table 7 4 Meeting Room Right Click Options Continued Right click ya Paste Participant Pastes participant properties from the clipboard into a Meeting Room For details see Chapter 6 To copy the participant properties from an On Going Conference or Reservation on page 6 46 Paste Participant Pastes participant properties from the clipboard into the As Meeting Room while changing the participant name or other parameters For details see Chapter 6 To copy the participant properties from an On Going Conference or Reservation on page 6 46 Deletes the Meeting Room from the MCU Print Meeting Prints the Meeting Room information to a printer to a fi
457. sive Speaker O84 Management Unmute Audio Ctrl U UnMute video Bock Anaa Turn OFF AGC Properties Alternatively to unmute the audio channel select the participant s icon and then press the appropriate shortcut key combination the default shortcut key combination is lt Ctrl U gt To mute a participant using the Participant Properties dialog box 1 Inthe Monitor pane or the Status pane right click the participant icon and then click Properties Disconnect Participant Ckrl T Move Participant F Copy Participant Ctrl C Cut Crits Delete Del Exclusive Speaker 4 Management d Mute Audio Ctrl M Mute Video Block Audio Turn OFF AGC The Participant Properties dialog box opens 6 27 Chapter 6 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences 6 28 2 Click the Connection Info2 tab The Participant Properties Connection Info2 dialog box opens Yolanda Properties k Video Sources H245 Disconnection Cause Resource Details Identification Advanced Connection Infot Connection Info2 Connection Time Loopback Status jan 08 2004 10 48 15 AM Tm Al M T120 Disconnection Time E Audio a Video rf an 08 2004 10 48 09 AM l Ts Rate Rix Rate Connection Retries Left 377 a 0 m Mute By Operator m Attending T Audio Video Oper Participant Mute By Participan F Audio is Video Beier Mute By MCU Participant Att
458. ssigned to the conference This number must be defined in the H323 dialog box of the selected IP Network Service 3 Click OK The H 323 Service Prefix is added to the table in the Meet Me Service H 323 Service pane 7 8 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume If participants use more than one IP Network Service to connect to the conference repeat steps to 3 to define H 323 Service Prefixes for these additional IP Network Services In the Conference Properties dialog box click OK to complete the conference definition To delete a service name or dial in number from the conference l In the Conference Properties Meet Me per Conf dialog box select the ISDN IP Network Service name or dial in number to delete The service name and dial in numbers are removed from the conference definition Chapter 7 Meet Me per Conferences and Meeting Rooms Monitoring Meet Me Conferences When an undefined ISDN participant in a Meet Me Conference dials into the conference the system tries to connect the participant using the Bonding or H 221 protocol If the connection uses the Bonding protocol during the negotiation with the endpoint the number of additional channels to be connected is communicated and the connection proceeds as in a standard Bonding connection When connecting to the conference the name of an Undefined participant appears in the format lt conference name_ X gt where X is the participant s sequential nu
459. ssssesssseesssssssssseseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 14 Setting an Entry Queue as Default ee eeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 16 Enabling Entry Queue Access for Conferences ccceeeees 8 17 Using an Existing Entry Queue to Define a Target Conference 8 18 Operator CONTEC ICES cake tcsutasceatel ausesetaduvanenastscaesenhenasonieasmntannencambedenss 8 22 Operator Functions Requiring an Active Operator Conference 8 22 Defining an On Going Operator Conference ccceccceeeeeees 8 24 Defining an Operator Reservation ccccceececeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 29 Starting an Operator Conference from a Reservation Template 8 30 Attended Conferencing cccccccecccccceeccceececceeecceceeseeeeeeaeseaeeeaaaaaas 8 32 The Participant s Queue Window cccecceeessessseseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeees 8 33 Listing Participants in the Participants Queue Window 8 34 Using Participants Queue Filters ec cccesseeeteeennneeees 8 36 The Attended Participants Dialog BOX cceeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 41 Attended Participants Management c sssssseseeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeees 8 53 Performing Operations using the Right Click Menu 8 55 Moving a Participant to the Operator Conference 8 55 Moving a Participant to the Home Conference 8 56 Placing a Participant On Hold ou ceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 59 Performing Operations using the Participants Queue Toolbar
460. stination Conference ID Password Example Conference ID 1234 Conference Password 3456 H 323 participants dial 925 1 2228 1 23444345 6 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume SIP Participants Using an Entry Queue minimizes the number of conferences that require registration with the SIP server and enables using one URI address for all dial in connections using the format lt Entry Queue name gt lt domain name gt Example Entry Queue Name EQ1 Conference ID 1234 Conference Password 3456 Domain Name polycom com SIP participants dial eq1 polycom com When dialing from a Microsoft Windows Messenger endpoint which does not have DTMF capabilities the first participant who in Ad Hoc conferencing creates the new conference enters the Entry Queue name followed by the target conference name and the numeric ID in the format EQ name target conference name target conference numeric ID For example EQ1 sales 12345 In this example the Entry Queue name is EQ1 and a new On Going Conference by the name sales with the numeric ID 72345 will be created on the MCU You do not need to add the domain name to the conference name as it is automatically added by Microsoft Windows Messenger when sending the request to the SIP server The other conference participants can connect to the conference directly by entering either sales or 12345 4 83 Chapter 4 Defining Conferences and Participants Conference Access
461. sting Operator Assistance 0 00 eeeeesseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeees 11 25 Appendix A Disconnection Causes A 1 Appendix B Glossary 002 cee ees B 1 Table of Contents Before You Begin The MGC Manager application is designed to set up and monitor multipoint video conferences and to perform system configuration activities for the MGC Multipoint Control Units MCUs to which it connects MGC Manager is consists of a user provided PC workstation equipped with a Windows 98 Windows NT Windows 2000 or Windows XP operating system and of the MGC Manager software The PC can connect to the MGC unit via LAN Internet dial up modem or RS 232 interface System Requirements The MGC Manager application can be installed in an environment that meets the following requirements IBM PC compatible computer Pentium I 400 MHz CPU or higher Minimum 64 MB RAM recommended 64 MB Windows 98 Windows ME Windows NT Windows 2000 or Windows XP operating system Modem optional Network capabilities TCP IP Prerequisites This manual assumes the user has the following knowledge Familiarity with Windows 98 Windows NT Windows 2000 or Windows XP operating systems and interface Basic knowledge of video conferencing concepts and terminology 1 1 Chapter 1 Before You Begin About the MGC Manager User s Guides 1 2 The MGC Manager User Guides documentation set includes the follow
462. stioner any time during the question or you can end the current Q amp A session using the appropriate code on the DTMF input device or by selecting the appropriate function in the MGC Manager application You can change the position of the participants in the queue moving a selected participant s position up or down the queue or to the first or last position in the queue e A Q amp A session requires the use of a DTMF input device e The Q amp A session managing options are applicable only to conferences with an assigned IVR Service running on an Audio card Controlling Q amp A Queues with the Toolbar You can easily manage the Q amp A queues using the dedicated toolbar Enable this toolbar by clicking a participant icon in an On Going Conference or by clicking the icon of a participant waiting in the Q amp A queue The Q amp A toolbar is detailed in Table 3 8 on page 3 19 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Adding Questioners to Q amp A Queues Participants can be added as questioners to the Q amp A queue using one of the following options e Questioners are added to the Q amp A queue once they press the appropriate DTMF code on their DTMF input device default DTMF code is 22 An appropriate audio message is played to confirm the participant addition to the Q amp A queue e _Questioners can also be added the queue manually from the MGC Manager application In the Browser Status or Monitor panes right click the icon
463. t initial communication send an initial capabilities set ISDN only Resource Deficiency Resources deficiency Insufficient resources available ISDN only A 4 MGC Manager User s Guide Table A 1 Primary Disconnection Reasons Continued Resource Deficiency Net port deficiency Insufficient network cont resources to handle the ISDN call ISDN only MUX port deficiency Insufficient MUX resources ISDN only Audio port deficiency Insufficient audio ports ISDN and IP Video port deficiency Insufficient video resources ISDN and IP Audio message port Insufficient audio deficiency resources available for IVR or Greet and Guide messages ISDN and IP H323 deficiency Insufficient IP resources IP only T123 port deficiency Insufficient data resources ISDN and IP H323 call close No port Insufficient audio ports left for audio IP only H323 call close No port The required video ports left for video exceed the number of ports allocated to video in fixed ports IP only H323 call close No port The required data ports left for T120 exceed the number of ports allocated to data in fixed ports IP only H323 call close Internal system error Gatekeeper connection IP only ID failed A 5 Appendix A Disconnection Causes A 6 Table A 1 Primary Disconnection Reasons Continued Cause Message Description Category Resource Deficiency H323 call close No control port le
464. t a SIP Client Error 413 Request Entity Too Large response The server is refusing to process a request because the request entity is larger than the server is willing or able to process IP only SIP client error 414 The endpoint sent a SIP Client Error 414 Request URI Too Long response The server is refusing to service the request because the Request URI is longer than the server is willing to interpret IP only Appendix A Disconnection Causes Table A 1 Primary Disconnection Reasons Continued SIP Failure cont SIP client error 420 The endpoint sent a SIP Client Error 420 Bad Extension response The server did not understand the protocol extension specified in a Require header field IP only SIP client error 481 The endpoint sent a SIP Client Error 481 Call Transaction Does Not Exist response IP only SIP client error 482 The endpoint sent a SIP Client Error 482 Loop Detected response IP only SIP client error 483 The endpoint sent a SIP Client Error 483 Too Many Hops response IP only SIP client error 484 The endpoint sent a SIP Client Error 484 Address Incomplete response The server received a request with a To address or Request URI that was incomplete IP only SIP client error 485 The endpoint sent a SIP Client Error 485 Ambiguous response The address provided in the request Request URI was ambiguous IP only MGC Manager User s Guid
465. t and Conference Level Video Management Change the conference and participant Video Layout in a Continuous Presence conference Video Force at the conference and the participant level Conference Level Operations The following operations can be performed at the conference level Add new participants to a conference Mute dial in participants upon their connection to the conference Mute audio for a conference Lock and unlock a conference Chapter 6 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences 6 4 Change the conference and chairperson password Change a conference s duration Enable the end of conference reminder Change the conference billing code Modify conference User Defined fields information MGC Manager only Add remarks Enable broadcasting of Annex D still video image to all participants in Transcoding and Continuous Presence conferences Print the conference details to a file printer or clipboard Control the Question and Answer session Conduct Voting sessions Place a conference on hold Audio Only conferences only see the MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Perform chairperson operations via DTMF Codes Invite participants to the conference Operations performed during On Going Audio Only Conferences are described in the MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Chapter 3 Managing Audio Only Conferences MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Participant Level Operations C
466. t can include Audio Only and video participants Supported Select the network to be used by participants to connect to Network this conference e IP Select this option if only IP participants will connect to the conference In addition to Classic and Quad Views the Software option is enabled in the Video Session gt Continuous Presence list IP ISDN ATM MPI Select this option to let participants join this conference using all types of network connections 4 25 Chapter 4 Defining Conferences and Participants Table 4 4 Conference Properties General Continued Video Session Select the Video Session type for the conference e Video Switching To set a conference in which all the participants use the same line rate and video and audio parameters by setting the communication parameters to the common capabilities This conference type does not use the MCU video resources The conference speaker is displayed in full screen on all endpoints In Video Switching conferences the highest common mechanism is enabled allowing the system to select the best video parameters that can be supported by all the endpoints currently connected to the system and dynamically change them when a new endpoint joins or leaves the conference Transcoding To set a conference in which participants use different line rates video audio and data parameters up to the maximum line rate defined for the conference thus maintaining the bes
467. t connection this column shows the participant s number dialed by the MCU to connect the participant to the conference All the operations that can be performed during a standard conference may be performed during an On Going Meet Me Conference 7 10 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Meeting Rooms A Meeting Room is a Meet Me Per Conference saved on the MCU in passive mode without using any of the system resources It may be activated endlessly or you can define the number of activations The Meeting Room is set to 2 hour duration and is generally intended for undefined dial in participants The Meeting Room is automatically activated when the first participant dials in Other participants may join the conference by dialing in If dial out participants are also defined for the conference the system automatically dials out to these participants the moment the conference 1s activated The operator or conference initiator may lock the conference to additional dial in participants at any time An IVR enabled Meeting Room can be configured to start only when the chairperson connects to the Meeting Room In that case participants connecting to the Meeting Room conference prior to the chairperson s connection are placed on hold hear background music when available and see the Welcome video slide in video Meeting Room conferences If the chairperson does not connect in a predefined time period the conference is automatically termina
468. t database name gt Window Help New Window Cascade Tile Horizontally Tile Vertically Arrange Icons w l 2 Reservations in amp ccordDE L gt If the database window is closed on the DataBase menu click Open D B Reservation Template and then select the database storing the Reservation template DataBase Directory Options Save Database Retest Database Filter Login window ro Open D E Reservation Template Open D B Participant Template Logout amp Clear Login Record Load Defaults From DB Manage databases Database ODBC 3 26 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume The Reservations in Database window is displayed If required expand the Groups hierarchy until you locate the desired Reservation template By default the Default Group is expanded and this step may be skipped Right click the icon of the Reservation template you want to use to start the conference and then click Start Immediately If there are several MCUs connected to the same MGC Manager you also need to select the MCU to host the conference U Reservations in AccordDB J Root Names Participant Numbers IP Address SIP Address H O Default F3 Alpha 01 F3 Alpha 11 New Participant Product Management Default 4ttending Print Template Cut Ctrl X Copy Ctrl C Paste aby strl4 P Paste 4s Delete Del Properties U _____________________________________ An On Going Co
469. t network connections PSTN ISDN or T1 CAS lines cellular phones or VoIP H 323 or SIP VTX 1000 users can connect to conferences as audio only participants while enjoying wideband high quality audio The IVR module offers chairperson dial out inviting participants to join the On Going Conference chairperson and participant control of the conference via touch tone commands DTMF codes voting and Question and Answer sessions and many more For detailed information about the Audio Only conferences and features see the MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Video Conferences Video Conferences can include both Video and Audio as well as Audio Only participants Participants can connect to the video conference using different network connections ISDN IP H 323 and SIP ATM and MPI serial connection Various parameters affect the video display and quality These parameters are affected by the Video Session type the conference line rate and the video quality parameters such as video protocol video resolution etc Video Conference Settings When defining a new video conference you select the parameters that determine the video display on the participant s endpoint and the qualify of the video Video Session Types The video session type determines the video display options full screen or split screen with all participants viewed simultaneously and the method in which the video is processed by the MCU with or wi
470. t the user does not exist at the domain specified in the Request URI IP only A SIP Redirection 300 Multiple Choices response was returned IP only A SIP Redirection 305 Use Proxy response was returned The requested resource MUST be accessed through the proxy given by the Contact field IP only MGC Manager User s Guide Table A 1 Primary Disconnection Reasons Continued SIP Failure cont SIP redirection 380 A SIP Redirection 380 Alternative Service response was returned The call was not successful but alternative services are possible IP only SIP remote cancelled The endpoint canceled Call the call IP only SIP remote closed call The endpoint ended the call IP only SIP remote stopped The endpoint is not responding responding IP only SIP remote unreachable The endpoint could not be reached IP only SIP request terminated The endpoint terminated the request The request was terminated by a BYE or CANCEL request IP only SIP request timeout The request was timed out IP only SIP server error 500 The SIP server sent a SIP Server Error 500 Server Internal Error response The server encountered an unexpected condition that prevented it from fulfilling the request IP only Appendix A Disconnection Causes Table A 1 Primary Disconnection Reasons Continued SIP Failure cont SIP server error 501 SIP server error 502 SIP server error
471. t video and audio capability that each participant endpoint can achieve with the current conference settings As ina Video Switching session the current speaker is displayed on all screens and switching between participants is audio activated This conference type requires MCU video resources 4 26 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Table 4 4 Conference Properties General Continued Video Session e Continuous Presence To set a conference in which cont several participants can be viewed simultaneously in video layout windows In this conference type each participant endpoint s capabilities are used to maintain the highest possible video audio and data quality according to the conference settings Hence this conference type requires MCU video resources Once Continuous Presence is selected the categories of video layout arrangements are available Classic participants can be displayed in up to 9 video windows arranged in 21 video layouts that can be used with all types of Video card Quad Views This mode should be selected when the conference includes 10 participants or more that can be arranged in three different layouts Five additional layouts are also available for selection This conference type uses Video card resources Software SWCP a software solution that resembles the Continuous Presence functionality but does not use video card resources Offers only two video layouts 2x1 and 2x2 I
472. tarting an Operator Conference from a Reservation Template 8 30 To start an Operator Conference from an Operator Reservation template 1 Connect to the MCU 2 Log in to the Database For more details about Logging into User tables see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Chapter 7 Logging into the User Tables of the Database Display the Reservation in the Database window For more details about Opening a Reservation in the Database window see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Chapter 7 Logging into the User Tables of the Database In the Reservations database click the plus icon next to the Groups icon to expand the Groups tree until you locate the Group containing the Operator Reservation template The Operator Reservation template is listed together with the standard ri a Reservation templates and is identified by an Audio Eai or Video A3 Operator Conference template icon To list the participant in the Operator Reservation template click the plus icon next to the Operator Reservation icon T Reservations in AccordDB a UserGraups Phone t IP Channels be a a Operator on Oliver MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Right click the Operator Reservation icon and then click Start Immediately to start an On Going Operator Conference or click Start to schedule an Operator Conference reservation to start sometime in the future Hew Participant Copy 45
473. te an Audio Only Entry Queue whose target conferences are Audio Only conferences Select this option if your MCU has only VoicePlus capabilities Note Audio Only participants can also connect via a video Entry Queue 8 7 Chapter 8 Entry Queues Operator Conferences and Attended Conferencing Table 8 1 Entry Queue Definitions Parameters Continued eS ees Encryption Video Switching 8 8 Select this check box to create an IP Only Entry Queue whose target conferences are IP Only conferences The target conferences can be set as VoIP conferences Audio Only IP Only or Software Continuous Presence video For a detailed description of SWCP see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Chapter 1 Software Continuous Presence Settings Select this check box to encrypt this Entry Queue When enabled only encrypted participants can join this Entry Queue while non encrypted participants are disconnected from the MCU For more details about encryption and encrypted Entry Queues see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Il Chapter 1 Media Encryption Select this option to set the Entry Queue as a Video Switching Entry Queue and save video resources as no video ports are used for participant connections The participants connect to this Entry Queue using the line rate and video settings of the Entry Queue Therefore to move from the Entry Queue to a destination Video Switching conference the destinat
474. ted The time period default is 20 minutes is defined in the system cfg Greet and Guide IVR section by the LEADER_WAITING_TIME_OUT flag The conference is automatically terminated when the last participant quits the conference if Auto Termination is selected or in an IVR enabled conference when the chairperson exits the conference or manually by the operator or conference initiator Once the conference is terminated the MCU checks the conference recurrence setting If the conference is still valid for re activation the conference resumes its passive state waiting for another initiating call Otherwise the Meeting Room is deleted from the MCU The operator can delete a Meeting Room from the Meeting Rooms list The Meeting Room can be accessed directly or via an Entry Queue For direct dialing in an ISDN number and an IP Network Service Prefix are assigned to the meeting Room in the same way as for Meet Me Per Conference For details see Chapter 4 Joining an On Going Conference on page 4 70 e Meeting Rooms can be defined only if the appropriate Customer Permission 5 e The Meeting Room is not erased when the MCU is reset is defined in the system cfg file Chapter 7 Meet Me per Conferences and Meeting Rooms Defining a New Meeting Room To define a new Meeting Room 1 Inthe MCU tree right click the Meeting Rooms Entry Queues amp SIP Factories icon and then click New Meeting Room A Meeti
475. ted and cannot be cleared when defining a new participant during an On Going Conference Service Name Enter the name of the IP Network Service handling the call Note that the system is case sensitive If left blank the default IP Network Service H 323 or SIP depending on the Interface Type is used Video Protocol This option defaults to the conference setting when adding a new participant during an On Going Conference Select the video compression standard e Auto Use the conference s Video Protocol settings and enable the dynamic adjustment of the Video Protocol For more details see Defining Advanced Media Settings on page 4 40 H 261 The base video compression standard that is supported by all endpoints participants H 263 A video compression standard that provides enhanced video quality This standard is not supported by all endpoints H 264 A video compression standard that provides enhanced video quality especially in line rates of up to 384 Kbps This standard is not supported yet by all endpoints 4 106 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Table 4 9 IP Participant Properties Advanced Continued Video Protocol e H 264 A Polycom proprietary standard for cont video compression that improves video quality at a line rate lower than 384Kbps Note When the Video Protocol is set to Auto in the Conference Properties Settings dialog box this overrides the participant s Video Protocol
476. tegory whether it is audio or video related and details the cause message In some cases a possible solution may be indicated This appendix details the cause messages displayed in the Cause field and their explanation version refer to the topic ACCOngoingParticipant GetDisconnectCause For a full list of disconnection cause messages for the current MGC Manager LY in the MGC C API e book Table A 1 Primary Disconnection Reasons Operator Disconnect Disconnected by The operator operator disconnected the endpoint from the conference ISDN and IP No Net Connection No net connection The network failed to connect to the network card ISDN only Participant Hang Up Party hang up The endpoint hung up ISDN only Password Failure The participant entered the wrong password in the IVR or didn t enter a password ISDN and IP A 1 Appendix A Disconnection Causes A 2 Table A 1 Primary Disconnection Reasons Continued Cause Message Description Category V Gate No Response Security Failure V gate does not respond Remote device capabilities do not support encryption A common key exchange algorithm could not be established between the MCU and the remote device A common encryption algorithm could not be established between the MCU and the remote device Remote device did not open the encryption signaling channel The remote device key exchange algorithm message was not rec
477. ter the second dial in number to be assigned to the 2 conference This number is optional 7 7 Chapter 7 Meet Me per Conferences and Meeting Rooms 3 Click OK The dial in numbers are added to the table in the Meet Me Service ISDN Service pane 4 If participants use more than one ISDN Network Service to connect to the conference repeat steps 1 to 3 to define dial in numbers for these additional ISDN Network Services To manually assign H 323 Service Prefixes to the conference H 323 dial in participants can dial into Meet Me Conferences by simply dialing the H 323 Prefix from the IP Network Service and the conference Numeric ID or the conference name For more information see Chapter 4 Conference Direct Dialing and Access on page 4 75 1 Inthe Conference Properties Meet Me per Conf dialog box in the Meet Me Service H 323 Service pane click the Plus button The H 323 Service dialog box opens H323 Service x H 323 Network Service Mame H 323 Serice Prefix mA 2 Define the dial in H 323 Service Prefix to be assigned to the conference as follows Table 7 2 H 323 Network Service Options a e T H 323 Network Enter the name of the IP Network Service to be used Service Name by participants to connect to the Conference exactly as it is defined in the IP Network Services list the system is case sensitive H323 Service Enter the H 323 prefix from the IP Network Service to Prefix be a
478. the 1 Entry Queue This number must be part of the dial in numbers range defined for the selected ISDN Network Service For more details regarding the dial in numbers range see the MGC Administrator s Guide Chapter 3 Note When connecting ISDN lines via a private PBX to the MCU the PBX may truncate the dial in number The operator must know the digits which are truncated by the PBX and convey them to the participant Dial in number Type the second dial in number to be assigned to the 2 Entry Queue This number is optional 6 Click OK 8 12 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume The dial in numbers are added to the Network Services Table Entry Queue Properties F3 Alpha 02 l x Entry Queue Settings Name Enty Queue Service Jeq70 a Numeric ID Cascade YT 1000 Target Conference Settings T AdHoc Audio Alg Auto Profile bi Video Format Auto ki Target Conferences mo Frame Rate Auto ki C IF Only Video Protocol Auto Encryption F Annex Hl Annex P Annex F f Video Switching Line Rate 2 Restricted Transcoding Continuous Presence 005551234 2005551235 Cancel 7 Repeat the steps 4 to 6 to define additional dial in numbers for the Entry Queue Up to 16 numbers may be assigned to the Entry Queue To delete a dial in number from the Entry Queue 1 Select the service name or dial in number to delete in the Entry Queue Properties dialog box
479. the Browser pane expand the MCU tree Right click the On Going Conferences icon and then click New Conference The Conference Properties General dialog box opens Default Conference Properties Product Management x General Settings Participants Video Sources Resource Force Meet Me Per Cont Recording Name Finance Conf Entry Password Duration 2 00 Web Chairperson Password Billing Numeric ID MEU User Defined 1 Enty Queue Access User Defined 2 v Meet Me Per Conf User Defined 3 TS Conference Type Media 7 r Supported Networkq r Video Session Standard C Audio CP Video Switching C Meeting Room Video Audio IP ISDN Transcoding ATM MPI Operator Continuous Presence Classic Remarks Remarks History Cancel Help MGC Manager User s Guide Volume 3 Define the conference general parameters such as conference Name Duration Passwords if required and Numeric ID You may also define the user defined fields if they are enabled in your system For more details see Chapter 4 To define the conference General parameters on page 4 21 H 323 dial in participants in the Advanced dial in mode For details see The numeric ID or the conference name is used as part of the dialing string by fs Chapter 4 Conference Access via Entry Queue on page 4 78 4 Select the Meet Me Per Conf c
480. the previous conference layout When another participant starts talking the Presentation Mode is cancelled and the conference returns to its predefined video layout To enable the Presentation Mode define the time period that participants are able to speak before they automatically become the conference speakers and are viewed in full screen by all the conference participants default time interval is 15 seconds Presentation Mode Guidelines e Presentation mode is available with Auto Layout Same Layout Conference On Port COP conferences e Ina COP conference when the speaker becomes the conference presenter the conference layout is automatically set to 1x1 full screen and all participants including the active speaker view this layout e If the speaker in a video conference is an Audio Only participant the Presentation Mode is disabled for that participant e Video Forcing can be applied while the conference is in normal speaker mode Video forcing works in the same way as in Lecture Mode when Presentation Mode is activated that is forcing is only enabled at the conference level and it only applies to the video layout viewed by the lecturer e Since the Presentation mode is available only in Continuous Presence conferences it cannot be selected for Operator conferences In addition it is not available in Software Continuous Presence conferences e When starting a conference in which Presentation Mode is
481. the remote control Enter a descriptive text for each of the choices to be selected during the voting session For example for digit O enter the first choice for digit enter the second choice etc Note This text will appear in the voting results and is saved in the text file together with the voting results Anonymous Select this check box to conduct an anonymous voting Vote session Start Time Displays the voting session start time 3 Present the voting choices to the conference participants Once the voting choices are clear to all you can start the voting itself 4 Click Start Voting Alternatively the chairperson can start the voting session from the touch tone telephone or remote control once the voting session parameters are 6 83 Chapter 6 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences defined by the Operator or via the Web browser by entering the appropriate DTMF code the default code is 81 Participants cast their votes using the DTMF input device by entering the code that was assigned to their preferred choice You can cancel the voting anytime during the voting session by clicking the Cancel Voting button or by entering 82 on the DI MF input device The results are shown in the Voting Results pane m Voting Settings Woting results Title Number of participants 4 TES PS Number of voters 4 Choices choice 2 YZ Pension Plan choice 3 PAT Pension Plan votes
482. thout using the MCU s video resources The Session Types are Video Switching Transcoding and Continuous Presence 4 7 Chapter 4 Defining Conferences and Participants Video Switching VSW A conference in which all participants see the same video picture full screen and does not use the MCU video resources The current speaker is displayed in full screen on all the participants endpoints while the speaker sees the previous speaker Switching between participants is voice activated whenever a participant starts to speak he or she becomes the conference speaker and is viewed on all screens All conference participants must use the same line rate and video parameters such as video protocol frame rate annexes and interlaced video mode as no video processing is performed However the Highest Common Mechanism can be enabled for the video parameters allowing the system to select the best video parameters that can be supported by all the endpoints currently connected to the system and to dynamically change them when a new endpoint joins or leaves the conference It improves the connectivity between endpoints eliminates Secondary connections and facilitates Entry Queue Access and participant s moves during conferences The Highest Common mechanism is available with both H 320 and H 323 endpoints but is not available with SIP endpoints The Highest Common mechanism is not supported in Cascading conferences and in conferences set to
483. ticipant from the conference in the Conference Participants list click the name of the participant to remove and then click the lt lt button The participant s name is removed from the Conference Participants list but remains in the Pre Defined Participants list Note You can select several names at a time Participant Del Removes participants from the conference or from the Pre defined Participants list Delete Participant To remove a participant from the conference only same as Remove In the Conference Participants list click the name of the participant and then click the Del button Confirm the deletion To delete a participant from the Pre defined Participants File In the Pre defined Participants list click the name of the participant and then click the Del button After confirmation the participant s name is removed from the Pre defined Participant File list and from the selected Participant Template file or Database Group Note You can select several names at a time Search Use this option to search for a name when the source list is very long Those participants whose names match the character string that you specify in this text box are displayed in the Pre Defined Participants list 4 49 Chapter 4 Defining Conferences and Participants Table 4 8 Conference Properties Participants Options Continued Click this button to define a new participant during conference definition The parti
484. ticipant level e Make dial out connections e Change the participant connection type dial in dial out e Change the participant s Line Rate before connection to the conference e Disconnect and reconnect participants e Change the properties of a disconnected participant e Downspeed MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Name undefined dial in participants Move participants from one conference to another using the drag and drop option or the participant menu Move a participant to the Operator conference only in an Attended Conference see Chapter 8 Entry Queues Operator Conferences and Attended Conferencing Move a participant to the Home conference only in an a Attended conference see Chapter 8 Entry Queues Operator Conferences and Attended Conferencing Place a participant on hold only in an a Attended conference see Chapter 8 Entry Queues Operator Conferences and Attended Conferencing Designate a participant as Exclusive Speaker Change a participant s status to Conference Chairperson Designate a participant as a VIP Modify the participant s User Defined fields information MGC Manager only Control the participant s listening and broadcasting volume Mute or unmute the participant s audio and video channel Block the transmission of the audio channel to the participant s site Enable Auto Gain Control AGC function Perform participant operations via DTMF Codes Participan
485. ticipants Queue toolbar d Dragging and Dropping the Participant icon Expand the On Going Conferences list in the Browser pane to display the Home Conference icon Drag the icons of the participants to the Browser pane and drop them on the Home Conference icon The selected participants are immediately connected to the conference 8 63 Chapter 8 Entry Queues Operator Conferences and Attended Conferencing 8 64 Conference Reservations A Reservation is a conference scheduled to start later Reservations enable you select the conference start date and time or define a recurrent reservation Scheduling a conference reservation involves defining the conference parameters assigning the conference to an MCU setting the date and time at which the conference is to start and the duration of the conference How you schedule a conference reservation depends on a number of factors as shown in Table 9 1 networks H 323 SIP ISDN T1 CAS ATM and MPI serial connection The type of network used is defined individually for each participant in the conference The MGC Manager allows you to set up and run conferences in mixed Table 9 1 Factors in Deciding Conference Reservation Methods Do this For these conditions The conference parameters are stored in a Reservation template Start the conference from a template You can start the conference immediately On Going Conference or start
486. ticipants Queue Filter Parameters Filter Name Enter the name of the filter If you are modifying the parameters of an existing filter enter a new name to modify the filter name Participant Status in Participants Queue Helo Request Select this check box to display participants who have requested help Waiting for Select this check box to display participants who are Operator waiting for the Operator Assistance because they Assistance failed to enter the correct conference numeric ID Conference or Chairperson password or because they need to be connected to the conference as the Entry Queue Service or IVR Service is set to attended mode On Hold Select this check box to display participants who have been placed on hold Welcome no wait Select this check box to display participants who are in Welcome no wait status Welcome wait Select this check box to display participants who are in Welcome wait status Attended Select this check box to display participants who are currently being attended Dial In Numbers Dial In Numbers Define the dial in numbers used by participants to access Entry Queues Meeting Rooms or conferences Only participants dialing these numbers are displayed in the Participants Queue window 8 38 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Table 8 4 Participants Queue Filter Parameters Continued Dial In Numbers To define the dial in numbers cont 1 Click the plus icon to add a
487. tination conference For further details on the individual operations refer to the explanations in the section Performing Operations using the Right Click Menu on page 8 55 8 61 Chapter 8 Entry Queues Operator Conferences and Attended Conferencing Moving a Participant Interactively You can drag and drop a participant to the Operator or Home conference from the following panes and lists e Browser Status and Monitor pane Operator conference list e Browser and Status pane Participants Queue list e Participants Queue window To drag and drop a participant to the Operator conference 1 Expand the On Going Conferences list in the Browser pane to display the Operator Conference icon 2 Drag the icon of the participant to the Browser pane and drop it on the Operator Conference icon To drag and drop a participant to the Home conference 1 Expand the On Going Conferences list in the Browser pane to display the Home Conference icon 2 Drag the icon of the participant to the Browser pane and drop it on the Home Conference icon Moving a Participant to the Operator Conference by Double Clicking the Participant s Icon 8 62 You can move a participant to the Operator conference by double clicking the participant s icon in the following panes and lists e Browser and Status pane Participants Queue list e Participants Queue window To move a participant to the Operator conference by double clicking th
488. tions Performed During On Going Conferences Conference Level Operations Adding New Participants to a Conference 6 42 Occasionally you may be required to add a participant after a conference has begun To do this you can use one of the following methods Define a new participant using the conference right click menu using the conference toolbar using the Conference Properties dialog box Add a defined participant from the Participant Database or from a Participant Template file Copy a participant from another conference or a conference template Inviting an H 323 Video participant This option is available from the inviter endpoint using the appropriate DTMF code For more details on Video Invite see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Chapter 1 For detailed information on using databases and templates see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Chapters 6 and 7 respectively For detailed information on defining participants see Chapter 4 Defining Participant Properties When defining a participant during an On Going Conference only the participant properties relevant to the conference to which the participant is added are enabled For example when defining a participant during an On Going Audio Only conference only audio participants can be defined MGC Manager User s Guide Volume To define a new participant using the conference right click menu l Expand the On Going Confer
489. tions Performed During On Going Conferences To modify the Personal Layout for a participant using MGC Manager 1 Right click the icon of the connected participant you want to modify and then click Properties Disconnect Participant Ctrl T Copy Participant Chrl Cut Ctrl Delete Del Exclusive Speaker O84 Management F Mute Audio Ctrl M Mute video Block Audio Turn OFF AGT Properties The Participant Properties dialog box opens 2 Click the Video Sources tab The Participant Properties Video Sources dialog box opens 3 Select the Personal Layout option Alice Properties Identification Advanced Connection Infol Connection Info2 Video Sources H24 Di j onnection Cause Resource Details o oo ooo oooo oO Em oo 288 eee 1 2 3 4 S 10 Black Screen Yolanda r Personal Layout C Conference Layou OK Cancel Apply 6 34 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Click the arrow next to the number of squares panes to be displayed on the participant s screen The available video layouts for the selected view are displayed Click the desired layout The Video Layout pane is updated in the Participant Properties Video Sources dialog box You may video force participants to the video layout window using the standard method as described in Video Forcing at the Participant Level on page 6 40 5 Click Apply or OK and close the
490. to Selec I Same Lecture Mode Layout None vi Lecturer name UnCheck Not Forced Participants F Timer Interval 5 Sec OK Cancel Apply Help Chapter 11 Click amp View Personal Layout Options 11 18 2 Participants in a Click amp View enabled conference may change their personal video layouts This layout is viewed only by the participant modifying the layout All other participants except for participants currently viewing their own personal layouts see the conference layout To select a Personal Layout 1 From your endpoint activate the Click amp View application 2 Inthe Click amp View Home screen enter 2 on the DTMF input device POLYCOM Call Controls This DTMF value activates the Personal Layout screen MGC Manager User s Guide Volume The available video layouts are displayed in the Personal Layout menu screen Table 11 2 on page 11 16 lists the available layouts for Continuous Presence Classic and Quad Views My IP 172 22 133 39 P VideoMail Call Controls 3 On the endpoint s DTMF input device enter the DTMF code displayed next to the desired layout For example if the desired layout in Continuous Presence Classic is 2x2 enter 4 on the endpoint s remote control The Click amp View screen closes and the new personal layout is shown on the endpoint s screen The new layout is only viewed on the endpoint selecting it 11 19 Cha
491. to connect the participants using the best possible audio algorithm according to the line rate set for the conference Dual Stream In this mode the endpoint sends two video streams Mode Video and data The Video is based on the principle I see you and you see me while data implies we both see the same content The video streams are handled differently by the receiving endpoint The different streams may be shown on separate screens during the video session e None The Dual Stream mode is unavailable In such a case the Video Protocol parameter is set to Auto e H 239 P C Enables sending two alternating video streams People and Content for most Polycom endpoints P C is the Polycom proprietary protocol while H 239 is the industry standard Select the bitrate for the Contents stream according to the required Content quality e Graphics for standard graphics e Hi res Graphics for high quality display or highly detailed graphics e Live Video for video clips or live video display 4 35 Chapter 4 Defining Conferences and Participants Table 4 5 Conference Properties Settings Parameters Continued Dual Stream e People and Content VO Polycom proprietary Mode cont technology mainly intended for PictureTel and other older endpoints For this mode Annex N Annex P and Annex F are selected by default Available only when the conference is set to Video Switching Visual Concert PC and FX Available with
492. to designate this participant as the conference Chairperson User Defined 1 4 In any or all of the four User Defined fields enter Title general information for the participant such as the participant s E mail address telephone number company name location or any required information The titles of the User Defined fields can be modified in the Database Manager gt Defaults gt User Defined Defaults and loaded to the MGC Manager application For details of defining the titles see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Chapter 6 Defaults For a description on how to load the user defined default titles see Chapter 3 Loading the User Defined Default Set to the MGC Manager Application on page 3 31 8 43 Chapter 8 Entry Queues Operator Conferences and Attended Conferencing Table 8 5 Attended Participant Dialog Box Fields Continued Broadcasting If necessary adjust the level of sound transmitted by Volume this participant heard by the operator and later by other participants To adjust the volume move the slider The volume scale is from 1 to 10 where 1 is the weakest and 10 the strongest volume The volume of each endpoint s audio at connection time is set to 5 One movement of the volume slider increases or decreases the volume by one unit equivalent to 3db Listening Volume If necessary adjust the level of sound heard by this participant To adjust the volume move the slider
493. to run the conference or not If the participant did not connect to the conference click the Disconnection Cause tab to display the cause The Participant Properties Disconnection Cause dialog box opens Karen Properties Identification Advanced Connection Infot Connection Info2 Video Sources H221 Disconnection Cause Resource Details m Call Disconnection Reason Operator Disconnect Bonding Failure No Net Connection Bad H243 Connection Participant Hang Up C Resource Defficiency Gate No Response Security Failure OK Cancel 5 53 Chapter 5 Monitoring Conferences This dialog box lists the categories and parameters which indicate the cause of participant s disconnection from the conference The information is displayed according to the protocol standard defined for the participant and the parameters vary accordingly For example different parameters play a role in the disconnection of ISDN or IP participants The following information is displayed Table 5 15 Disconnection Cause Parameters SSS a Call Disconnection Operator Disconnect The operator disconnected Reason the participant from the conference The Cause field displays the name of the operator who disconnected the participant No Net Connection The network channels could not be connected This may also be caused when the communication lines are unavailable or busy Participant hang up The pa
494. to sort the items in ascending order Listing Conference Properties The properties of an On Going Conference can be viewed in the Status pane or in the Monitor pane of the main window The Status pane enables you to view the properties of a single conference or list all On Going Conferences without participant details while the Monitor pane enables you to view several conferences simultaneously and in detail This pane displays additional parameters and allows you to filter the information for example to display only those participants who require the operator s assistance Viewing On Going Conference Status In the On Going Conferences list you can view all the conferences currently running on the MCU You can view the statuses of the conferences either by expanding the On Going Conferences tree or by clicking the On Going Conferences icon The system simultaneously lists all the activated conferences and Entry Queues To display conference information in the Status pane 1 Inthe MGC Manager window Browser pane expand the MCU tree 2 Expand the On Going Conferences tree to view the list of currently running conferences g Product Management Major H 8 MU Configuration 2 On Going Conferences see On Going Gateway Sessions O aa fei Participants QueuefO F EIh Reservations 0 m e Meeting Rooms 20 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume The On Going Conferences and the details properties of each
495. to the Operator conference and still appears in the Participants Queue In addition the Attended Participant window opens For more details see The Attended Participants Dialog Box on page 8 41 The participant is moved to the Operator conference while his her icon remains in the conference list and in the Participants Queue list An exclamation point appears next to the Participant icon in the Name column of all panes and in the conference tree im In addition the Attended icon is displayed in the Status column of the Participants Queue in the Monitor and Status panes Moving a Participant to the Home Conference To move a participant to his her Home conference from the Ongoing Conference list or the Operator conference list l In the Browser Status or Monitor panes display the list of participants in the conference Use one of the following options a Using the Move Participant option in the right click menu Right click the icon of the participant to be moved to the Home conference and then click Move Participant MGC Manager User s Guide Volume A list of conferences appears Move Participant Copy Participant Disconnect Participant Ctrl T Int l Finance Chrl ic Int l Marketing Cut Chril Delete Del Exclusive Speaker O84 Management F athend FZ Hald To Home Conf F3 Mute Audio Ctrl M Mute video Block Audio Turn GFF AGE Properties Click the name of the H
496. to use for connecting to the conference You can manually assign a dial in number to the conference in the Conference Properties Meet Me Per Conf dialog box If participants in the same conference use different ISDN Network Services the conference may be assigned different dial in numbers for each of the ISDN Network Services used to connect to the conference In such a case use the manual allocation method If the conference includes T1 CAS audio only participants and the MCU is configured to allow T1 CAS participants in video conferences you can manually allocate the dial in number for the T1 CAS participants T1 CAS participants can only dial in to a conference using a Meet Me Conference as undefined participants The list of dial in numbers assigned to the conference is displayed in the Meet Me Services table The first column displays the ISDN Network Service name The Dial in Number 1 and Dial in Number 2 columns display the first and second dial in numbers assigned to the conference for each listed Network Service If no dial in number is defined the system automatically assigns the first free number in the dial in numbers range defined in the default ISDN Network Service Before you manually allocate dial in number s to the conference check the ISDN T1 CAS Network Service for the dial in numbers that can be allocated to conferences MGC Manager User s Guide Volume To manually allocate a dial in number to the co
497. uct Management 25 171178 0188 124 Falcon Cies 201 Ci 188 203 f Uliss 33 ij 188 34 f GJ188 35 f 6 ees IC 50 188 30 i mgc 50 188 31 maec 25 A f Eipcontt 188 203 ID 44805 Pst Eines mac 50 188 31 ID 776 o 4 172 22 188 40 172 22 188 194 172 22 171 178 172 22 188 124 172 22 188 201 172 22 188 203 172 22 188 33 172 22 188 34 172 22 188 35 172 22 188 206 172 22 190 106 172 22 188 30 172 22 188 31 172 22 188 213 172 22 188 214 172 22 188 139 125255 114380 935936 Gi 0 Connected Empty JD Disconnected ISDN 0 Connected Empty JD Disconnected H323 E SEES es an Ee Table 3 9 MCU Connection Status Icons Disconnected Gray Connecting The MGC Manager is disconnected from the MCU Connection to the MCU in progress 3 23 Chapter 3 MGC Manager Basics Table 3 9 MCU Connection Status Icons Continued Startup Resetting Bad Connection 3 24 The connection is OK and the MCU is in the Normal state When connected Normal status a green LED in the MCU icon is lit The connection is OK and the MCU is starting up after reset The MCU is resetting The system has used up all its memory resources Disconnect all running conferences and reset the MCU The connection between the MGC Manager and the MCU is lost due to LAN problems A major error occurred such as
498. ultiple Switching Modes e IVR Enabled Conferencing e Encryption e Single dial Entry Queues Universal Transcoding For each endpoint connected to a conference the MGC s Universal Transcoding gateway automatically identifies the audio compression video protocol video resolution frame rate and bandwidth The MCU then performs any necessary translations on the fly ensuring that each endpoint operates at their optimal capability 384 Kbps 768 Kbps 6B Bonding G 722 Audio G 711 Audio 30 FPS 30 FPS CIF 384 Kbps CIF Multirate 2 x 64 Kbps N x 64 Kbps G 728 Audio G 728 Audio G 711 Audio G 722 Audio 7 5 FPS 15 FPS 30 FPS 30 FPS QCIF QCIF CIF CIF Figure 2 3 Transcoding Performed by the MGC Unit Chapter 2 MGC Manager Overview Dynamic Continuous Presence CP The dynamic Continuous Presence capability of the MGC system offers multiple viewing options and window layouts for video conferencing Continuous Presence CP for video conferencing is available in three modes e Classic e Quad Views e Software The Continuous Presence Classic mode offers 21 layouts to accommodate different numbers of participants and conference settings Figure 2 4 Continuous Presence Classic Mode Video Layouts 2 4 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume The Continuous Presence Quad Views mode offers three additional layouts for larger conferences with more than 10 participants
499. umber is entered within 10 seconds The pound key is pressed directly after the DTMF code 1 e 36 A wrong number is dialed or the pound key is not pressed at the end of the dialed number No MCU recources In such a case an error tone is heard For the Disconnect Invitee option ensure that 35 and the permission level to disconnect the last invited participant are selected MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Managing Secure Mode Conferences In the Secure mode joining the conference monitoring the conference or controlling the conference in any way is denied to outside participants including operators In addition operators cannot view the participants list or any conference properties while the conference is in the Secure mode However operators can terminate the conference even in this mode Special icons are used to indicate that a conference is in Secure mode For a list of these icons see Table 5 7 on page 5 29 Chairpersons can enable or disable the Secure mode for an On Going Conference using the appropriate DTMF codes on the touch tone telephone While the conference is in a Secure mode the chairperson and conference participants can perform various operations using the appropriate DTMF codes such as voting or question and answer sessions These operations will not be displayed in the MGC Manager monitoring panes Once the chairperson secures or unsecures the conference an appropriate voice message may b
500. umn displays the largest free consecutive buffer in the region where MCMS is loaded The Port column identifies the port used for communication between the MCU and the MGC Manager WebCommander to which the MGC Manager is connected Port 80 is the default port and Port 443 is used for secured communication SSL or TLS Note These indicators are enabled if the Display MCU Memory option File gt Preferences is selected For details see Showing and Hiding the Memory Indicators on page 3 10 3 3 Chapter 3 MGC Manager Basics Additional Windows The MGC Manager uses several windows to present information If multiple windows are open at a time and a window is hidden behind another one it can be accessed by clicking on the Window menu For details see Multiple Window Display on page 3 12 Several windows display Templates such as Reservation Templates and Participant Templates Templates contain conference and participant settings for repeated use when similar properties are needed The various template windows can be placed alongside or on top of the main window allowing you to work simultaneously with the template windows and the main window There are two categories of templates database templates and Polycom proprietary templates Each category is displayed in a separate window Database Template Windows Microsoft Access or SQL databases can be used to organize conference and participant templates Confer
501. ures system requirements and prerequisites Chapter 2 Defining Standard Audio Only Conferences and Reservations Includes step by step instructions for setting up On Going Audio Only Conferences and Reservations and for defining Audio Only participants Chapter 3 Monitoring Audio Only Conferences Describes the information provided by the MGC Manager when monitoring an On Going Audio Only conference Chapter 4 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences Describes the operations that can be performed during an On Going Audio Only conference Chapter 5 Meeting Rooms and Entry Queues Includes step by step instructions for setting up Audio Only Meeting Rooms and Entry Queues Chapter 6 IVR and Entry Queue Services Provides a general description of VR and Entry Queue Service usage Includes step by step instructions for defining new IVR and Entry Queue Services downloading the voice message files to the Audio card and printing the DTMF codes defined in the IVR Message Service Chapter 7 Attended Conferencing Describes Operator conferences and Attended Participant Management 1 5 Chapter 1 Before You Begin Conventions 1 6 When learning the MGC Manager application it is important for you to correctly interpret the terms and conventions used in this Guide Choose or Double click 1s used when you need to activate a menu command or a command button in the dialog box Select or Click
502. vanced Settings Media Continued Video Format The following resolutions are available cont e 4CIF Resolution 576 pixels per line Data rate up to 30 frames per second 4CIF is enabled in the system cfg file and requires the installation of the Video card in the MCU Available in Video Switching conferences when the following conditions are met The endpoint can receive 4CIF The conference line rate is set to 512 Kbps or higher The minimum line rate for 4CIF selection is defined in the system cfg file The appropriate layout is selected for the conference layout is 1x1 full screen and the video input stream is 4CIF 2x2 or 3x3 VGA Resolution 640 x 480 pixels SVGA Resolution 800 x 600 pixels XGA Resolution 1024 x 768 pixels NTSC Resolution 525 lines per frame up to 16 million colors Note When a video format is selected its frame rate is displayed and for H 263 formats the annexes are enabled Frame Rate This parameter defines the number of frames per second and is enabled only in the Video Switching mode and when the video protocol is NOT set to Auto A higher frame rate ensures better video quality on the endpoint s screen Auto is the only setting when Video Format is set to Auto If required select e 7 5 10 15 30 pic sec the number of frames per second that determines the video quality Auto to enable the automatic selection of the highest frame rate common to all endpoints curr
503. voice prompts and are requested to enter the required chairperson password or conference and chairperson passwords when Numeric ID are used for routing or wait to be automatically connected to the conference They can also be prompted for additional information such as their billing code If no IVR Service is assigned to the conference participants are moved directly from the Entry Queue to the conference Undefined Dial in ISDN Participants As shown in Figure 4 6 the dial in number assigned to the Entry Queue is 9251222 The Numeric ID assigned to Conferencel is 1234 and to Conference2 is1300 ISDN and PSTN participants dial 9251222 with the appropriate area codes When the connect to the Entry Queue they enter the conference Numeric ID or password to be routed to the appropriate conference 4 81 Chapter 4 Defining Conferences and Participants 4 82 H 323 Participant H 323 participants dial Network Service Prefix Entry Queue ID Name Example Network Service Prefix 925 Entry Queue ID 1222 H 323 participants dial 9251222 H 323 participants can bypass the Entry Queue voice messages by adding the correct Conference ID of destination conference to the initial dial string Network Service Prefix EQ Destination Conference ID Example Conference ID 1234 H 323 participants dial 925 12224412344 H 323 participants can also add the Conference Password to the initial dial string Network Service Prefix EQ De
504. w Hames Chairperson hairperson or YerVOone Decrease Listening Yolum 76 E vemone E El Override Mute All but Me Everyone SilencelT Menu J Everyone 1 M 1 Pand Start Click View Everyone Cancel Help 11 7 Chapter 11 Click amp View 10 Select Start Click amp View in the Name field 11 In the DTMF Code left field enter the required code The default DTMF code is a double asterisk 12 In the Permission right field select Everyone to enable this function to be used by all the conference participants 13 Click OK to complete the definition of the IVR Service Enabling the Click amp View Application for a Conference To enable the Click amp View Application in a Conference 1 Connect to an MCU and expand its tree 2 Right click the On Going Conferences icon and then click New Conference 6 uy Product Management Normal MCU Configuration en Going Conferences 13 New Operator Conference i Print All Paste eg Paste As Chri P z Sim i paste SIP Factory Ae ip pees MGC Manager User s Guide Volume The Conference Properties General dialog box opens Default Conference Properties Product Management Click and View Classic f abe sri Se re Epp 3 Inthe Video Session box click Continuous Presence and then select either Classic or Quad Views 11 9 Chapter 11 Click amp View
505. word an audio prompt is played indicating that the wrong password was entered and that the participant should re enter the conference chairperson password Participants can be designated as Chairpersons by the Operator from the MGC Manager when the Conference Chairperson option is enabled in the IVR Service assigned to their conference Participants can designate themselves as Chairpersons using the appropriate DTMF code as defined for the IVR Service assigned to their conference 6 19 Chapter 6 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences To change a participant s status to conference chairperson in the MGC Manager e In the Browser pane the Monitor pane or the Status pane of the main window right click the participant s icon and then click Change to Chairperson Polycom 6 Disconnect Participant Ctrl T Copy Participant ctrl E Cut Chris Delete Del Exclusive Speaker O4 Operations d Change to Chairperson ttend Fe Hold To Home Gon F3 Mute udio Ctrl M Mute Video Block Audio Turn OFF AGC Properties The selected participant becomes the conference chairperson and the Chairperson icon is displayed next to the participant name To revert the chairperson s status to regular participant e In the Monitor pane or the Status pane of the main window right click the chairperson s icon and then click Change to Regular Participant The Chairperson s icon changes to the Standard Participant i
506. x General Settings Participants Video Sources Meet Me Per Cont Recording M General Settings aaa i iE A Line Rate 384 kbps Msg Service Type None Video Rate In Out Msg Service Name I Conference On Part J Encryption Silence Ij J Tx 1000 lt lt Basic S ER I Conference Lock ear None z F Mute Meet Me parties Cascade None F Start Conf Requires Chairperson F GrdHold Master Name None 7 E Terminate After Chairperson Exits T Enable Invite T120 Rate None IC T Auto Termination FECC LSD Rate None Before First Join 5 Min After Last Quit fi Min Media Settings Audio Alg 16 Siren G 728 Dual Stream Mode None lt lt Basic T Foll Eall Pro Motion Auto J Entry Tone Roll Call announcement Meana jw YS V End Time Alert Tone 5 Min fa Vi F fac 0 z V Exit Tone Roll Call announcement idea Formak a Frame Rate Auto 7 Talk Hold Time f5 Sec Quality Auto 7 Audio Mix Depth Boo H Sites M AnnexN P AnnexP P Annex Cancel Help The Meeting Room settings are defined in the same way as a Standard On Going Conference Define the correct conference Line Rate If the MCU includes an Audio card and you want participants to control their conference via their endpoints assign an IVR Service to the Meeting Room It is recommended to enable the
507. xtending a Conference Manually ccccccseeeeeeeeeeeees 6 58 Terminating a Conference Manually cccccccceceeseeeeeeees 6 60 Enabling the End of Conference Reminder ee eeeeeeeees 6 61 Changing the Conference Billing Code ecccccccccceeeeeeees 6 62 Changing the Conference User Defined Parameters 6 63 Adding Remarks During an On Going Conference 6 64 Broadcasting Annex D Still Video Image Slide 6 65 Printing Conference Data i scvcacwsdavensiaariadsedelasiassvarednnaddanstanesaccinnes 6 68 Managing Question and Answer Sessions cscceseeeeeeeteees 6 74 Controlling Q amp A Queues with the Toolbar 6 74 Adding Questioners to Q amp A Queues ceeecceeetertteteeeees 6 75 Changing a Participant s Position in the Q amp A Queue 6 76 Allowing Participant Questions ccccecccceeseecetesseesteteseees 6 77 Ending Participant Questions cccceeeeesseeeesseeeseeeeseeeeeeees 6 79 Removing Participants from the Q amp A Queue 08 6 80 Clearing Q amp A Queues sins sosduncsniusnanvaaanenneceaniucenuedeisesucuiawels 6 80 Managing Voting Sessions ccccccccessesseeeecceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 6 81 Conducting a Voting Session cceeecccccceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 81 Using DTMF Codes During a Conference ccccccccecccccceeeeeeeeeeees 6 88 Changing the Conference or Ch
508. yone To play the DTMF help menu press star eight three To enable this feature the relevant file must be assigned to the function in the IVR Message Service 32 Enable Roll Call To enable Roll Call press star three two Disable Roll Call 32 Chairperson To disable Roll Call press pound three two Chairperson Roll Call review names 33 Chairperson To initiate the roll call and playback of the participant names press star three three Roll Call stop review names Chairperson To end playback of participant names press pound three three Start Dial Out 25 Chairperson To start the dial out press star two five Conference Termination 87 Chairperson To end the conference press star eight seven Start Click amp View ii Everyone To start the Click amp View application press star star 6 91 Chapter 6 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences Table 6 5 Operations performed during a conference using DTMF codes DTMF Function DAMAT Code Change to Chairperson Everyone To change the status of a participant to Chairperson press star seven eight 78 Increase my listening volume 76 Everyone To increase your volume press star seven Six Decrease my listening volume 76 Everyone To decrease your volume press pound seven six Override Mute All But Me Everyone To enable participants to unmute their endpoints while the Exclusive Speaker Mute mode is imposed To
509. your MCU you can monitor the On Going gateway sessions To view the list of current gateway sessions e Double click the On Going Gateway Sessions icon or click the plus icon next to the On Going Gateway Sessions icon The list of gateway sessions opens Displays Dial up string showing call setup ee between two H 323 Ee On Going Gateway Sessions endpoints See H323 0H323 1045 _5797 l Displays the incoming E 323GatewayPartyIni gateway Dial up string from the H 323 local endpoint Psese i 32 3GateWayPartyOutl1045 Displays the outgoing gateway Dial up string to the H 323 remote endpoint Figure 5 2 Gateway Sessions Indicators Figure 5 2 shows a gateway call between two IP networks The dialing string is composed of the H 323 Network Service prefix GW Service prefix the profile identifier and the remote H 323 endpoint s alias in E 164 format 1045 The system displays the alias of the remote H 323 endpoint in the gateway session name and the participant name The same status icons that indicate the standard participant status are used to indicate the participant status in a gateway session For the description of all conference status icons see Table 5 2 on page 5 10 In a Double Gateway call the system displays only the local endpoint and gateway session parameters 5 77 Chapter 5 Monitoring Conferences 5 78 To view the participants status in the gateway session e Double cl

MGC Manager User's Guide Vol. 1 version 6.0 - Support

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents